2022 Volvo XC40 Fuse Box Diagram – Blown Fuse
XC40
OWNER'S MANUAL
VÄLKOMMEN!
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your passengers. Volvo strives to design one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental requirements.
To increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that you read the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's
manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo Manual) and on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com).
We encourage everyone to always wear their seatbelt in this and other cars. Please do not drive if you are under the influence of alcohol or medication or have an impaired ability to drive in some other way.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
OWNER INFORMATION
Owner information Owner's manual in centre display Navigate in the owner's manual in the centre display Owner's Manual in mobile devices Volvo Cars support site Reading the owner's manual The owner's manual and the environment
YOUR VOLVO
SAFETY
16 Volvo ID
26 Safety
44
17 Creating and registering a Volvo ID
26 Safety during pregnancy
44
18 Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure
28 Whiplash Protection System
45
IntelliSafe driver support and safety 31 Seatbelts
46
20 Sensus - online connectivity and
32 Putting on and taking off seatbelts
47
21 entertainment
Seatbelt tensioner
49
21 Software updates
35 Resetting the electric seatbelt
50
23 Recording data
35 tensioner*
Terms & Conditions for Services
36 Door and seatbelt reminder
50
Customer Privacy Policy
37 Airbags
51
Important information on acces-
37 Driver airbags
52
sories and auxiliary equipment
Passenger airbag
53
Installation of accessories
38 Activating and deactivating pas-
54
Connection of equipment to the
38 senger airbag*
car's diagnostic socket
Side airbags
57
Showing the car's identification number
39 Inflatable curtains
57
Change of market when importing
40 Safety mode
58
or relocating
Starting and moving the car after
59
Driver distraction
40 safety mode
Child safety
60
Child seats
60
Upper mounting points for child seats 61
Lower mounting points for child seats 62
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for
62
child seats
Child seat positioning
63
2
DISPLAYS AND VOICE
Child seat mounting
64 CONTROL
Overview table for location of child seats
66
Displays and controls by the driver in a left-hand drive car
Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts
67
Displays and controls by the driver in a right-hand drive car
Table for location of i-Size child seats 69 Driver display
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
70 Driver display settings Fuel gauge
Trip computer
Show trip data in the driver display
Resetting the trip meter
Show trip statistics in the centre display
Settings for trip statistics
Date and time
Outside temperature gauge
Indicator and warning symbols
License agreement for the driver display
App menu in the driver display
Managing the app menu in the driver display
Messages in the driver display
Managing messages in the driver display
Handling a message saved from the driver display
Overview of centre display
97
74 Managing the centre display
100
Activating and deactivating centre 75 display
103
Navigating in the centre display's 77 views
103
79 Managing subviews in centre display 107
80 Function view in centre display
110
80 Moving apps and buttons in cen-
112
81 tre display
82
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
112
83 Keyboard in centre display
114
83
Changing keyboard language in centre display
117
84 Enter the characters, letters and
117
84 words manually in the centre display
85 Changing the appearance in the
119
87
centre display
Switching off and changing the
119
92
volume of the system sound in the centre display
92 Changing system units
120
93
Changing system language
120
95
Other settings in the centre display's top view
120
96
Open contextual setup in the centre display
121
3
Resetting user data for change of
122
ownership
Resetting settings in the centre
122
display
Table showing centre display settings 123
Driver profiles
124
Selecting driver profile
125
Renaming a driver profile
125
Protect driver profile
126
Linking remote control key to
126
driver profile
Resetting settings in the driver
128
profiles
Message in centre display
128
Managing messages in the centre
129
display
Handling a message saved from
129
the centre display
Voice recognition
130
Using voice recognition
131
Controlling a telephone with voice
133
recognition
Voice control of radio and media
134
Settings for voice recognition
134
LIGHTING
Lighting control Adjusting light functions via the centre display Adapting the headlamp pattern from the headlamps Position lamps Daytime running lights Dipped beam Using main beam Active main beam Using direction indicators Active bending lights* Front fog lamps/cornering lights* Rear fog lamp Brake lights Emergency brake lights Hazard warning flashers Using home safe lighting Approach light duration Interior lighting Adjusting interior lighting
WINDOWS, GLASS AND
138 MIRRORS
139 Windows, glass and mirrors
154
Pinch protection for windows and
154
140 sun blinds
Reset sequence for pinch protection 155
140 Power windows
155
141 Operating power windows
156
141 Rearview and door mirrors
157
142 Adjusting rearview mirror dimming
158
143 Angling adjustment of the door
159
144 mirrors
144 Panoramic roof*
160
145 Operating the panoramic roof*
162
146
Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's* sun blind
164
147
Wiper blades and washer fluid
165
147
Using windscreen wipers
165
147
Using the rain sensor
166
148
Activating and deactivating the
167
148 rain sensor's memory function
149 Using windscreen and headlamp
168
151 washers
Using the rear window wiper and
169
rear window washer
Using automatic rear windscreen
170
wiping when reversing
4
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Manual front seat
172
Power* front seat
173
Adjusting the power* front seat
173
Storing a position for seat and
174
door mirrors
Using a stored position for seat
175
and door mirrors
Adjusting* the length of the seat
176
cushion in the front seat
Adjusting the lumbar support* in
176
the front seat
Lowering the backrests in the rear
177
seat
Adjusting the head restraints in
179
the rear seat
Steering wheel controls and horn
180
Steering lock
181
Adjusting the steering wheel
181
CLIMATE
Climate Climate zones Climate control - sensors Perceived temperature Controlling the climate control system using voice control Air quality CleanZone* Clean Zone Interior Package* Interior Air Quality System* Activating and deactivating the air quality sensor* Passenger compartment filter Air distribution Changing air distribution Opening, closing and aiming the air vents Table of air distribution options Climate controls Activating and deactivating heated front seat* Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated front seat* Activating and deactivating heated rear seat* Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel*
184 Activating and deactivating auto-
199
184
matic start of heated steering wheel*
185
Activating auto climate control
199
186
Activating and deactivating air recirculation
200
186 Activating and deactivating time
200
setting for air recirculation
187 Activating and deactivating max
201
188 defroster
188
Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen*
202
189
Activating and deactivating auto-
203
189 matic start of heated windscreen*
Activating and deactivating the
203
190 heated rear window and door mirrors
190 Activating and deactivating auto-
204
191
matic starting of the heated rear window and door mirrors
191 Regulating fan level for front seat
204
192 Regulating temperature for front seat 205
195 Synchronising temperature
206
197
Activating and deactivating air conditioning
206
197 Parking climate*
207
Preconditioning*
207
198 Start and switch off preconditioning* 208
Preconditioning time setting*
209
198
5
Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning* Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning* Removing time setting for preconditioning* Climate comfort when parking* Starting and switching off climate comfort when parking* Symbols and messages for parking climate control* Heater* Parking heater* Additional heater* Activating and deactivating automatic start of auxiliary heater*
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
209 Locking and unlocking Lock confirmation
211 Lock indication setting
220 Antenna locations for the start
255
220
and lock systems
221
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
256
211 Remote control key
Locking and unlocking with the
212 remote control key
213
Settings for remotely controlled and inside unlocking
214
Unlocking the tailgate with the remote control key
222 Unlocking the tailgate from the
257
224 inside of the car
Activating and deactivating child
257
226 safety locks
Automatic locking when driving
258
226 Closing and locking tailgate with
259
button*
215 Remote control key range
227 Setting the max. opening for elec-
261
216
Replacing the battery in the remote control key
217 Ordering more remote control keys
227 trically operated tailgate* Operating the tailgate with foot
231 movement*
261
217 Care Key - restricted remote con-
232 Private locking
263
trol key
Activating and deactivating pri-
263
Care Key settings
233 vate locking
Detachable key blade
233 Alarm*
264
Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade Immobiliser Type approval for the remote control key system
234 Activating and deactivating alarms*
266
Reduced alarm level*
266
236 Double lock*
267
237
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* 252
Keyless locking and unlocking*
253
Settings for Keyless entry*
254
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate*
254
6
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driving support systems
270
Speed-dependent steering force
270
Electronic stability control
271
Electronic Stability Control in
272
sport mode
Activating or deactivating sport
273
mode for electronic stability control
Symbols and messages for elec-
274
tronic stability control
Connected Safety
276
Activating or deactivating
277
Connected Safety
Limitations of Connected Safety
277
Road Sign Information*
278
Activating or deactivating road
279
sign information*
Display mode for road sign infor-
280
mation*
Road Sign Information and
282
Sensus Navigation*
Warning for speed limitation and
282
speed camera from road sign
information*
Activating or deactivating warn-
283
ings from road sign information*
Limitations of Road Sign Information* 284
Speed limiter
285
Selecting and activating speed limiter 286
Deactivating the speed limiter
287
Temporary deactivation of speed
287
limiter
Limitations for speed limiter
288
Automatic speed limiter
288
Activating or deactivating the
289
automatic speed limiter
Changing the tolerance for the
290
automatic speed limiter
Limitations for automatic speed limiter 291
Cruise control
291
Selecting and activating cruise control 293
Deactivating cruise control
293
Standby mode for cruise control
294
Adaptive cruise control*
295
Controls for adaptive cruise control* 296
Display mode for adaptive cruise
297
control*
Selecting and activating adaptive
298
cruise control*
Deactivating adaptive cruise control* 299
Standby mode for adaptive cruise
299
control*
Limitations for adaptive cruise control* 301
Change between cruise control
301
and adaptive cruise control* in the
centre display
Symbols and messages for adap-
303
tive cruise control*
Pilot Assist*
305
Controls for Pilot Assist*
307
Display mode for Pilot Assist*
308
Selecting and activating Pilot Assist* 310
Deactivate Pilot Assist*
311
Standby mode for Pilot Assist*
311
Temporary disabling of steering
312
assistance with Pilot Assist*
Limitations of Pilot Assist*
313
Symbols and messages for
316
Pilot Assist*
Overtaking Assistance*
317
Use Overtaking Assistance
317
Warning from driver support in
318
the event of a collision risk
Change of target with driver support 319
Set the stored speed for driver
319
support
Set time interval to vehicle ahead
320
Drive modes when using time
322
interval to vehicles
Automatic braking with driver support 322
Lane assistance
323
Activating or deactivating lane
325
assistance
7
Selecting assistance option for
326 Steering assistance upon risk of
345 Park Assist Pilot front, rear and
362
lane assistance
head-on collision
along the sides*
Limitations of Lane assistance
326 Steering assistance upon risk of
346 Activating or deactivating the
363
Symbols and messages for lane
327
rear-end collision*
parking assistance system*
assistance
Limitations for steering assistance
347 Limitations of Parking assistance
364
Display mode for lane assistance
329
at risk of collision
Symbols and messages for Park
366
City SafetyTM Subfunctions for City Safety Setting the warning distance for City Safety
330 331 333
Symbols and messages for steer-
348
ing assistance upon risk of collision
Rear Collision Warning*
349
Limitations of Rear Collision Warning* 349
Assist Pilot Park assist camera* Park assist camera locations and surveillance areas*
367 368
Detection of obstacles with City Safety
334
BLIS*
Activating or deactivating BLIS
350 Park assist lines for park assist
351
camera*
370
City Safety in cross traffic
336 Limitations of BLIS
352
Sensor fields for parking assistance system
372
Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic Automatic braking in the event of an impeded evasive manoeuvre with City Safety
337 Messages for BLIS Driver Alert Control
337 Activating or deactivating Driver Alert Control
353 Activate park assist camera 354 Symbols and messages for Park 355 assist camera
Park Assist Pilot*
374 375
377
City Safety brakes for oncoming vehicles
338
Select rest stop guidance in the event of a warning from Driver
Alert Control
355 Parking variants with Park Assist
378
Pilot*
Limitations of City Safety
339 Limitations of Driver Alert Control
356
Using Park Assist Pilot*
379
Messages for City Safety
342
Steering assistance at risk of collision 343
Activating or deactivating steering
344
Cross Traffic Alert* Activating or deactivating Cross Traffic Alert*
356
Leaving parallel parking with Park Assist Pilot*
382
357 Limitations of Park Assist Pilot*
382
assistance in the event of a collision risk Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert*
344 Messages for Cross Traffic Alert* Park Assist*
358
Messages for Park Assist Pilot*
360
Radar unit
361
Type approval for radar device
385 386 387
Camera unit
395
8
Limitations for camera and radar unit 395
Recommended maintenance for
398
camera and radar unit
Symbols and messages for cam-
400
era and radar unit
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the car Switching off the car Ignition positions Selecting ignition mode Alcohol lock* Bypass of the alcohol lock* Before starting the engine with the alcohol lock* Brake functions Foot brake Brake assistance Braking on wet roads Braking on gritted roads Brake system maintenance Parking brake Activating and deactivating the parking brake Automatic parking brake activation setting Parking on a hill In the event of a fault in the parking brake Automatic braking when stationary Activating and deactivating the automatic brake at a standstill Help when starting on a hill
404 Auto braking after a collision
417
405 Regenerative braking*
417
406 Gearbox
417
407 Manual gearbox
418
408 Automatic gearbox
418
408 Changing gear with automatic
419
409
gearbox
Changing gear with steering
421
409
wheel paddles*
409
Gear selector inhibitor
422
410
Kick-down function
422
411
Launch function*
423
411
Symbols and messages for automatic gearbox
423
411 Gear shift indicator
423
412 All-wheel drive*
424
412 Drive modes*
424
414
Changing drive mode*
427
Drive mode Eco
427
414 Activating and deactivating drive
429
414
mode Eco with the function button
Start/stop function
430
415 Driving with start/stop function
430
416 Deactivating the start/stop function 432
Conditions for the Start/Stop function 432
416
Level control* and shock absorption
434
9
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Low speed control*
435 Overloading the starter battery
455 Sound, media and Internet
476
Activating and deactivating low-
435 Using jump starting with another
455 Audio settings
476
speed driving* using a function button
battery
Sound experience*
477
Hill descent control*
436 Towbar*
457 Apps
477
Activating and deactivating hill descent control* with the function button
437 Specifications for towbar* Extendable and retractable towbar*
458 Downloading apps 459 Updating apps
478 479
Economical driving
438 Driving with a trailer
461 Deleting apps
479
Preparations for a long trip
439 Trailer stability assist*
463 Radio
480
Winter driving
440 Checking trailer lamps
464 Start radio
480
Driving in water
440
Opening and closing the fuel filler flap 441
Filling fuel
441
Handling of fuel
443
Towbar-mounted bicycle rack*
465
Towing
466
Fitting and removing the towing eye 467
Recovery
468
Changing radio band and radio station 481
Searching for radio stations
482
Save radio channels in the Radio
483
Favourites app
Petrol
443 HomeLink®*
469 Settings for radio
483
Petrol particle filter
444 Programming HomeLink®*
470 RDS radio
485
Diesel
445 Using HomeLink®*
472 Digital radio*
485
Empty tank and diesel engine
446 Type approval for HomeLink®*
472 Link between FM and digital radio*
486
Diesel particulate filter
447 Compass*
473 Media player
486
Emission control with AdBlue® Handling AdBlue® Checking and filling with AdBlue®
448 Activating and deactivating the
449
compass* Calibrating the compass*
450
473 Media playback
487
Controlling and changing media
488
473 Searching media
489
Symbols and messages for AdBlue® 452
Gracenote®
490
Overheating in the engine and
454
drive system
Video
491
Playing a video
491
10
Playing back DivX® Settings for video Media via Bluetooth®
491 Switch between Bluetooth-con-
492 492
nected phones Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
506 User terms and conditions and data sharing
507 Activating and deactivating data sharing
Connecting a device via Bluetooth®
492 Managing phone calls
507 Data sharing for services
Media via USB port
493 Managing text messages
508 Storage space on hard disk
Connecting a device via USB port Technical specifications for USB devices Compatible media formats Apple® CarPlay®* Using Apple® CarPlay®* Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®* Android Auto* Using Android Auto*
493 Settings for text messages 494 Managing the phone book
509 License agreement for audio and
509
media
Settings for phone
510
494 Settings for Bluetooth devices
510
495
Wireless phone charger*
511
496
Using the wireless telephone charger* 511
498 Certificate for wireless charger
513
498 Internet-connected car*
517
499 Connect the car to the Internet via
518
500 a Bluetooth-enabled phone
Settings for Android Auto* Tips for using Android Auto* Phone
501
Connect the car to the Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi)
518
502
Connect the car to the Internet via
502 car modem (SIM card)
519
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time Connecting a phone to the car via
503 Settings for car modem* Sharing Internet access from the
505 car via a Wi-Fi hotspot
520 520
Bluetooth automatically Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually
No or poor Internet connection
506
Remove Wi-Fi network
521 522
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-con-
506 Wi-Fi technologies and security
522
nected phone
523 523 524 525 526
11
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres
538
Dimension designation for tyre
540
Dimension designation for wheel rim 541
Tyres' rotation direction
541
Tread wear indicators on the tyres
542
Checking tyre pressure
542
Adjusting tyre pressure
543
Recommended tyre pressure
544
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
545
Saving a new reference value for
546
tyre pressure monitoring*
See tyre pressure status in the
547
centre display*
Action in the event of warning for
548
low tyre pressure
Messages for tyre pressure moni-
549
toring*
Changing wheel
549
Tool kit
551
Jack*
552
Wheel bolts
552
Spare wheel*
553
Handling the spare wheel*
554
Winter tyres
555
Snow chains
556
Emergency puncture repair kit
557
Using a puncture repair kit Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit
LOADING, STORAGE AND
558 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
561 Passenger compartment interior
564
Tunnel console
565
Using the cigarette lighter*
566
Emptying the ashtray*
566
Electrical sockets
567
Using electrical sockets
567
Using the glovebox
568
Sun visors
570
Cargo area
570
Recommendations for loading
570
Roof load and loading on load carriers 571
Bag hooks
572
Load retaining eyelets
573
Through-load hatch in the rear seat* 573
Folding up the cargo area floor
573
Release folding cargo area floor*
574
Fitting and removing the safety net* 575
Remove and store the parcel shelf
577
First aid kit*
578
Warning triangle
579
12
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo service programme
582 Bulb replacement
617 Cleaning wheel rims
633
Data transfer between car and
582
workshop via Wi-Fi
Download Center
583
Managing system updates via the
583
Download Centre
Car status
584
Book service and repair
585
Sending car information to a workshop 586
Raise the car
587
Servicing the climate control system 590
Exterior lamp positions Replacing the rear direction indicator bulb Changing brake light bulb Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb Bulb specifications Cleaning the interior Cleaning the centre display Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
617 Rustproofing
633
618 Car paintwork
633
Touching up minor paintwork damage 634
619 Colour codes
635
620 Replacing the wiper blade, rear
635
621 window
621 Replacing windscreen wiper blades 636
622 Set the wiper blades in service
637
623
position
Filling washer fluid
638
Opening and closing the bonnet
590 Cleaning the seatbelts
624
Engine compartment overview Engine oil Checking and filling with engine oil Coolant Topping up coolant
592 Cleaning textile floor and entrance
624
593
mats
594
Cleaning leather upholstery*
625
595
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
626
596
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts
626
Starter battery
597 Cleaning the exterior
627
Support battery
599 Polishing and waxing
627
Symbols on the batteries
601 Handwashing
628
Battery recycle
601 Automatic car wash
629
Fuses and central electrical units
602 High-pressure washing
631
Replacing a fuse
602 Cleaning the wiper blades
631
Fuses in engine compartment
604 Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber
632
Fuses under the left-hand front seat 610 and trim components
13
SPECIFICATIONS
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Type designations
642 Alphabetical Index
669
Dimensions
645
Weights
647
Towing capacity and towball load
648
Engine specifications
651
Engine oil -- specifications
653
Adverse driving conditions for
655
engine oil
Transmission fluid specifications
656
Brake fluid specifications
656
Fuel tank - volume
656
Tank capacity for AdBlue®
657
Air conditioning -- specifications
657
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions 659
Approved wheel and tyre sizes
663
Minimum permitted tyre load
665
index and speed rating for tyres
Approved tyre pressures
667
14
OWNER INFORMATION
OWNER INFORMATION
Owner information
Owner's information is available in several different product formats, both digital and printed. The owner's manual is available in the car's centre display, as a mobile app and on the Volvo Cars support site. There is a Quick Guide and a supplement to the owner's manual available in the glovebox, with specifications and fuse information, amongst other things. A printed owner's manual can be ordered.
The car's centre display1 In the centre display, drag down the top view and tap on Owner's manual. Available here are options for visual navigation with exterior and interior images of the car. The information is searchable and
is also divided into categories.
Mobile app In App Store or Google Play, search for "Volvo Manual", download the app to your smartphone or tablet and select the car. Available in the app are video tutorials and options for visual navigation
with exterior and interior images of the car. The content is searchable, and the various sections are designed to facilitate navigation
Volvo Cars support site Go to volvocars.com/support and select your country. Here you can find owner's manuals, both online and in PDF format. On the Volvo Cars support site there are also video tutorials and further
information and help regarding your Volvo and your car ownership. The page is available for most markets.
Printed information There is a supplement to the owner's manual1 in the glovebox that contains information on fuses and specifications, as well as a summary of important and practical information.
There is also a Quick Guide available in printed format that helps you to get started with the most commonly used functions in the car.
Depending on equipment level selected, market, etc. additional owner's information may also be available in printed format in the car.
A printed owner's manual and associated supplement can be ordered. Contact a Volvo dealer to order.
1 A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the centre display. 16
IMPORTANT
The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven safely in traffic and that applicable laws and regulations are followed. It is also important that the car is maintained and handled in accordance with Volvo's recommendations in the owner's information.
If there should be a difference between the information in the centre display and the printed information then it is always the printed information that applies.
NOTE
Changing the language in the centre display may mean that some owner's information is not compliant with national or local laws and regulations. Do not switch to a language that is difficult to understand as this may make it difficult to find your way back through the screen structure.
Related information · Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17) · Owner's Manual in mobile devices
(p. 20)
· Volvo Cars support site (p. 21) · Reading the owner's manual (p. 21)
2 Applies for most markets.
OWNER INFORMATION
Owner's manual in centre display
A digital2 version of the owner's manual is available in the car's centre display. The digital owner's manual can be accessed from the top view, and in some cases the contextual owner's manual can also be accessed from the top view.
NOTE The digital owner's manual is not available while driving.
Owner's manual
The information in the owner's manual can be accessed directly via the owner's manual homepage or its top menu.
Top view with button for owner's manual. To open the owner's manual - drag down the top view in the centre display and tap on
Owner's manual.
}}
17
OWNER INFORMATION || Contextual owner's manual
Related information · Navigate in the owner's manual in the
centre display (p. 18)
· Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
· Downloading apps (p. 478)
Navigate in the owner's manual in the centre display
The digital owner's manual can be accessed from the centre display top view in the car. The content is searchable, and the various sections are designed to facilitate navigation.
Top view with button for contextual owner's manual. The contextual owner's manual is a shortcut to an article in the owner's manual that describes the active function shown on the screen. When the contextual owner's manual is availa-
ble, it is shown to the right of Owner's manual in the top view. Tapping on the contextual owner's manual therefore opens an article in the owner's manual that is related to the content that is shown on the screen. E.g. tap on Navigation Manual an article that is related to navigation opens. This only applies to some of the apps in the car. For downloaded third party apps, for example, it is not possible to access appspecific articles.
18
The owner's manual is accessed from the top view.
To open the owner's manual - drag down the top view in the centre display and tap on Owner's manual.
There is a range of different options for finding information in the owner's manual. The options can be accessed from the owner's manual homepage and from the top menu.
OWNER INFORMATION
Opening the menu in the top menu
Press in the upper list in the owner's manual.
> A menu with different options for finding information is opened:
Homepage
Tap on the symbol to go back to the start page in the owner's manual.
Categories
The articles in the owner's manual are structured into main categories and subcategories. The same article can be found in several appropriate categories so that it can be found more easily.
1. Press Categories. > The main categories are shown in a list.
2. Tap on a main category ( ). > A list of subcategories ( ) and articles ( ) is shown.
3. Tap on an article to open it.
To go back, press the back arrow.
Featured articles Press the symbol to access a page with links to a selection of articles that can be useful to read in order to get to know the more common functions of the car. The articles can also be accessed via
categories, but are collected here for faster access. Tap on an article in order to read it in its entirety. Hotspots for exterior and interior
Exterior and interior overview images of the car. Different parts are designated with hotspots that lead to articles about those parts of the car.
1. Press Exterior or Interior. > Exterior or interior images are shown with so-called hotspots in place. The hotspot leads to articles about the corresponding part of the car. Swipe horizontally over the screen to browse among the images.
2. Tap on a hotspot.
> The title of the article about the area is shown.
3. Tap on the title to open the article.
To go back, press the back arrow.
Favourites
Press the symbol to access the articles saved as favourites. Tap on an article in order to read it in its entirety.
Saving or deleting articles as favourites
Save an article as favourite by pressing at the top right when an article is open. When an article has been saved as a favourite the star is
filled in: .
To remove an article as a favourite, press the star again in the current article.
Video
Press the symbol to view brief instruction videos for various functions in the car.
}}
19
OWNER INFORMATION
|| Information
Tap on the symbol to obtain information about which version of the owner's manual is available in the car as well as other useful information.
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
The owner's manual is available as a mobile app3 from both the App Store and Google Play. The app is adapted for smartphones and tablets.
various sections are designed to facilitate navigation.
Using the search function in the top menu 1. Tap on in the top menu of the owner's
manual. A keyboard appears in the lower part of the screen. 2. Type in a keyword, such as "seatbelt". > Suggestions for articles and categories
are shown while letters are being entered. 3. Tap on the article or category to access it. Related information
· Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17) · Keyboard in centre display (p. 114) · Reading the owner's manual (p. 21)
3 For certain mobile devices.
The owner's manual can be downloaded as a mobile app from the App Store or Google Play. The QR code provided here takes you directly to the app. Alternatively, you can search for "Volvo manual" in the App Store or Google Play.
The app contains a video along with exterior and interior images where different parts of the car are highlighted with so-called hotspots, which lead to articles about the area in question. The content is searchable, and the
The mobile app is available from both the App Store and Google Play.
Related information · Reading the owner's manual (p. 21)
20
Volvo Cars support site
More information on your car is available on the Volvo Cars website and support site.
Support on the Internet Go to volvocars.com/support to visit the site. The support site is available for most markets.
It contains support for functions such as webbased services and functions, Volvo On Call*, the navigation system* and apps. Videos and step-by-step instructions explain different procedures, e.g. how to connect the car to the Internet via a mobile phone.
Downloadable information
Maps For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation there is the facility to download maps from the support page.
Owner's manuals as PDF Owner's manuals are available for download in PDF format. Select car model and model year to download the manual as required.
Contact The support site contains contact details to customer support and your nearest Volvo retailer.
Create a Volvo ID on the Volvo Cars website Create a personal Volvo ID and manage it on volvocars.com.
Related information · Volvo ID (p. 26)
OWNER INFORMATION
Reading the owner's manual
To help you get to know your new car, read the Owner's Manual before you drive it for the first time. Reading the owner's manual is a way to become familiar with new functions, get advice on how to handle the car in different situations and learn how to make use of all the car's features. Please pay attention to the safety instructions contained in the owner's manual.
The intention of this owner's information is to explain all possible functions, options and accessories included in a Volvo vehicle. It is not intended as an indication or guarantee that all of these features, functions and options are included in every vehicle. Some terminology used may not exactly match terminology used in sales, marketing and advertising materials.
Development work is constantly underway in order to improve our product. Modifications may mean that information, descriptions and illustrations in the owner's manual differ from the equipment in the car. We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice.
Do not remove this manual from the car - if problems should arise then the necessary information about where and how to seek professional help will be missing.
© Volvo Car Corporation
}}
* Option/accessory. 21
OWNER INFORMATION
|| Options/accessories In addition to standard equipment, the owner's manual also describes options (factory fitted equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra equipment).
All, at the time of publication known, options and accessories are marked with an asterisk: *.
The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations.
In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of injury.
NOTE
Note texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of e.g. features and functions.
Decals The car contains different types of decal which are designed to convey important information in a clear manner. The decals in the car have the following descending degree of importance for the warning/information.
Warning of personal injury
Risk of property damage
White ISO symbols and white text/image on black or blue warning field and message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in damage to property.
IMPORTANT
Important texts appear if there is a risk of damage.
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white text/image on black message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or fatality.
22
* Option/accessory.
Information
OWNER INFORMATION
ate from the car's appearance depending on equipment level and market.
Related information · Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17) · Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 20) · Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)
The owner's manual and the environment
The Owner's Manual is printed on paper originating from controlled forests.
The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)® symbol shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner's manual comes from FSC®-certified forests or other controlled sources.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on black message field.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your particular car is available on the respective decals for your car.
Illustrations and video clips Illustrations and video clips used in the owner's manual are sometimes schematic and are intended to provide an overall picture or example of a certain function. They may devi-
Related information · Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 28)
23
YOUR VOLVO
YOUR VOLVO
Volvo ID
Volvo ID is a personal ID that gives access to a wide range of services via a single username and password.
NOTE The services available may vary over time and depend on equipment level and market.
Examples of services:
· Volvo On Call app* check the car with
your phone. For example, you can check fuel level, show the nearest petrol station and lock the car remotely.
· Send to Car send addresses from map
services on the Web, directly to the car.
· Book service and repair register a work-
shop/dealer and book a service directly from the car.
NOTE If the username/password for a service (e.g. Volvo On Call) is changed, then it is also changed automatically for other services.
Volvo ID is created from the car, volvocars.com or the Volvo On Call app1.
1 If you have Volvo On Call*.
When a Volvo ID is registered in the car, several services will be made available. Several Volvo IDs can be used for the same car and several cars can even be connected to the same Volvo ID.
Related information · Creating and registering a Volvo ID
(p. 26)
· Book service and repair (p. 585)
Creating and registering a Volvo ID
It is possible to create a Volvo ID in different ways. If the Volvo ID is created at volvocars.com or with Volvo On Call app2, the Volvo ID must also be registered to the car to enable use of the various Volvo ID services.
Create a Volvo ID with the Volvo ID app 1. Download the Volvo ID app from
Download Centre in the centre display's app view.
2. Start the app and register a personal email address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created and automatically registered to the car. Volvo ID services can now be used.
Create a Volvo ID on the Volvo Cars website 1. Go into volvocars.com and log in3 using
the icon at the top right. Select Create Volvo ID.
2. Enter a personal email address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read below to learn how to register the ID to the car.
26
* Option/accessory.
Create a Volvo ID with the Volvo On Call app4 1. Download the latest version of the Volvo
On Call app to the phone5.
2. Select to create Volvo ID.
3. The web page for creating a Volvo ID opens. Fill in the requested information.
4. Tick the box to accept the terms and conditions.
5. Press the button that creates your Volvo ID.
6. An e-mail message is sent to the address given. Click on the link in the e-mail message to activate Volvo ID. > Now the Volvo ID is ready to use.
Registering your Volvo ID to the car If you created your Volvo ID via the web or the Volvo On Call app, register it to your car as follows:
1. If not done already, download the Volvo ID app from Download Centre in the centre display's app view.
NOTE
To download apps, the car must be connected to the Internet.
2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/your email address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the email address linked to your Volvo ID. > Your Volvo ID is now registered to the car. Volvo ID services can now be used.
Related information · Volvo ID (p. 26) · Downloading apps (p. 478) · Managing system updates via the Down-
load Centre (p. 583)
· Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
2 Only applies to certain markets. 3 Available on certain markets. 4 Cars with Volvo On Call*. 5 Available to download via e.g. Apple App Store or Google Play.
YOUR VOLVO * Option/accessory. 27
YOUR VOLVO
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure
Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on the development of safer and more effi-
cient products and solutions in order to reduce the negative impact on the environment.
Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars' core values and influences all operations. The environmental work is based on the whole life cycle of the car and takes into account the environmental impact it has, from design to scrapping and recycling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new product developed must have less impact on the environment than the product it replaces.
Volvo's environmental management work has resulted in the development of more effective and less polluting drivelines Drive-E. Personal environment is also important to Volvo - the
air inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air outside thanks to the climate control system.
Your Volvo complies with stringent international environmental standards. All Volvo's manufacturing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this supports a systematic approach to the operation's environmental issues, which leads to continuous improvement with reduced environmental impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means that environmental laws and regulations in force are complied with. Volvo also requires that its partners must also meet these requirements.
Fuel consumption Since a large part of a car's total environmental impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel consumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
28
YOUR VOLVO
Contributing to a better environment An energy-efficient and economical car can contribute to reduced environmental impact and also involve reduced costs for the owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to reduce fuel consumption and thereby save money and contribute to a better environment - here is some advice:
· Plan for an effective average speed.
Speeds above approx. 80 km/h (approx. 50 mph) and below 50 km/h (approx. 30 mph) lead to increased energy consumption.
· Follow the Service and Warranty Book-
let's recommended intervals for service and maintenance of the car.
· Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off
the engine when stationary for longer periods. Pay attention to local regulations.
· Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary
stops and uneven speed contribute to increased fuel consumption.
· Use preconditioning* before starting in
cold conditions - it improves starting capacity and reduces wear in cold weather. The engine reaches normal operating temperature more quickly, which decreases consumption and reduces emissions.
Also remember to always dispose of environmentally hazardous waste, such as batteries
and oil, in an environmentally safe manner. Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty about how this type of waste should be discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept "Clean inside and out" a concept that encompasses a clean interior environment as well as highly efficient emission control. In many cases the exhaust emissions are well below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger compartment An air filter helps prevent dust and pollen entering the passenger compartment via the air intake.
The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traffic outside.
The system cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the air intake is closed and the air is recirculated. Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, queues and tunnels for example.
IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*, which also includes a function
that allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked with the remote control key.
Interior The material used in the interior of a Volvo is carefully selected and has been tested in order to be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details are hand-made, such as the seams of the steering wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is monitored in order not to emit strong odours or substances that cause discomfort in the event of e.g. high heat and bright light.
Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car. In this way you also contribute to a cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops are entrusted with the service and maintenance of your car it becomes part of Volvo's system. Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in which workshop premises shall be designed in order to prevent spills and discharges into the environment. The workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools required to guarantee good environmental care.
Recycling
Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspec-
tive, it is also important that the car is recycled
in an environmentally sound manner. Almost
all of the car can be recycled. The last owner
}}
* Option/accessory. 29
YOUR VOLVO || of the car is therefore requested to contact a
retailer for referral to a certified/approved recycling facility. Related information
· Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 659)
· Economical driving (p. 438) · Start and switch off preconditioning*
(p. 208)
· The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 23)
· Air quality (p. 187)
30
* Option/accessory.
YOUR VOLVO
IntelliSafe driver support and safety
IntelliSafe is the Volvo Cars concept for car safety. IntelliSafe comprises a number of systems6, whose purpose is to make a car journey safer, to prevent injuries and to protect passengers and other road users.
WARNING The functions are supplementary aids they cannot handle all situations in all conditions.
The driver always bears responsibility that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable road traffic rules and regulations are followed.
Support With the aim of assisting the driver to drive the car in a safer way, IntelliSafe has the following functions.
· Active main beam · Tunnel detection · Pilot Assist · Cross Traffic Alert* · Blind Spot Information* · Park Assist* · Park Assist Pilot*
· Park assist camera* · Road Sign Information* · Electronic stability control · Roll Stability Control · Speed limiter* · Cruise control · Adaptive cruise control* · Rear Collision Warning · Driver Alert Control
· All-wheel drive7
Prevention With the aim of assisting the driver to avoid an accident, IntelliSafe has the following functions.
· City Safety · Distance Warning* · Lane assistance · Collision Avoidance
Protection With the aim of protecting the driver and passengers in certain situations in the event of an accident, IntelliSafe has the following collaborative functions.
· Whiplash Protection System · Seatbelts with seatbelt tensioners · Airbags
NOTE Read the individual sections on each system in order to fully understand the functions and learn about important warnings.
Related information · Active main beam (p. 143) · Safety (p. 44) · Driving support systems (p. 270)
6 Some of the systems are fitted as standard, while others are options. This may vary depending on market, model year and car model. 7 All Wheel Drive
* Option/accessory. 31
YOUR VOLVO
Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment
Sensus makes it possible to use different types of apps and turn the car into a Wi-Fi hotspot.
This is Sensus
Sensus offers an intelligent interface and online connectivity with the digital world. An intuitive navigation structure makes it possible to receive relevant support, information and entertainment when it is necessary, without distracting the driver.
Sensus covers all solutions in the car that are connected with entertainment, online connectivity, navigation* and the user interface between driver and car. It is Sensus that makes communication possible between you, the car and the outside world.
Information when it is needed, where it is needed The different displays in the car provide information at the right time. The information is shown in different locations based on how it should be prioritised by the driver.
32
* Option/accessory.
YOUR VOLVO
Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritised.
Driver display
The driver display shows information on speed and e.g. incoming calls or song tracks being played. The display is operated via the two steering wheel keypads.
Centre display
Driver display8.
8 The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
}}
33
YOUR VOLVO
|| Many of the main functions of the car are controlled from the centre display, a touch screen which reacts to touch. The number of physical buttons and controls in the car is therefore minimal. The screen can even be operated while wearing gloves.
From here, for example, you can control the climate control system, the entertainment system and seat position*. The information that is shown in the centre display can be acted on by the driver or someone else in the car when the opportunity arises. Voice recognition system
The voice recognition system can be used without the driver needing to take his/her hands off the steering wheel. The system can understand natural speech. Use voice recognition to, for example, play back a song, call someone, increase the temperature or read out a text message.
Related information · Driver display (p. 77) · Overview of centre display (p. 97) · Voice recognition (p. 130) · Internet-connected car* (p. 517) · Sharing Internet access from the car via a
Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 520)
34
* Option/accessory.
YOUR VOLVO
Software updates
So that you as a Volvo customer get the best experience of your car, Volvo continuously develops the systems in the cars and the services that you are offered. In connection with service at an authorised Volvo dealer, the software in your Volvo will be updated to the latest version. The latest software update allows you to benefit from available improvements, including improvements from earlier software updates.
For more information about available updates and frequently asked questions, visit volvocars.com/support.
NOTE
Functionality after updating may vary depending on market, model, model year and options.
Related information · Sensus - online connectivity and entertain-
ment (p. 32)
· Managing system updates via the Down-
load Centre (p. 583)
Recording data
As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance, certain information about the vehicle's operation, functionality and incidents are recorded in the car.
Event Data Recorder (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to register and record data related to traffic accidents or collision-like situations, such as times when the airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle in the road. The data is recorded in order to increase understanding of how vehicle systems work in these types of situations. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short time, usually 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record data related to the following in the event of traffic accidents or collision-like situations:
· How the various systems in the car
worked
· Whether the driver and passenger seat-
belts were fastened/tensioned
· The driver's use of the accelerator or brake
pedal
· The travel speed of the vehicle
This information can help us understand the circumstances in which traffic accidents, injuries and damage occur. The EDR only records
data when a non-trivial collision situation occurs. The EDR does not record any data during normal driving conditions. Similarly, the system never registers who is driving the vehicle or the geographic location of the accident or near-miss situation. However, other parties, such as the police, could use the recorded data in combination with the type of personally identifiable information routinely collected after a traffic accident. Special equipment and access to either the vehicle or the EDR is required to be able to interpret the registered data.
In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a number of computers designed to continually check and monitor the function of the car. They can record data during normal driving conditions, but in particular register faults affecting the vehicle's operation and functionality, or upon activation of the vehicle's driver support function (e.g. City Safety and the auto brake function).
Some of the recorded data is required to enable service and maintenance technicians to diagnose and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehicle. The registered information is also needed to enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out in laws and by government authorities. Information registered in the vehicle is stored in its computer until the vehicle is serviced or repaired.
}}
35
YOUR VOLVO
|| In addition to the above, the registered information can be used in aggregate form for research and product development with the aim of continuously improving the safety and quality of Volvo cars.
Volvo will not contribute to the above-described information being disclosed to third parties without the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be forced to disclose information of this nature to the police or other authorities who may assert a legal right to access such. Special technical equipment which Volvo and workshops that have entered into agreements with Volvo have access to is required to be able to read and interpret the recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the information, which is transferred to Volvo during servicing and maintenance, is securely stored and managed and that its management complies with relevant legal requirements. For further information - contact a Volvo retailer.
Vehicle Connectivity Module (VCM High) Vehicles equipped with VCM High can collect data on the vehicle's safety functions as well as other functions in the vehicle. Data are collected for product development, quality follow-up and safety work, as well as to improve and monitor the vehicle's quality and its safety functions. The purpose of data collection is
also to manage Volvo Car Corporation's warranty undertakings, as well as to meet legal requirements related to engine emissions data.
NOTE
In conjunction with data collection, Volvo may use a small part of the vehicle's data plan of up to 10 MB/month.
Terms & Conditions for Services
Volvo offers services that help to enhance car safety and comfort. These services include everything from assistance in emergencies to navigation and various maintenance services.
Before using the services, it is important for you to read the support information relating to the Terms & Conditions for Services at volvocars.com.
Related information · Customer Privacy Policy (p. 37)
36
YOUR VOLVO
Customer Privacy Policy
Volvo respects and safeguards the personal integrity of everyone visiting our website. This policy regards to the handling of customer data and personal information. The purpose is to give current, past and potential customers a general understanding of:
· The circumstances in which we gather
and process your personal data.
· The types of personal data we gather.
· The reason we gather your personal data.
· How we handle your personal data.
For more information on the policy, search support information at volvocars.com.
Related information · User terms and conditions and data shar-
ing (p. 523)
· Terms & Conditions for Services (p. 36)
· Recording data (p. 35)
Important information on accessories and auxiliary equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of accessories and extra equipment can negatively affect the car's electronic system. We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is only carried out by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car's computer system.
The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations.
Options or accessories described in this manual are marked with an asterisk. In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo retailer.
WARNING The driver always bears the ultimate responsibility that the car is used safely and that laws and regulations in force are followed. It is also important that the car has maintenance and service according to Volvo's recommendations, the owner's information and the service and warranty booklet. If the on-board information differs from the printed owner's manual then the printed information always has precedence.
Related information · Installation of accessories (p. 38) · Connection of equipment to the car's
diagnostic socket (p. 38)
· Reading the owner's manual (p. 21)
37
YOUR VOLVO
Installation of accessories
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is only carried out by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car's computer system.
· Volvo original accessories are tested to
ensure that they function with the car systems for performance, safety and emissions control. In addition, a trained and qualified Volvo service technician knows where accessories may or may not be safely installed in your Volvo. Always seek the advice of a trained and qualified Volvo service technician before installing any accessories in or on your car.
· Accessories that are not approved by
Volvo may not have been specifically tested for use with your car.
· Some of the car's performance or safety
systems can be negatively affected if you install accessories that have not been tested by Volvo, or if you permit someone without experience of the car to install accessories.
· Damage that is caused by accessories
installed in a non-approved or incorrect way is not covered by any new car warranty. More warranty information can be found in the service and warranty booklet.
Volvo does not accept any liability for deaths, personal injury or costs arising as a result of the installation of non-original accessories.
Related information · Important information on accessories and
auxiliary equipment (p. 37)
Connection of equipment to the car's diagnostic socket
Incorrect connection and installation of software or diagnostic tools may have a negative effect on the car's electronic system. We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is only carried out by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car's computer system.
Data link connector (On-board Diagnostic, OBDII) is under the instrument panel on the driver's side.
38
YOUR VOLVO
NOTE
Volvo Cars accepts no liability for the consequences if unauthorised equipment is connected to the On-board Diagnostic socket (OBDII). This socket should only be used by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians.
Related information · Important information on accessories and
auxiliary equipment (p. 37)
Showing the car's identification number
When contacting a Volvo dealer concerning your Volvo On Call subscription, for example, you will need the car's identification number (VIN9). 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Continue to System System Information Vehicle Identification Number. > The car's identification number is shown.
Another way of finding VIN is:
· on the first page of the service and war-
ranty booklet
· in the car's registration document
· look on the dashboard through the car's
windscreen.
VIN is positioned in a similar place on all models.
9 Vehicle Identification Number 39
YOUR VOLVO
Change of market when importing or relocating
When you import a car or relocate a car to another country, it is important that you register the car in the new market in order, for example, for the online services to work correctly, as well as to ensure that the car complies with local requirements and laws.
Visit an authorised Volvo dealer To get help to register the car, visit an authorised Volvo dealer.
If you do not do this then you may experience that apps, Volvo On Call10, software downloads and other online services are affected and do not work correctly.
Creating a new Volvo ID in your new home market When you relocate to another country you should create a Volvo ID in the new country.
If you have already created a Volvo ID in another country and want to use the same email address, you must first delete your Volvo ID in the region you originally created it. Alternatively, you can create a new Volvo ID using another e-mail address.
For cars with Volvo On Call10 Download the Volvo On Call app from the country where the car will be used and link the app to your car.
NOTE
Visit an authorised Volvo dealer if you have imported or relocated with your car to a new country.
Available services may vary depending on market and car model.
NOTE
If the car is exported to another market, Volvo is not responsible for any adaptations to the car in order to comply with requirements or laws that apply in the importing market. Read more in Service and Warranty or contact your Volvo workshop for more information.
Related information · Book service and repair (p. 585)
Driver distraction
The driver is responsible for doing everything possible to ensure the safety of themselves, their passengers and other road users. Part of this responsibility is avoiding distractions such as carrying out an activity that is not related to operating the car in a driving environment. Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped with content-rich entertainment and communications systems. This could be mobile phones with handsfree, navigation systems and audio systems with lots of functions. You may also have other portable electronic devices for your own convenience. Used correctly, in a safe way they can enrich the driving experience. If they are used in the wrong way they could distract you.
We wish to give the following warnings regarding such systems, to indicate Volvo's concern for your safety. Never use a device or function in the car in such a way that it will distract you from the task of driving safely. Distractions can lead to serious accidents. Apart from these general warnings, we offer the following advice regarding the new functions that may be in the car:
10 Applicable only to markets that have access to Volvo On Call. 40
WARNING
· Never use a hand-held mobile phone
while driving. In some areas it is forbidden for the driver to use a mobile phone while the car is moving.
· If the car is equipped with a navigation
system you must only set and change the itinerary when the car is parked.
· Never program the audio system while
the car is moving. Program the radio's presets when the car is parked and then use the programmed presets for faster and simpler use of the radio.
· Never use laptops or hand-held com-
puters while the car is moving.
Related information · Sound, media and Internet (p. 476)
YOUR VOLVO 41
SAFETY
SAFETY
Safety
The vehicle is equipped with several safety systems that work together to protect the vehicle's driver and passengers in the event of an accident. The car is equipped with a number of sensors that react in the event of an accident and activate different safety systems, such as different types of airbags and seatbelt tensioners. Depending on the specific accident situation, such as collisions at different angles, roll-over or driving off the road, the systems react in different ways to provide good protection.
There are also mechanical safety systems such as Whiplash Protection System. The car is also constructed so that a large part of the force of a collision is distributed to beams, pillars, floor, roof and other parts of the body.
The car's safety mode may be activated after a collision if an important function in the car has been damaged.
Warning symbol in driver display The warning symbol is illuminated in the driver display when the car's electrical system is set in ignition position II. The symbol is extin-
guished after approx. 6 seconds if the car's safety system is fault-free.
WARNING If the warning symbol remains illuminated or is switched on during driving and the message SRS airbag Service urgent Drive to workshop is shown in the driver display, it means that part of one of the safety systems does not have full functionality. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted as soon as possible.
WARNING Never modify or repair the car's various safety systems yourself. Defective work in one of the systems can cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted.
If the specific warning symbol is broken then the general warning symbol is illuminated instead and the driver display shows the same message.
Related information · Safety during pregnancy (p. 44) · Seatbelts (p. 46) · Airbags (p. 51) · Whiplash Protection System (p. 45) · Safety mode (p. 58) · Child safety (p. 60)
Safety during pregnancy
It is important that the seatbelt is used correctly during pregnancy, and that pregnant drivers adjust their seating position. Seatbelt
The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen. The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible. In addition, check that there are no twists in the seatbelt. Seating position As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers must adjust the seat and steering wheel such
44
that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel). The aim should be to position the seat with as large a distance as possible between abdomen and steering wheel.
Related information · Safety (p. 44)
· Seatbelts (p. 46)
· Manual front seat (p. 172)
· Power* front seat (p. 173)
Whiplash Protection System
Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) reduces the risk of whiplash injuries. The system consists of energy absorbing backrests and seat cushion, as well as a specially designed head restraint in the front seats. WHIPS is deployed in the event of a rear-end collision, where the angle and speed of the collision and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence.
When WHIPS is deployed, the front seat backrests are lowered backward and the seat cushions move downward to change the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger. Its movement helps to absorb some of the forces that can arise and cause whiplash.
WARNING
WHIPS is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
SAFETY
WARNING Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. If the front seats have been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the seats must be replaced. Some of the seats' protective properties may have been lost even if they do not appear damaged.
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind or under the front seats or in the rear seat that may prevent WHIPS from functioning.
}} * Option/accessory. 45
SAFETY
||
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat's backrest.
If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered then any load must be secured to prevent it from sliding up to the front seat backrest in the event of a collision.
WARNING
If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered or a rear-facing child seat is used in the rear seat, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not make contact with the lowered backrest or child seat.
Seating position For good protection from WHIPS the driver and passenger must have the correct seating position and make sure that the system's function is not obstructed.
Set the correct seating position in the front seat before driving starts.
Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head restraint.
WHIPS and child seats The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by WHIPS.
Related information · Safety (p. 44)
· Manual front seat (p. 172)
· Power* front seat (p. 173)
· Rear Collision Warning* (p. 349)
Seatbelts
Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used. It is important that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can provide good protection. Do not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position.
WARNING Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to hooks or other interior fittings, as this prevents the belt from tightening properly.
WARNING The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.
46
* Option/accessory.
WARNING Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt.
Related information · Safety (p. 44) · Seatbelt tensioner (p. 49) · Putting on and taking off seatbelts
(p. 47)
· Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 50)
SAFETY
Putting on and taking off seatbelts
Make sure that all passengers have fastened their seatbelts before starting to drive.
Putting on seatbelts 1. Pull out the seatbelt slowly and make sure
it is not twisted or damaged.
NOTE
The seatbelt is equipped with an inertia reel that is locked in the following situations:
· if the belt is extended too quickly. · during braking and acceleration. · if the car leans heavily. · when driving in bends.
2. Lock the belt by inserting the locking tab in the intended buckle. > A loud "click" indicates that the belt has locked.
WARNING Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side. The seatbelts and buckles would otherwise possibly not function as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serious injury.
}} 47
SAFETY
|| 3. In the front seats the seatbelt can be adjusted for height.
Press together the seat mounting and move the seatbelt up or down. Position the belt as high as possible without it chafing against your throat.
WARNING Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
WARNING Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to hooks or other interior fittings, as this prevents the belt from tightening properly.
The seatbelt must pass over the shoulder (not down over the arm). 4. Tension the hip strap over the lap by pull-
ing the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder.
The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen).
WARNING Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not function as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury.
Taking off seatbelts 1. Press the red button on the seatbelt
buckle and then let the belt retract.
2. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does not hang loose.
Related information · Seatbelts (p. 46) · Seatbelt tensioner (p. 49) · Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 50)
48
SAFETY
Seatbelt tensioner
The car is fitted with standard seatbelt tensioners and electric* seatbelt tensioners that can tension the seatbelts in critical situations and collisions.
Standard seatbelt tensioner The seatbelts in the front seat and at the outer seats in the rear are equipped with a standard belt pretensioner.
The seatbelt tensioner tensions the seatbelt in the event of a collision with sufficient force in order to more effectively restrain the occupant.
Electric seatbelt tensioner* The driver and front passenger seatbelts are equipped with an electric seatbelt tensioner.
The seatbelt tensioners work together and can be activated together with the driver support systems City Safety and Rear Collision Warning. In critical situations, such as panic braking, driving off the road (e.g. the car rolls into a ditch, lifts off the ground or hits something in the terrain), skidding, or risk of collision, the seatbelt can be tensioned by the seatbelt tensioner's electric motor.
The electric seatbelt tensioner helps to adjust the occupant to a better position, reducing the risk of striking the car's interior and improving the effect of safety systems, such as the car's airbags.
When the critical situation has come to an end, the seatbelt and the electric seatbelt pretensioner are restored automatically, but they can also be restored manually.
IMPORTANT If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger side will also be deactivated.
WARNING Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt.
Related information · Seatbelts (p. 46) · Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 47) · Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner*
(p. 50)
· Activating and deactivating passenger air-
bag* (p. 54)
· City SafetyTM (p. 330)
· Rear Collision Warning* (p. 349)
* Option/accessory. 49
SAFETY
Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner*
The electric seatbelt tensioner is designed to be reset automatically, but the seatbelt tensioner can be reset manually if the belt remains extended. 1. Stop the car at a safe place.
2. Unfasten the seatbelt and then refasten it. > The seatbelt and electric seatbelt tensioner are reset.
WARNING Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt.
Related information · Seatbelt tensioner (p. 49) · Seatbelts (p. 46)
Door and seatbelt reminder
The system reminds unbelted occupants to wear a seatbelt, and also warns about an open door, bonnet or lid. Driver display graphics
Graphics in the driver display with different types of warnings. The warning colour on the door and tailgate is dependent on the vehicle's speed. The driver display's graphics show which seats in the car are occupied by belted and unbelted passengers. The same graphic also shows if the bonnet, tailgate or any door is open. The graphic can be acknowledged by pressing the O button on the right-hand steering wheel keypad.
Seatbelt reminder
Visual reminder in the roof console. A visual reminder is given in the roof console and by means of the warning symbol in the driver display. The acoustic reminder is dependent on speed, driving time and distance. The belt status of the driver and passengers is shown in the driver display's graphic when a belt is buckled or unbuckled. Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt reminder system. Front seat A visual and acoustic reminder remind the driver and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one.
50
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
Rear seat The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two subfunctions:
· Provides information on which seatbelts
are being used in the rear seat. The driver display's graphics are shown when the seatbelts are in use.
· Reminding that a seatbelt in the rear seat
is unfastened during a journey by means of a visual and acoustic reminder. The reminder will cease once the seatbelt has been put on again.
Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate and fuel filler flap If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or a door is not closed properly, the driver display's graphics show what is open. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the source of the warning.
If the car is driven at a speed lower than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the driver display's information symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the driver display's warning symbol illuminates.
Related information · Seatbelts (p. 46)
· Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 47)
Airbags
The car is equipped with airbags and inflatable curtains for driver and passengers.
NOTE
The detectors react differently depending on the nature of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt positions.
It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The detectors sense the force of the collision on the vehicle and the action is adapted accordingly so that none, one or more airbags are deployed.
WARNING The airbag system's control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid, disconnect the cables to the starter battery. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.
Deployed airbags If any of the airbags have deployed, the following is recommended:
· Recovering the car. Volvo recommends
that it is transported to an authorised
}}
51
SAFETY
||
Volvo workshop. Do not drive with
deployed airbags.
· Volvo recommends engaging an author-
ised Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of components in the car's safety systems.
· Always contact a doctor.
WARNING Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/ injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns.
Related information · Safety (p. 44) · Driver airbags (p. 52) · Passenger airbag (p. 53) · Side airbags (p. 57) · Inflatable curtains (p. 57)
Driver airbags
As a supplement to the seatbelts, the car is equipped with steering wheel airbag and knee airbag1 on the driver's side.
and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.
WARNING The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision. To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest.
Steering wheel airbag and knee airbag1 on the driver's side in the front seat.
In the event of a frontal collision, the airbags help to protect the head, neck, face and chest of the driver as well as the knees and legs.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag/airbags is inflated. The airbag cushions the initial collision impact for the occupant. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation
WARNING Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
Steering wheel airbag location This airbag is fitted into the centre of the steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.
Knee airbag1 location The airbag is folded up in the lower part of the instrument panel on the driver's side. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG.
1 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets. 52
WARNING Do not place or attach any object on the top or front of the panel where the knee airbag is stowed.
Related information · Airbags (p. 51) · Passenger airbag (p. 53)
SAFETY
Passenger airbag
As a supplement to the seatbelts, the vehicle is equipped with an airbag on the passenger side in the front seat.
WARNING The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision. To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest.
Passenger side front airbag.
In the event of a frontal collision, the airbag helps to protect the head, neck, face and chest of the passenger as well as the knees and legs.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag is inflated. The airbag cushions the initial collision impact for the occupant. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.
WARNING Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
Passenger airbag location The airbag is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG.
WARNING Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located.
}}
53
SAFETY || Label for passenger airbag
Label on the passenger side's sun visor. The warning label for the passenger airbag is positioned as shown above.
WARNING If the car is not equipped with a switch to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the airbag will always be activated.
WARNING Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated. Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.
Related information · Airbags (p. 51) · Driver airbags (p. 52) · Activating and deactivating passenger air-
bag* (p. 54)
Activating and deactivating passenger airbag*
The passenger airbag can be deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch, Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch (PACOS). The switch for the passenger airbag is located on the passenger end of the instrument panel and is accessible when the passenger door is open.
Check that the switch is in the required position.
ON - The airbag is activated and all frontfacing passengers (children and adults) can sit safely on the passenger seat.
OFF - The airbag is deactivated and children in rear-facing child seats can sit safely on the passenger seat.
54
* Option/accessory.
WARNING If the car is not equipped with a switch to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the airbag will always be activated.
Activating passenger airbag
SAFETY
2. Confirm the message by pressing the right-hand steering wheel keypad's O button.
Pull the switch outward and turn from OFF to ON.
> The driver display shows the message Passenger airbag on Please acknowledge.
NOTE
If the passenger airbag has been activated/ deactivated with the car in ignition position I or lower, a message is shown in the driver display and the following indicator in the roof console approx. 6 seconds after the car's electrical system has been set in ignition position II.
> A text message and a warning symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated.
WARNING Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated. The passenger airbag must always be activated when front-facing passengers (children and adults) are sitting in the front passenger seat. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.
}}
55
SAFETY
|| Deactivating passenger airbag
Pull the switch outward and turn from ON to OFF. > The driver display shows the message
Passenger airbag off Please acknowledge.
NOTE If the passenger airbag has been activated/ deactivated with the car in ignition position I or lower, a message is shown in the driver display and the following indicator in the roof console approx. 6 seconds after the car's electrical system has been set in ignition position II.
2. Confirm the message by pressing the right-hand steering wheel keypad's O button.
IMPORTANT If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger side will also be deactivated.
Related information · Seatbelt tensioner (p. 49) · Child seats (p. 60)
> A text message and a symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is deactivated.
WARNING Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.
56
SAFETY
Side airbags
The side airbags on the driver's and passenger seats act to protect the chest and hips in the event of a collision.
The side airbags are fitted in the outer backrest frames of the front seats and help to protect the driver and passengers in the front seat. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision.
WARNING Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the side airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
WARNING Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag. Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.
WARNING Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Side airbags and child seats The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag. Related information · Airbags (p. 51)
Inflatable curtains
The inflatable curtain, Inflatable Curtain (IC), helps to prevent the driver and passengers from striking their heads on the inside of the car during a collision.
The inflatable curtain is mounted along both sides of the headlining and helps protect the driver and outer seat passengers of the car. The panels are labelled with IC AIRBAG. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.
WARNING Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the inflatable curtain system can cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
}}
57
SAFETY
||
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hooks are only designed for light coats and jackets (not for solid objects such as umbrellas).
Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends only using Volvo genuine parts that are approved for fitting within these areas.
WARNING Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the load and the side windows if the car is loaded to above the top edge of the door windows. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Related information · Airbags (p. 51)
Safety mode
Safety mode is a protective state that is triggered when a collision may have damaged any of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for any of the safety systems, or the brake system. If the car has been in a collision, the message Safety mode See Owner's manual may be shown on the driver display with a warning symbol as long as the display is not damaged and the car's electrical system is still in working order. This message means that the car has reduced functionality.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See Owner's manual message is shown in the driver display. Leave the car at once.
If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to attempt to reset the system in order to start and move the car for a short distance, if in a dangerous traffic situation for example.
WARNING Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in safety mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety mode See Owner's manual has been shown.
WARNING If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information · Safety (p. 44) · Starting and moving the car after safety
mode (p. 59)
· Recovery (p. 468)
58
Starting and moving the car after safety mode
If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to attempt to reset the system in order to start and move the car for a short distance, if in a dangerous traffic situation for example.
Starting the car after safety mode 1. Check the general damage situation of the
car and whether any fuel has been leaking. There must be no smell of fuel either.
If there is only minor damage and a check has revealed no fuel leaks, starting can be attempted.
WARNING Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See Owner's manual message is shown in the driver display. Leave the car at once.
2. Switch off the car.
3. Then try to start the car. > The car's electronics carry out a systems check and then try to resume normal status.
IMPORTANT
If the message Safety mode See Owner's manual is still shown on the display the car must not be driven or towed but a vehicle recovery service must then be used instead. Even if the car appears to be driveable, hidden damage may make the car impossible to control once moving.
Moving the car after safety mode 1. If the driver display shows the message
Normal mode The car is now in normal mode after a start attempt, the car can be carefully moved if standing in a dangerous position.
2. Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information · Safety mode (p. 58)
· Starting the car (p. 404)
· Recovery (p. 468)
SAFETY
59
SAFETY
Child safety
Children must always sit secure while travelling in the car. Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats and attachment devices) which is designed for fitting in this particular car. Using Volvo's child safety equipment, you obtain good conditions for a child to travel safely in the car. In addition, the child safety equipment fits in well and is simple to use.
The equipment that should be used is selected taking account of the weight and size of the child.
Volvo recommends that children travel in a rear-facing child seat until as late an age as possible, at least until 4 years of age, and then in a front-facing child seat until the child is 140 cm (4 feet 7 inches) tall.
NOTE
Legal provisions about the type of child seat that must be used for children of different ages and heights vary from country to country. Check what does apply.
NOTE
When using child safety equipment, it is important to read the installation instructions included.
In the event of questions when fitting child safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Related information · Safety (p. 44) · Child seats (p. 60) · Activating and deactivating child safety
locks (p. 257)
Child seats
Suitable child seats should always be used when children are travelling in the car. Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make sure that the child seat is positioned, mounted and used correctly.
Look in the installation instructions for the child seat for the correct fitting.
NOTE
When using child safety equipment, it is important to read the installation instructions included.
In the event of questions when fitting child safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.
NOTE
Never leave a child seat loose in the car. Always secure it according to the instructions for the child seat, even when it is not in use.
NOTE
Long-term installation and use of child seats may cause wear and tear on the car's fittings. Volvo recommends using the kick guard accessory to protect the car's fittings.
60
SAFETY
Related information · Child safety (p. 60)
· Upper mounting points for child seats
(p. 61)
· Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 62)
· i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child
seats (p. 62)
· Child seat positioning (p. 63)
· Activating and deactivating passenger air-
bag* (p. 54)
Upper mounting points for child seats
The car is equipped with upper mounting points for child seats on the rear seat's outer seats. The upper mounting points are primarily intended for use with front-facing child seats.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the upper mounting points.
The location of the mounting points
WARNING The child seat's upper straps must be routed through the hole in the head restraint leg before they are tensioned at the mounting point. If this is not possible, follow the recommendations from the child seat manufacturer.
NOTE Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate fitting this type of child seat in cars with folding head restraints on the outer seats.
Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols on the rear of the backrest.
The mounting points are located on the rear of the rear seat's outer seats.
NOTE
In cars with a parcel shelf, this must be removed before child seats can be attached to the mounting points.
Related information · Child seats (p. 60)
· Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 62)
· i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child
seats (p. 62)
· Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 66)
· Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 67)
* Option/accessory. 61
SAFETY
Lower mounting points for child seats
The car is equipped with lower mounting points for child seats in the front seat* and the rear seat. The lower mounting points are designed to be used in conjunction with certain rear-facing child seats. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the lower mounting points. The location of the mounting points
Mounting point locations in the front seat. The mounting points in the front seat are located on the sides of the passenger seat's legroom. The mounting points in the front seat are only mounted if the vehicle is equipped with a
switch to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag*.
Mounting point locations in the rear seat. The mounting points in the rear seat are located on the rear section of the front seat's floor rails.
Related information · Child seats (p. 60) · Upper mounting points for child seats
(p. 61)
· i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child
seats (p. 62)
· Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 66)
· Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 67)
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats
The car is equipped with i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats in the rear seat. i-Size/ISOFIX2 is a fixture system for car child seats that is based on an international standard. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points. The location of the mounting points
Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols2 on the upholstery of the backrest. The mounting points for i-Size/ISOFIX are located behind covers in the lower section of the rear seat's backrest, in the outer seats. Lift the covers in order to access the mounting points.
62
* Option/accessory.
Related information · Child seats (p. 60)
· Upper mounting points for child seats
(p. 61)
· Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 62)
· Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 66)
· Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 69)
· Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 70)
Child seat positioning
It is important to position the child seat in the right place in the car. The choice of location depends, amongst other things, on the type of child seat and whether the passenger airbag is activated.
Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible. Always fit rear-facing child seats in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. If a child is sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys. If the passenger airbag is deactivated then rear-facing child seats can be fitted on the front passenger seat.
SAFETY
NOTE Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply.
WARNING Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated. Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.
2 Names and symbols change depending on market.
}}
63
SAFETY
|| Label for passenger airbag
Label on the passenger side's sun visor. The warning label for the passenger airbag is positioned as shown above.
Related information · Child seats (p. 60) · Child seat mounting (p. 64) · Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 66)
· Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 67)
· Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 69)
· Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 70)
Child seat mounting
It is important to remember a number of things when a child restraint system is mounted and used, which depend on where the child restraint system is positioned.
WARNING Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally. Do not secure the straps for the child seat into the seat's horizontal adjustment bar or in springs, rails or beams under the seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps. Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen.
NOTE
When using child safety equipment, it is important to read the installation instructions included.
In the event of questions when fitting child safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.
NOTE
Never leave a child seat loose in the car. Always secure it according to the instructions for the child seat, even when it is not in use.
NOTE
Long-term installation and use of child seats may cause wear and tear on the car's fittings. Volvo recommends using the kick guard accessory to protect the car's fittings.
Installation in the front seat · When fitting rear-facing child seats, check
that the passenger airbag is deactivated.
· When fitting front-facing child seats,
check that the passenger airbag is activated.
· Only use child seats that are recom-
mended by Volvo, are universally approved or are semi-universal, and where the car is included on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
· ISOFIX child seats can only be fitted when
the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console3 accessory.
3 The accessory range varies depending on market. 64
SAFETY
· If the child seat is equipped with lower
straps, Volvo recommends that the lower mounting points are used with these3.
· If the child seat is equipped with support
legs, always fit the support leg/support legs directly to the floor. Never fit a support leg to a footrest or other object.
· The ISOFIX guide can be used in order to
facilitate child seat installation.
Installation in the rear seat · Only use child seats that are recom-
mended by Volvo, are universally approved or are semi-universal, and where the car is included on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
· A child seat with support legs must not be
fitted in the centre seat.
· The outer seats are equipped with the
ISOFIX fixture system and are approved for i-Size4.
· The outer seats are equipped with upper
mounting points. Volvo recommends that child seat's upper straps should be pulled through the hole in the head restraint before being tensioned at the mounting point. If this is not possible, follow the recommendations from the child seat manufacturer.
· If the child seat is equipped with lower
straps, never adjust the position of the seat in front after the straps have been fitted in the lower mounting points. Always remember to remove the lower straps when the child seat is not installed.
· If the child seat is equipped with support
legs, always fit the support leg/support legs directly to the floor. Never fit a support leg to a footrest or other object.
With the installation of an infant seat in the rear seat, Volvo recommends a distance of at least 50 mm (2 tum) from the front part of the infant seat to the rearmost part of the seat in front.
Related information · Child seat positioning (p. 63)
· Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 66)
· Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 67)
· Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 69)
· Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 70)
3 The accessory range varies depending on market. 4 Varies depending on market.
65
SAFETY
Overview table for location of child seats
The table gives an overview of the types of child seats suitable for the car's seats.
Seat positions in right-hand drive cars.
Seat positions in left-hand drive cars.
i-Size child seats Universally approved child seats secured using the car's seatbelt
Seat positionB 3, 5
2C, 3, 4, 5
A For more information, contact the child seat manufacturer. B According to the numbering above. C Activated airbag for front-facing child seats. Deactivated airbag for rear-facing child seats.
Related information · Child seat positioning (p. 63)
· Child seat mounting (p. 64)
· Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 67)
· Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 69)
· Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 70)
Other child seat categoriesA 2C, 3, 5
66
Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts
The table gives a recommendation for which child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child.
NOTE
Always read the owner's manual section on installing a child seat before installing one in the car.
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats)A
Group 0 max 10 kg
UB, C
Group 0+ max 13 kg
UB, C
Group 1 LD
9-18 kg
Group 2 LD
15-25 kg
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats)A
X
X
UFB, E
UFB, F
SAFETY
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
UC
UC
UC
UC
UE, LD
UE
UF, LD
UF
}} 67
SAFETY
|| Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats)A
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats)A
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 3 X
22-36 kg
UFB, F
UF
UF
U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group. UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats. L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. X: The seat is not suitable for children in this mass group.
A The seat cushion extension must always be retracted for the installation of child seats. B Adjust the seat to a more elevated position. C Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146). D Volvo recommends: Volvo rear-facing seat (type approval E5 04212). E Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group. F Volvo recommends: Booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster seat (type approval E1 04301312).
WARNING Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated.
· Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 70)
· Seatbelts (p. 46)
Related information · Child seat positioning (p. 63)
· Child seat mounting (p. 64)
· Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 66)
· Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 69)
68
SAFETY
Table for location of i-Size child seats
The table gives a recommendation for which i-Size child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child.
The child seat must be approved in accordance with UN Reg R129.
NOTE
Always read the owner's manual section on installing a child seat before installing one in the car.
Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag, Front seat (with activated airbag, only Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
only rear-facing child seats)
front-facing child seats)
i-Size child seats
X
X
i-UA, B
X
i-U: Suitable for i-Size "universal" child seat, front-facing and rear-facing. X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats.
A Volvo recommends that children travel in a rear-facing child seat until as late an age as possible, at least until 4 years of age. B Volvo recommends: BeSafe iZi Kid X2 i-Size (type approval E4-129R-000002).
Related information · Child seat positioning (p. 63)
· Child seat mounting (p. 64)
· Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 66)
· Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 67)
· Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 70)
· i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child
seats (p. 62)
69
SAFETY
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
The table gives a recommendation for which ISOFIX child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child.
The child seat must be approved in accordance with UN Reg R44 and the car model must be included in the manufacturer's vehicle list.
NOTE
Always read the owner's manual section on installing a child seat before installing one in the car.
Weight Size classA Type of child seat
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-
facing child seats)B, C
Group 0
E
Rear-facing infant seat
max 10 kg
E
Rear-facing infant seat
Group 0+
C
Rear-facing child seat
max 13 kg
D
Rear-facing child seat
ILB, D, XE ILB, D, F, XE
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats)B, C
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
X
ILD
X
X
ILD
X
70
SAFETY
Weight Size classA Type of child seat
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-
facing child seats)B, C
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats)B, C
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
A
Front-facing child seat
Group 1 9-18 kg
B
Front-facing child seat
B1
Front-facing child seat
C
Rear-facing child seat
D
Rear-facing child seat
X ILB, F, XE
ILB, F, G, XE
ILG, IUFG
X
X
IL
X
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories.
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems.
A For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat's label. B Works for the installation of ISOFIX child seats that are semi-universally approved (IL) if the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console accessory (the accessory range varies depending on market).
There are no upper mounting points for child seats here. C The seat cushion extension must always be retracted for the installation of child seats. D Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146). E Applicable if the car is not fitted with an ISOFIX bracket. F Adjust the backrest so that the head restraint does not interfere with the child seat. G Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
WARNING Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated.
NOTE
If an i-Size/ISOFIX child seat has no size classification, the car model must be included on the vehicle list for the child seat.
NOTE
Volvo recommends contacting an authorised Volvo dealer for information about which i-Size/ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.
}}
71
SAFETY || Related information
· Child seat positioning (p. 63) · Child seat mounting (p. 64) · Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 66)
· Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 67)
· Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 69)
· i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child
seats (p. 62)
72
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Displays and controls by the driver in a left-hand drive car
The overviews show where the displays and controls near the driver are located.
Steering wheel and instrument panel
Left-hand steering wheel keypad
Display lighting, unlocking/opening*/closing* of tailgate
Roof console
Centre and tunnel console
Position lamps, daytime running lights, dipped beam, main beam, direction indicators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*, rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter Steering wheel paddles* for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox Driver display Wipers and washing, rain sensor* Right-hand steering wheel keypad Steering wheel adjustment Horn
74
Front reading lamps and interior lighting
Panoramic roof*
Display in roof console, ON CALL button*
Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror
Centre display
Start button
Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media, drive mode button* Electrical socket, USB port, wireless phone charger* Gear selector
Parking brake
Automatic braking when stationary
* Option/accessory.
Driver's door
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Displays and controls by the driver in a right-hand drive car
The overviews show where the displays and controls near the driver are located.
Steering wheel and instrument panel
Horn Steering wheel adjustment Left-hand steering wheel keypad
Roof console
Memory for settings for power front seat*, door mirrors Central locking, power windows, door mirrors, electric child lock* Bonnet opening
Adjusting front seat
Related information · Manual front seat (p. 172) · Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 173) · Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 181) · Lighting control (p. 138) · Starting the car (p. 404) · Driver display (p. 77) · Overview of centre display (p. 97) · Gearbox (p. 417)
Position lamps, daytime running lights, dipped beam, main beam, direction indicators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*, rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter
Steering wheel paddles* for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox
Driver display
Wipers and washing, rain sensor*
Display lighting, unlocking/opening*/closing* of tailgate
Right-hand steering wheel keypad
Front reading lamps and interior lighting Panoramic roof* Display in roof console, ON CALL button* Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror
}} * Option/accessory. 75
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Centre and tunnel console
Driver's door
Centre display Start button Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media, drive mode button* Electrical socket, USB port, wireless phone charger* Gear selector Parking brake Automatic braking when stationary
76
Memory for settings for power front seat*, door mirrors Central locking, power windows, door mirrors, electric child lock* Bonnet opening
Adjusting front seat
Related information · Manual front seat (p. 172) · Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 173) · Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 181) · Lighting control (p. 138) · Starting the car (p. 404) · Driver display (p. 77) · Overview of centre display (p. 97) · Gearbox (p. 417)
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Driver display
The driver display shows information about the car and driving. The driver display contains gauges, indicators and indicator and warning symbols. The content of the driver display depends on the car's equipment, settings and which functions are active at that time.
The driver display is activated as soon as a door is opened, i.e. in ignition position 0. The driver display extinguishes after a while if it is not used. To reactivate it, proceed with one of the following:
· Depress the brake pedal. · Activate ignition position I.
Location in the driver display:
On the left
Speedometer
Trip meter
OdometerB
Cruise control and speed limiter information
Road Sign Information*
· Open one of the doors. WARNING
If the driver display should extinguish, not illuminate on activation/start or be fully or partially illegible, the car must not be used. You should visit a workshop immediately. Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING In the event of a fault in the driver display the information on e.g. brakes, airbags or other safety systems may not be shown. In which case, the driver cannot check the status of the car's systems or receive current warnings and information.
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
In the middle
On the right
Indicator and warning symbols
Tachometer/ECO gaugeA
Outside temperature gauge
Gear shift indicator
Clock
Drive mode
Messages, in some cases with graphics
Fuel gauge
Door and seatbelt information
Start/stop function status
Media player
Distance to empty tank
Navigation map*
Instantaneous fuel consumption }}
* Option/accessory. 77
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
|| On the left
A Depends on drive mode selected. B Accumulated mileage.
Dynamic symbol The dynamic symbol in its basic form.
In the middle Phone Voice recognition CompassA
On the right App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)
· Messages in the driver display (p. 93) · Managing the app menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 92)
· Drive modes* (p. 424)
The centre of the driver display contains a dynamic symbol that changes appearance for different types of message. An amber or red marker around the symbol indicates the degree of severity of a control or warning message.
Examples of indicator symbol.
With an animation, the basic shape can be turned into a graphic showing where a problem is situated, or in order to clarify information.
Related information · Driver display settings (p. 79)
· Indicator and warning symbols (p. 85)
· Trip computer (p. 80)
78
* Option/accessory.
Driver display settings
Settings for the driver display's display options can be made via the driver display's app menu and via the centre display's settings menu. Settings via the driver display's app menu
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. The app menu is opened and controlled using the right-hand keypad on the steering wheel. In the app menu, you can choose which information is shown on the driver display from:
· trip computer · media player · phone · navigation system*.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Settings via the centre display
Selecting information type 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press My Car Displays Driver Display Information.
3. Select what should be shown in the background:
· Show no information in background
· Show information for current
playing media
· Show navigation even if no route is
set
Selecting theme 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Tap on My Car Displays Display Themes
3. Select a theme (appearance) for the driver display:
· Glass
· Minimalistic
· Performance
· Chrome Rings
Selecting language 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Tap on System System Languages and Units System Language to select language. > A change will affect the language in all displays.
These settings are personal and are saved automatically to the active driver profile.
Related information · Driver display (p. 77)
· Managing the app menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 92)
· Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
* Option/accessory. 79
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge in the driver display shows the fuel level in the tank.
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. The beige zone in the fuel gauge indicates the quantity of fuel in the tank. When the fuel level is low, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and turns amber colour. The trip computer also shows the distance to empty tank.
Related information · Driver display (p. 77) · Filling fuel (p. 441) · Fuel tank - volume (p. 656)
Trip computer
The car's trip computer records vales such as e.g. distance, fuel consumption and average speed whilst driving. In order to facilitate fuel-efficient driving, information is recorded about both instantaneous and average fuel consumption. The information from the trip computer can be shown in the driver display.
Examples of trip computer information in the driver display. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. The following meters are included in the trip computer:
· Trip meter · Odometer · Instantaneous fuel consumption · Distance to empty tank · Tourist - alternative speedometer
Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed via system settings in the centre display.
Trip meter There are two trip meters, TM and TA.
TM can be reset manually and TA is reset automatically if the car is not used for at least four hours.
The following information is registered while driving:
· Mileage
· Driving time
· Average speed
· Average fuel consumption
The values apply from the trip meter's latest reset.
Odometer The odometer records the car's total mileage. This value cannot be reset to zero.
Instantaneous fuel consumption This gauge shows the fuel consumption that the car has at the moment. The value is updated approximately every second.
Distance to empty tank The trip computer calculates the remaining mileage with the fuel available in the tank.
80
The calculation is based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km (20 miles) and the remaining drivable fuel quantity.
When the gauge shows "----", there is not enough fuel left to be able to calculate the remaining mileage. Refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight deviation if the driving style has been changed.
An economic driving style generally results in a longer driving distance.
Tourist - alternative speedometer The alternative digital speedometer makes it easier to drive in countries where speed limit signs are in a different unit than that shown in the car's instruments.
The digital speed is then shown in the opposite unit to that shown in the analogue speedometer. If the analogue speedometer is graduated in mph, the digital speedometer shows the corresponding speed in km/h and vice versa.
Related information · Show trip data in the driver display
(p. 81)
· Resetting the trip meter (p. 82)
· Show trip statistics in the centre display
(p. 83)
· Driver display (p. 77)
· Changing system units (p. 120)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Show trip data in the driver display
The trip computer's recorded and calculated values can be shown in the driver display. The values are saved in a trip computer app. Via the app menu, you can choose which information is shown on the driver display.
Open and navigate in the app menu1 using the righthand steering wheel keypad.
App menu Left/right Up/down Confirm
}} 81
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
|| 1. Open the app menu in the driver display by pressing (1).
(It is not possible to open the app menu while there is an unacknowledged message in the driver display. The message first has to be confirmed by pressing the O button (4) before the app menu can be opened.)
2. Navigate to the trip computer app to left or right with (2).
> The top four menu rows show measured values for trip meter TM. The next four menu rows show measured values for trip meter TA. Scroll up or down in the list with (3).
3. Scroll down to the option buttons to select which information to show in the driver display:
· Odometer
· Distance to empty tank
· Tourist (alternative speedometer)
· Mileage for trip meter TM, TA, or no
display of mileage
· Instantaneous fuel consumption, aver-
age consumption for TM or TA, alternatively, no display of fuel consumption
Select or deselect an option with the O button (4). The change is made immediately.
Related information · Trip computer (p. 80)
· Resetting the trip meter (p. 82)
Resetting the trip meter
Reset the trip meter using the left-hand stalk switch.
Reset all information in trip meter TM (i.e. mileage, average consumption, average speed and driving time) with a long press on the RESET button on the left-hand stalk switch. Pressing the RESET button resets only the mileage.
The trip meter TA can only be reset automatically when the car has not been used for four or more hours. Related information
· Trip computer (p. 80)
1 The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. 82
Show trip statistics in the centre display
Trip statistics from the trip computer are displayed graphically in the centre display and provide an overview that facilitates more fuelefficient driving.
Open the Driver performance app in app view in order to show the trip statistics.
Each bar in the diagram symbolises a distance of 1, 10 or 100 km, alternatively miles. The bars are filled in from the right as driving progresses. The bar on the far right shows the value for the current distance.
The average fuel consumption and total driving time are calculated since the last time the trip statistics were reset.
Trip statistics from the trip computer2.
Related information · Settings for trip statistics (p. 83) · Trip computer (p. 80)
2 The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Settings for trip statistics
Reset or adjust settings for trip statistics. 1. Open the Driver performance app in app
view in order to show the trip statistics.
2. Press Preferences to
· change graph scale. Select resolution 1,
10 or 100 km/miles for the bar.
· reset data after every trip. Performed
when the car has been stationary for more than 4 hours.
· reset data for the current trip.
Trip statistics, calculated average consumption and total driving time are always reset simultaneously. Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed via system settings in the centre display. Related information
· Show trip statistics in the centre display
(p. 83)
· Trip computer (p. 80) · Resetting the trip meter (p. 82)
83
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Date and time
The clock is shown in both the driver display and the centre display. Clock location
In certain situations, messages and information may cover the clock in the driver display. In the centre display, the clock is located at the top right of the status bar. Date and time settings Select Settings System Date and
Time in the centre display's top view to change settings for time and date format. Adjust the date and time by pressing the up or down arrow on the touch screen. Automatic time for cars with GPS When the car is equipped with a navigation system, Auto Time can be selected. The time
zone is then adjusted automatically based on the location of the car. For certain types of navigation systems, the current location (country) must also be set to obtain the right time zone. If Auto Time is not selected, time and data are adjusted with arrow up or arrow down on the touch screen.
Summer time In certain countries, it is possible to select the Auto Daylight Saving Time setting for automatic setting of summer time. For other countries, the Daylight Saving Time setting can be selected manually.
Related information · Driver display (p. 77)
· Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
Outside temperature gauge
The outside temperature is shown in the driver display. A sensor detects the temperature outside of the car.
If the car has been stationary, the gauge may display a temperature reading that is too high.
When the outside temperature is in the range 5 °C to +2 °C (23 °F to 36 °F), a snowflake symbol lights up that warns of potentially slippery conditions. Change the unit for the temperature gauge, etc. via system settings in the centre display's top view. Related information
· Driver display (p. 77) · Changing system units (p. 120)
84
Indicator and warning symbols
The indicator and warning systems alert the driver to the fact that a function is activated, a system is working, or a defect or serious error has occurred.
Red symbols
Warning
The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been detected which could affect the safety or drivability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the driver display at the same time.
The warning symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.
Seatbelt reminder
Illuminates or flashes when someone in the car is not wearing a seatbelt.
Airbags
An error has been detected in any of the car's safety systems.
Read the message on the driver display and contact a workshop. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Fault in brake system
An error has occurred on the braking system.
Read the message on the driver display and contact a workshop. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.
Parking brake
Light illuminated permanently: The parking brake is activated.
Flashing: an error has occurred with the parking brake. Read the message in the driver display.
Faults in the electrical system
An error has occurred on the electrical system.
Read the message on the driver display and contact a workshop. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.
High engine temperature
The engine temperature is too high. Read the message in the driver display.
Collision risk
City Safety warns of a risk of collision with other vehicles, pedestrians, cyclists or large animals.
Low oil pressure
The engine oil pressure is too low. Stop the engine immediately and check the engine oil level, top up if necessary.
If the symbol lights up and the oil level is normal, read the message on the display and contact a workshop. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.
Amber symbols Information
A fault has occurred in one of the car's systems. Read the message in the driver display.
The information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.
Fault in brake system
An error has occurred on the braking system. Read the message in the driver display.
}}
85
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
ABS fault
The system is disengaged. The car's regular brake system continues to work, but without the ABS function.
AdBlue system (diesel)
Low AdBlue level or fault in AdBlue system.
Emissions system
Emissions systems fault. Drive to a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.
Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp is illuminated.
Tyre pressure system
Low tyre pressure.
If there is a fault in the tyre pressure system, the symbol will flash for approx. 1 minute and then illuminate with a constant glow. This may be because the system cannot detect or warn of low tyre pressure as intended.
Fault in the headlamp system A fault has occurred on the headlamp system. Read the message in the driver display.
Lane assistance Lane assistance warns/intervenes.
Stability system Light on permanently: a fault has occurred in the system. Flashing: the system is working.
Stability system, sport mode Sport mode is selected.
Blue symbols Active main beam Active main beam is activated and switched on.
Main beam Main beam is switched on.
Green symbols Automatic brake The function is activated and the service brake or parking brake is operating.
Front fog lamps The front fog lamp is switched on.
Position lamps The position lamps are switched on.
Left and right-hand direction indicator The direction indicator is being used.
White/grey symbols Active main beam Active main beam is activated, but does not come on.
Preconditioning Engine and compartment heater/air conditioning pre-condition the car.
86
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Lane assistance White symbol: Lane assistance is on and road lines are detected. Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on but road lines are not detected.
Rain sensor The rain sensor is activated.
Related information · Driver display (p. 77)
License agreement for the driver display
A license is an agreement for the right to operate a certain activity or the right to use someone else's entitlement according to the terms and conditions in the agreement. The following text is Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer or developer.
Freetype Project License 3rd Party Software Disclaimers and License Agreements Confidential ID 06-00004-004 39 / 75 Revision 06.00A, 2015-06-09 2006-Jan-27 Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg.
Introduction The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages; some of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine, various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the FreeType Project. This license applies to all files found in such packages, and which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test programs, documentation and makefiles, at the very least. This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all encourage inclusion and use of free software in commercial and freeware products alike. As a consequence, its main points are that: o We
don't promise that this software works. However, we will be interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is' distribution) o You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or full form, without having to pay us. (`royaltyfree' usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you have used the FreeType code. (`credits') We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this software, with or without modifications, in commercial products. We disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType Project and assume no liability related to The FreeType Project. Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form for a credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this license. We thus encourage you to use the following text: "Portions of this software are copyright © 2013 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved."
}}
87
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
|| Legal Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license, the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType Project', be they named as alpha, beta or final release. `You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where `using' is a generic term including compiling the project's source code as well as linking it to form a `program' or `executable'. This program is referred to as `a program using the FreeType engine'. This license applies to all files distributed in the original FreeType Project, including all source code, binaries and documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive. If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by this license, you must contact us to verify this. The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as specified below.
1. No Warranty THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT. '
2. Redistribution This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual and irrevocable right and license to use, execute, perform, compile, display, copy, create derivative works of, distribute and sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source and object code forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose; and to authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted herein, subject to the following conditions: o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file (`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered, original files must be preserved in all copies of source files. o Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that states that the software is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your documentation, though this isn't mandatory. These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified files. If you use our work, you must
acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid to us.
3. Advertising Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use the name of the other for commercial, advertising, or promotional purposes without specific prior written permission. We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation or advertising materials: `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', `FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'. As you have not signed this license, you are not required to accept it. However, as the FreeType Project is copyrighted material, only this license, or another one contracted with the authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType Project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms of this license.
4. Contacts There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: o freetype@nongnu.org. Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as future and wanted additions to the library and distribution. If you are looking for support, start in this list if you haven't found anything to help you in the documentation. o freetypedevel@nongnu.org. Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues, specific
88
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
licenses, porting, etc. Our home page can be found at http://www.freetype.org
HarfBuzz / UCDN License
· Copyright © 2010,2011,2012 Google, Inc.
· Copyright © 2012 Mozilla Foundation
· Copyright © 2011 Codethink Limited
· Copyright © 2008,2010 Nokia
Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies)
· Copyright © 2009 Keith Stribley
· Copyright © 2009 Martin Hosken and SIL
International
· Copyright © 2007 Chris Wilson
· Copyright © 2006 Behdad Esfahbod
· Copyright © 2005 David Turner
· Copyright ©
2004,2007,2008,2009,2010 Red Hat, Inc.
· Copyright © 1998-2004 David Turner and
Werner Lemberg
For full copyright notices consult the individual files in the package. Permission is hereby granted, without written agreement and without license or royalty fees, to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose, provided that the above copyright notice and the following two paragraphs appear in all copies of this software. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE TO ANY
PARTY FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS NO OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS.
Libunibreak License This library is released under an open-source licence, the zlib/libpng licence. Please check the file LICENCE for details. Apart from using the algorithm, part of the code is derived from the data provided under http:// www.unicode.org/Public. And the Unicode Terms of Use may apply: URL:http:// www.unicode.org/copyright.html
LICENSE:
· Copyright (C) 2008-2012 Wu Yongwei
<wuyongwei at gmail dot com>
· Copyright (C) 2012 Tom Hacohen <tom
dot hacohen at samsung dot com>
This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the author be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software. Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions: 1. The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgement in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required. 2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software. 3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
}}
89
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
|| Unicode Inc. License Agreement EXHIBIT 1 UNICODE, INC. LICENSE AGREEMENT - DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE Unicode Data Files include all data files under the directories http:// www.unicode.org/Public/, http:// www.unicode.org/reports/, and http:// www.unicode.org/cldr/data/ . Unicode Software includes any source code published in the Unicode Standard or under the directories http://www.unicode.org/Public/, http://www.unicode.org/reports/, and http:// www.unicode.org/cldr/data/. NOTICE TO USER: Carefully read the following legal agreement. BY DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING, COPYING OR OTHERWISE USING UNICODE INC.'S DATA FILES ("DATA FILES"), AND/OR SOFTWARE ("SOFTWARE"), YOU UNEQUIVOCALLY ACCEPT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY, ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE, DO NOT DOWNLOAD, INSTALL, COPY, DISTRIBUTE OR USE THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE. COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright © 1991-2010 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in http:// www.unicode.org/copyright.html. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files and any associated documentation (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any
associated documentation (the "Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a) the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in associated documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in each modified Data File or in the Software as well as in the documentation associated with the Data File(s) or Software that the data or software has been modified. THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS
ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
90
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
ZLIB Data Compression Library License
Agreement (C) 1995-2010 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software. Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly Mark Adler jloup@gzip.org madler@alumni.caltech.edu If you use the zlib library in a product, we would appreciate *not* receiving lengthy legal documents to sign. The sources are provided for free but without warranty of any kind. The library has been entirely written by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark
Adler; it does not include third-party code. If you redistribute modified sources, we would appreciate that you include in the file ChangeLog history information documenting your changes. Please read the FAQ for more information on the distribution of modified source versions.
GLEW Licence (Modified BSD Licence) The OpenGL Extension Wrangler Library
· Copyright (C) 2002-2008, Milan Ikits
<milan.ikits@ieee org>
· Copyright (C) 2002-2008, Marcelo E.
Magallon <mmagallo@debian.org>
· Copyright (C) 2002, Lev Povalahev
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * The name of the author may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Related information · Driver display (p. 77)
91
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
App menu in the driver display
The app menu in the driver display provides quick access to commonly used functions for certain apps.
The figure is schematic. The app menu in the driver display can be used instead of the centre display and is controlled using the right-hand keypad on the steering wheel. The app menu makes it easier to switch between different apps or functions within the apps without having to let go of the steering wheel.
App menu functions Different apps give access to different types of functions. The following apps and their associated functions can be controlled from the app menu:
App Trip computer
Media player Phone
Navigation
Functions
Selection of trip meter, selection of what to show in the driver display, etc.
Selection of active source for the media player.
Calling a contact from the call list.
Guide to destination, etc.
Related information · Driver display (p. 77)
· Overview of centre display (p. 97)
· Managing the app menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 92)
Managing the app menu in the driver display
The app menu in the driver display is operated with the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
The app menu and the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. The figure is schematic.
Open/close Left/right Up/down Confirm
92
Opening/closing the app menu Press on open/close (1).
> The app menu opens/closes.
NOTE
It is not possible to open the app menu while there is an unacknowledged message in the driver display. The message has to be confirmed first before the app menu can be opened.
The app menu closes automatically after a period of inactivity or after certain options have been selected.
Navigating and selecting in the app menu 1. Navigate between the apps by pressing
on the left or right (2). > Functions for previous/next app are
shown in the app menu.
2. Browse through the functions for the selected app by tapping on up or down (3).
3. Confirm or highlight an option for the function by pressing on confirm (4). > The function is activated and for some options the app menu then closes.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
If the app menu is opened again, the functions of the most recently selected app are shown first.
Related information · App menu in the driver display (p. 92)
· Messages in the driver display (p. 93)
Messages in the driver display
The driver display can show messages to inform or assist the driver in the event of different events.
Example of message in the 8-inch driver display. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
}} 93
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Examples of messages in the driver display. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. The driver display shows messages that are of high priority for the driver. Messages can be shown in different parts of the driver display depending on what other information is currently being displayed. After a while, or when the message has been acknowledged/action taken if required, the message disappears from the driver display. If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in
the Car Status app, which is opened from the app view in the centre display. Message composition may vary and they can be shown together with graphics, symbols or buttons for acknowledging the message or accepting a request, for example.
Service messages
Shown below is a selection of important service messages and their meanings.
Message
Specification
Stop safelyA
Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a work-
shopB.
Turn off engineA
Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a work-
shopB.
Service urgent Drive to workshopA
Contact a workshopB to check the car immediately.
Service requiredA
Contact a workshopB to check the car as soon as possible.
Regular maintenance
Book time for maintenance
Time for regular service -
contact a workshopB. Shown before the next service date.
Regular maintenance
Time for maintenance
Time for regular service -
contact a workshopB. Shown at the next service date.
Message
Specification
Regular maintenance
Maintenance overdue
Time for regular service -
contact a workshopB. Shown when the service date has passed.
Temporarily offA
A function has been temporarily switched off and is reset automatically while driving or after starting again.
A Part of message, shown together with information on where the problem has arisen.
B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information · Managing messages in the driver display
(p. 95)
· Handling a message saved from the driver
display (p. 96)
· Message in centre display (p. 128)
94
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Managing messages in the driver display
Messages in the driver display are handled using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
Examples of messages in the driver display3 and the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
Examples of messages in the driver display4 and the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
Left/right
Confirm
Some messages in the driver display contain one or more buttons for acknowledging the message or accepting a request, for example.
Managing a new message For messages with buttons:
1. Navigate between the buttons by pressing on the left or right (1).
2. Confirm the selection by pressing on confirm (2).
> The message disappears from the driver display.
For messages without buttons:
Close the message by pressing on confirm (2), or allow the message to close automatically after a while.
> The message disappears from the driver display.
If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in the Car Status app, which is opened from the app view in the centre display. The message Car message stored in Car Status application is shown in the centre display in conjunction with this.
Related information · Messages in the driver display (p. 93)
· Handling a message saved from the driver
display (p. 96)
· Message in centre display (p. 128)
3 With 8-inch driver display. 4 With 12-inch driver display.
95
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Handling a message saved from the driver display
Whether saved from the driver display or the centre display, messages are managed in the centre display.
Saved messages can be seen in the Car Status app. Messages that are shown in the driver display and that need to be saved are added
in the Car Status app in the centre display. The message Car message stored in Car Status application is shown in the centre display in conjunction with this.
Reading a saved message To read a saved message immediately:
Press the button to the right of the Car message stored in Car Status application message in the centre display.
> The saved message is shown in the Car Status app.
To read a saved message later:
1. Open the Car Status app from the app view in the centre display.
> The app is opened in the bottom subview of the home view.
2. Select the Messages tab in the app.
> A list of saved messages is shown.
3. Tap on a message to expand/minimise.
> More information on the message is shown in the list and the image to the left in the app shows information about the message graphically.
Managing a saved message In maximised mode, some messages have two buttons available to book service or read the owner's manual.
To book service for a saved message:
In maximised mode for the message, press Request appoint.Call to make Appointment5 for help in booking service.
> With Request appoint.: The Appointments tab opens in the app and creates a request to book service and repair work.
With Call to make Appointment: The phone app is initiated and calls a service centre to book service and repair work.
To read the owner's manual for a saved message:
In maximised mode for the message, press Owner's manual to read about the message in the owner's manual.
> The owner's manual opens in the centre display and shows information linked to the message.
Saved messages in the app are deleted automatically each time the engine is started.
Related information · Messages in the driver display (p. 93)
· Managing messages in the driver display
(p. 95)
· Message in centre display (p. 128)
5 Market dependent. Volvo ID and selected workshop also need to be registered.
96
Overview of centre display
Many of the car's functions are controlled from the centre display. Presented here is the centre display and its options.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}} 97
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL ||
Three of the centre display's basic views. Swipe right or left to access the function or app view respectively6.
Function view - car functions that are activated or deactivated with a press. Certain
functions are also so-called trigger functions, which means they open a window
6 The views are reversed for right-hand drive cars.
98
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
with setting options. Examples of these include Camera.
Home view - the first view that is shown when the screen is started.
Application view (app view) - apps that have been downloaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded functions, such as FM radio. Tap on an app icon to open the app.
Status bar - the activities in the car are shown right at the top of the screen. Network and connection information is shown on the left-hand side of the status bar, while media-related information, the clock and indication about on-going background activity are shown on the right.
Top view - drag the tab down in order to access the top view. Settings, Owner's manual, Profile and the car's saved messages are accessed from here. In some cases contextual settings (e.g. Navigation Settings) and the contextual owner's manual (e.g. Navigation Manual) can also be accessed in the top view.
Navigation - leads to map navigation, with e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap on the subview to expand it.
Media - recently used apps associated with media. Tap on the subview to expand it.
Phone - the phone function can be reached from here. Tap on the subview to expand it.
Extra subview - recently used apps or car functions that do not belong in any of the other subviews. Tap on the subview to expand it.
Climate row - information and direct interaction to set temperature and seat heating for example*. Tap on the symbol in the centre of the climate row in order to open the climate view with more setting options.
NOTE
If necessary, the climate control can be used to cool the media system in the centre display. In these cases, the message Climate system Cooling the infotainment system is shown in the driver display.
Related information · Managing the centre display (p. 100)
· Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
· Function view in centre display (p. 110)
· Apps (p. 477)
· Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 112)
· Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
· Open contextual setup in the centre dis-
play (p. 121)
· Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
· Media player (p. 486)
· Phone (p. 502)
· Climate controls (p. 195)
· Switching off and changing the volume of
the system sound in the centre display (p. 119)
· Changing the appearance in the centre
display (p. 119)
· Changing system language (p. 120)
· Changing system units (p. 120)
· Cleaning the centre display (p. 622)
· Message in centre display (p. 128)
* Option/accessory. 99
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Managing the centre display
Many of the car's functions are controlled and regulated from the centre display. The centre display is a touch screen that reacts to touch.
Using the touch screen functionality in the centre display The screen reacts differently depending on whether it is touched by dragging, swiping, or tapping. Actions such as browsing between different views, marking objects and scrolling
in a list can be performed by touching the screen in different ways.
An infrared light curtain just above the surface of the screen enables the screen to detect a finger that is just in front of the screen. This technology makes it possible to use the screen even with gloves on.
Two people can interact with the screen at the same time, e.g. to adjust the climate for the driver and passenger side respectively.
IMPORTANT Do not use sharp objects on the screen as they may scratch it.
The table below presents the different procedures for operating the screen:
Procedure
Execution
Result
Press once.
Highlights an object, confirms a selection or activates a function.
Press twice in quick suc- Zooms in on a digital object, such as the map. cession.
Press and hold.
Grabs an object. Can be used to move apps or map points on the map. Press and hold your finger against the screen and at the same time drag the object to the desired location.
Tap once with two fingers.
Zooms out from a digital object, such as the map.
100
Procedure
Execution Drag
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Result Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Hold depressed and drag in order to move apps or map points on the map. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.
Swipe/drag quickly
Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.
Note that touching the upper section of the screen may cause the top view to open.
Drag apart
Zooms in.
Drag together
Zooms out.
}} 101
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
|| Returning to home view from another view 1. Briefly press the home button below the centre display. > The last position of the home view is shown.
2. Briefly press again. > All subviews of the home view are set to their default mode.
NOTE
In home view standard mode - briefly press the home button. An animation that describes access to the different views is shown on the screen.
Scrolling in a list, article or view When a scroll indicator is visible in the screen, it is possible to scroll downward or upward in the view. Swipe downwards/upwards anywhere in the view.
The scroll indicator appears in the centre display when it is possible to scroll in the view.
Using the controls in the centre display
The control is used for many of the car's functions. Regulate e.g. temperature by means of one of the following:
· drag the control to the desired tempera-
ture,
· tap on + or - in order to raise or lower the
temperature gradually, or
· tap on the desired temperature on the
control.
Related information · Activating and deactivating centre display
(p. 103)
· Moving apps and buttons in centre display
(p. 112)
· Keyboard in centre display (p. 114)
Temperature control.
102
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Activating and deactivating centre display
The centre display can be dimmed and reactivated using the home button beneath the screen.
Home button for the centre display. The effect of using the home button that the screen dims and the touchscreen no longer reacts to touch. The climate row will still be shown. All functions connected to the screen are still running, such as climate, audio, guidance* and apps. When the centre display is dimmed, it is a good opportunity to clean the screen. The dimming function can also be used to fade the screen so that it does not disturb while driving.
1. Give a long press on the physical home button below the screen. > The screen goes dark except for the climate row, which continues to be shown. All functions connected to the screen are still running.
2. Reactivate the screen - briefly tap on the home button. > The view that was displayed before the screen was switched off will be shown again.
NOTE
The screen cannot be deactivated when a prompt to perform an action is shown on the screen.
NOTE
The centre display deactivates automatically when the engine is off and the driver's door is opened.
Related information · Cleaning the centre display (p. 622) · Changing the appearance in the centre
display (p. 119)
· Overview of centre display (p. 97)
Navigating in the centre display's views
There are five different basic views in the centre display: home view, top view, climate view, app view and function view. The screen is started automatically when the driver's door is opened.
Home view Home view is the view that is shown when the screen is started. It consists of four subviews: Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra subview.
An app or car function selected from the app or function view starts in the respective subview of the home view. E.g. FM radio starts in the Media tile.
The extra tile shows the last used app or car function that is not associated with any of the other three areas.
The subviews show brief information about each different app.
NOTE
When the car is started, the home view's various sub-views show information on the current status of apps.
}} * Option/accessory. 103
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
NOTE
In home view standard mode - briefly press the home button. An animation that describes access to the different views is shown on the screen.
Status bar The activities in the car are shown at the top of the screen. Network and connection information is shown on the left-hand side of the status bar, while media-related information, the clock and indication that background activity is in progress are shown on the right.
Top view
Top view dragged down.
A tab is located in the centre of the status bar at the top of the screen. Open the top view by
pressing on the tab or by dragging/swiping from the top downwards across the screen.
In the top view, access is always available to:
· Settings
· Owner's manual
· Profile
· The car's saved messages.
In the top view, access is given to the following in some cases:
· Contextual setting (e.g. Navigation
Settings). Change settings directly in the top view when an app (e.g. navigation) is running.
· Contextual Owner's Manual (e.g.
Navigation Manual). Gain access directly in the top view to articles in the digital owner's manual that are related to the content displayed on screen.
Exit the top view - press outside the top view, on the home button or at the bottom of the top view and drag upward. The underlying view is then visible and available for use again.
NOTE
The top view is not available during starting/shutdown or when a message is shown on the screen. It is also not available when climate view is shown.
Climate view The climate row is always visible at the bottom of the screen. The most common climate settings can be made directly there, such as setting temperature and seat heating*.
Press the symbol in the centre of the climate row to open the climate view and gain access to more climate settings.
Press the symbol to close the climate view and return to the previous view.
104
* Option/accessory.
App view
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
view, such as the number of unread text messages for Messages.
Tap on an app to open it. The app then opens in the tile to which it belongs, e.g. Media.
You can scroll down in the app view, depending on the number of apps. Do this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.
Go back to the home view again by swiping from left to right7 across the screen, or by pressing the home button.
Function view
App view with the car's apps. Swipe from right to left7 across the screen in order to access the app view from the home view. Apps that have been downloaded (thirdparty apps) and apps for embedded functions,
such as FM radio, are found here. Certain apps show brief information directly in the app
7 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
The function view with buttons for different car functions. Swipe from left to right7 across the screen in order to access the function view from the home view. From here you can activate or
deactivate different car functions, e.g. BLIS*, Lane Keeping Aid* and Park Assist*.
}}
* Option/accessory. 105
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
|| Depending on the amount of functions, it is also possible here to scroll downward in the view. Do this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up. Unlike in app view, where an app is opened with a press, a function is activated or deactivated by pressing the relevant function button. Some functions (trigger functions) open in a new window when pressed. Go back to the home view again by swiping from right to left7 across the screen, or by pressing the home button.
Related information · Managing subviews in centre display
(p. 107)
· Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 112)
· Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
· Open contextual setup in the centre dis-
play (p. 121)
· Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17) · Driver profiles (p. 124) · Climate controls (p. 195) · Apps (p. 477) · Function view in centre display (p. 110) · Overview of centre display (p. 97)
7 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
106
Managing subviews in centre display
Home view consists of four subviews: Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra subview. These views can be expanded.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}} 107
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Expanding a subview from default mode
Standard mode and expanded mode of a subview in the centre display. 108
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Expanding a subview:
For tiles Navigation, Media and Phone: Press anywhere on the subview. When a tile is expanded, the extra tile in the home view is temporarily forced away. The other two tiles are minimised and only certain information is shown. When the extra tile is tapped, the other three tiles are minimised and only certain information is displayed.
The expanded view provides access to the basic functions of the app.
Closing an expanded subview:
The subview can be closed in three different ways.
· Tap on the upper part of the expanded
subview.
· Tap on another tile (this tile will then
open in expanded mode instead).
· Briefly press the physical home button
below the centre display.
Opening or closing a subview in full screen mode The extra tile8 and the tile for Navigation can be opened out in full screen mode, with even more information and more setting options.
When a new subview is opened in full-screen mode, no information from the other subviews is shown.
In expanded mode, open the app in full screen - press on the symbol.
Press on the symbol to go back to the expanded mode, or press the home button at the bottom of the screen.
Home button for the centre display.
There is always the option to go back to home view by pressing the home button. To go back to the home view's standard view from full screen mode press twice on the home button.
Related information · Managing the centre display (p. 100)
· Activating and deactivating centre display
(p. 103)
· Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
8 Does not apply to all apps or car functions opened via the extra tile.
109
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Function view in centre display
All the buttons for car functions are located in the function view, one of the centre display's basic views. Navigate to the function view
from home view by swiping from left to right across the screen9.
Different types of buttons There are three different types of buttons for car functions; see below:
Type of button Property
Function buttons
Have on/off positions.
When a function is running, an LED indicator illuminates to the left of the icon for the button. Press the button to activate/deactivate a function.
Trigger buttons
Do not have on/off positions.
When a trigger button is depressed, a window for the function is opened. For example, it may be a window to change seat position.
Parking buttons
Have on, off and scan modes. Similar to the function buttons but with an extra position for parking scanning.
Affects car function Most buttons in function view are function buttons.
· Camera · Headrest Fold
· Park In · Park Out
9 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. 110
The buttons' different modes
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
When the LED indicator illuminates in green on a function or parking button, the function is activated. When a function is activated, extra text with an explanation for certain functions is shown. The text is shown for a few seconds and then the button is shown with the LED indicator illuminated.
For Lane Keeping Aid, the text Works only at certain speeds is shown, for example, when the button is depressed.
Press the button once briefly to activate or deactivate the function.
The function is deactivated when the LED indicator is extinguished.
When a warning triangle is shown in the righthand section of the button there is something not working as intended. Related information
· Managing the centre display (p. 100) · Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
111
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Moving apps and buttons in centre display
The apps and buttons for car functions in the app view and function view respectively can be moved and organised as desired. 1. Swipe from right to left10 to access the
app view, or swipe from left to right10 to access the function view.
2. Tap on an app or button and hold it down.
> The app or button changes size and becomes slightly transparent. It is then possible to move it.
3. Drag the app or button to a vacant space in the view.
The maximum number of rows available for use in order to position apps or buttons is 48. To move an app or button outside the visible view, drag it to the bottom of the view. New rows are then added, where the app or button can be located.
An app or button can thus be located further down and is then not visible in the normal mode for the view.
Swipe across the screen to scroll up or down in the view.
NOTE Hide the apps that you rarely or never use by moving them to the bottom, off the visible screen. This way it will be easier to find the apps you use more often.
NOTE Apps and car function buttons cannot be added to locations that are already occupied.
Related information · Function view in centre display (p. 110) · Apps (p. 477) · Managing the centre display (p. 100)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
Overview of the symbols that can be shown in the centre display's status bar. The status bar shows activities in progress and, in some cases, their status. Not all symbols are shown all the time due to the limited space in the status bar.
Symbol Specification
Connected to the Internet.
Roaming activated.
Signal strength in mobile phone network.
Bluetooth device connected.
Bluetooth activated but no device connected.
Information sent to and from GPS.
Connected to Wi-Fi network.
Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hotspot). The car then shares the available connection.
10 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. 112
Symbol Specification Car modem activated.
USB sharing active.
Phone charging wirelessly.
Process in progress.
Timer for preconditioning active.
Audio source being played back.
Audio source stopped.
Phone call in progress.
Audio source muted.
News is received from the radio channel. Traffic information is received.
Clock.
Related information · Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
· Message in centre display (p. 128)
· Internet-connected car* (p. 517) · Connecting a device via USB port (p. 493) · Wireless phone charger* (p. 511) · Phone (p. 502) · Date and time (p. 84)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL * Option/accessory. 113
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Keyboard in centre display
The centre display keyboard makes it possible make entries using keys. It is also possible to "draw in" letters and characters on the screen by hand. The keyboard can be used to enter characters, letters and numbers, e.g. to write text messages from the car, enter passwords or search for articles in the digital owner's manual. The keyboard is only shown when entries can be made on the screen.
114
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
The image shows an overview of some of the buttons which may be shown in the keyboard. The appearance varies depending on language settings and the context in which the keyboard is being used.
}} 115
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Row of suggested words or characters11.
addresses, each word automatically starts Variants of a letter or character
The suggested words are adjusted as new
with a capital letter. In text fields for pass-
letters are being entered. Browse among
word, web address or email address entry,
the suggestions by pressing on the right
all letters are automatically lower case
and left arrows. Tap on a suggestion to
unless otherwise set with the button.
select it. Note that this function is not supported by all language selections. If not available, the row will not be shown on the keyboard.
The characters available on the keyboard depend on which language was selected (see point 7). Tap on a character to enter it.
The button works in different ways, depending on the context in which the keyboard is used - either to enter @ (when an email address is entered) or to create a new row (for normal text input).
Hides the keyboard. If this is not possible,
Number entry. The keyboard (2) is then
shown with numbers. Press
, which
in number mode is shown instead of
, to return to the letter keyboard, or
to open the keyboard with special characters.
Changes text input language, e.g. EN. The available characters and word suggestions (1) vary depending on the selected language. To make it possible to change languages for the keyboard, the languages must first be added under Settings.
Space.
Variants of a letter or character, e.g. é or è, can be entered by holding down the letter or character. A box is displayed showing possible variants of letters or characters. Press the required variant. If no variant is selected, the original letter/character is entered.
the button is not shown.
Used to enter capital letters. Press again to enter one capital letter and then continue with lower-case letters. Another press makes all letters capital letters. The next press restores the keyboard to lowercase letters. In this mode, the first letter after a full stop, exclamation mark or question mark is a capital letter. The first letter in the text field is also a capital letter. In text fields intended for names or
Undoes entered text. Pressing briefly deletes one character at a time. Hold the button depressed to delete characters more quickly.
Changes keyboard mode to write letters and characters by hand instead.
Pressing the confirmation button above the keypad (not visible in the illustration) confirms the entered text. The appearance of the button differs depending on context.
Related information · Changing keyboard language in centre
display (p. 117)
· Enter the characters, letters and words
manually in the centre display (p. 117)
· Managing the centre display (p. 100)
· Managing text messages (p. 508)
11 Applies to Asiatic languages.
116
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Changing keyboard language in centre display
To make it possible to switch between different languages for the keyboard, the languages must first be added under Settings.
Adding or deleting languages in settings The keyboard is automatically set to the same languages as the system language. The keyboard language can be manually adapted without affecting the system language. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press System System Languages and
Units Keyboard Layouts. 3. Select one or more languages from the
list. > It is now possible to switch between
the selected languages directly from the keyboard for text input. If no languages have been actively selected under Settings, the keyboard retains the same language as the car's system language.
12 Applies to certain system languages.
Switching between different languages in the keyboard
When a number of languages have been selected in Settings, the button in the keyboard is used to switch between the different languages.
To change keyboard language with list:
1. Give a long press on the button.
> A list opens.
2. Select the required language. If more than four languages have been selected under Settings, it is possible to scroll in the list from the keyboard.
> The keyboard is adapted to the selected language and other word suggestions are given.
To change the keyboard language without displaying the list:
One short press of the button. > The keyboard is adapted to the next language in the list without displaying the list.
Related information · Changing system language (p. 120)
· Keyboard in centre display (p. 114)
Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display
The centre display keyboard allows you to enter characters, letters and words on the screen by "drawing" by hand.
Press the button on the keyboard to change from typing with the keys to entering letters and characters by hand.
Area for writing characters/letters/words/ parts of word. The text field where the characters or word suggestions12 appear as they are written on screen (1).
}}
117
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Suggestions for characters/letters/word/
Writing characters/letters/words by hand
Deleting/changing characters/letters
part of word. It is possible to scroll
1. Write a character, a letter, a word or parts
written by hand
through the list.
of a word in the area for hand-written let-
Space. A space can also be created by entering a dash (-) in the area for hand-
ters (1). Write a word or parts of a word above each other or on a line.
written letters (1). See the heading "Enter-
> A number of suggested characters, let-
ing a space in the free text field with hand-
ters or words is shown (3). The most
writing recognition" below.
likely choice is found at the top of the
Undo entered text. Press briefly to delete
list.
one character/one letter at a time. Wait a
moment before pressing again to delete
IMPORTANT
the next character/letter, etc. Return to the keyboard with regular character input. Switch off/on sound when entering.
Hide the keyboard. If this is not possible, the button is not shown. Change text input language.
Do not use sharp objects on the screen as they may scratch it.
2. Enter the character/letters/word by waiting a moment. > The character/letter/word at the top of the list is entered. It is also possible to select a different character by pressing
Delete all characters in the text field (2) by swiping across the handwriting field (1).
There are several options for deleting/ changing characters/letters:
· Press the intended letter or word in the
list (3).
· Press the text undo button (5) to delete
the letter and begin again.
the required character, letter or word in the list.
· Swipe horizontally from right to left13
over the area for handwritten letters (1).
Delete multiple letters by swiping over
the area several times.
· Pressing the X in the text field (2) dele-
tes all of the entered text.
13 For Arabic keyboard - swipe in the opposite direction. Swiping from right to left creates a space. 118
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Changing row in the free text field with handwriting
Change row by hand by drawing the above character in the handwriting field14. Entering a space in the free text field with handwriting recognition
Enter a space by drawing a dash from left to right15.
Related information · Keyboard in centre display (p. 114)
Changing the appearance in the centre display
The appearance of the screen in the centre display can be changed by selecting a theme. 1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press My Car Displays Display Themes.
3. Then select a theme, e.g. Minimalistic or Chrome Rings.
As a supplement to these appearances, it is possible to choose between Normal and Bright. With Normal, the screen background is dark and the text is light. This alternative is the default for all themes. A light variant can also be selected, in which the background is light and the text is dark. This alternative can be useful in e.g. strong daylight.
This alternative is always available for the user and is not affected by the surrounding lighting.
Related information · Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
· Activating and deactivating centre display
(p. 103)
· Cleaning the centre display (p. 622)
Switching off and changing the volume of the system sound in the centre display
The centre display can be used to change the volume of the system sound or switch off the system sound altogether. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2. Press Sound System Volumes.
3. Under Touch Sounds, drag the control to change the volume/switch off screen touch sounds. Drag the control to the desired volume.
Related information · Overview of centre display (p. 97)
· Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
· Audio settings (p. 476)
14 For Arabic keyboards - draw the same character, but reversed. 15 For Arabic keyboard - draw the dash from right to left.
119
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Changing system units
Units settings are defined in the centre display's Settings menu. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2. Continue to System System Languages and Units Units of Measurement.
3. Select a unit standard:
· Metric - kilometres, litres and degrees
Celsius.
· Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees
Celsius.
· US - miles, gallons and degrees Fah-
renheit. > The units in the driver display and cen-
tre display are changed.
Related information · Overview of centre display (p. 97)
· Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
· Changing system language (p. 120)
Changing system language
Language settings are defined in the centre display menu Settings.
NOTE
Changing the language in the centre display may mean that some owner's information is not compliant with national or local laws and regulations. Do not switch to a language that is difficult to understand as this may make it difficult to find your way back through the screen structure.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Continue to System System Languages and Units.
3. Select System Language.
Languages that support voice recognition have a voice recognition symbol. > The language in the driver display and
centre display are changed.
Related information · Overview of centre display (p. 97)
· Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
· Changing system units (p. 120)
Other settings in the centre display's top view
You can change settings and information for many of the car's functions via the centre display. 1. Open the top view by pressing on the tab
at the top or by dragging/swiping from the top downwards across the screen. 2. Press Settings to open the settings menu.
Top view with button for Settings. 3. Press on one of the categories and the
subcategories to navigate to the required setting. 4. Change one or more settings. Different types of setting are changed in different ways. > The changes are saved immediately.
120
A subcategory in the settings menu with different types of settings (here, a multi-selector button and radio buttons).
Related information · Overview of centre display (p. 97)
· Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 122)
· Table showing centre display settings
(p. 123)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Open contextual setup in the centre display
It is possible to use contextual setup for most of the car's basic apps so that you can change settings directly in the top view in the centre display.
Top view with button for contextual setting. Contextual setting is a shortcut for accessing a specific setting relating to the active function shown on screen. The apps installed in the car
from the beginning, e.g. FM radio and USB, are a part of Sensus and are part of the car's embedded functions. The settings for these apps can be changed directly via contextual setting in the top view. When contextual setup is available: 1. Drag down top view when an app is in
expanded mode, e.g. Navigation.
2. Press Navigation Settings. > A navigation settings page opens.
3. Change settings as desired and confirm the selections.
Press Close or the physical home button beneath the centre display to close setup view.
Most of the car's basic apps have this contextual setting option, but not all.
Third party apps Third party apps are not included in the car's system from the beginning, but are the type that can be downloaded e.g. Volvo ID. Here the settings are always made inside the app and not from the top view.
Related information · Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
· Overview of centre display (p. 97)
· Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 122)
· Downloading apps (p. 478)
121
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Resetting user data for change of ownership
In the event of a change of ownership, user data and system settings should be restored to factory settings. The settings in the car can be reset at different levels. Restore all user data and system settings to the original factory settings in the event of a change of ownership. In the event of a change of ownership it is also important to change the owner of the Volvo On Call* service.
Related information · Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 122)
· Resetting settings in the driver profiles
(p. 128)
Resetting settings in the centre display
It is possible to reset the defaults for all settings defined in the centre display settings menu.
Two types of reset There are two different types of restore operation in the settings menu:
· Factory reset - clears all data and files
and resets all settings to their default values.
· Reset Personal Settings - clears per-
sonal data and resets personal settings to their default values.
Resetting settings Follow these instructions to reset your settings.
NOTE
Factory reset is only possible when the car is stationary.
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.
2. Continue to System Factory reset.
3. Select the required reset type. > A pop-up window is shown.
4. Press OK to confirm the reset.
For Reset Personal Settings, the reset must be confirmed by pressing Reset for the active profile or Reset for all profiles. > Selected settings are reset.
Related information · Overview of centre display (p. 97)
· Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
· Table showing centre display settings
(p. 123)
122
* Option/accessory.
Table showing centre display settings
The settings menu in the centre display has a number of main categories and subcategories where settings and information for many of the car's functions are collected. There are seven main categories: My Car, Sound, Navigation, Media, Communication, Climate and System.
In turn, each category contains a number of subcategories and setting options. The tables below show the first level of subcategories. The setting options for a function or area are described in more detail in the corresponding section of the owner's manual.
Some settings are personal, which means that they can be saved to Driver Profiles. Other settings are global, which means they are not linked to a driver profile.
My Car
Subcategories
Displays
IntelliSafe
Drive Preferences/Individual Drive Mode*
Lights and Lighting
Mirrors and Convenience
Subcategories Locking Parking Brake and Suspension Wipers
Sound Subcategories Tone Balance System Volumes
Navigation Subcategories Map Route and Guidance Traffic
Media Subcategories AM/FM radio DAB* Gracenote®
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Subcategories TV* Video Communication Subcategories Phone Text Messages Android Auto* Apple CarPlay* Bluetooth Devices Wi-Fi Car Wi-Fi Hotspot Car Modem Internet* Volvo On Call* Volvo Service Networks Climate The main category Climate has no subcategories.
}}
* Option/accessory. 123
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
|| System Subcategories Driver Profile Date and Time System Languages and Units Privacy and Data Keyboard Layouts Voice Control* Factory reset System Information
Related information · Overview of centre display (p. 97) · Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
· Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 122)
Driver profiles
Many of the settings made in the car can be adapted according to the driver's personal preferences and can be saved in one or more driver profiles. The personal settings are automatically saved in the active driver profile. Each key can be linked to a driver profile. When the linked key is used, the car is adapted to the settings of that specific driver profile.
What settings are saved in the driver profiles? Many of the settings defined in the car will be saved automatically in the active driver profile unless the profile is protected. In the car, the settings defined are either personal or global. Only personal settings are saved in driver profiles.
Settings that can be saved in a driver profile include, amongst other things, screens, mirrors, front seats, navigation*, audio and media system, language and voice control.
Some settings, referred to as global settings, can be changed but are not saved to a specific driver profile. Changes to global settings affect all profiles.
Global settings The global settings are not changed when changing between driver profiles. They remain
the same regardless of which driver profile is active.
Keyboard layout settings are an example of global settings. If driver profile X is used to add additional languages to the keyboard, these remain available for use even if driver profile Y is used. The keyboard layout settings are not saved to a specific driver profile - the settings are global.
Personal preferences If driver profile X was used to e.g. set centre display brightness, driver profile Y is not affected by this setting. It has been saved to driver profile X - the brightness setting is a personal setting.
Related information · Selecting driver profile (p. 125)
· Renaming a driver profile (p. 125)
· Linking remote control key to driver profile
(p. 126)
· Protect driver profile (p. 126)
· Resetting settings in the driver profiles
(p. 128)
· Table showing centre display settings
(p. 123)
124
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Selecting driver profile
When the centre display has been started, the selected driver profile is shown at the top of the screen. The driver profile last used is the one that will be active next time the car is unlocked. It is possible to change to another driver profile after the car has been unlocked. However, if the remote control key has been linked to a driver profile then this is what is selected when the car is started. There are three options for changing to another driver profile.
Option 1:
1. Tap on the name of the driver profile shown in the top of the centre display when the display has been started.
> A list of selectable driver profiles is shown.
2. Select the driver profile required.
3. Press Confirm.
> The driver profile is selected and the system loads the settings for the new driver profile.
Option 2:
1. Drag down the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Profile.
> The same list as for Option 1 is shown.
3. Select the driver profile required.
4. Press Confirm. > The driver profile is selected and the system loads the settings for the new driver profile.
Option 3:
1. Drag down the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
3. Press System Driver Profiles. > A list of selectable driver profiles is shown.
4. Select the driver profile required. > The driver profile is selected and the system loads the settings for the new driver profile.
Related information · Driver profiles (p. 124)
· Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
· Renaming a driver profile (p. 125)
· Linking remote control key to driver profile
(p. 126)
Renaming a driver profile
It is possible to change the name of the different driver profiles used in the car. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2. Press System Driver Profiles.
3. Select Edit Profile. > A menu opens, where the profile can be edited.
4. Tap in the box Profile Name. > A keyboard appears, and it is possible to change the name. Tap on to close the keyboard.
5. Save the name change by pressing Back or Close. > The name has now been changed.
NOTE A profile name cannot start with a space, as the profile name will not then be saved.
Related information · Selecting driver profile (p. 125) · Keyboard in centre display (p. 114)
125
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Protect driver profile
In some cases it is preferable not to save various settings defined in the car to the active driver profile. In this case, it is possible to protect the driver profile.
NOTE
Protecting a driver profile is only possible when the car is stationary.
To protect a driver profile:
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press System Driver Profiles.
3. Select Edit Profile. > A menu opens, where the profile can be edited.
4. Select Protect Profile to protect the profile.
5. Save your profile protection option by pressing Back/Close.
> When the profile is protected, settings defined in the car will not be saved automatically to the profile. Instead, your changes must be saved manually
under Settings System Driver
Profiles Edit Profile by pressing Save current settings to the profile. When the profile is unprotected, on the other hand, your settings will be saved automatically to the profile.
Related information · Driver profiles (p. 124)
Linking remote control key to driver profile
It is possible to link your key to a driver profile. The driver profile along with all of its settings will then be automatically selected every time the car is used with that specific remote control key. The first time the remote control key is used, it is not linked to any specific driver profile. When the car is started, the Guest profile will automatically be activated.
A driver profile can be selected manually without linking it to the key. When the car is unlocked, the last active driver profile is activated. Once the key has been linked to a driver profile, a driver profile does not need to be selected when that specific key is used.
Linking a remote control key to a driver profile
NOTE
Connecting a remote control key to a driver profile is only possible when the car is stationary.
First select the profile to be linked to the key, if the profile to be linked is not already active.
126
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
The active profile can then be linked to the key.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press System Driver Profiles.
3. Select the desired profile. The display returns to the home view. The Guest profile cannot be linked to a key.
4. Drag down the top view again and tap on Settings System Driver Profiles Edit Profile.
5. Select Connect key to link the profile with the key. It is not possible to link a driver profile to a different key than the one currently being used in the car. If there are multiple keys in the car, the message More than one key is found, put the key you want to connect on backup reader will be displayed.
Related information · Driver profiles (p. 124)
· Renaming a driver profile (p. 125)
· Remote control key (p. 222)
The backup reader's location in the storage compartment.
> When the message Profile connected to key is shown, the key and the driver profile are linked.
6. Press OK. > This key is now linked to the driver profile and will remain linked as long as the Connect key box is not unticked.
127
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Resetting settings in the driver profiles
Settings that have been saved to one or more driver profiles can be reset if the car is stationary.
NOTE
Factory reset is only possible when the car is stationary.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press System Factory reset Reset Personal Settings.
3. Select one of the options Reset for the active profile, Reset for all profiles or Cancel.
Related information · Driver profiles (p. 124) · Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 122)
Message in centre display
The centre display can show messages to inform or assist the driver in the event of different events.
Example of a message in the centre display's top view. The centre display shows messages that are of lower priority for the driver. Most messages are shown above the centre display's status bar. After a while, or when any required action related to the message has been taken, the message disappears from the status bar. If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned in the top view in the centre display. Message composition may vary and they can be shown together with graphics, symbols or a button for activating/deactivating a function linked to the message.
Pop-up messages In some cases, a message is shown in the form of a pop-up window. Pop-up messages have higher priority than messages shown in the status bar and require acknowledgement/ action before they disappear.
Related information · Managing messages in the centre display
(p. 129)
· Handling a message saved from the cen-
tre display (p. 129)
· Messages in the driver display (p. 93)
128
Managing messages in the centre display
Messages in the centre display are handled in centre display views.
Example of a message in the centre display's top view. Some messages in the centre display have a button (or several buttons in pop-up messages) for e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to the message. Managing a new message For messages with buttons: Press the button to perform the action or
allow the message to close automatically after a while. > The message disappears from the sta-
tus bar.
For messages without buttons:
Close the message by tapping on it, or allow the message to close automatically after a while. > The message disappears from the status bar.
If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned in the top view in the centre display.
Related information · Message in centre display (p. 128)
· Handling a message saved from the cen-
tre display (p. 129)
· Messages in the driver display (p. 93)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Handling a message saved from the centre display
Whether saved from the driver display or the centre display, messages are managed in the centre display.
Examples of saved messages and possible options in the top view. Messages that are shown in the centre display that need to be saved are added in the top view of the centre display.
}} 129
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
|| Reading a saved message 1. Open the top view in the centre display. > A list of saved messages is shown. Messages with an arrow to the right can be maximised.
2. Tap on a message to expand/minimise. > More information on the message is shown in the list and the image to the left in the app shows information about the message graphically.
Managing a saved message Some messages have a button for e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to the message.
Press the button to perform the action.
Saved messages in the top view are deleted automatically when the car is switched off.
Related information · Message in centre display (p. 128)
· Managing messages in the centre display
(p. 129)
· Messages in the driver display (p. 93)
Voice recognition
Voice control16 allows you to control functions in the car, e.g. climate system, radio or a Bluetooth-connected phone with spoken commands. In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*, the navigation system can also be controlled with voice recognition.
What is voice control? Voice control is an aid that can facilitate the use of different commands in your car. In principle, it works like a normal application in which you enter information in a fixed sequence in order to perform a task, but instead of typing on a keyboard you use voice commands. It may therefore be a good idea to learn how, and in what order, a voice command should be spoken in order to achieve the desired result.
The voice control system allows you to control certain infotainment and climate functions using voice commands. The system can respond with speech and by showing information in the driver display.
WARNING The driver always holds overall responsibility for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and complying with all applicable rules of the road.
Voice control system microphone
System updating The voice recognition system is continuously improved. It is recommended to always have the latest version installed. Download updates at volvocars.com/support.
16 Applies to certain markets. 130
* Option/accessory.
NOTE
Not all system languages support voice recognition. The ones that do are highlighted with the symbol in the list of available system languages. Read more about where the information can be found in the section on settings for voice recognition.
Related information · Using voice recognition (p. 131)
· Controlling a telephone with voice recog-
nition (p. 133)
· Voice control of radio and media (p. 134)
· Controlling the climate control system
using voice control (p. 186)
· Settings for voice recognition (p. 134)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Using voice recognition
Start voice control17 To give commands via the voice control system, you have a "dialogue" with the system. Depress the steering wheel button for voice recog-
nition to activate the system and initiate a dialogue using voice commands. After you have pressed the button, a beep tone can be heard and the voice control symbol is shown in the driver display.
This shows that the system has started to listen and you can start to say the commands. As soon as you start to talk, the system is trained to recognise and understand your voice. This takes several seconds and is done automatically, which means that you do not need to start any voice training manually.
Remember the following:
· Speak after the tone with a normal voice
at a normal tempo.
· Do not speak while the system is replying
(the system cannot understand commands during this time).
· Avoid background noise in the passenger
compartment by having the doors, windows and panoramic roof* closed.
NOTE
Not all system languages support voice recognition. The ones that do are highlighted with the symbol in the list of available system languages. Read more about where the information can be found in the section on settings for voice recognition.
In general, the system works by listening for a basic command which is followed by more detailed commands that specify what you want the system to do.
To change the system audio volume, turn the rotary volume knob when the voice speaks. It is possible to use other buttons during voice control. However, other sounds will be silenced during dialogue with the system, which means that it is not possible to execute any functions linked with audio using the buttons.
17 Applies to certain markets.
}} * Option/accessory. 131
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
|| Cancel voice control Voice control can be cancelled in different ways:
· Tap briefly on and say "Cancel".
· Give a long press on the steering wheel
button for voice control until you hear two beeps. This stops voice recognition even when the system is speaking.
Voice control is also cancelled if you do not reply during a dialogue. The system will first ask for a reply three times and if there is still no response then voice control will be cancelled automatically.
To speed up communication and skip the prompts from the system, press the steering wheel button for voice control . This cancels the system voice and you can say the next command.
Example of voice recognition control 1. Press .
2. Say "Call [Forename] [Surname] [number category]", e.g. "Call Robin Smith Mobile".
> The system dials the selected contact from the phonebook. If the contact has several phone numbers (e.g. home, mobile, work), the right category must be referred to.
Commands/phrases The following commands can generally be used, regardless of the situation:
· "Repeat" - repeats the last voice instruc-
tion in the ongoing dialogue.
· "Cancel" - discontinue the dialogue.18
· "Help" - starts a help dialogue. The sys-
tem replies with the commands available in the current situation, a prompt or an example.
Commands for specific functions such as phone and radio are described in specific sections.
Digits The number commands are stated differently depending on the function to be controlled:
· Phone numbers and postcodes must be
spoken individually, number by number,
e.g. "zero, three, one, two, two, four, four, three" (03122443).
· House numbers can be spoken individu-
ally or in groups, e.g. "two, two" or "twenty-two" (22). For English and Dutch, several groups can be said in sequence, e.g. "twenty-two, twenty-two" (22 22). For English, double or triple can be used, e.g. "double zero" (00). Numbers can be given within the range 0-2300.
· Frequencies can be spoken as "ninety
eight point eight" (98.8), "a hundred and four point two" or "hundred four point two" (104.2).
Speed and repetition mode It is possible to adjust the speed if the system is speaking too quickly.
Repetition mode can be enabled so that the system repeats what you have said.
To change the speed or activate/deactivate repetition mode:
1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press System Voice Control and select settings.
· Repeat Voice Command
· Speech Rate
18 Note that this only stops the dialogue when the system is not speaking. To do that, give a long press on
until two beep tones are heard.
132
Related information · Voice recognition (p. 130)
· Controlling a telephone with voice recog-
nition (p. 133)
· Voice control of radio and media (p. 134)
· Controlling the climate control system
using voice control (p. 186)
· Settings for voice recognition (p. 134)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition19
Call a contact, have messages read aloud or dictate brief messages with voice control commands to a Bluetooth connected telephone. To specify a contact in the phone book, the voice recognition command must include contact information that is entered in the phone book. If a contact, e.g. Robyn Smith, has several phone numbers then the number category can also be stated, e.g. Home or Mobile: "Call Robin Smith Mobile".
Press and say one of the following commands:
· "Call [contact]" - dials the selected con-
tact from the phone book.
· "Call [phone number]" - dials the phone
number.
· "Recent calls" - displays the call list.
· "Read message" - message is read out. If
there are several messages - select which message should be read out.
· "Message to [contact]" the user is
requested to say a brief message. The message is then repeated aloud and the user can choose to send20 or revise the
message. For this function to work, the car must be connected to the Internet.
NOTE
Not all system languages support voice recognition. The ones that do are highlighted with the symbol in the list of available system languages. Read more about where the information can be found in the section on settings for voice recognition.
Related information · Voice recognition (p. 130) · Using voice recognition (p. 131) · Voice control of radio and media (p. 134) · Controlling the climate control system
using voice control (p. 186)
· Settings for voice recognition (p. 134) · Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
19 Applies to certain markets. 20 Only certain phones can send messages via the car. For information on which phones are compatible, see volvocars.com/support.
* Option/accessory. 133
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Voice control of radio and media21
Commands for radio and media player device control are shown below.
Tap on mands:
and say one of the following com-
· "Media" - starts a dialogue for media and
radio and shows examples of commands.
· "Play [artist]" - plays back music by the
selected artist.
· "Play [song title]" - plays back the
selected song.
· "Play [song title] from [album]" - plays
back the selected song from the selected album.
· "Play [radio station]" - starts playing
back the selected radio channel.
· "Tune to [frequency]" - starts the
selected radio frequency in the current frequency band. If no radio source is active, the FM band is started by default.
· "Tune to [frequency] [wavelength]" -
starts the selected radio frequency in the selected frequency band.
· "Radio" - starts FM radio.
· "Radio FM" - starts FM radio.
· "Radio AM" - starts AM radio.22
21 Applies to certain markets. 22 Availability varies depending on model and/or market. 23 Applies to certain markets.
· "DAB " - starts DAB radio*.
· "USB" - starts playback from USB.
· "iPod" - starts playback from iPod.
· "Bluetooth" - starts playback from a
Bluetooth-connected media source.
· "Similar music" -- plays back music sim-
ilar to the music currently playing back from USB devices.
NOTE
Not all system languages support voice recognition. The ones that do are highlighted with the symbol in the list of available system languages. Read more about where the information can be found in the section on settings for voice recognition.
Related information · Voice recognition (p. 130) · Using voice recognition (p. 131) · Controlling a telephone with voice recog-
nition (p. 133)
· Controlling the climate control system
using voice control (p. 186)
· Settings for voice recognition (p. 134)
Settings for voice recognition23
Settings for the voice control system are selected here.
Settings System Voice Control
Settings can be made within the following areas:
· Repeat Voice Command · Gender · Speech Rate
Audio settings Select audio settings under:
Settings Sound System Volumes Voice Control
Language settings Voice recognition is not possible for all languages. Languages available for voice recognition are marked with an icon in the language list - .
Changing the language also affects menu, message and help texts.
Settings System System Languages and Units System Language
134
* Option/accessory.
Related information · Voice recognition (p. 130)
· Using voice recognition (p. 131)
· Controlling a telephone with voice recog-
nition (p. 133)
· Controlling the climate control system
using voice control (p. 186)
· Voice control of radio and media (p. 134)
· Audio settings (p. 476)
· Changing system language (p. 120)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL 135
LIGHTING
LIGHTING
Lighting control
The different lighting controls are used to control both exterior and interior lighting. The left-hand stalk switch activates and adjusts the exterior lighting. The interior brightness is adjusted using a thumbwheel on the instrument panel. Exterior lighting
Rotating ring in the left-hand stalk switch. When the car's electrical system is in ignition position II, the following functions are available for the rotating ring's different positions:
Position Specification
Daytime running lights. Main beam flash can be used.
Daytime running lights and position lamps. Position lamps when the car is parked.A Main beam flash can be used.
Dipped beam and position lamps. Main beam can be activated. Main beam flash can be used.
Position Specification
Daytime running lights and position lamps in daylight.
Dipped beam and position lamps in weak daylight or darkness, or when the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog lamp are activated.
The Active main beam function can be activated.
Main beam can be activated when dipped beam is switched on.
Main beam flash can be used.
Active main beam on/off.
A If the car is stationary but running, the rotating ring can be
moved to
position from another position to switch
on only the position lamps instead of other lighting.
Volvo recommends that when the vehicle is driven.
mode is used
138
* Option/accessory.
WARNING The car's lighting system is not able to determine when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all situations. The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with a beam pattern suitable for the traffic situation and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations.
Thumbwheel in instrument panel
· Using direction indicators (p. 144) · Using main beam (p. 142) · Dipped beam (p. 141) · Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 145) · Rear fog lamp (p. 146) · Active bending lights* (p. 144) · Brake lights (p. 147) · Emergency brake lights (p. 147) · Hazard warning flashers (p. 147)
Thumbwheel (to left) for adjusting interior brightness.
Related information · Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 139)
· Interior lighting (p. 149) · Position lamps (p. 140)
LIGHTING
Adjusting light functions via the centre display
Several light functions can be adjusted and activated via the centre display. This applies to active main beam, home safe lighting and approach light, for example. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting.
3. Select Exterior Lights or Interior Lighting and then select the function that needs to be adjusted.
Related information · Lighting control (p. 138) · Active main beam (p. 143) · Using home safe lighting (p. 148) · Approach light duration (p. 148) · Using direction indicators (p. 144) · Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
· Function view in centre display (p. 110)
* Option/accessory. 139
LIGHTING
Adapting the headlamp pattern from the headlamps
This car does not need to reset the headlamp pattern when changing from right to lefthand traffic, and vice versa.
Related information · Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
· Function view in centre display (p. 110)
· Active bending lights* (p. 144)
Position lamps
Position lamps can be used so that other road users can see the car if it stops or is parked. The position lamp is switched on with the rotating ring on the stalk switch.
Stalk switch rotating ring in position lamps position.
Turn the rotating ring to the
position -
the position lamps are switched on (number
plate lighting is switched on at the same
time).
If the car's electrical system is in ignition position II then the daytime running lights are switched on instead of the front position lamps. When the rotating ring is in this position, the position lamps are switched on regardless of the ignition position of the car's electrical system.
If the car is stationary but running, the rotating ring can be moved to the position lamp
position from another position to switch on only the position lamps instead of other lighting.
When driving for more than 30 seconds at max. 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime running lights are switched on. The driver
should turn to a position other than
.
If the tailgate is opened when it is dark outside, the rear position lamps come on (if not already switched on) to warn road users approaching from behind. This takes place irrespective of the position of the rotating ring or the ignition position of the car's electrical system.
Related information · Lighting control (p. 138)
· Ignition positions (p. 406)
140
* Option/accessory.
Daytime running lights
The car has sensors that detect the light conditions in the surroundings. The daytime running lights are switched on when the rotating
ring on the stalk switch is in position
,
or
as well as when the car's elec-
trical system is in ignition position II. In posi-
tion
, the headlamps change automati-
cally to dipped beam in weak daylight or
darkness.
beam also takes place if the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog lamp are activated.
WARNING This system help to save energy - it cannot determine in all situations when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and rain. The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with the correct beam pattern for the traffic situation and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations.
Related information · Lighting control (p. 138) · Ignition positions (p. 406) · Dipped beam (p. 141)
Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.
If the stalk switch rotating ring is in the position, the daytime running lights (DRL1) are switched on when the car is driven in daylight. The car automatically changes lighting from daytime running light to dipped beam in weak daylight or darkness. Changing to dipped
LIGHTING
Dipped beam
When driving with the stalk switch's rotating
ring in the
position, dipped beam is
activated automatically in weak daylight or darkness or when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II.
Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.
With the stalk switch's rotating ring in position, dipped beam is also activated automatically if:
· the front fog lamps* are activated · the rear fog lamp is activated · the front and rear fog lamps are activated
With the stalk switch's rotating ring in the position, dipped beam is always acti-
1 Daytime Running Lights
}} * Option/accessory. 141
LIGHTING
|| vated when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II.
Tunnel detection
The car detects when it is driven into a tunnel and switches from daytime running lights to dipped beam.
Note that the rotating ring in the left-hand
stalk switch must be in detection to work.
mode for tunnel
Related information · Lighting control (p. 138)
· Ignition positions (p. 406)
· Daytime running lights (p. 141)
Using main beam
Main beam is operated with the left-hand stalk switch. Main beam is the car's strongest lighting and should be used when driving in the dark for better visibility, as long as it does not dazzle other road users.
main beam by moving the stalk switch forwards. Deactivate by moving the stalk switch backwards.
When main beam has been activated the symbol illuminates in the driver display.
Related information · Lighting control (p. 138) · Active main beam (p. 143)
Steering wheel stalk switch with rotating ring.
Main beam flash Move the stalk switch backwards slightly to main beam flash position. Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is released.
Main beam
Main beam can be activated when the
steering wheel stalk switch's rotating ring
is in position
2 or
. Activate
2 When dipped beam is activated. 142
LIGHTING
Active main beam
Active main beam is a function which uses a camera sensor at the top edge of the windscreen to detect the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and then switches from main beam to dipped beam.
The symbol
represents active main beam.
The function can start while driving in the dark when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h (approx. 12 mph) or higher. The function can also take streetlights into account. When the camera sensor no longer detects any oncoming car or car in front, main beam is switched on again after about a second.
Activate active main beam
Active main beam is activated and deactivated
by turning the left-hand stalk switch to posi-
tion
. The rotating ring then returns to
position
. When active main beam is
activated, the symbol
illuminates with a
white glow in the driver display. When main
beam is activated, the symbol shines blue.
If active main beam is deactivated while main beam is on, the lighting is immediately reset to dipped beam.
Active main beam does not need to be reactivated every time the car is started.
Limitations for active main beam The camera sensor on which the function is based has limitations.
If this symbol is shown in the driver
display, together with the message
Active High Beam Temporarily
unavailable, then switching
between main and dipped beam must be per-
formed manually. The
symbol extin-
guishes when these message are shown.
The same applies if this symbol is shown together with the message Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual.
Active main beam may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When active main beam becomes available again, or the windscreen sensors are no
longer blocked, the message goes out and the symbol illuminates.
WARNING Active main beam is an aid for using the optimum beam pattern when conditions are favourable. The driver always bears responsibility for manually switching between main and dipped beam when traffic situations or weather conditions so require.
Related information · Lighting control (p. 138) · Using main beam (p. 142) · Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 395)
143
LIGHTING
Using direction indicators
The car's direction indicators are operated with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator lamps flash three times or continuously, depending on how far up or down the stalk switch is moved.
Direction indicators.
Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the first position and release. The direction indicator lamps flash three times. If the function is deactivated via the centre display, the lamps will flash once.
NOTE
· This automatic flashing sequence can
be stopped by moving the stalk switch immediately in the opposite direction.
· If the symbol for direction indicators in
the driver display flashes more quickly than normal - see the message in the driver display.
Continuous flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to its end position.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is moved back manually, or automatically by the steering wheel movement.
Related information · Hazard warning flashers (p. 147)
· Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 139)
· Replacing the rear direction indicator bulb
(p. 618)
Active bending lights*
Active bending lights are designed to provide additional illumination in bends and junctions. Cars with LED3 headlamps* can have active bending lights, depending on the car's equipment level.
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right) respectively.
Active bending lights follow steering wheel movements to provide additional illumination in bends and junctions and can thereby provide the driver with improved visibility.
The function is activated automatically when the car is started. In the event of a fault in the
function, the
symbol illuminates in the
driver display at the same time as the driver
display shows an explanatory text.
3 LED (Light Emitting Diode) 144
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
The function is only active in weak daylight or darkness and only when the car is moving and dipped beam is switched on.
Deactivating/activating the function The function is activated when the car is supplied from the factory and can be deactivated/ activated via the centre display's function view.
Press the Active Bending Lights button.
Related information · Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 139)
· Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 145)
Front fog lamps/cornering lights*
The fog lights are activated manually when driving in fog and automatically when reversing in order to complement the reversing light.
If the car is fitted with cornering lights*, the fog lights come on automatically in dull daylight or darkness in order to light up the area diagonally in front of the car.
Button for front fog lamps.
The rear fog lamps can only be switched on when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II and the rotating ring on the stalk
switch is in position
,
or
.
Press the button to activate and deactivate.
The
symbol illuminates in the driver dis-
play when the front fog lamps are switched on.
The front fog lamps switch off automatically when the car is switched off or when the rotating ring on the stalk switch is set to the
position.
NOTE
Regulations on the use of fog lamps vary from country to country.
Cornering lights* The front fog lamps can include the cornering lights function, which temporarily illuminates the area diagonally in front of the car in the direction the steering wheel is turned on a sharp bend, or in the direction shown by the direction indicators.
The function is activated in weak daylight or darkness when the stalk switch's rotating ring
is in the
or
position and the speed
of the car is lower than approx. 30 km/h (approx. 20 mph).
In addition, both cornering lights are switched on as a supplement to the reversing lamp during reversing.
The function is activated when the car is supplied from the factory and can be activated and deactivated via the centre display.
}}
* Option/accessory. 145
LIGHTING
|| Related information · Lighting control (p. 138) · Ignition positions (p. 406) · Rear fog lamp (p. 146) · Active bending lights* (p. 144) · Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 139)
Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp is considerably stronger than the normal rear lights and should only be used in reduced visibility due to fog, snow, smoke or dust so that other road users have an early warning of a vehicle ahead.
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp is a lamp at the rear of the car, on the driver's side.
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when:
· ignition position II is active and the rotat-
ing ring on the stalk switch is in position
or
· the stalk switch's rotating ring is in posi-
tion
and the front fog lamps are
switched on.
Press the button to switch the lights on/off.
The
symbol in the driver display illumi-
nates when the rear fog lamp is switched on.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically when:
· the car is switched off or when the rotat-
ing ring on the stalk switch is set to the
position
· the stalk switch's rotating ring is in posi-
tion
and the front fog lamps are
switched off.
NOTE
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary from country to country.
Related information · Lighting control (p. 138)
· Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 145)
· Ignition positions (p. 406)
· Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb (p. 620)
146
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
Brake lights
The brake light automatically comes on during braking. The brake light is illuminated when the brake pedal is depressed and when the car is braked automatically by one of the driver support systems.
Related information · Emergency brake lights (p. 147)
· Brake functions (p. 409)
· Changing brake light bulb (p. 619)
· Driving support systems (p. 270)
Emergency brake lights
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert vehicles behind about heavy braking.
The function means that the brake light flashes instead of - as in normal braking shining with a constant glow. The emergency brake lights are activated during heavy braking or if the ABS system is activated at high speeds.
After the driver brakes to a low speed and then releases the brake, the brake light returns to normal glow.
The car's hazard warning flashers are activated at the same time. These flash until the driver accelerates the car to a higher speed again or switches off the car's hazard warning flashers.
Related information · Brake lights (p. 147)
· Foot brake (p. 409)
· Hazard warning flashers (p. 147)
Hazard warning flashers
Hazard warning flashers warn other road users by means of all of the car's direction indicators being activated simultaneously. The function can be used to give a warning in the event of traffic hazards.
Button for hazard warning flashers. Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers. The hazard warning flashers are automatically activated when the car brakes so powerfully that the emergency brake lights are activated and the speed is low. The hazard warning flashers start to flash after the emergency brake lights have stopped flashing and are then deactivated automatically when the car drives away again or are deactivated if the button is depressed.
}}
147
LIGHTING
||
NOTE
Regulations for the use of hazard warning flashers may vary between countries.
Related information · Emergency brake lights (p. 147)
· Using direction indicators (p. 144)
Using home safe lighting
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept switched on to work as home safe lighting after the car has been locked. To activate the function:
1. Switch off the car.
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch forward toward the instrument panel and release.
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
> A symbol in the driver display is illuminated to indicate that the function is activated and outer lighting is switched on: Position lamps, headlamp beams, number plate lighting and lighting in outer handles*.
The length of time that home safe lighting remains on can be set via the centre display.
Related information · Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 139)
· Approach light duration (p. 148)
Approach light duration
Approach lighting is switched on when the car is unlocked and is used to switch on the car's lighting at a distance. The function is activated when the remote control key is used for unlocking. In daylight, position lamps, interior roof lamps, floor lights and cargo area lighting are activated. In weak daylight or darkness, number plate lighting and lighting in the outer handles are also activated* with their light source aimed towards the ground.
The lighting stays on for approx. 2 minutes if no doors are opened. If a door is opened within the activation time, the time for the interior lighting and lighting in the outer handles* will be extended.
The function can be activated and deactivated via the centre display.
Related information · Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 139)
· Using home safe lighting (p. 148)
· Remote control key (p. 222)
148
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
Interior lighting
The passenger compartment is equipped with several types of lighting, e.g. general interior lighting, adjustable decor illumination and reading lighting. All lighting in the passenger compartment can be switched on and off manually at least 5 minutes from when:
· the car has been switched off and its elec-
trical system is in ignition position 0
· the car has been unlocked but it has not
yet been started. Front roof lighting
Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side Passenger compartment lighting
Auto function for passenger compartment lighting
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Reading lighting The reading lamps on the right and left-hand sides can be turned on and off by briefly pressing the buttons in the roof console. Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
Passenger compartment lighting The floor lighting and interior roof lighting are switched on or off with a short press on the button in the roof console.
Auto function for passenger compartment lighting The automatic function is activated by a short press on the AUTO button in the roof console. With the automatic system activated, the light indicator in the button illuminates and the passenger compartment lighting is switched on and off according to the following.
The passenger compartment lighting comes on when:
· The car is unlocked
· The car is switched off
· A side door is opened.
The passenger compartment lighting goes off when:
· The car is locked · The car is started · A side door is closed · A side door has remained open for approx.
2 minutes. Rear roof lighting* The rear area of the car has reading lighting, which is also used as passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamps above the rear seat.
}}
* Option/accessory. 149
LIGHTING
||
In cars with panoramic roof* there are two lamp units, one on each side of the roof. The reading lamps are switched on or off by briefly pressing the button on the lamp. Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
Glovebox lighting Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respectively when the lid is opened or closed. Sun visor mirror lighting* The lighting for the mirror in the sun visor is switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed. Ground lighting* The ground lighting is switched on or off when the corresponding door is opened or closed.
Lighting in the cargo area The lighting in the cargo area is switched on or off when the tailgate is opened or closed.
Decor lighting The ambient light is switched on when you open the doors and is switched off when the car is locked. The intensity of the decor lighting can be adapted in the centre display and also precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel.
Ambience lights* The car is equipped with LEDs that make it possible to change the colour of the light. These lights are switched on when the car is running. The ambience light can be adapted in the centre display and also precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel.
Lighting in storage compartments in doors The lighting in the storage compartments in the doors is switched on when you open the doors and is switched off when the car is locked. The brightness can be precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel.
Lighting in the tunnel console's front cup holder The lighting in the front cup holders is switched on when the car is unlocked and is switched off when the car is locked. The
brightness can be precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel.
Related information · Adjusting interior lighting (p. 151) · Lighting control (p. 138) · Ignition positions (p. 406) · Passenger compartment interior (p. 564)
150
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
Adjusting interior lighting
The lamps inside the car come on differently depending on the ignition position used. The interior lighting can be adjusted with a thumbwheel in the instrument panel, and certain light functions can also be adjusted via the centre display.
The thumbwheel on the instrument panel, to the left of the steering wheel, is used to adjust the brightness of the display lighting, controls lighting, ambient decor illumination and ambience light*.
Adjusting ambient decor illumination 1. Press Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting Interior Lighting.
3. Choose between the following settings:
· Under Ambient Light Intensity, select
from Off, Low and High.
· Under Ambient Light Level, select
from Reduced and Full.
Adjusting ambience light* The car is equipped with a number of LEDs that make it possible to change the colour of the light. These lights are switched on when the car is running.
Changing the brightness of the lights 1. Press Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.
3. Under Interior Mood Light Intensity, select from Off, Low and High.
Changing the colour of the light 1. Press Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.
3. Choose between By Temperature and By Colour in order to change the colour of the light.
With the By Temperature option, the light changes according to the set passenger compartment temperature.
With the By Colour option, the Theme Colours subcategory can be used to adjust further.
Related information · Interior lighting (p. 149)
· Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 139)
· Ignition positions (p. 406)
* Option/accessory. 151
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Windows, glass and mirrors
The car contains several different windows, glass panes and mirrors. Some of the windows in the car are laminated. The windscreen has laminated glass, and laminated glass is available as an option for certain other glass areas. Laminated glass is reinforced, which provides better protection against break-ins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment.
The panoramic roof* also has laminated glass.
· Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 203)
The symbol is shown on the windows where the glass is laminated.1
Related information · Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 154)
· Panoramic roof* (p. 160) · Power windows (p. 155) · Rearview and door mirrors (p. 157) · Using windscreen wipers (p. 165) · Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 168)
· Activating and deactivating the heated
windscreen* (p. 202)
1 Does not apply to the windscreen or panoramic roof* which are always laminated and thus do not have this symbol.
154
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
All power windows and sun blinds* have pinch protection which is deployed if they are blocked by any object while opening or closing. In the event of blocking, the movement stops and then reverses automatically to approx. 50 mm (approx. 2 inches) from the blocked position (or to full ventilation position). It is possible to force pinch protection when closing has been cancelled, e.g. when ice is formed, by continuing to press the control in one and the same direction. If any fault arises with the pinch protection, a reset sequence can be tested.
WARNING If the starter battery is disconnected, the automatic opening and closing function must be reset to work properly. A reset must take place for pinch protection to work.
Related information · Reset sequence for pinch protection
(p. 155)
· Operating power windows (p. 156) · Operating the panoramic roof* (p. 162)
* Option/accessory.
Reset sequence for pinch protection
If a problem occurs with the electrical functions for the electric windows, a reset sequence can be tested.
WARNING If the starter battery is disconnected, the automatic opening and closing function must be reset to work properly. A reset must take place for pinch protection to work.
In the event of problems with the panoramic roof, contact a workshop.2
Reset the power window 1. Start with the window in closed position.
2. Then operate the controls in the manual position 3 times upwards to closed position. > The system is initialised automatically.
If problems persist, contact a workshop.
Related information · Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 154)
· Operating power windows (p. 156)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Power windows
Each door has a control panel for the electrically-driven power windows. The driver's door has controls for operating all windows and also to activate the child safety locks.
Driver's door control panel. Electric child safety locks* that deactivate the controls in the rear doors to prevent doors or windows from being opened from the inside. Controls for rear windows. Controls for front windows.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts.
· Always operate the windows with cau-
tion.
· Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
· Never leave children alone in the car.
· Remember to always switch off the
power supply to the power windows by setting the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the key with you when leaving the car.
· Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's electrical system is fully disconnected.
Related information · Operating power windows (p. 156)
· Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 154)
· Reset sequence for pinch protection
(p. 155)
2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory. 155
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Operating power windows
Using the driver's door control panel, all power windows can be operated - using the control panels in the other doors operates the power window in the individual door. The power windows are equipped with pinch protection. If any fault arises with the pinch protection, a reset sequence can be tested.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts.
· Always operate the windows with cau-
tion.
· Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
· Never leave children alone in the car.
· Remember to always switch off the
power supply to the power windows by setting the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the key with you when leaving the car.
· Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's electrical system is fully disconnected.
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto. Move one of the controls gently up or down. The power windows move up or down as long as the control is held in position.
Operating with auto. Move one of the controls up or down to the end position and release it. The window runs automatically to its end position.
In order for the power windows to be used, the ignition position must be I or II. The power windows can be operated for a few minutes after the car has been switched off and after the ignition has been switched off - although not after a door has been opened. It is only possible to operate one control at a time.
It can also be operated using a remote control key or keyless opening* with the door handle.
WARNING Check that children or other passengers are not at risk of crushing when all the windows are closed with a remote control key or keyless opening* with a door handle.
NOTE One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.
NOTE The windows cannot be opened at speeds above approx. 180 km/h (approx. 112 mph), but they can be closed. The driver always bears responsibility for following traffic regulations in force.
NOTE It may not be possible to operate windows at low temperatures.
Related information · Power windows (p. 155) · Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 154)
· Reset sequence for pinch protection
(p. 155)
156
* Option/accessory.
· Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 253)
· Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 224)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Rearview and door mirrors
The rearview mirrors and door mirrors can be used to give the driver better visibility to the rear.
Interior rearview mirror The interior rearview mirror is equipped with HomeLink*, automatic dimming* and compass*.
The interior rearview mirror is adjusted by angling it manually.
Door mirrors
WARNING Both mirrors are bent to provide optimal vision. Objects may appear to be further away than they actually are.
The door mirror positions are adjusted with the joystick in the driver's door control panel.
There are also a number of automatic settings that can be linked to the memory function buttons for the power seat*.
Related information · HomeLink®* (p. 469) · Compass* (p. 473) · Adjusting rearview mirror dimming
(p. 158)
· Angling adjustment of the door mirrors
(p. 159)
· Storing a position for seat and door mir-
rors (p. 174)
· Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 203)
* Option/accessory. 157
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirrors and dazzle the driver. Use dimming when disturbed by light from behind. Manual dimming The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with a control in the mirror's lower edge.
Control for manual dimming. 1. Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment. 2. Return to normal mode by moving the
control towards the windscreen. The control for manual dimming is not available on mirrors with automatic dimming.
Automatic dimming* If bright light comes from behind, the rearview mirrors automatically dim when it is dark outside or when the light is limited, for example when driving in tunnels. Automatic dimming is always active while driving, apart from when gearbox reverse position is selected.
NOTE
When sensitivity is changed there is no immediately noticeable change in dimming, but the change takes place gradually.
Dimming sensitivity will affect both the interior rearview mirror and the door mirrors.
To change dimming sensitivity:
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press My Car Mirrors and Convenience.
3. Under Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming, select Normal, Dark or Light.
The interior rearview mirror contains two sensors - one forward facing and one rearward facing - that work together to identify and eliminate dazzling light. The forward facing sensor detects ambient light, while the rear-
ward facing sensor detects the light from vehicle headlights behind.
For the door mirrors to be equipped with automatic dimming, the interior rearview mirror must also be equipped with automatic dimming.
NOTE
If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in the seats or in the cargo area in such a way that light is prevented from reaching the sensors, then the dimming function of the interior rearview and door mirrors is reduced.
Related information · Rearview and door mirrors (p. 157)
· Angling adjustment of the door mirrors
(p. 159)
158
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Angling adjustment of the door mirrors
To ensure better visibility to the rear, the door mirrors need to be set to the preferences of the driver. There are a number of automatic settings that can also be linked to the memory function buttons for the power seat*. Using controls for door mirrors
Controls for door mirrors. The door mirror positions are adjusted with the joystick in the driver's door control panel. Ignition position must be at least I. 1. Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand door mirror. The light in the button illuminates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the centre.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light should no longer be illuminated.
Folding in rearview mirrors electrically* The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces.
1. Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously.
2. Release them after approximately 1 second. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully retracted position.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automatically stop in the extended position with the previous setting.
Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset electrically to their original position for electric retracting/ extending* to work correctly.
1. Fold in the door mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously.
2. Fold them out again by pressing the L and R buttons simultaneously.
3 Only in combination with power seat with memory buttons*.
3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors are returned to the original position.
Angling during parking3 A door mirror can be angled down for the driver to view the side of the road when parking, for example.
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R button.
Note that the button may need to be pressed twice, depending on whether it was already preselected. The button flashes when the door mirror is angled down. When reverse gear is disengaged, the door mirror automatically starts to return after approx. 3 seconds and then reaches its original position after approx. 8 seconds.
Automatic angling during parking3 With this setting, the door mirror is automatically angled down when reverse gear is selected. The folded position is preset and cannot be adjusted.
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.
2. Press My Car Mirrors and Convenience.
}}
* Option/accessory. 159
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
|| 3. Under Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse, select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to activate/deactivate and to select which review mirror should be angled.
You can make the door mirror return to its original position by pressing the L or R button twice.
Automatic retraction when locking* In the centre display, you can set all the rearview and door mirrors to retract/extend automatically when the car is locked/unlocked using the key.
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.
2. Press My Car Mirrors and Convenience.
3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to activate/deactivate.
NOTE
If you manually fold the mirrors with the L and R buttons and then lock the car, they will not fold out automatically when you unlock the car, even if this setting has been made. They must be manually folded out.
Related information · Rearview and door mirrors (p. 157)
· Adjusting rearview mirror dimming
(p. 158)
· Storing a position for seat and door mir-
rors (p. 174)
· Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 203)
Panoramic roof*
The panoramic roof is divided into two glass sections. The front section can be opened vertically at the rear edge (ventilation position) or horizontally (open position). The rear section is fixed roof glass. The panoramic roof has a wind deflector and a sun blind made of perforated fabric and located under the glass roof to provide extra protection from factors such as strong sunlight.
The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated with a control located in the roof. In order that the panoramic roof and the sun blind can be operated, the car's electrical system must be in ignition position I or II.
160
* Option/accessory.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts.
· Always operate the windows with cau-
tion.
· Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
· Never leave children alone in the car.
· Remember to always switch off the
power supply to the power windows by setting the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the key with you when leaving the car.
· Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's electrical system is fully disconnected.
IMPORTANT
· Do not open the panoramic roof when
load carriers are fitted.
· Do not place any heavy objects on the
panoramic roof.
IMPORTANT · Remove ice and snow before opening
the panoramic roof. Take care not to scratch surfaces or damage strips.
· Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
has frozen closed.
Wind deflector
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
· Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 253) · Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 224)
The panoramic roof has a wind deflector that is raised when the panoramic roof is in the open position.
Related information · Operating the panoramic roof* (p. 162)
· Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's*
sun blind (p. 164)
· Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 154)
* Option/accessory. 161
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Operating the panoramic roof*
The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated with a control in the roof panel and both are equipped with pinch protection.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts.
· Always operate the windows with cau-
tion.
· Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
· Never leave children alone in the car.
· Remember to always switch off the
power supply to the power windows by setting the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the key with you when leaving the car.
· Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's electrical system is fully disconnected.
IMPORTANT
· Do not open the panoramic roof when
load carriers are fitted.
· Do not place any heavy objects on the
panoramic roof.
IMPORTANT · Remove ice and snow before opening
the panoramic roof. Take care not to scratch surfaces or damage strips.
· Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
has frozen closed.
In order that the panoramic roof and the sun blind can be operated, the car's electrical system must be in ignition position I or II. It can also be operated using a remote control key or keyless opening* with the door handle.
WARNING Check that children or other passengers are not at risk of crushing when all the windows are closed with a remote control key or keyless opening* with a door handle.
IMPORTANT Check that the panoramic roof is properly closed when closing.
The movement of the roof is stopped if the control is released during manual operation, or when the glass reaches the comfort position4 or the maximum opening or closing position.
The movement of both panoramic roof and sun blind are also stopped if the roof control is operated again in the opposite direction to the current direction of movement.
The panoramic roof and the sun blind are also equipped with pinch protection. If any fault arises with the pinch protection, a reset sequence can be tested.
NOTE
For manual opening, the sun blind must be fully open before the panoramic roof can be opened. When the procedure is reversed, the panoramic roof must be fully closed before the sun blind can be fully closed.
NOTE
It may not be possible to operate windows at low temperatures.
4 Comfort position is a position where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving.
162
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Open and close ventilation position
Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge. Open by pressing the control upward once. Close by pressing the control downward once.
When the ventilation position is selected the front glass cover is raised at its rear edge. If the sun blind is fully closed when ventilation position is selected, then it opens automatically approx. 50 mm (approx. 2 inches). The sun blind follows automatically if the panoramic roof is closed from ventilation position.
Fully open and close the panoramic roof using the roof control
Operation, manual mode Operation, automatic mode Manual operation 1. To open the sun blind - press the control backwards to the position for manual opening. 2. Open the panoramic roof to comfort position - press the control backwards a second time to the position for manual opening. 3. Open the panoramic roof to maximum position - press the control backwards a third time to the position for manual opening. Close by repeating the preceding procedure in reverse order - press the control forward/
downward to the manual closing position instead.
Automatic operation 1. Open the sun blind to maximum position -
press the control backward to the position for automatic opening and release.
2. Open the panoramic roof to comfort position - press the control backwards a second time to the position for automatic opening and release.
3. Open the panoramic roof to maximum position - press the control backwards a third time to the position for automatic opening and release.
Close by repeating the preceding procedure in reverse order - press the control forward/ downward to the automatic closing position instead.
Automatic operation - rapid opening or closing The panoramic roof and sun blind can be opened or closed simultaneously:
To open - press the control rearward to the automatic operation position twice and release.
To close - press the control forward/ downward to the automatic operation position twice and release.
}}
163
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
|| Related information · Panoramic roof* (p. 160)
· Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's*
sun blind (p. 164)
· Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 154)
· Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 253)
· Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 224)
Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's* sun blind
With this function, the sun blind is closed automatically 15 minutes after the car has been locked if it is parked in hot weather. This is in order to lower the passenger compartment temperature and protect the car's upholstery from sun-fading. The function is deactivated when the car is supplied from the factory and can be activated or deactivated in the centre display.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press My Car Locking.
Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to activate/deactivate.
NOTE
The sun blind is also closed when all windows are closed using the remote control key or keyless opening* with a door handle.
· Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 224)
Related information · Panoramic roof* (p. 160)
· Operating the panoramic roof* (p. 162)
· Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 154)
· Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 253)
164
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Wiper blades and washer fluid
Together with the washer fluid, the wipers aim to improve visibility as well as headlamp pattern. The washer nozzles are heated* automatically in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid from freezing.
Information indicating that the washer fluid needs topping up appears in the driver display when there is approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid remaining.
Related information · Using the rain sensor (p. 166)
· Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 168)
· Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 170)
· Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 167)
· Using the rear window wiper and rear
window washer (p. 169)
· Filling washer fluid (p. 638)
· Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 637)
· Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 636)
· Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 635)
· Using windscreen wipers (p. 165)
Using windscreen wipers
The windscreen wipers are designed to clean the windscreen. Different settings for the windscreen wipers are set using the righthand stalk switch.
Right-hand stalk switch. The thumbwheel is used to set rain sensor sensitivity and wiper swipe frequency.
Single sweep Lower the stalk switch and release to make one sweep.
Windscreen wipers off Move the stalk switch to position 0 to switch off the windscreen wipers.
Intermittent wiping Move the lever up to switch the wipers to intermittent wiping. Set the number
of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel when intermittent wiping is selected.
Continuous wiping Raise the stalk switch for the wipers to sweep at normal speed.
Raise the stalk switch further for the wipers to sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers - ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the windscreen and rear window is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.
Related information · Using the rain sensor (p. 166) · Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 168)
· Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 170) }}
* Option/accessory. 165
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
· Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 165) · Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 167)
· Using the rear window wiper and rear
window washer (p. 169)
· Filling washer fluid (p. 638) · Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 637)
· Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 636)
· Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 635)
Using the rain sensor
The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen. Rain sensor sensitivity can be adjusted with the thumbwheel on the right-hand stalk switch.
Right-hand stalk switch. Rain sensor button
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
When the rain sensor is activated, the rain
sensor symbol display.
is shown in the driver
Activating the rain sensor When activating the rain sensor, the car must be running or in ignition position I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch is in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain
sensor button
.
Move the lever down to make the wipers move.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitivity and downward for lower sensitivity. An extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned upward.
Deactivating the rain sensor
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain
sensor button
or moving the stalk
switch up to another wiper program.
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in ignition position 0 or when the engine is switched off.
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically when wiper blades are set in service position. The rain sensor is reactivated when service mode has been deactivated.
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash. Deactivate the rain sensor while the car is running or when the car's electrical system is in ignition position I or II. The symbol in the driver display extinguishes.
166
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Related information · Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 168)
· Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 170)
· Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 165)
· Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 167)
· Using the rear window wiper and rear
window washer (p. 169)
· Filling washer fluid (p. 638)
· Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 637)
· Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 636)
· Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 635)
· Using windscreen wipers (p. 165)
Activating and deactivating the rain sensor's memory function
The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen. When the memory function is activated, the rain sensor button does not need to be pressed every time the vehicle is started:
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.
2. Press My Car Wipers.
3. Select Rain Sensor Memory to activate/ deactivate the memory function.
Related information · Using the rain sensor (p. 166)
· Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 168)
· Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 170)
· Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 165)
· Using the rear window wiper and rear
window washer (p. 169)
· Filling washer fluid (p. 638)
· Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 637)
· Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 636)
· Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 635)
· Using windscreen wipers (p. 165)
167
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
Windscreen and headlamp washers are designed to clean the windscreen and headlamps. Windscreen and headlamp washers are started using the right-hand stalk switch. Starting windscreen and headlamp washers
Washing function, right-hand stalk switch. Move the right-hand stalk switch toward
the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers. > The windscreen wipers will make sev-
eral more sweeps once the stalk switch has been released.
IMPORTANT
Avoid activating the washer system when it is frozen or the washer reservoir is empty, otherwise there is a risk of damaging the pump.
Headlamp washing* To save fluid, the headlamps are washed automatically at a defined interval when the headlamps are switched on.
Reduced washing
If only approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid remains in the reservoir and the message Washer fluid Level low, refill, together with
the
symbol, is shown in the driver dis-
play, then the supply of washer fluid to the
headlamps is switched off. This is to prioritise
cleaning the windscreen and the visibility
through it. The headlamps are only washed if
main or dipped beam is switched on.
Related information · Using the rain sensor (p. 166)
· Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 170)
· Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 165)
· Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 167)
· Using the rear window wiper and rear
window washer (p. 169)
· Filling washer fluid (p. 638)
· Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 637)
· Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 636)
· Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 635)
· Using windscreen wipers (p. 165)
168
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Using the rear window wiper and rear window washer
The rear window wiper and rear window washer are designed to clean the rear window. Washing/wiping is started and settings are changed by means of the right-hand steering wheel stalk switch.
Activating the rear window wiper and rear window washer
NOTE
The rear window wiper motor is equipped with overheating protection which means that it is switched off if it overheats. The rear window wiper works again after a cooling-down period.
· Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 637)
· Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 636)
· Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 635)
· Using windscreen wipers (p. 165)
Select
for intermittent wiping with
the rear window wiper.
Select
for continuous speed with the
rear window wiper.
Move the right-hand steering wheel stalk switch forward to start rear window
washing and wiping.
Related information · Using the rain sensor (p. 166)
· Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 168)
· Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 170)
· Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 167)
· Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 165)
· Filling washer fluid (p. 638)
169
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wipers are switched on initiates rear window wiping. The function stops when reverse gear is disengaged. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display.
2. Press My Car Wipers.
3. Select Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deactivate wiping when reversing.
If the rear windscreen wiper is already operating at a constant speed then no change takes place when reverse gear is engaged.
Related information · Using the rain sensor (p. 166)
· Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 168)
· Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 165)
· Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 167)
· Using the rear window wiper and rear
window washer (p. 169)
· Filling washer fluid (p. 638)
· Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 637)
· Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 636)
· Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 635)
· Using windscreen wipers (p. 165)
170
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Manual front seat
The car's front seats have a range of setting options in order to enhance comfort.
Raise/lower the seat by means of pumping the lever up/down.
Change the backrest inclination by turning the control knob.
· Storing a position for seat and door mir-
rors (p. 174)
· Using a stored position for seat and door
mirrors (p. 175)
· Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 176)
· Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 176)
Adjust the seat forward/backward by lifting the handle and adjusting the distance to the steering wheel and pedals. Check that the seat is locked after the position has been adjusted.
Change the length* of the seat cushion by pulling the lever up and moving the seat cushion forward/backward by hand.
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cushion* by pumping up/down.1
Change the lumbar support* by pressing the button upward/downward/forward/ back.
You can manually adjust the height of the head restraints by pressing in the button.
WARNING Adjust the position of the driver's seat before setting off, never while driving. Make sure that the seat is in locked position in order to avoid personal injury in the event of heavy braking or an accident.
Related information · Power* front seat (p. 173) · Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 173)
1 Only applies to the driver's seat.
172
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Power* front seat
The car's front seats have a range of setting options in order to enhance comfort. The power seat can be moved forwards/backwards and upwards/downwards. The front edge of the seat cushion can be raised/ lowered and the backrest inclination can be changed. The lumbar support* can be adjusted upwards/downwards/forwards/ backwards. Seat cushion length is adjusted manually*. Seat setup can take place when the engine is running and within a certain time after unlocking the door without the engine running. Adjustment can also be performed within a certain time after the engine has been switched off.
IMPORTANT
The power seats have overload protection that is triggered if any seat is blocked by an object. If this happens, remove the object and then move the seat again.
Related information · Manual front seat (p. 172)
· Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 173)
· Storing a position for seat and door mir-
rors (p. 174)
· Using a stored position for seat and door
mirrors (p. 175)
· Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 176)
· Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 176)
Adjusting the power* front seat
Set to desired sitting position using the control on the front seat's seating section. Activate the lumbar support* by pressing the four-way control.
Activate and use the lumber support control by pressing the four-way control up/ down/forwards/back. Raise/lower the seat cushion front edge by adjusting the control up/down. Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting the control up/down. Move the seat forward/backward by adjusting the control forward/backward. Change the backrest inclination by adjusting the control forward/backward. Only one movement (forward/back/up/down) can be made at a time.
}}
* Option/accessory. 173
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
|| The backrests of the front seats cannot be lowered fully forward.
You can manually adjust the height of the head restraints by pressing in the button. Related information
· Manual front seat (p. 172) · Power* front seat (p. 173) · Storing a position for seat and door mir-
rors (p. 174)
· Using a stored position for seat and door
mirrors (p. 175)
· Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 176)
· Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 176)
Storing a position for seat and door mirrors
You can store the position for power* seat and door mirrors in the memory buttons. Store two different positions for the power seat* and the door mirrors using the memory buttons. The buttons are located on the inside of one of the front doors or both*.
Button M for storing settings. Memory button. Memory button. Storing a position 1. Adjust seat and door mirrors to the desired position.
2. Press and hold the M button depressed. The light indicator in the button illuminates.
3. Within three seconds, press and hold the 1 or 2 button.
> When the position has been stored in the selected memory button, an acoustic signal can be heard and the light indicator in the M button extinguishes.
If none of the memory buttons is depressed within three seconds then the M button extinguishes and no storing takes place.
The seat or the door mirrors must be readjusted before a new memory can be set.
Related information · Manual front seat (p. 172)
· Power* front seat (p. 173)
· Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 173)
· Using a stored position for seat and door
mirrors (p. 175)
· Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 176)
· Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 176)
· Angling adjustment of the door mirrors
(p. 159)
174
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Using a stored position for seat and door mirrors
If the positions for the power* seat and the door mirrors have been stored, they can be activated by using the memory buttons. Using a stored setting
A stored setting can be used with the front door either open or closed: Open front door Depress one of the memory buttons 1 ( )
or 2 ( ) with a short press. Power seat and door mirrors move and then stop at the positions stored in the selected memory button.
Closed front door Hold one of the memory buttons 1 ( ) or
2 ( ) depressed until seat and door mirrors stop in the positions that are stored in the selected memory button.
If the memory button is released, the movement of the seat and door mirrors will be stopped.
WARNING
· Because the driver's seat can be
adjusted with the ignition off, children should never be left unattended in the vehicle.
· Movement of the seat can be STOP-
PED at any time by pressing any button on the power seat control panel.
· Do not adjust the seat while driving.
· Make sure there is nothing under the
seats when they are being adjusted.
Related information · Manual front seat (p. 172)
· Power* front seat (p. 173)
· Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 173)
· Storing a position for seat and door mir-
rors (p. 174)
· Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 176)
· Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 176)
· Angling adjustment of the door mirrors
(p. 159)
* Option/accessory. 175
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat
For increased comfort, you can adjust the length of the seat cushion.
· Using a stored position for seat and door
mirrors (p. 175)
· Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 176)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat
The lumbar support is adjusted using a control on the side of the seat cushion.
Control for seat cushion adjustment. 1. Grip the handle on the front of the seat
and pull upwards. 2. Adjust the length of the seat cushion. 3. Release the handle and make sure that the
seat cushion has reached the correct position. Related information
· Manual front seat (p. 172) · Power* front seat (p. 173) · Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 173) · Storing a position for seat and door mir-
rors (p. 174)
176
Four-way button, located on the side of the seat's seating section. The four-way lumbar support is adjusted using the four-way button (the round one) which is located on the side of the seat's seating section. The lumbar support can be adjusted forwards/backwards and upwards/downwards.
* Option/accessory.
Adjusting the lumbar support
· Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 176)
· Press the four-way button up /down
to move the lumbar support upwards/ downwards.
· Press the front section of the four-way
button to increase lumbar support.
· Press the rear section of the four-way
button to decrease lumbar support.
Related information · Manual front seat (p. 172)
· Power* front seat (p. 173)
· Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 173)
· Storing a position for seat and door mir-
rors (p. 174)
· Using a stored position for seat and door
mirrors (p. 175)
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
The rear seat's backrest is divided into two parts. The two parts can be folded forward individually.
WARNING · Adjust the seat and fix it before driving
away. Take care when adjusting the seat. Uncontrolled or careless adjustment can lead to trapping injuries.
· When loading long objects, they must
always be strapped in securely to avoid injury and damage during sudden braking.
· Always switch off the engine and apply
the parking brake when loading and unloading the car.
· For cars with automatic gearbox, set
the gear selector in P to prevent it from being moved by mistake.
IMPORTANT There must be no objects on the rear seat when the backrest is to be folded down. The seat belts must not be connected either. Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the rear seat upholstery.
}}
* Option/accessory. 177
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
||
IMPORTANT
The armrest* for the centre seat must be raised before lowering the seat.
Through-load hatch* in the rear seat must be closed before lowering.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted upwards, in order that the rear backrests can be fully folded forward.
Lowering the backrest To facilitate folding of the rear seat, the car must be stationary and at least one rear door open.
Ensure that there are no occupants or objects in the rear seat.
Lower the centre seat's head restraint manually.
Pull the handles located on the car's left and right-hand backrests forwards to fold down the left and right-hand part of the rear seat respectively.
3. The backrest disengages from the lock and needs to be lowered manually to the horizontal position.
Raising the backrest Raising the backrest to upright position is carried out manually:
1. Move the backrest up/back.
2. Press the backrest until the lock engages.
3. Raise the head restraints manually.
4. If necessary, raise the centre seat's head restraint.
WARNING When the backrest has been raised, the red indicator should no longer be showing. If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place.
WARNING Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seat are locked properly after being folded up. The head restraints of the outer seats must always be raised when there are passengers on any of the rear seats.
Related information · Adjusting the head restraints in the rear
seat (p. 179)
· Private locking (p. 263) · Activating and deactivating private locking
(p. 263)
178
* Option/accessory.
Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat
Adjust the centre seat head restraint according to the height of the passenger. Fold down the outer seat head restraints* to improve rearward visibility.
Adjust the head restraint for the centre seat
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
The centre seat's head restraint must be adjusted according to the passenger's height so that, if possible, the whole of the back of the head is covered. Slide it up manually as required.
To lower the head restraint, the button (see illustration) must be depressed while the restraint is carefully moved down.
WARNING The centre seat head restraint must be in its lowest position when the centre seat is not used. When the centre seat is used, the head restraint must be correctly adjusted to the height of the passenger so that it covers the whole of the back of the head if possible.
Fold down the rear seat's outer head restraints via the centre display* The outer head restraints can be retracted via the centre display's function view. You can lower the head restraints in ignition position 0.
Press the Headrest Fold button to activate/deactivate lowering.
Move the head restraint back manually until a click is heard.
WARNING Do not lower the outer head restraints if there are passengers in any of the outer rear seats.
WARNING The head restraint must be in locked position after being folded up.
}}
* Option/accessory. 179
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
|| Related information · Lowering the backrests in the rear seat (p. 177)
Steering wheel controls and horn
The steering wheel houses the horn and controls for e.g. the driver support systems and voice control.
Horn
Keypads and paddles* in the steering wheel. Controls for driver support systems.2
Paddle shifter* for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox. Controls for voice control and menu, message and phone handling.
The horn is located in the centre of the steering wheel.
Related information · Steering lock (p. 181) · Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 181)
2 Speed Limiter, Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Warning* and Pilot Assist. 180
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Steering lock
The steering wheel lock makes it difficult to steer the car if it is stolen, for example. A mechanical noise can be perceived when the steering lock is locked or unlocked.
Activating the steering lock The steering lock is activated when the car is locked from the outside and the engine is switched off. If the car is left unlocked then the steering lock will be activated automatically after a while.
Deactivating the steering lock The steering lock is deactivated when the car is unlocked from outside. If the car is not locked, the steering wheel lock will be deactivated as long as the remote control key is in the passenger compartment and the car is started.
Related information · Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 180)
· Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 181)
Adjusting the steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted in different positions.
The steering wheel can be adjusted for height and for depth.
WARNING Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before driving away. The steering wheel must never be adjusted while driving.
Lever for steering wheel adjustment.
1. Push the lever forwards to release the steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you.
3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press or raise the steering wheel slightly at the same time as you move the lever back.
Related information · Steering lock (p. 181)
· Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 180)
· Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 173)
· Speed-dependent steering force (p. 270)
* Option/accessory. 181
CLIMATE
CLIMATE
Climate
The car is equipped with electronic climate control. The climate control system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment. All climate control system functions are controlled from the centre display and physical buttons in the centre console.
Some functions for the rear seat can also be controlled from the climate controls* at the rear of the tunnel console.
NOTE
If necessary, the climate control can be used to cool the media system in the centre display. In these cases, the message Climate system Cooling the infotainment system is shown in the driver display.
Related information · Climate zones (p. 184) · Climate control - sensors (p. 185) · Perceived temperature (p. 186) · Controlling the climate control system
using voice control (p. 186)
· Parking climate* (p. 207) · Heater* (p. 215) · Air quality (p. 187)
· Air distribution (p. 190) · Climate controls (p. 195)
184
Climate zones
The number of climate zones that the car is divided into governs the options for setting different temperatures for different parts of the passenger compartment. 1-zone climate
Climate zones with 1-zone climate. With 1-zone climate, the temperature in the passenger compartment is set jointly for the left and right-hand sides.
* Option/accessory.
2-zone climate*
CLIMATE
Climate control - sensors
The climate control system has a number of sensors to help control the climate in the car. Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.
Sensor location
Related information · Climate (p. 184)
· Interior Air Quality System* (p. 189)
Climate zones with 2-zone climate.
With 2-zone climate, the temperature in the passenger compartment can be set separately for the left and right-hand sides.
Related information · Climate (p. 184)
Sun sensor - on the upper side of the instrument panel.
Moisture sensor - in the casing by the interior rearview mirror.
Outside temperature sensor - in the righthand door mirror.
Temperature sensor for the passenger compartment - by the physical buttons in the centre console.
With the Interior Air Quality System* there is also an air quality sensor that is fitted into the climate control system air intake.
* Option/accessory. 185
CLIMATE
Perceived temperature
The climate control system regulates the climate in the passenger compartment based on the perceived temperature, not on actual temperature. The temperature you select in the passenger compartment corresponds to the physically perceived temperature as affected by factors such as the ambient temperature, air speed, humidity, solar radiation, etc. in and around the car at the time. The system includes a sun sensor which detects on which side the sun is shining into the passenger compartment. This means that the temperature can differ between the right and left-hand side's air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on both sides. Related information
· Climate (p. 184)
1 Applies to certain markets.
Controlling the climate control system using voice control1
Commands for voice control of the climate control system in order to e.g. change temperature, activate a heated seat* or change fan level.
Tap on mands:
and say one of the following com-
· "Climate" - starts a dialogue for climate
control and shows examples of commands.
· "Set temperature to X degrees" - sets
the desired temperature.
· "Raise temperature"/"Lower
temperature" - raise/lower the temperature setting one step.
· "Sync temperature" - synchronises the
temperature* for all climate zones in the car with the temperature set for the driver's side.
· "Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the
desired air flow.
· "Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" -
closes the desired air flow.
· "Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" -
changes the air flow to Max/Off.
· "Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" -
raises/lowers the fan level one step.
· "Turn on auto" - activates automatic cli-
mate regulation.
· "Air condition on"/"Air condition off" -
activates/deactivates the air conditioning.
· "Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" -
activates/deactivates the air circulation.
· "Turn on defroster "/"Turn off
defroster" - activates/deactivates defrosting of windows and door mirrors.
· "Turn on max defroster"/"Turn max
defroster off" - activates/deactivates the max defroster.
· "Turn on electric defroster"/"Turn off
electric defroster" - activates/deactivates the heated windscreen*.
· "Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear
defroster" - activates/deactivates the heated rear window and door mirrors.
· "Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn
steering wheel heat off" - activates/ deactivates the heated steering wheel*.
· "Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower
steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the setting for the heated steering wheel* one step.
186
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
· "Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat"
- activates/deactivates the heated seat*.
· "Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" -
raises/lowers the setting for the heated seat* one step.
NOTE
Not all system languages support voice recognition. The ones that do are highlighted with the symbol in the list of available system languages. Read more about where the information can be found in the section on settings for voice recognition.
Related information · Climate (p. 184) · Voice recognition (p. 130) · Using voice recognition (p. 131) · Settings for voice recognition (p. 134)
Air quality
The materials selected for the passenger compartment and the air cleaning system ensure that the air quality in the passenger compartment is high.
Materials in the passenger compartment The interior of the passenger compartment is designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.
Tested materials have been developed in order to reduce the quantity of dust in the passenger compartment and to contribute to making the passenger compartment easier to keep clean.
The carpets in both the passenger compartment and the cargo area are removable and easy to remove and clean.
Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo to clean the interior.
Air cleaning system In addition to the passenger compartment filter, the car is equipped with an air cleaning system that helps to maintain high air quality in the passenger compartment.
Related information · Climate (p. 184)
· CleanZone* (p. 188)
· Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 188) · Interior Air Quality System* (p. 189) · Passenger compartment filter (p. 190)
* Option/accessory. 187
CLIMATE
CleanZone*
The CleanZone function checks and indicates whether or not all conditions have been met for good air quality in the passenger compartment.
The indicator is visible in the climate view in the centre display. The indicator is visible in the climate row when the climate view is not open. If the conditions have not been met then the Clean Zone text is white. When all conditions have been met, this is indicated by the text changing colour to blue. Conditions that need to be met:
· That all doors and the tailgate are closed. · That all side windows and the panoramic
roof* are closed.
· That the air quality system Interior Air
Quality System* is activated.
· That the ventilation fan is activated. · That the air recirculation is deactivated.
NOTE CleanZone does not indicate that the air quality is good. It only indicates that the conditions for good air quality have been met.
Related information · Air quality (p. 187) · Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 188) · Interior Air Quality System* (p. 189) · Passenger compartment filter (p. 190)
Clean Zone Interior Package*
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) comprises a series of modifications that keep the passenger compartment even clearer from allergy and asthma-inducing substances, among other things. The following is included:
· An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is unlocked with the remote control key. The fan fills the passenger compartment with fresh air. The function starts when required and is disengaged automatically after a time or when one of the passenger compartment doors is opened. The amount of time the fan runs is reduced gradually due to reduced need up until the car is 4 years old.
· The fully automatic air quality system
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS).
Related information · Air quality (p. 187)
· CleanZone* (p. 188)
· Interior Air Quality System* (p. 189)
· Passenger compartment filter (p. 190)
188
* Option/accessory.
Interior Air Quality System*
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully automatic air quality system that separates gases and particles to reduce the levels of odours and contaminants in the passenger compartment. IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) and cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone.
If the air quality sensor senses that the outside air is contaminated, the air intake is closed and air recirculation is activated.
NOTE
The air quality sensor must always be enabled to ensure the best air in the passenger compartment.
In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as to prevent misting.
In the event of misting, the defrost functions for windscreen, side windows and rear window should be used.
Related information · Activating and deactivating the air quality
sensor* (p. 189)
· Air quality (p. 187)
· CleanZone* (p. 188)
· Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 188) · Passenger compartment filter (p. 190)
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating the air quality sensor*
The air quality sensor is part of the fully automatic air quality system Interior Air Quality System (IAQS). It is possible to set whether the air quality sensor should be activated/deactivated. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the cen-
tre display. 2. Press Climate. 3. Select Air Quality Sensor to activate/
deactivate the air quality sensor. Related information
· Interior Air Quality System* (p. 189)
* Option/accessory. 189
CLIMATE
Passenger compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compartment is cleaned with a filter.
Replacing the passenger compartment filter To maintain high climate system performance, the filter must be changed at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the recommended replacement intervals. If the car is used in a severely contaminated environment, it may be necessary to replace the filter more often.
NOTE
There are different types of passenger compartment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.
Related information · Air quality (p. 187)
· CleanZone* (p. 188)
· Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 188)
· Interior Air Quality System* (p. 189)
Air distribution
The climate control system distributes the incoming air via a number of different vents in the passenger compartment.
Automatic and manual air distribution With auto-regulated climate running the air distribution takes place automatically. If necessary, the air distribution can be controlled manually.
Adjustable air vents Some of the air vents in the car are adjustable, which means that you can open/close the vent to aim the air flow.
Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger compartment.
With 1-zone climate - four on the instrument panel. Addition with 2-zone climate* - two at the rear of the tunnel console.
NOTE At low ambient temperatures, no air is distributed from the adjustable air vents on the rear of the tunnel console.
Related information · Climate (p. 184) · Changing air distribution (p. 191) · Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 191)
· Table of air distribution options (p. 192)
190
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Changing air distribution
The air distribution can be changed manually if required.
1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row.
The air distribution buttons in the climate view. Air distribution - windscreen defroster vents Air distribution - air vents in instrument panel and centre console Air distribution - air vents in the floor
2. Press one or more of the air distribution buttons in order to open/close the corresponding air flow. > The air distribution is changed and the buttons illuminate/extinguish.
Related information · Air distribution (p. 190) · Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 191)
· Table of air distribution options (p. 192)
Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
Some air vents in the passenger compartment can be opened, closed and aimed individually. If the car's outer vents are aimed at the side windows then misting can be eliminated.
If the car's outer vents are aimed inwards then, in a hot climate, a comfortable environment is obtained in the passenger compartment.
Opening and closing the air vents Turn the rotary knob in the middle of the
air vent to open/close the air flow from the vent.
The air flow is at maximum when the marking on the knob is in vertical position.
Aiming the air vents Move the lever in the middle of the air vent
horizontally/vertically to direct the air flow from the vent.
Related information · Air distribution (p. 190)
· Changing air distribution (p. 191)
· Table of air distribution options (p. 192)
191
CLIMATE
Table of air distribution options
The air distribution can be changed manually if required. The following options are available for setting.
Air distribution
Purpose
If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system returns to automatically regulated climate control.
Main air flow from the defroster vents. Some air flows from other air vents.
Counteracts misting and icing in a cold and humid climate (to achieve this, fan level must not be low).
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows Provides efficient cooling in a hot climate. from other air vents.
Main air flow from the air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other Provides heat or cooling to the floor. air vents.
192
CLIMATE
Air distribution
Main air from the defroster vents and air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows from other air vents.
Purpose Provides good comfort in hot and dry climates.
Main air flow from the defroster vents and air vents at the floor. Some Provides good comfort and good demisting in a cold or
air flows from other air vents.
humid climate.
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at Provides good comfort in sunny weather with cool out-
the floor. Some air flows from other air vents.
door temperatures.
Main air flow from the defroster vents, from the air vents in the instru- Gives balanced comfort in the passenger compart-
ment panel and air vents at the floor.
ment.
}} 193
CLIMATE || Related information
· Air distribution (p. 190) · Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 191)
· Changing air distribution (p. 191)
194
Climate controls
The climate control system's functions are controlled from physical buttons in the centre console, the centre display and the climate controls at the rear of the tunnel console*.
Physical buttons in centre console
CLIMATE
Depending on equipment level, the climate view can be divided into several tabs. Change between the tabs by swiping left/right or by pressing the respective heading.
Button for heated windscreen* and max defroster.
Button for heated rear window and door mirrors.
Climate row in centre display The most common climate functions can be regulated from the climate row.
Climate row with 2-zone climate. Climate row with 1-zone climate has some differences regarding the location of the controls.
Temperature controls for driver and passenger side.2
Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver and front passenger seat, as well as heated steering wheel*.3
Button for access to the climate view. The graphic on the button shows activated climate settings.
Climate view in centre display Open climate view by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row.
2 With 1-zone climate, the control is to the right of the centre button. 3 With 1-zone climate, the buttons are located to the far left and right in the climate row.
}} * Option/accessory. 195
CLIMATE
|| Main climate In addition to the climate row's functions, other main climate functions can also be controlled in the Main climate tab.
Max, Electric, Rear - Controls for defrosting the windows and door mirrors. AC - Controls for air conditioning. Recirc - Controls for air recirculation. Controls for air distribution.
Fan control.
AUTO - Auto regulating the climate.
Parking climate* The car's parking climate control can be regulated in the Parking climate tab.
Climate controls at rear of tunnel console* If the car is equipped with heated rear seats* there are physical buttons at the rear of the tunnel console for controlling this function.
Related information · Climate (p. 184)
· Activating and deactivating heated front
seat* (p. 197)
· Activating and deactivating heated rear
seat* (p. 198)
· Activating and deactivating the heated
steering wheel* (p. 198)
· Activating auto climate control (p. 199)
· Activating and deactivating air recircula-
tion (p. 200)
· Activating and deactivating max defroster
(p. 201)
· Activating and deactivating the heated
windscreen* (p. 202)
· Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 203)
· Regulating fan level for front seat (p. 204)
· Synchronising temperature (p. 206)
· Activating and deactivating air condition-
ing (p. 206)
196
* Option/accessory.
Activating and deactivating heated front seat*
The seats can be heated in order to increase comfort for driver and passengers when it is cold.
1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering wheel and seat button in the climate row in the centre display in order to open the controls for seat and steering wheel. If the car is not equipped with ventilated seats or heated steering wheel (for the driver's side), the button for heated seats is immediately available in the climate row.
WARNING Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats.
Related information · Climate controls (p. 195) · Activating and deactivating automatic
start of heated front seat* (p. 197)
2. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows the set level.
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated front seat*
The seats can be heated in order to increase comfort for driver and passengers when it is cold. It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated seats should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start in the event of low ambient temperature.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Auto Driver Seat Heating Level and Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level to activate/deactivate automatic start of heated driver's and passenger seat. > An "A" is shown at each button for heated front seats in the climate row when automatic starting has been activated.
4. Select Low, Medium or High to select level after the function has been activated.
Related information · Climate controls (p. 195)
· Activating and deactivating heated front
seat* (p. 197)
* Option/accessory. 197
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating heated rear seat*
The seats can be heated in order to increase comfort for driver and passengers when it is cold.
Activating and deactivating the heated rear seat from the rear seat
WARNING Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats.
Related information · Climate controls (p. 195)
Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel*
The steering wheel can be heated in order to increase comfort for the driver when it is cold.
1. Press the driver's side steering wheel and seat button in the climate row of the centre display in order to open the controls for seat and steering wheel. If the car is not equipped with heated seats or ventilated seats, the button for heated steering wheel is immediately available in the climate row.
Buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel console.
Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand side's physical buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel console to switch between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the LEDs in the button show the set level.
2. Repeatedly press the button for heated steering wheel in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows the set level.
Related information · Climate controls (p. 195)
· Activating and deactivating automatic
start of heated steering wheel* (p. 199)
198
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated steering wheel*
The steering wheel can be heated in order to increase comfort for the driver when it is cold. It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated steering wheel should be activated/ deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start in the event of low ambient temperature.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Auto Steering Wheel Heating Level to activate/deactivate automatic start of heated steering wheel.
> An "A" is shown at the button for heated steering wheel in the climate row when automatic starting has been activated.
4. Select Low, Medium or High to select level after the function has been activated.
Related information · Activating and deactivating the heated
steering wheel* (p. 198)
Activating auto climate control
With auto climate control activated, multiple climate functions are controlled automatically.
1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row.
2. Give a short or long press on AUTO Climate.
· Short press - air recirculation, air condi-
tioning and air distribution are controlled automatically.
· Long press - air recirculation, air condi-
tioning and air distribution are controlled automatically, temperature and fan speed are changed to standard settings: 22 °C (72 °F) and level 3. > Auto-regulation of the climate is activated and the button illuminates.
NOTE
Temperature and fan speed can be changed without deactivating the automatically-regulated climate control system. The automatically-regulated climate control system is deactivated when the air distribution is changed manually or when maximum defroster is activated.
Related information · Climate controls (p. 195)
* Option/accessory. 199
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating air recirculation
Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate control system reusing the air in the passenger compartment.
Related information · Climate controls (p. 195)
· Activating and deactivating time setting
for air recirculation (p. 200)
1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row.
2. Press Recirc. > Air recirculation is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
IMPORTANT If the air in the car is recirculated for too long then there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.
NOTE It is not possible to activate air recirculation when max defroster is activated.
Activating and deactivating time setting for air recirculation
Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate control system reusing the air in the passenger compartment. It is possible set whether the air recirculation timer should be activated/deactivated. When the timer is activated, air recirculation is automatically switched off after 20 minutes.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Recirculation Timer to activate/ deactivate the air recirculation timer.
Related information · Activating and deactivating air recircula-
tion (p. 200)
200
Activating and deactivating max defroster
Max defroster is used to quickly remove mist and ice from windows. Max defroster deactivates auto-regulation of the climate and air recirculation, activates air conditioning and changes the fan level to 5 and the temperature to HI.
NOTE
Changing the fan level to 5 increases the noise level.
When max defroster is deactivated, the climate control system returns to the previous settings.
Activating and deactivating max defroster from centre console There is a physical button in the centre console for quick access to max defroster.
With heated windscreen* the max defroster can only be activated individually from the climate view in the centre display.
Physical button in the centre console.
Cars without heated windscreen:
Press the button. > Max defroster is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Cars with heated windscreen:
Press the button repeatedly in order to switch between the three levels:
· Activated heated windscreen
· Activated heated windscreen and max
defroster
· Deactivated.
> Heated windscreen and max defroster are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
CLIMATE
NOTE Max defroster starts with a certain delay in order to avoid a short increase in fan level if the heated windscreen is deactivated by two quick presses of the button.
Activating and deactivating max defroster from centre display
1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row.
2. Press Max. > Max defroster is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Related information · Climate controls (p. 195)
* Option/accessory. 201
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen*
A heated windscreen is used to quickly remove mist and ice from the window. Activating and deactivating heated windscreen from centre console In the centre console is a physical button for rapid access to the heated windscreen.
Physical button in the centre console. Press the button repeatedly in order to
switch between the three levels:
· Activated heated windscreen · Activated heated windscreen and max
defroster
· Deactivated.
> Heated windscreen and max defroster are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Activating and deactivating heated windscreen from centre display
1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row.
NOTE
If the heated windscreen is activated when the Start/Stop function has auto-stopped the engine then the engine will be restarted.
Related information · Climate controls (p. 195) · Activating and deactivating automatic
start of heated windscreen* (p. 203)
2. Press Electric. > Heated windscreen is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
NOTE
A triangular area at the end of each side of the windscreen is not electrically heated, where de-icing may take longer.
NOTE
The heated windscreen may affect the performance of transponders and other communication equipment.
202
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated windscreen*
A heated windscreen is used to quickly remove mist and ice from the window. It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated windscreen should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start when there is a risk of ice or misting on the windscreen/window. The heating switches off automatically when the windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the ice or misting is gone.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Auto Front Defroster to activate/ deactivate automatic start of heated windscreen.
Related information · Activating and deactivating the heated
windscreen* (p. 202)
Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors
The heated rear window and door mirrors are used to quickly remove mist and ice from the windows and mirrors. Activating and deactivating heated rear window and door mirrors from centre console In the centre console is a physical button for rapid access to the heated rear window and door mirrors.
Physical button in the centre console. Press the button.
> Heated rear window and door mirrors are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Activating and deactivating heated rear window and door mirrors from centre display
1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row.
2. Press Rear. > Heated rear window and door mirrors are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Related information · Climate controls (p. 195) · Activating and deactivating automatic
starting of the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 204)
* Option/accessory. 203
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating automatic starting of the heated rear window and door mirrors
The heated rear window and door mirrors are used to quickly remove mist and ice from the windows and mirrors. It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated rear window and door mirrors should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start when there is a risk of ice or misting on the windscreen/window. The heating switches off automatically when the windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the ice or misting is gone.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Auto Rear Defroster to activate/ deactivate automatic start of heated rear window and door mirrors.
Related information · Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 203)
Regulating fan level for front seat4
The fan can be set to several different automatically controlled fan speeds for the front seat.
1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row.
Fan control buttons in the climate view.
2. Tap on the desired fan level, Off, 1-5 or Max. > Fan level is changed and the buttons for the selected level illuminate.
IMPORTANT If the fan is fully switched off then the air conditioning is not engaged, which results in a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.
NOTE The climate control system automatically adjusts the air flow within the selected fan level based on requirements. This means that the fan speed may change even though the fan level is the same.
Related information · Climate controls (p. 195)
4 For 2-zone climate, also rear seat. 204
Regulating temperature for front seat5
The temperature can be set to the desired number of degrees for the front seat's climate zones.
Related information · Climate controls (p. 195)
CLIMATE
Temperature buttons in the climate row.6
1. Press the left or right-hand side temperature button in the centre display's climate row to open the controls.
Temperature control.7
2. Regulate the temperature by either of the following:
· drag the control to the desired tem-
perature, or
· press +/- to raise/lower the tempera-
ture gradually. > The temperature changes and the but-
ton shows the set temperature.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature.
5 For 2-zone climate, also rear seat. 6 With 1-zone climate, the temperature button is to the right of the centre button. 7 With 1-zone climate, the control is horizontal instead of vertical.
205
CLIMATE
Synchronising temperature8
The temperature in the car's different climate zones can be synchronised with the temperature set on the driver's side.
by means of changing the temperature settings for a climate zone other than the driver's.
Related information · Climate controls (p. 195)
Activating and deactivating air conditioning
The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies incoming air as required. When the air conditioning is activated, the climate control system automatically controls starting and switching off as required.
Synchronisation button on the driver's side temperature controls. 1. Press the driver's side temperature button
in the centre display's climate row in order to open the controls. 2. Press Synchronise temperature. > The temperature for all zones in the car
is synchronised with the temperature set for the driver's side and the synchronisation symbol is shown adjacent to the temperature button. The synchronisation is stopped by means of a further press on Synchronise temperature or
8 Not available with 1-zone climate.
206
1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row.
2. Press AC. > Air conditioning is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. NOTE
Close all side windows and the panoramic roof* so that the air conditioning should work as well as possible.
* Option/accessory.
NOTE It is not possible to activate the air conditioning when the fan control is in Off position.
Related information · Climate controls (p. 195)
CLIMATE
Parking climate*
Parking climate control is a generic term for various functions that improve the passenger compartment climate when the car is parked, e.g. preconditioning.
Functions belonging to the parking climate control are controlled from the Parking climate in climate view in the centre display. Open climate view by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row.
Related information · Climate (p. 184)
· Preconditioning* (p. 207)
· Climate comfort when parking* (p. 212)
· Symbols and messages for parking cli-
mate control* (p. 214)
Preconditioning*
Preconditioning is a climate function which, if possible, attempts to reach comfort temperature in the passenger compartment before departure.
Preconditioning can use direct start or be set via the timer.
The function utilises several systems in different cases:
· In a cold climate, the parking heater*
warms up the passenger compartment to a comfortable temperature.
· When it is warm, the climate control venti-
lates the passenger compartment by blowing in air from outside the car.
NOTE
In temperatures immediately below comfort temperature, neither ventilation nor heating is activated and no preconditioning is started.
NOTE
During preconditioning of the passenger compartment, the car works to reach comfort temperature and not the temperature set in the climate control system.
}} * Option/accessory. 207
CLIMATE || Related information
· Parking climate* (p. 207) · Start and switch off preconditioning*
(p. 208)
· Preconditioning time setting* (p. 209)
9 Certain markets. 208
Start and switch off preconditioning*
Preconditioning heats* or ventilates the passenger compartment, if possible, prior to driving. The function can use direct start from the centre display or a mobile phone.
Start and switch off from car
1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row.
2. Select the Parking climate tab. 3. Press Preconditioning.
> Preconditioning is started/switched off and the button is illuminates/extinguishes.
NOTE The car's doors and windows should be closed during the preconditioning of the passenger compartment.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equipped with a heater*:
· In unventilated spaces indoors.
Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts.
· In locations with combustible or flam-
mable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.
· When there is a risk that the heater's
exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow under the front part of the car can obstruct the heater's ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance.
Starting from the app Starting the pre-conditioning, as well as information on selected settings, can be managed from a device that has Volvo On Call* App. Preconditioning heats* the compartment to the comfort temperature or ventilates the compartment by blowing in air from outside.
The passenger compartment can also be preconditioned with the car remote start function (Engine Remote Start - ERS)9 via the Volvo On Call* app.
* Option/accessory.
Related information · Parking climate* (p. 207)
· Preconditioning* (p. 207)
· Preconditioning time setting* (p. 209)
CLIMATE
Preconditioning time setting*
The timer can be set so that the preconditioning is finished at a predetermined time.
The timer can handle up to 8 different settings for
· a time on a single date
· a time on one or more days of the week,
with or without repetition.
Related information · Preconditioning* (p. 207)
· Adding and editing time setting for pre-
conditioning* (p. 209)
· Activating and deactivating time setting
for preconditioning* (p. 211)
· Removing time setting for precondition-
ing* (p. 211)
Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning*
The timer for preconditioning can manage up to 8 time settings. Adding a time setting
The button to add a time setting in the Parking climate tab in the climate view. 1. Open the climate view in the centre dis-
play. 2. Select the Parking climate tab.
}} * Option/accessory. 209
CLIMATE
|| 3. Press Add timer. > A pop-up window is shown.
NOTE
It is not possible to add a time setting if there already are 8 settings entered for the timer. Delete a time setting in order to be able to add a new one.
4. Tap on Date to set the time for a single date.
Tap on Days to set the time for one or more days of the week.
With Days: Activate/deactivate repetition by ticking/unticking the box for Repeat weekly.
5. With Date: Select the date for preconditioning by scrolling the date list with the arrows.
With Days: Select the days of the week for preconditioning by tapping on the buttons for the days of the week.
6. Set the time when the preconditioning should be finished by scrolling with the arrows.
7. Tap on Confirm in order to add the time setting. > The time setting is added to the list and is activated.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equipped with a heater*:
· In unventilated spaces indoors.
Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts.
· In locations with combustible or flam-
mable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.
· When there is a risk that the heater's
exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow under the front part of the car can obstruct the heater's ventilation. Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance.
Editing a time setting 1. Open the climate view in the centre dis-
play.
2. Select the Parking climate tab.
3. Press the time setting that is to be changed. > A pop-up window is shown.
4. Edit the time setting in the same way as described in "Adding a time setting" above.
Related information · Preconditioning* (p. 207)
· Preconditioning time setting* (p. 209)
· Activating and deactivating time setting
for preconditioning* (p. 211)
· Removing time setting for precondition-
ing* (p. 211)
210
* Option/accessory.
Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning*
A time setting in the timer for preconditioning can be activated or deactivated based on need.
The timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in the climate view. 1. Open the climate view in the centre dis-
play. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. 3. Activate/deactivate a time setting by tap-
ping on the timer button to the right of the setting. > The time setting is activated/deacti-
vated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equipped with a heater*:
· In unventilated spaces indoors.
Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts.
· In locations with combustible or flam-
mable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.
· When there is a risk that the heater's
exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow under the front part of the car can obstruct the heater's ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance.
Related information · Preconditioning* (p. 207)
· Preconditioning time setting* (p. 209)
· Adding and editing time setting for pre-
conditioning* (p. 209)
· Removing time setting for precondition-
ing* (p. 211)
CLIMATE
Removing time setting for preconditioning*
A time setting for preconditioning that is no longer required can be deleted.
The button for editing the list/deleting the time setting in the tab Parking climate in the climate view. 1. Open the climate view in the centre dis-
play. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. 3. Press Edit list. 4. Press the delete icon to the right in the
list. > The icon changes to the text Delete. 5. Press Delete to confirm. > The time setting is removed from the
list. }}
* Option/accessory. 211
CLIMATE
|| Related information · Preconditioning* (p. 207) · Preconditioning time setting* (p. 209) · Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 209) · Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning* (p. 211)
Climate comfort when parking*
The climate in the car's passenger compartment can be maintained while the car is parked, e.g. if the engine needs to be switched off but the driver or passenger(s) wants to remain in the car and maintain the level of climate comfort.
Starting climate comfort retention is only possible via direct start from the centre display.
The function utilises several systems in different cases:
· Residual heat from the engine, in a cold
climate, heats the passenger compartment to comfort temperature.
· When it is warm, the ventilation cools the
passenger compartment by blowing in air from outside the car.
NOTE
Climate comfort retention is switched off when the car is locked from the outside to avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use of the function is intended to maintain climate comfort when driver or passengers remain inside the car.
There is a limit to how long climate comfort can be maintained in a cold climate, which depends on the amount of residual heat available.
Related information · Parking climate* (p. 207)
· Starting and switching off climate comfort
when parking* (p. 213)
212
* Option/accessory.
Starting and switching off climate comfort when parking*
Climate comfort retention maintains the climate in the passenger compartment after driving. The function can use direct start from the centre display.
1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row.
2. Select the Parking climate tab. 3. Press Keep climate comfort.
> Climate comfort retention is started/ switched off and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
NOTE It is not possible to start climate comfort retention if there is not enough residual heat in the engine to maintain the passenger compartment climate, or if the outside temperature is above approx. 20°C (68°F).
NOTE
Climate comfort retention is switched off when the car is locked from the outside to avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use of the function is intended to maintain climate comfort when driver or passengers remain inside the car.
There is a limit to how long climate comfort can be maintained in a cold climate, which depends on the amount of residual heat available.
Related information · Climate comfort when parking* (p. 212)
CLIMATE * Option/accessory. 213
CLIMATE
Symbols and messages for parking climate control*
A number of symbols and messages regarding parking climate control can be shown in the driver display.
Messages relating to parking climate control can also be displayed in a device which has the Volvo On Call* app.
This symbol illuminates in the driver display when the parking heater is active.
Symbol Message Parking climate Service required
Specification
Parking climate control is disengaged. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as possible.
Parking climate Temporarily unavailable
Parking climate control is temporarily disengaged. If the problem persists for some time, contact a workshopA to check the function.
Parking climate Unavailable Fuel level too low
Parking climate control cannot be activated when the fuel level is too low to start the parking heater*. Fill the vehicle's fuel tank.
Parking climate
Parking climate control cannot be activated if the charge level of the starter battery is too low to
Unavailable Charge level too low start the parking heater*. Start the car.
Parking climate Limited Charge level too low
The running time for parking climate control is limited when the state of charge in the starter battery is low. Start the car.
A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information · Parking climate* (p. 207)
214
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Heater*
The heater has two subfunctions that help to heat the passenger compartment or engine in different situations.
The heater has two subfunctions:
· Parking heater - heats the passenger com-
partment, if necessary, when the parking climate control's preconditioning is activated.
· Additional heater - heats the passenger
compartment and engine, if necessary, during driving.
The heater is fuel-driven and is fitted inside the engine compartment.
NOTE
When the heater is running, smoke may be emitted from under the front part of the car and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound from the fuel pump may also be heard from the rear section of the car. This is perfectly normal.
Battery and charging The heater is powered by the car's starter battery. If the charge level of the starter battery is too low, then the heater is switched off automatically and the driver display shows a message.
NOTE Make sure that there is enough charge in the battery if the heater needs to be used. The car must be connected to an electrical socket for the heater to be used for preconditioning. Fuel and refuelling
Warning label on fuel filler flap. The heater uses fuel from the car's normal fuel tank. If the car is parked on a steep incline, this may limit the supply of fuel to the heater. If the level in the fuel tank is too low then the heater is switched off automatically and the driver display shows a message.
NOTE Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's fuel tank if the heater needs to be used.
WARNING Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel.
Check in the driver display that the heater is switched off. This symbol is lit when it is working as a parking heater.
Related information · Climate (p. 184) · Parking heater* (p. 216) · Additional heater* (p. 217)
* Option/accessory. 215
CLIMATE
Parking heater*
The parking heater heats the passenger compartment as necessary before driving if the car's preconditioning is activated.
The parking heater is one of two subfunctions of the car's heater. The heater is fitted inside the engine compartment.
When this symbol illuminates in the driver display, the parking heater may be active.
NOTE
When the heater is running, smoke may be emitted from under the front part of the car and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound from the fuel pump may also be heard from the rear section of the car. This is perfectly normal.
The parking heater starts automatically if the parking climate's preconditioning* is activated and the passenger compartment needs to be heated up.
Depending on factors such as fuel availability, battery level, passenger compartment temperature and ambient temperature, the heater has different running times, but never longer than 30 minutes.
NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's fuel tank if the parking heater needs to be used.
Make sure that there is enough charge in the starter battery if the parking heater needs to be used.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the parking heater combined with short journeys may discharge the battery and impair starting.
If the heater is used on a regular basis, then the car should be driven for the same amount of time that the heater is used in order to ensure that the car's battery is recharged with the same amount of energy as consumed by the parking heater. In cold climates or if the battery is older, a longer mileage may be required to charge the battery.
WARNING Do not use preconditioning if the car is equipped with a heater*:
· In unventilated spaces indoors.
Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts.
· In locations with combustible or flam-
mable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.
· When there is a risk that the heater's
exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow under the front part of the car can obstruct the heater's ventilation. Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance.
WARNING If there is a smell of fuel, unusual amounts of smoke, black smoke, or unusual sounds coming from the parking heater, switch off the heater and, if possible, pull out its fuse. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair.
Related information · Heater* (p. 215) · Additional heater* (p. 217)
216
* Option/accessory.
Additional heater*
The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger compartment and engine while driving. The additional heater is one of two subfunctions of the car's heater. The heater is fitted inside the engine compartment.
NOTE
When the heater is running, smoke may be emitted from under the front part of the car and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound from the fuel pump may also be heard from the rear section of the car. This is perfectly normal.
The additional heater starts and is controlled automatically when heating is required while the car is being driven.
It switches off automatically when the car is switched off.
NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's fuel tank if the auxiliary heater needs to be used.
Related information · Heater* (p. 215) · Parking heater* (p. 216)
· Activating and deactivating automatic
start of auxiliary heater* (p. 217)
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating automatic start of auxiliary heater*
The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger compartment and engine while driving. It is possible to set whether automatic start for the additional heater should be activated/ deactivated.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Additional Heater to activate/ deactivate automatic start of the additional heater.
NOTE Volvo recommends that the automatic start for the additional heater should be switched off for short driving distances.
Related information · Additional heater* (p. 217)
* Option/accessory. 217
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Locking and unlocking
The car can be locked and unlocked in several different ways. The car can be locked and unlocked
· using the buttons on the remote control
key
· using the detachable key blade (if the bat-
tery in the remote control key is exhausted)
· without a key* (Passive Entry), the remote
control key must be within range
· from the inside of the car using the locking
controls in the doors
· remote unlocking with Volvo On Call*.
There are two types of remote control keys to the car.
For cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking*, a slightly smaller, lighter and button-less key (Key Tag) is supplied.
Related information · Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 224)
· Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 253)
· Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 256)
· Private locking (p. 263)
· Alarm* (p. 264)
Lock confirmation
The car indicates with hazard warning flashers when the car is locked or unlocked.
Exterior indication Locking
· The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
locking by flashing and retracting the door mirrors1.
Unlocking
· The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
unlocking by two flashes and extending the door mirrors1.
All doors, the tailgate and the bonnet must be closed for the car to indicate that it is locked. If locking takes place with just the driver door closed2, locking will take place but the lock indication with hazard warning flashers will only take place when all doors, the tailgate and the bonnet have been closed.
Lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel
The lock and alarm indicator shows the status of the locking system:
· A long flash indicates locking. · Short flashes indicate that the car is
locked.
· Rapid flashes after disarming the alarm*
indicate that the alarm has been triggered.
220
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Indication in lock buttons Front door
Rear door*
Lock buttons with indicator lamp in the front door.
An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button of either front door indicates that all doors are locked. If any door is opened, the lamp will extinguish in both doors.
Lock button with indicator lamp in the rear door.
An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button for one of the doors indicates that the door in question is locked. If any door is unlocked, its lamp will extinguish while the others will continue to illuminate.
Other indication The home safe lighting and approach light functions can also be activated when locking and unlocking.
Related information · Lock indication setting (p. 221)
· Locking and unlocking (p. 220)
· Approach light duration (p. 148)
· Using home safe lighting (p. 148)
1 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors. 2 Not applicable to with cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*.
Lock indication setting
It is possible to select various options for how the car confirms locking and unlocking in the settings menu in the centre display. To change the locking response setting: 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press My Car Locking.
3. Press Visible Locking Feedback to select when the car is to give a visible response:
· Lock · Unlock · Both
Or switch off the function by selecting Off .
To change the setting for retractable rearview mirrors* when locking: 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press My Car Mirrors and Convenience.
3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to activate or deactivate the function.
}}
* Option/accessory. 221
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Related information
· Lock confirmation (p. 220)
Remote control key
The remote control key locks and unlocks the doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap. The remote control key needs to be inside the car for it to be started.
The remote control keys can be linked to different driver profiles to save personal preferences in the car.
WARNING The remote control key contains a button cell battery. Keep new and used batteries out of the reach of children. If someone swallows a battery it may cause serious injury. If damage is discovered, e.g. if the battery cover cannot be closed properly, then the product should not be used. Keep defective products out of the reach of children.
Remote control key3, Care Key or respective key tag (Key Tag)*. The remote control key is not physically used when starting since the car is equipped with support for keyless starting (Passive Start) as standard. You simply need to have the key in the front part of the passenger compartment. For cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry)* the key can be anywhere in the car to start the car. In this case, a slightly smaller, lighter key tag (Key Tag) is also supplied.
3 The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
222
* Option/accessory.
Remote control key buttons
The remote control key has four buttons - one on the left-hand side and three on the right-hand side.
Locking - Pressing the button locks the doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap and also arms the alarm*. Press and hold to close all of the windows and the panoramic roof* simultaneously.
Unlocking - Pressing the button unlocks the doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap and also deactivates the alarm. A longer press opens all windows simultaneously. This total airing function can be used, for example, to quickly air the car in hot weather.
Tailgate - Unlocks the tailgate only and disarms its alarm. On cars with power operated tailgate*, the tailgate is opened automatically when the button is held depressed. The tailgate is also closed with
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
a long press acoustic warning signals sound.
Panic function - Used to attract attention in an emergency. Press and hold the button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to activate the direction indicators and the horn. The function can be turned off with the same button once it has been active for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off automatically after 3 minutes.
WARNING
If anyone is left in the car, make sure the power windows and panoramic roof* are de-energised by always taking the remote control key with you when you leave the car.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car.
· A remote control key or key tag left in
the car will be deactivated when the car is locked and the alarm is armed using another valid key. The "Double lock" function is also deactivated. The key left behind is reactivated when the car is unlocked.
· A Care Key left in the car will be deacti-
vated even when the car is locked using Volvo On Call, and reactivated when the car is unlocked using Volvo On Call or with another valid key.
Button-less key (Key Tag)* The key tag provided with the keyless locking and unlocking function works in the same way as the standard remote control key as regards keyless starting and locking and unlocking. The key is waterproof to a depth of approx. 10 metres (30 feet) for up to 60 minutes. It has no detachable key blade and the battery cannot be replaced.
Care Key - restricted remote control key A Care Key allows the car owner to set a limit for the speed of the car. The limitation is
}}
* Option/accessory. 223
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
|| intended to encourage the car to be driven in a safe manner, e.g. when being loaned out.
Interference Remote control key functions for keyless starting and keyless locking and unlocking* can be disrupted by electromagnetic fields and screening.
NOTE
Avoid storing the remote control key close to metal objects or electronic apparatus, e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers - preferably no closer than 10-15 cm (4-6 inches).
If there is still interference - use the remote control key's detachable key blade to unlock and then place the key in the backup reader in the storage compartment to disarm the car and allow the car to be started.
NOTE
When the remote control key is positioned in the backup reader in the storage compartment, make sure that there are no car keys, metal objects or electronic apparatus nearby (e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers). Several car keys close to one another in the storage compartment may cause interference with each other.
Related information · Starting the car (p. 404)
· Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 224)
· Remote control key range (p. 227)
· Replacing the battery in the remote con-
trol key (p. 227)
· Detachable key blade (p. 233)
· Care Key - restricted remote control key
(p. 232)
· Immobiliser (p. 236)
· Linking remote control key to driver profile
(p. 126)
Locking and unlocking with the remote control key
The buttons on the remote control key can be used to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate and the fuel filler flap simultaneously. Locking with the remote control key
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. Press the remote control key button to
lock the car. For the lock sequence to be activated, the driver door must be closed4. If any of the other doors or the tailgate are open, these are locked and alarmed* only when they are closed. The alarm's movement detectors* are activated when all the doors and the tailgate are closed and locked.
224
* Option/accessory.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car.
· A remote control key or key tag left in
the car will be deactivated when the car is locked and the alarm is armed using another valid key. The "Double lock" function is also deactivated. The key left behind is reactivated when the car is unlocked.
· A Care Key left in the car will be deacti-
vated even when the car is locked using Volvo On Call, and reactivated when the car is unlocked using Volvo On Call or with another valid key.
Locking when the tailgate is open
NOTE
If the car has been locked while the tailgate is open, be careful not to leave the remote control key in the cargo area when the tailgate is closed and the car is completely locked5.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Unlocking with the remote control key Press the remote control key button to
unlock the car.
Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes of unlocking, they are locked automatically. This function prevents the car from being left unlocked unintentionally.
When the remote control key does not work
NOTE
Always try moving closer to the car and making another unlock attempt.
If it is not possible to lock or unlock with the remote control key, the battery may be discharged - in which case, lock or unlock the driver's door with the detachable key blade.
Related information · Settings for remotely controlled and inside
unlocking (p. 226)
· Unlocking the tailgate with the remote
control key (p. 226)
· Remote control key (p. 222)
· Replacing the battery in the remote con-
trol key (p. 227)
· Locking and unlocking with the detacha-
ble key blade (p. 234)
4 If the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking* then all side doors must be closed. 5 If the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking and the key is detected inside the car, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.*
* Option/accessory. 225
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Settings for remotely controlled and inside unlocking
It is possible to select different sequences for remotely controlled unlocking. To change setting:
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.
2. Press My Car Locking Remote and Interior Unlock.
3. Select option:
· All Doors - unlocks all doors simultane-
ously.
· Single Door - unlocks the driver's
door. Unlocking all of the doors requires two presses on the remote control key's unlock button.
The settings made here also affect central unlocking via opening handles from the inside.
Related information · Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 224)
· Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 256)
Unlocking the tailgate with the remote control key
It is possible to unlock just the tailgate by pressing a button on the remote control key.
1. Press the remote control key's button. > The tailgate is unlocked but remains closed. The side doors are still locked and the alarm is armed*. The lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel extinguishes in order to show that the entire car is not locked. Lightly grasp the rubberised pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle to open the tailgate. If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.
2. With the power operated tailgate option* -
Long press (approx. 1.5 seconds) on the remote control key's button > The tailgate is unlocked and opened,
while the side doors remain locked and their alarm functions armed.
Related information · Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 224)
226
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Remote control key range
In order for the remote control key to work properly it needs to be within a certain distance from the car. For manual use The remote control key's functions for e.g. locking/unlocking that are activated by pressing on or have a range that extends approx. 20 metres (65 feet) from the car. If the car does not verify a button being pressed - move closer and try again. For keyless* use
For keyless use, a remote control key or the button-less key (Key Tag) must be within a semicircular area with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres (5 feet) on both long sides and approx. 1 metre (3 feet) from the tailgate.
NOTE
The remote control key functions may be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions, etc. The car can always be locked/unlocked with the key blade.
If the remote control key is removed from the car
If the remote control key is removed from the car when the engine is running, the warning message Car key not found Removed from car is shown in the driver display and an acoustic reminder sounds when the last door is closed.
The message extinguishes when the key is returned to the car, followed by a press of the right-hand keypad's O button, or when the last door is closed.
Related information · Remote control key (p. 222)
· Antenna locations for the start and lock
systems (p. 255)
· Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 252)
Replacing the battery in the remote control key
The battery in the remote control key needs to be replaced when it has become discharged.
NOTE All batteries have a limited service life and must eventually be replaced (does not apply to Key Tag). The service life of the battery varies depending on how often the vehicle/key is used.
The battery for the remote control key should be replaced if
· the information symbol illuminates and the
message Car key battery low is shown in the driver display
· the locks repeatedly do not react to sig-
nals from the remote control key within 20 metres (65 feet) of the car.
NOTE Always try moving closer to the car and making another unlock attempt.
}}
* Option/accessory. 227
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
|| The battery in the button-less key6 (Key Tag) cannot be replaced - a new key can be ordered from an authorised Volvo workshop.
IMPORTANT A discharged Key Tag must be handed over to an authorised Volvo workshop. The key must be deleted from the car since it is still possible to use it to start the car via back-up start.
Opening the key and changing the battery
Hold the remote control key with the front visible and the Volvo logo facing the right way - slide the button at bottom edge by the key ring to the right. Slide the front side's shell a few millimetres upwards.
The shell will then come free and can be lifted off the key.
Turn the key, move the button to the side and slide the back shell a few millimetres upwards.
The shell will then come free and can be lifted off the key.
6 Supplied with cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*. 228
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Use a screwdriver or similar to turn the battery cover anticlockwise until the markings meet at the OPEN text.
Carefully lift away the battery cover by pressing e.g. a fingernail into the recess.
Then prize the battery cover upwards.
The battery (+) side is facing upwards. Then carefully prize loose the battery as illustrated.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching new batteries and their contact surfaces with your fingers as this may impair their function.
Install a new battery with the (+) side up. Avoid touching the remote control key's battery contacts with your fingers.
Place the battery in the holder with the edge down. Then slide the battery forwards so that it fastens under the two plastic catches.
Press the battery down so that it fastens under the upper black plastic catch.
NOTE
Use batteries with the designation CR2032, 3 V.
}} 229
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the batteries to be used in the remote control key fulfil UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, subsection 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop fulfil the above criteria.
Refit the battery cover and turn it clockwise until the marking aligns with the CLOSE text.
Reposition the rear side's shell and press it down until a clicking sound can be heard.
Then slide the shell back.
> A further click will indicate that the shell is properly positioned and securely attached.
Turn the remote control key over and refit the front side's shell by pressing it down until a clicking sound can be heard.
Then slide the shell back.
> A further click will indicate that the shell is securely attached.
230
WARNING
Check that the battery is fitted correctly with the correct polarity. If the remote control key shall not been used for a long time, remove the battery to avoid battery leakage and damage. Batteries with damage or leaks may cause corrosive injury on contact with the skin. Therefore, use protective gloves when handling damaged batteries.
· Keep batteries out of the reach of chil-
dren.
· Do not leave batteries lying around
since they can be swallowed by children or pets.
· Batteries must not: be dismantled,
short-circuited or thrown into open flames.
· Do not charge non-rechargeable bat-
teries, this may cause an explosion. Before use, the remote control key should be checked to avoid causing damage. If damage is discovered, e.g. if the battery cover cannot be closed properly, then the product should not be used. Keep defective products out of the reach of children.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that exhausted batteries are disposed of in a manner which is kind to the environment.
Related information · Locking and unlocking with the detacha-
ble key blade (p. 234)
· Starting the car (p. 404)
· Remote control key (p. 222)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Ordering more remote control keys
The car is supplied with two remote control keys. A button-less key is supplied if the car is equipped with keyless locking and unlocking*. Additional keys can be ordered. A total of twelve keys can be programmed and used for one single car. If additional keys are ordered, additional driver profiles are added one per new remote control key. This also applies for the key tag.
Loss of a remote control key If you lose a remote control key then a new one can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The remaining remote control keys must be taken to the workshop. The code of the missing key must be erased from the system as a theft prevention measure.
The current number of keys registered to the car can be checked via driver profiles in the centre display's top view, select Settings System Driver Profiles.
Related information · Remote control key (p. 222)
* Option/accessory. 231
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Care Key - restricted remote control key
A Care Key allows the car owner to set a limit for the speed of the car. The limitation is intended to encourage the car to be driven in a safe manner such as when being loaned out, for example.
For a Care Key, you can set your car's maximum speed. Other functions of the key are the same as those of a normal remote control key. The limits are intended to act as measures to reduce the risk of accidents, thereby making it feel safer to hand over the car to e.g. young drivers, valet parking or a workshop. Ordering Care Key One or more Care Key can be ordered from a Volvo dealer. A total of eleven keys with restrictions can be programmed and used for
a single car - at least one must be a normal remote control key.
Limitations of Care Key The key is linked to a special Care Key driver profile, and when it is active, the key's settings cannot be changed. It is not possible to change to another driver profile either; this requires a normal remote control key.
The driver profile is activated when the car is unlocked with a Care Key without a normal remote control key in the vicinity.
NOTE
In the event of a change of driver, the car must be locked and unlocked in order to activate a new driver profile.
Setting options The following limitations are available to be set:
· speed interval: 50-180 km/h
(30-112 mph)
· Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
Symbol Specification
Speed limitation is active.
Related information · Care Key settings (p. 233)
· Remote control key (p. 222)
232
Care Key settings
Change the maximum speed of a Care Key via the centre display. 1. Unlock the car with the normal remote
control key.
2. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.
3. Press System Driver Profiles Key.
4. Change the settings you want.
Care
Related information · Care Key - restricted remote control key
(p. 232)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Detachable key blade
The remote control key contains a detachable key blade of metal with which a number of functions can be activated and some operations carried out. The key blade's unique code is provided by authorised Volvo workshops, which are recommended when ordering new key blades.
The key blade's application areas Using the remote control key's detachable key blade
· the left-hand7 front door can be opened
manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key
· all doors are emergency-locked
· the rear doors' mechanical child lock can
be activated and deactivated.
The button-less key8 does not have a detachable key blade. If necessary, use the detachable key blade from the normal remote control key.
Detaching the key blade
Hold the remote control key with the front visible and the Volvo logo facing the right way - slide the button at bottom edge by the key ring to the right. Guide the front side's shell a few millimetres upwards.
The shell will then come free and can be lifted off the key.
7 This applies whether the car is left-hand drive or right-hand drive. 8 Supplied with cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*.
}} * Option/accessory. 233
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM ||
Detach the key blade by angling it up.
Related information · Locking and unlocking with the detacha-
ble key blade (p. 234)
· Remote control key (p. 222)
Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade
Amongst other things, the detachable key blade can be used to unlock the car from the outside - e.g. if the remote control key's battery has become discharged.
Unlocking
Return the key blade to its intended position in the remote control key after use.
Refit the shell by pressing it downward until a clicking sound is heard.
Then slide the shell back. > A further click will indicate that the
shell is securely attached.
9 This applies whether the car is right-hand drive or left-hand drive.
234
Pull out the front door handle on the lefthand side to its end position so that the lock cylinder becomes visible9.
Insert the key in the lock cylinder.
Turn clockwise 45 degrees so that the key blade is pointing straight back.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Turn the key back 45 degrees to its starting position. Remove the key from the lock cylinder and release the handle so that the rear section of the handle is resting against the car again.
5. Pull out the handle. > The door opens.
NOTE
When the door is unlocked using the key blade and is then opened, the alarm is triggered. The alarm must be deactivated manually, see separate section.
Locking The left-hand front door can be locked with its lock cylinder and the detachable key blade.
The other doors have a locking switch at the end that must be pushed in using the key blade then they are mechanically locked/ inhibited from opening from outside.
The doors can still be opened from the inside.
Manual locking of the door. Not to be confused with the child safety lock.
1. Remove the detachable key blade from the remote control key.
2. Insert the key blade in the hole for lock reset.
3. Press in the key until the key bottoms, approximately 12 mm (0.5 inches).
The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside.
The door is blocked against opening from the outside. To return to position A, the inner door handle must be opened.
NOTE
· A door's lock reset only locks that par-
ticular door - not all doors simultaneously.
· A manually locked rear door with child
lock activated cannot be opened from inside or outside. The door can then only be unlocked with the key buttons, central locking button, the keyless locking system* or Volvo On Call*.
Related information · Detachable key blade (p. 233)
· Activating and deactivating alarms*
(p. 266)
· Starting the car (p. 404)
· Replacing the battery in the remote con-
trol key (p. 227)
· Remote control key (p. 222)
* Option/accessory. 235
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Immobiliser
The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection system that prevents an unauthorised person from starting the car. The car can only be started with the correct remote control key.
The following error message in the driver display is related to the electronic immobiliser:
Symbol Message Specification
Car key not found
See Owner's manual
Error reading the remote control key during starting - place the key on the key symbol in the storage compartment and try again.
Related information · Remote control key (p. 222)
· Ordering more remote control keys
(p. 231)
236
Type approval for the remote control key system
Type approval for the car's remote key system can be seen in the following tables.
For detailed information on type approval, go to volvocars.com.
Lock system keyless start (Passive Start) and keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*)
Country/Area Argentina Brazil
CEM marking for the remote control key system. For supplementary type approval numbers, see following tables.
Type approval CNC ID: C-14771 MT-3245/2015
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}} * Option/accessory. 237
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
|| Country/Area Europe
The United Arab Emirates Indonesia Jordan Malaysia Mexico Namibia
Type approval
Delphi Deutschland GmbH, 42367 Wuppertal hereby declares that this CV1-134TRX conforms to the essential property requirements and other relevant provisions contained in directive 2014/53/EU (RED). The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at volvocars.com
ER37847/15 DA0062437/11
Nomor: 38301/SDPPI/2015
TRC/LPD/2014/250
RDBV/25A/1118/S(18-4228), RDBV/26A/1118/S(18-4229)
IFETEL: RLVDEVO15-0396
TA-2016-02
238
Country/Area Russia
Type approval
Serbia South Africa
P1614120100 TA-2014-1868
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}} 239
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
|| Remote control key Country/Area Type approval
Europe
Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio equipment HUF8423MS conforms to directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at volvocars.com
Wavelength: 433.92 MHz Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW
Manufacturer: Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany
Argentina
CNC ID: H-23694
Brazil
Anatel: 06768-19-06643
Modelo: HUF8423MS
Este equipomento opera em caráter secundário isto é não tem direito a proteção contra interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
240
Country/Area Type approval
Philippines
ESD-1919938C
The United Arab Emirates
Ghana IndonesiaA
NCA Approved: ZRO-M8-7E3-138 Sertifikat Nomor: 65073/SDPPI/2019 PLG ID: 8093
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}} 241
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
|| Country/Area Type approval CU (Customs Union) Kazakhstan, Russia
Morocco Moldova
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC Numéro d'agrément: MR 20402 ANRT 2019 Date d'agrément: 10/07/2019
Nigeria Oman
Connection and use of this communication equipment is permitted by the Nigerian Communications Commission
242
Country/Area Type approval
Paraguay
HUF8423MS
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Serbia
Singapore South Africa
Complies with IMDA Standards DA103787 TA-2019/772
Taiwan
.1
.2
}}
243
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
|| Country/Area Type approval
Ukraine
.C :
Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co KG
,
[HUF8423MS]
;
-
For detailed information on type approval, go to volvocars.com. : 433,92
Vietnam
244
Country/Area Type approval Belarus Zambia
A Only applies to Indonesia.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}} 245
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
|| Key Tag Country/Area Europe
Argentina
Type approval
Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio equipment HUF8432MS conforms to directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at volvocars.com. Wavelength: 433.92 MHz Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW Manufacturer: Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany
CNC ID: H-23695
Brazil Ghana
Anatel: 04362-16-06643
Modelo: HUF8432MS
Este equipo opera em caráter secundário isto é não tem direito a proteção contra interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
NCA Approved: ZRO-M8-7E3-139
246
Country/Area Type approval
Philippines
ESD-1919939C
The United Arab Emirates
CU (Customs Union) Kazakhstan, Russia
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}} 247
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
|| Country/Area Type approval
IndonesiaA
Sertifikat Nomor: 65072/SDPPI/2019 PLG ID: 8093
Morocco Moldova
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC Numéro d'agrément: MR 20403 ANRT 2019 Date d'agrément: 10/07/2019
Nigeria Oman
Connection and use of this communications equipment is permitted by the Nigerian Communications Commission
248
Country/Area Type approval
Paraguay
HUF8432MS
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Serbia
Singapore South Africa
Complies with IMDA Standards DA103787 TA-2019-773
Taiwan
.1
.2
}}
249
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
|| Country/Area Type approval
Ukraine
.C :
Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co KG
,
[HUF8432MS]
;
-
For detailed information on type approval, go to volvocars.com. : 433,92
Vietnam
250
Country/Area Type approval Belarus
Zambia
A Only applies to Indonesia.
Related information · Remote control key (p. 222)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM 251
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
With the keyless locking and unlocking function, carrying the remote control key in a pocket or bag will suffice. The car is locked or unlocked via a touch-sensitive surface on the door handle.
Touch-sensitive surfaces
Door handle The outside of the door handles contains a recess for locking, while the inside contains a touch-sensitive surface for unlocking.
NOTE
It is important that only one touch-sensitive surface is activated at a time. Gripping the handle while touching the lock surface risks giving double commands. This means that the requested activity (locking/unlocking) will not be executed, or will be executed with a delay.
Tailgate handle The tailgate handle has a rubberised pressure plate that is only used for unlocking.
Related information · Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 253)
· Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 254)
Touch-sensitive recess for locking Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking
NOTE
Be aware that the system may be activated in connection with car washing if the remote control key is in range.
252
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Keyless locking and unlocking*
With keyless locking and unlocking, it is sufficient to touch the door handle's touch-sensitive surface to lock or unlock the car.
NOTE One of the car's remote control keys must be within range for locking and unlocking to work.
Touch-sensitive recess for locking Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking
NOTE Be aware that the system may be activated in connection with car washing if the remote control key is in range.
Keyless locking All side doors must be closed to be able to lock the car. The tailgate, on the other hand, can be open when locking the car with a side door handle.
Touch the marked surface towards the rear on the outside of a door handle after the door has been closed. Or press the
button on the underside of the tailgate before it closes.
> The lock indicator on the instrument panel starts to flash to indicate the car is locked.
To close all side windows and the panoramic roof* simultaneously - place a finger against the touch-sensitive recess on the outside of the door handle and hold it there until all of the side windows and the panoramic roof have been closed.
Locking when the tailgate is open If the car has been locked and the tailgate is still open, make sure that the remote control key is not left in the cargo area when the tailgate is closed.
NOTE
If the key is detected inside the car, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.
Keyless unlocking Grasp a door handle or gently press the
rubberised pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle to unlock the car. > The lock indicator on the instrument
panel stops flashing to indicate that the car is unlocked.
Rubberised pressure plate on the tailgate can only be used for unlocking.
Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes of unlocking, they are locked automatically. This function prevents the car from being left unlocked unintentionally.
}}
* Option/accessory. 253
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
|| Related information · Settings for Keyless entry* (p. 254)
· Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 254)
· Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 252)
Settings for Keyless entry*
It is possible to select different sequences for Keyless entry. To change setting:
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.
2. Tap on My Car Locking Keyless Unlock.
3. Select option:
· All Doors - unlocks all doors simultane-
ously.
· Single Door - unlocks selected door.
Related information · Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 253)
· Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 252)
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate*
With keyless locking and unlocking, it is sufficient to press lightly on the rubberized pressure plate on the tailgate handle to unlock.
NOTE
One of the car's remote control keys must be within range behind the car for unlocking to work.
The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock.
To open:
1. Press gently on the rubberised pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle. > The lock is released.
254
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
2. Lift by the outside handle in order to open the tailgate.
IMPORTANT
· Minimal force is required to release the
rear hatch lock - just gently press the rubberised panel.
· Do not place the lift force on the rubber
panel when opening the rear hatch - lift the handle. Using too much force may damage the electrical contacts on the rubber panel.
Antenna locations for the start and lock systems
An antenna for the keyless starting system and antennas for the keyless locking system* are built into the car.
WARNING People with pacemaker operations should not come closer than 22 cm (9 inches) to the keyless system's antennas with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless system.
Related information · Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 252)
· Remote control key range (p. 227)
It is also possible to unlock the tailgate handsfree with a foot movement under the rear bumper, see separate section.
WARNING Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car through the cargo area.
Related information · Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 253) · Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 252)
· Remote control key range (p. 227) · Operating the tailgate with foot move-
ment* (p. 261)
Antenna locations:
In the storage compartment in the tunnel console
In the upper front section of the left-hand rear door10
In the upper front section of the right-hand rear door10
In the cargo area10
* Option/accessory. 255
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
The doors and tailgate can be locked and unlocked from inside using the central locking controls in the front doors.
Central locking
Alternative unlocking method
Locking using a button in the front door Press the button - both front doors
must be closed. > All doors and the tailgate are locked.
Locking using a button in the rear door*
Locking and unlocking button with indicator lamp in the front door.
Unlocking using a button in the front door Press the button to unlock all side
doors and the tailgate.
Opening handle for alternative unlocking in the side door11.
Pull the opening handle on one of the side doors and release.
> Depending on the settings in the remote control key, either all doors will be unlocked or only the selected door will be unlocked and opened.
To change this setting, tap on Settings
My Car Locking Remote and Interior Unlock in the centre display's top view.
Locking button with indicator lamp in the rear door.
The rear door lock buttons lock their respective rear door.
Unlocking the rear door Pull the opening handle.
> The rear door is unlocked and opened12.
10 Only in cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking*. 11 The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. 12 Provided that the child lock is not activated.
256
* Option/accessory.
Related information · Settings for remotely controlled and inside
unlocking (p. 226)
· Unlocking the tailgate from the inside of
the car (p. 257)
· Activating and deactivating child safety
locks (p. 257)
Unlocking the tailgate from the inside of the car
The tailgate can be unlocked from inside by pressing the button on the instrument panel.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Activating and deactivating child safety locks
The child safety lock prevents the rear doors from being opened from inside. The child lock can be either manual or electrical*.
Manual child lock
Brief press on the instrument panel.
button on the
> The tailgate can be unlocked and opened from the outside by grasping the rubberised pressure plate.
With the power operated tailgate option*:
Long press on the instrument panel.
button on the
> The tailgate is opened.
Related information · Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 256)
Manual child lock. Not to be confused with manual door locks. Use the remote control key's detachable
key blade to turn the knob. The door is blocked against opening from the inside. The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside.
}}
* Option/accessory. 257
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
NOTE
· A door's knob control only blocks that
particular door - not both rear doors simultaneously.
· Cars with an electric child safety lock
do not have a manual child lock.
Electric child lock* The electric child lock can be activated and deactivated in all ignition positions above 0. Activation and deactivation can be performed up to 2 minutes after switching off the car, provided that no door is opened.
· windows are only opened with the but-
tons in the driver's door.
· doors cannot be opened from inside.
If the child lock is activated when the car is switched off, it will remain activated the next time the car is started.
Symbols and messages
Symbol Message
Specification
Rear child lock Activated
The child lock is activated.
Rear child lock Deactivated
The child lock is deactivated.
Related information · Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 256)
· Detachable key blade (p. 233)
Automatic locking when driving
The doors and tailgate are locked automatically when the car starts to move. To change this setting:
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.
2. Press My Car Locking.
3. Select Auto Lock Doors While Driving to deactivate or activate this function.
Related information · Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 256)
Activation and deactivation button.
· Lamp lit the lock is activated. · Lamp not lit - the lock is deactivated.
When the child lock is activated, the following is possible, the rear:
258
* Option/accessory.
Closing and locking tailgate with button*
The buttons on the underside of the tailgate can close and lock the car automatically.
Location of the button/buttons on the underside of the tailgate.
IMPORTANT During manual tailgate operation, open or close it slowly. Do not use force to open/ close it if there is resistance. It may be damaged and stop working correctly.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Closing13 Press the button on the underside of
the tailgate. > The tailgate closes automatically and
remains unlocked.
NOTE
· The button is active 24 hours after the
hatch has been left open. Thereafter, it must be closed manually.
· If the flap has been open for more than
30 minutes, it will close at a slow speed.
Locking14 1. Press the
the tailgate.
button on the underside of
2. Close the hatch manually. > The tailgate and the doors are locked15.
Closing and locking16 Press the button on the underside of
the tailgate. > The tailgate is closed automatically and
the car is locked15.
NOTE
· One of the car's remote control keys
must be within range for locking and unlocking to work.
· When using keyless* locking or closing,
three signals will sound if the key is not detected sufficiently close to the tailgate.
13 Applies to cars with power operated boot lid. 14 Applies to cars with the keyless locking/unlocking option. 15 All doors must be closed for locking the car. 16 Applies to cars with keyless locking/unlocking and power operated tailgate.
}} * Option/accessory. 259
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
|| Cancel closing
· Press the button on the instrument panel.
· Press the remote control key's button.
· Press the closing button on the underside
of the tailgate13.
· Press the rubberised pressure plate
beneath the outside handle.
· Using a foot movement*.
The tailgate's movement is interrupted and stops. The tailgate can then be operated manually.
If the tailgate is stopped close to closed position, the next activation will open the tailgate.
Pinch protection If something with sufficient resistance prevents the tailgate from opening or closing then the pinch protection is activated.
· During opening - movement is interrupted,
the tailgate stops and a long acoustic signal sounds.
· During closing - movement is interrupted,
the tailgate stops, a long acoustic signal sounds and the tailgate returns to the programmed max. position.
WARNING Watch out for the risk of crushing when opening and closing. Check that there is nobody near the tailgate before starting to open or close it as a crush injury may have severe consequences. Always operate the tailgate with caution. Pre-tensioned springs
The pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tailgate.
WARNING Do not open the pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tailgate. They are pretensioned with high pressure and can cause injury if opened.
13 Applies to cars with power operated boot lid.
Related information · Setting the max. opening for electrically
operated tailgate* (p. 261)
· Operating the tailgate with foot move-
ment* (p. 261)
· Remote control key range (p. 227)
260
* Option/accessory.
Setting the max. opening for electrically operated tailgate*
Adjust the max opening of the tailgate, e.g. to make it easier if the car is in a garage with limited space.
To adjust max. opening 1. Open the tailgate manually - and stop it in
the desired opening position.
2. Press and hold button on the bottom of the tailgate for approx. 3 seconds. > Two acoustic signals sound to indicate that the set position has been saved.
NOTE
It is not possible to program an opening position lower than half-open tailgate.
Reset max. opening 1. Open the tailgate manually to the fully
open position.
2. Press and hold the button on the underside of the tailgate for approx. 3 seconds. > Two acoustic signals sound to indicate that the set position has been cleared.
NOTE
· If the system has been operating con-
tinuously for a long time, it is switched off to avoid overload. It can be used again after about 2 minutes.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Operating the tailgate with foot movement*
A function which allows the tailgate to open and close by moving a foot under the rear bumper makes life easier when your hands are full. If the car is equipped with keyless locking and unlocking* then you can unlock the tailgate with a foot movement.
The function with both opening and closing of the tailgate is also available when the car is equipped with power operated tailgate*.
NOTE
The foot-operated tailgate function is available in two versions:
· Opening and closing with foot move-
ment
· Only unlocking with foot movement
(lift up the tailgate manually to open it)
Note that the function for opening and closing with foot movement requires power operated tailgate*.
}} * Option/accessory. 261
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
The sensor is located on left of centre in the bumper. One of the car's remote control keys must be within range behind the car, approx. 1 metre (3 feet), for opening and closing to be possible. This also applies to an already unlocked car in order to avoid accidental opening e.g. in a car wash.
Opening and closing with foot movement
Kicking motion within the detector's activation area. Make one forward kicking motion under
the left part of the rear bumper. Then take a step back. The bumper must not be touched. > A short acoustic signal sounds when
opening or closing is activated - the tailgate is opened/closed. If several kicking motions take place without an approved remote control key being located behind the car, opening will not be possible until after a certain delay. Do not leave your foot positioned under the car during the kicking motion. This could cause activation to fail.
Cancelling opening or closing with foot movement Make one forward kicking motion while
opening or closing is in progress in order to stop the movement of the tailgate.
The remote control key does not have to be in the vicinity of the car to cancel opening or closing of the tailgate.
If the tailgate is stopped close to closed position, the next activation will open the tailgate.
NOTE
There is a risk of reduced function, or no function, if the rear bumper is loaded with large amounts of ice, snow, dirt or similar. For this reason, make sure you keep it clean.
NOTE
Pay attention to the possibility that the system may be activated in a car wash or similar if the remote key is within range.
Related information · Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 252)
· Remote control key range (p. 227)
262
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Private locking
The tailgate can be locked with the private locking function which prevents it from being opened, e.g. when the car is taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar.
The private locking function button is located in the centre display function view. Depending on the current status of the lock, Private
shown.
Locking Unlocked or Private Locking Locked is
Related information · Activating and deactivating private locking
(p. 263)
Activating and deactivating private locking
Private locking is activated with a function button in the centre display and an optional PIN code.
NOTE
The car needs to be in ignition mode I as a minimum for the private locking function to be activated.
Private locking has two codes:
· A security code is created the first time
the function is used.
· A new PIN code is selected every time the
function is activated.
Enter the security code before using for the first time A security code needs to be selected during the first time the function is used. It can then be used to deactivate private locking if the selected PIN code has been forgotten or lost. The security code acts as a PUK code for all subsequent PIN codes set for the private locking function.
Save the security code in a safe place.
To create a security code: 1. Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
> A pop-up window is shown. 2. Enter the preferred security code and
press Confirm. > The security code is saved. The private
locking function is now ready for activation. Activate private locking 1. Press the button for private locking in the function view.
> A pop-up window is shown.
}} 263
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
|| 2. Enter the code to be used in order to unlock the tailgate after locking and tap on Confirm.
> The tailgate is locked. Confirmation of locking takes place by means of a green indicator being shown by the button in the function view.
Deactivate private locking 1. Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
If the car is unlocked via Volvo On Call* or the Volvo On Call app, private locking will be deactivated automatically.
Forgotten security code If the security code has also been forgotten, contact an authorised Volvo dealer for help with deactivating private locking.
Related information · Private locking (p. 263)
Alarm*
The alarm provides audible and visual warnings if anyone enters the car without a valid remote control key or manipulates the starter battery or alarm siren.
Alarm indicator
> A pop-up window is shown. 2. Enter the code that was used for locking
and tap on Confirm. > The tailgate is unlocked. Confirmation
of unlocking takes place by means of the green indicator by the button in the function view extinguishing. Forgotten PIN code If the PIN code has been forgotten or the wrong PIN code has been entered more than three times, the security code can be used to deactivate private locking.
264
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the alarm system's status:
· LED not lit alarm not armed. · The LED flashes once every other second
alarm is armed.
· After the alarm has been disarmed, the
LED flashes rapidly for a maximum of 30 seconds or until ignition position I has been activated - the alarm has been triggered.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
When armed, the alarm is triggered if:
· a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is
opened17
· a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement detector*)
· the car is raised or towed away (if fitted
with a tilt detector*)
· the starter battery's cable is disconnected · the siren is disconnected.
Alarm signals When the alarm has been triggered, the following happens:
· A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off.
· Hazard warning flashers flash for
5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off. If the cause of alarm activation is not rectified, the alarm cycle is repeated up to 10 times17.
Movement and tilt sensors* Movement and tilt detectors react to movements inside the car18 e.g. if the window is broken or if anyone tries to tow the car away.
17 Applies to certain markets. 18 Airflows from the climate control are also registered.
To avoid triggering the alarm unintentionally:
· Close all windows when leaving the car.
· Close the panoramic roof.
· If the climate control is used aim the air-
flow so that it does not point upwards in the passenger compartment.
It is also possible to reduce the alarm level in the centre display.
Symbols and messages
Symbol Message
Specification
Alarm system failure Service required
Contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or alter components in the alarm system yourself. Any such attempts may affect the terms of the insurance.
Related information · Activating and deactivating alarms*
(p. 266)
· Reduced alarm level* (p. 266)
· Double lock* (p. 267)
* Option/accessory. 265
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Activating and deactivating alarms*
The alarm is activated when the car is locked, and is deactivated when the car is unlocked. It is also possible to deactivate the alarm without a working key.
Activating and deactivating alarms The alarm is activated when the car is locked, and is deactivated when the car is unlocked.
Deactivate the alarm without a functioning remote control key The car can be unlocked and disarmed even if the remote control key does not work e.g. if the remote control key's battery is dead.
1. Open the driver's door with the detachable key blade.
> The alarm is triggered.
2.
Place the remote control key on the key symbol in the backup reader in the tunnel console's storage compartment. 3. Press the start button. > The alarm is deactivated. Switching off a triggered alarm Press the remote control key's unlock button or set the car in ignition position I by pressing the start button. Related information
· Alarm* (p. 264)
Reduced alarm level*
Reduce the alarm level, e.g. when travelling on a car ferry. The alarm's movement and tilt detectors react to movements inside the car. These detectors are switched off in reduced alarm level.
Activating reduced alarm level Press the Reduced Guard button in the
centre display function view. > The function is now activated.
Related information · Alarm* (p. 264)
· Double lock* (p. 267)
266
* Option/accessory.
Double lock*
Double lock means that all opening handles are released mechanically when locking from the outside, which makes it impossible to open the doors from the inside. Double lock is activated when locking with a remote control key or with keyless locking*, and takes place with a delay of approx. 10 seconds after the doors have locked. If a door is opened within the delay time then the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deactivated.
The car can only be unlocked with a remote control key, keyless unlocking* or the Volvo On Call app * when double lock is activated.
The front left door can also be unlocked with the detachable key blade. If the car is unlocked with the detachable key blade, the alarm will be triggered.
WARNING
Do not lock the car from the outside while there is anyone left in the car.
Related information · Reduced alarm level* (p. 266)
· Alarm* (p. 264)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM * Option/accessory. 267
DRIVER SUPPORT
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driving support systems
The car is equipped with different driver support systems which can assist the driver in different situations, either actively or passively. For example, the systems can help the driver to:
· maintain a set speed
· maintain a certain time interval to the vehi-
cle ahead
· prevent a collision by giving a warning to
the driver and braking the car
· help the driver to park.
Some of the systems are fitted as standard while others are options which alternative applies is market dependent.
Related information · IntelliSafe driver support and safety
(p. 31)
· Speed-dependent steering force (p. 270)
· Electronic stability control (p. 271)
· Connected Safety (p. 276)
· City SafetyTM (p. 330)
· Road Sign Information* (p. 278)
· Speed limiter (p. 285)
· Automatic speed limiter (p. 288)
· Cruise control (p. 291)
· Adaptive cruise control* (p. 295) · Pilot Assist* (p. 305) · Overtaking Assistance* (p. 317) · Lane assistance (p. 323) · Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 343)
· Rear Collision Warning* (p. 349) · BLIS* (p. 350) · Driver Alert Control (p. 354) · Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 356) · Park Assist* (p. 361) · Park assist camera* (p. 367) · Radar unit (p. 386) · Camera unit (p. 395)
Speed-dependent steering force
Speed related power steering causes the steering wheel force to increase with the speed of the car so as to be able to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. On motorways the steering is firmer. When parking and at low speed steering is light and requires less effort.
Reduced power In rare situations, the power steering may need to work at reduced power, and turning the steering wheel may then seem slightly heavier. This may occur when the power steering becomes too hot and then needs temporary cooling. It may also occur if the power supply is disrupted.
In the event of reduced power, the message Power steering Assistance temporarily reduced is shown, as well as this symbol in the driver display.
While the power steering is working at reduced power, the driver support functions and steering assistance systems are not available.
270
* Option/accessory.
WARNING If the temperature increases too much, the servo may be forced to switch off completely. In such a situation, the driver display shows the Power steering failure Stop safely message, combined with a symbol.
Change the steering force level* Steering wheel resistance can be adjusted when using INDIVIDUAL drive mode.
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.
2. Select My Car Drive Modes Steering Force.
Steering wheel resistance selection can only be accessed if the car is stationary or is moving at low speed and in a straight line.
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270) · Drive modes* (p. 424)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Electronic stability control
Electronic Stability Control (ESC1) helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction.
The driver display shows this symbol when the system is engaged.
Braking from the system may be heard as a pulsing sound, and the car may accelerate more slowly than expected when applying the throttle.
The system consists of the following subfunctions:
· Stability function2
· Spin control and traction control system
· Engine Drag Control
· Trailer stability assist
· Roll Stability Control
WARNING
· The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
· The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system.
· Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Stability function2 The function checks the driving and brake force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car.
1 Electronic Stability Control 2 Also known as Active Yaw Control.
}} * Option/accessory. 271
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Spin control and traction control system The function is active at low speed and brakes the drive wheels that spin so that additional traction shall be transferred to the drive wheels that are not spinning.
The function can also prevent the driving wheels from spinning against the road surface during acceleration.
Engine Drag Control Engine Drag Control (EDC3) can prevent involuntary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine braking when driving in low gear on slippery road surfaces.
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can, amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to steer the car.
Trailer stability assist*4 Trailer stability assist (TSA5) stabilises a car towing a trailer in situations where they begin snaking.
NOTE
Trailer Stability Assist is deactivated if ESC Sport Mode is activated.
Roll Stability Control This function reduces the risk of overturning, for example during a sudden evasive manoeuvre or if the car skids. The system registers if and how much the car's lateral inclination changes. This information is used to calculate the risk of the car overturning. If the car is at risk, its electronic stability control system engages, the engine torque is reduced and one or more wheels are braked until the car has regained its stability.
WARNING
Under normal driving conditions, the system improves the car's road safety, but this must not be taken as a reason to increase speed. Always follow the normal precautions for safe driving.
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270)
· Activating or deactivating sport mode for
electronic stability control (p. 273)
· Symbols and messages for electronic sta-
bility control (p. 274)
· Trailer stability assist* (p. 463)
Electronic Stability Control in sport mode
The stability system (ESC6) is always activated it cannot be switched off. However, the driver can select ESC Sport Mode, which allows for a more active driving experience. With the ESC Sport Mode subfunction selected, intervention from the system is reduced and the car is allowed to skid more and greater control than normal is thus transferred to the driver.
When ESC Sport Mode is selected, the function can be considered as deactivated, despite the function continuing to help the driver in many cases.
NOTE
With ESC Sport Mode selected, Trailer Stability Assist (TSA7) is deactivated.
ESC Sport Mode also provides more traction even if the car has become bogged down or is driving on a loose surface, such as in sand or deep snow.
3 Engine Drag Control 4 Trailer stability assist is included when the Volvo genuine towbar is installed. 5 Trailer Stability Assist 6 Electronic Stability Control
272
* Option/accessory.
Related information · Electronic stability control (p. 271)
· Activating or deactivating sport mode for
electronic stability control (p. 273)
· Trailer stability assist* (p. 463)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating or deactivating sport mode for electronic stability control
The stability system (ESC8) is always activated it cannot be switched off. However, the driver can select sport mode, which allows for a more active driving experience.
Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view.
· Illuminated button indication the func-
tion is activated.
· Extinguished button indication the func-
tion is deactivated.
The driver display indicates activated ESC Sport Mode by displaying this symbol with a constant glow until the function is deactivated or the engine is switched off. The next time the engine is started, the system is back in its normal mode again.
The ESC Sport Mode function cannot be selected when one of the following functions is activated:
· Speed limiter
· Cruise control
· Adaptive cruise control*
· Pilot Assist*
Related information · Electronic Stability Control in sport mode
(p. 272)
· Electronic stability control (p. 271)
7 Trailer Stability Assist 8 Electronic Stability Control
* Option/accessory. 273
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for electronic stability control
A number of symbols and messages regarding electronic stability control (ESC9) can be
Symbol
Message
shown on the driver display. Here are some examples.
Specification
Constant glow for approx. 2 seconds System check when the engine is started.
Flashing light
The system is being activated.
Constant glow
Sport mode is activated. NOTE: The system is not deactivated in this mode it is partly reduced.
9 Electronic Stability Control 274
Symbol
Message ESC Temporarily off
ESC Service required
DRIVER SUPPORT
Specification The system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake temperature - the function is reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.
The system is disengaged. Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information · Electronic stability control (p. 271)
275
DRIVER SUPPORT
Connected Safety10
Connected Safety communicates information between your own car and other vehicles via the Internet11. The function is intended to make a driver aware that there may be a potentially dangerous traffic situation further ahead on the same road. The function can inform the driver whether another vehicle further ahead on the same road has activated its hazard warning flashers or detected slippery driving conditions. Information about slippery driving conditions is also given if your own car detects slippery surfaces.
Connected Safety can help the driver with the following:
· Alarm on hazard warning flashers
· Alarm on slippery driving conditions
Connected Safety communication between vehicles only works for vehicles equipped with the function and which have it activated.
Alarm on hazard warning flashers If your own car's hazard warning flashers are activated, information about this can be sent to vehicles approaching your own car's position.
When your own car is approaching a vehicle with flashing hazard warning flashers, this symbol is shown on the driver display.
Alarm on slippery driving conditions If your own car detects reduced friction between your tyres and the road, information on this can be sent to vehicles approaching your own car's position.
If an ice alert is triggered, this symbol is displayed on the Driver display when a vehicle approaches the slippery road section, both in your own car and in other vehicles that have received the information via Connected Safety.
10 Not available on all markets. 11 Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
WARNING
· The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
· The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system.
· Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270)
· Activating or deactivating Connected
Safety (p. 277)
· Limitations of Connected Safety (p. 277)
· Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
276
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating or deactivating Connected Safety
For Connected Safety to be able to share information on road conditions with other vehicles, the function needs to be activated. The function can be deactivated if you do not want to share information.
Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view.
Related information · Connected Safety (p. 276)
· Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
· User terms and conditions and data shar-
ing (p. 523)
· Limitations of Connected Safety (p. 277)
· Illuminated button indication the func-
tion is activated.
· Extinguished button indication the func-
tion is deactivated.
When activated, special terms and conditions that appear on the display must be acknowledged by the driver before a connection to the Internet12 can be made. For example, a situation where the driver must accept data being sent from the car using his/her mobile phone.
If there is no Internet connection, your own car will still inform you, the driver, that slippery driving conditions have been detected by your own car. For Connected Safety to work fully, your own car needs to be connected to the Internet.
Limitations of Connected Safety
Information about vehicles with activated hazard warning flashers or which have detected slippery driving conditions is not always communicated between all vehicles within the same area. This can be because for example:
· Poor or no contact with the Internet.
· Vehicles on slippery surfaces make
manoeuvres that are too weak for friction between tyres and road surface to be detectable, e.g. steering wheel movement, acceleration or braking.
· Vehicles that have detected slippery surfa-
ces, or have activated their hazard warning flashers, do not have the function activated.
· Vehicles that have detected slippery surfa-
ces, or have activated their hazard warning flashers, are not equipped with the function.
· There may be no warning due to missing
or defective global positioning/satellite navigation.
· Detection of slippery surfaces or activation
of hazard warning flashers has taken place
12 Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
}}
* Option/accessory. 277
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
on a road which is missing from Volvo
Cars database.
· Connected Safety is not available in all
markets and does not cover all areas - a retailer for Volvo has information on current areas.
WARNING
· In certain situations, the function may
give incorrect warnings for slippery driving conditions.
· The function cannot always detect
other vehicles with activated hazard warning flashers or detect all sections of road with slippery surfaces.
Related information · Connected Safety (p. 276)
· Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
Road Sign Information*
The Road Sign Information function (RSI13) can help the driver to observe speed-related road signs and certain prohibition signs.
Examples of readable signs14. RSI can provide information about such things as current speed, when a motorway or road is starting/ending, when overtaking is prohibited or when the direction of travel is one-way. If the car passes a speed limit sign, it will be shown on the driver display. Road sign information (RSI15) also includes subfunctions that can warn the driver if a speed limit has been exceeded or in connection with speed cameras.
NOTE
In certain markets, the Road Sign Information function* is only available in combination with Sensus Navigation*.
WARNING
· The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
· The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system.
· Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
13 Road Sign Information 14 Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples. 15 Road Sign Information
278
* Option/accessory.
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270)
· Activating or deactivating road sign infor-
mation* (p. 279)
· Display mode for road sign information*
(p. 280)
· Road Sign Information and Sensus
Navigation* (p. 282)
· Warning for speed limitation and speed
camera from road sign information* (p. 282)
· Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 284)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating or deactivating road sign information*
The Road Sign Information function (RSI16) is optional the driver can choose to activate or deactivate this function.
Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view.
· Illuminated button indication the func-
tion is activated.
· Extinguished button indication the func-
tion is deactivated. Road Sign Information is activated automatically each time the engine is started.
NOTE
· If the automatic speed limiter function
is activated, road sign information is shown in the driver display even if the Road Sign Information function is not activated.
· To remove road sign information from
the driver display, you must deactivate both the automatic speed limiter and Road Sign Information.
· When the automatic speed limiter
function is activated but Road Sign Information is deactivated, no warnings are given from Road Sign Information. Road Sign Information must also be activated in order to receive warnings.
Related information · Road Sign Information* (p. 278)
· Automatic speed limiter (p. 288)
· Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 284)
16 Road Sign Information
* Option/accessory. 279
DRIVER SUPPORT
Display mode for road sign information*
The Road Sign Information function (RSI17) shows road signs in different ways depending on the sign and the situation.
Example18 of detected speed information. When the function detects a road sign with an imposed speed limit, the driver display shows the sign as a symbol combined with a coloured indication on the speedometer. If the car is fitted with Sensus Navigation*, speed-related information is also obtained from map data, which means that the driver display can show or change information on the speed limit without having passed a speed-related sign.
An additional sign, such as "no overtaking", may be shown together with the speed limit symbol.
If the driver enters a road marked with a no-entry sign at the roadside, the symbol for this sign flashes on and off on the driver display as a warning.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*, information from map data is used to determine whether the car is being driven in the wrong direction.
The driver can also get an acoustic warning when driving towards a road marked with a no-entry sign if the Road Sign Audio Warning function is activated.
Speed limit or end of motorway When the function detects an "indirect speed limit sign" stating the end of the current speed limit e.g. at the end of a motorway a symbol appears with the corresponding road sign in the driver's display.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*, direct speed limit signs are normally displayed indirect speed limit signs are only displayed if map data has no information on the speed limit for the road section in question. Example of indirect speed limit sign:
End of all restrictions.
End of motorway.
The driver display symbol extinguishes after 10-30 seconds and remains so until the next speed related sign is passed. Changed speed limit When passing a direct speed limit sign when a speed limit changes, a symbol with the corresponding road sign appears in the driver's display.
17 Road Sign Information 18 Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
280
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Example of direct speed limit sign.
Additional signs
The driver display symbol extinguishes after about 5 minutes until the next speed-related sign is passed.
If the car is fitted with Sensus Navigation*, speed limit signs are shown in the driver display when map data contains information on the speed limit for the road section in question, even if no direct sign has been passed. If there is no information in map data, the sign is extinguished approx. 3 minutes after the last passing of a speed limit sign.
Examples of additional signs.
Sometimes different speed limits are signed for the same road - an additional sign then indicates the circumstances under which the different speeds apply. The road section may be particularly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or fog, for example.
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
If a trailer is connected to the car's electrical system and you pass a speed sign with the additional sign "trailer", the indicated speed will appear on the driver display.
Some speed limits only apply after a certain distance or at a certain time of day. The driver's attention is drawn to this fact by means of a symbol for an additional sign below the speed symbol. The additional symbol in the driver display will show either "DIST" or "TIME".
Sign for "School" and "Children at play"
If a warning sign for "School" or "Children at play" is included in the satellite navigator's map data19, the driver display shows a sign of this type.
Related information · Road Sign Information* (p. 278)
· Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 284)
19 Only in cars with Sensus Navigation*.
* Option/accessory. 281
DRIVER SUPPORT
Road Sign Information and Sensus Navigation*
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*, speed information is read from the navigation unit in the following cases:
· On detection of signs that indirectly indi-
cate a speed limit, such as motorway, dual carriageway and city limit signs.
· If a previously detected speed sign is
assumed not to apply any longer, but no new sign has been detected.
NOTE In certain markets, the Road Sign Information function* is only available in combination with Sensus Navigation*.
NOTE If a downloaded third-party app is used for navigation then there is no support for speed-related information.
Related information · Road Sign Information* (p. 278)
Warning for speed limitation and speed camera from road sign information*
Road sign information (RSI20) includes subfunctions that can warn the driver if a speed limit has been exceeded or in connection with speed cameras.
Examples of information on speed camera and speed limit in the driver display
Warning for speed limit The speed warning is given by the driver display symbol21 showing the applicable maximum permitted speed temporarily flashing when this speed is exceeded.
A speed warning is always given if the speed limit is exceeded in connection with speed camera information.
Speed Limit Warning warns the driver when the applicable speed limit or stored maximum speed is exceeded this warning is repeated once after approx. 30 seconds within the same speed limit area unless the driver reduces the speed.
Another warning is available only when the driver has reduced the speed by at least 5 km/h (3 mph) and then exceeds the speed limit again, or when the car reaches a new/ different speed limit area.
NOTE
To get an acoustic warning if you exceed the required speed, the Speed Limit Warning function must be activated and the Road Sign Audio Warning subfunction must be set to On. An acoustic warning is then given if the car's speed exceeds the speed indicated by the Road Sign Information function in the driver display.
20 Road Sign Information 21 Road signs are customised for each market the one shown here is just an example.
282
* Option/accessory.
Warning for speed camera A car equipped with road sign information and Sensus Navigation can provide information on an upcoming speed camera in the driver display22.
If the car exceeds a detected speed limit with the Speed Limit Warning function activated, a speed warning is given when the car approaches a speed camera, provided that the navigation map for the area in question contains information on speed cameras.
NOTE
An option is available to receive an acoustic warning for speed cameras independently of the car's speed and exceeded speed limit, even if the Road Sign Audio Warning function is deactivated.
Related information · Road Sign Information* (p. 278)
· Activating or deactivating warnings from
road sign information* (p. 283)
· Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 284)
Activating or deactivating warnings from road sign information*
The subfunction Speed Limit Warning for Road Sign Information (RSI23) is optional the driver can choose to activate or deactivate this subfunction.
Activating speed warning 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre display's top view.
2. Select Speed Limit Warning. > The function is activated and a speed limit selector appears.
Adjust the limit for Speed Warning The driver can select to receive a warning at a higher speed than the signed speed.
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2. Select Speed Limit Warning. > The function is activated and a speed limit selector appears.
DRIVER SUPPORT
3. Adjust the limit for Speed Warning by pressing the up/down arrows on the screen.
Note that the function does not give any consideration to selected limit adjustment when the driver display shows the speed camera symbol.
Activating acoustic warning in connection with speed warning
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2. Select/deselect Road Sign Audio Warning to activate/switch off the acoustic warning.
With the Road Sign Audio Warning function activated, the driver is also warned when driving towards one-way traffic/no-entry entrance.
Activate speed camera warning If the car is fitted with Sensus Navigation* and map data contains information on speed cameras, the driver can opt to receive an audible warning when approaching a speed camera.
22 Information on speed cameras on the navigation map is not available for all markets/areas. 23 Road Sign Information
}} * Option/accessory. 283
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2. Select/deselect Speed Camera Audio Warning to activate/switch off the audible speed camera warning.
Related information · Road Sign Information* (p. 278) · Warning for speed limitation and speed
camera from road sign information* (p. 282)
· Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 284)
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
The Road Sign Information (RSI24) function may have limitations in certain situations. Examples of what can reduce the function are as follows:
· Faded signs
· Signs positioned on bends
· Rotated or damaged signs
· Signs positioned high above the roadway
· Fully/partially obscured or poorly posi-
tioned signs
· Signs completely or partly covered with
frost, snow and/or dirt
· Digital road maps25 are out-of-date, inac-
curate or have no speed information26
NOTE
In certain markets, the Road Sign Information function* is only available in combination with Sensus Navigation*.
NOTE The RSI function may interpret some types of bicycle rack, connected to the electrical socket for trailers, as a connected trailer. In such cases, the driver display may show incorrect speed information.
NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Related information · Road Sign Information* (p. 278) · Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 395)
24 Road Sign Information 25 In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*. 26 Map data with speed information does not exist for all areas.
284
* Option/accessory.
Speed limiter
A speed limiter (SL27) can be likened to a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a preselected/set maximum speed by the speed limiter.
Buttons and symbols for the function. : Activates the speed limiter from
standby mode and resumes stored maximum speed
: Increases the stored maximum speed
: From standby mode activates the speed limiter and stores current speed
27 Speed Limiter
: From active mode deactivates/ changes the speed limiter to standby mode
: Reduces stored maximum speed
Marker for stored max speed
The car's current speed
Stored maximum speed
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING · The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
· The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system.
· Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270) · Limitations for speed limiter (p. 288) · Selecting and activating speed limiter
(p. 286)
· Deactivating the speed limiter (p. 287)
}}
285
DRIVER SUPPORT
· Temporary deactivation of speed limiter
(p. 287)
· Set the stored speed for driver support
(p. 319)
· Automatic speed limiter (p. 288)
Selecting and activating speed limiter
The speed limiter function (SL28) must first be selected and activated in order to be able to regulate the speed.
2. When speed limiter is selected press the steering wheel button (2) to activate. > The symbol is white the speed limiter is started and the current speed is stored as maximum speed.
Related information · Speed limiter (p. 285)
· Deactivating the speed limiter (p. 287)
· Temporary deactivation of speed limiter
(p. 287)
28 Speed Limiter 286
The speed limiter cannot be activated until after the engine has been started. The lowest maximum speed that can be stored is 30 km/h (20 mph).
1. Press (1) or (3) to scroll to the symbol
for the speed limiter
(4).
> The symbol is grey the speed limiter is in standby mode.
Deactivating the speed limiter
The speed limiter (SL29) can be deactivated and switched off.
Related information · Speed limiter (p. 285)
· Selecting and activating speed limiter
(p. 286)
· Temporary deactivation of speed limiter
(p. 287)
1. Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The symbol and indicators turn grey the speed limiter is set in standby mode and the driver can exceed the set speed limit.
2. Press the steering wheel button (1) or (3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol and indicator for speed limiter (4) are switched off which deletes the stored maximum speed.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Temporary deactivation of speed limiter
The speed limiter (SL30) can be temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode. The speed limiter can also be temporarily deactivated and overridden with the accelerator pedal without the speed limiter first having to be set in standby mode - e.g. to be able to quickly accelerate the car out of a situation.
In which case, proceed as follows:
1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and release it to interrupt acceleration when the desired speed has been reached. > In this mode, the speed limiter is still activated and the driver display's symbol is therefore WHITE.
2. Fully release the accelerator pedal when the temporary acceleration is finished. > The car is then engine-braked automatically to below the last stored maximum speed.
Related information · Speed limiter (p. 285)
· Selecting and activating speed limiter
(p. 286)
· Deactivating the speed limiter (p. 287)
29 Speed Limiter 30 Speed Limiter
287
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations for speed limiter
Speed limiter (SL31) has certain general limitations. On steep downhill gradients the speed limiter's braking effect may be inadequate and hence the stored maximum speed may be exceeded. In this case, the driver is alerted by the message Speed limit exceeded in the driver display.
NOTE A text message that the maximum speed is exceeded will be activated if the speed has been exceeded by at least 3 km/h (approx. 2 mph).
Related information · Speed limiter (p. 285)
Automatic speed limiter
The Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL32) function helps the driver to adapt the car's maximum speed to the speed shown on the road signs. The Speed Limiter function (SL33) can be changed to Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL).
The automatic speed limiter uses speed information from the Road Sign Information* (RSI34) function to automatically adapt the car's maximum speed.
WARNING
Even if the driver clearly sees the speedrelated road sign, the speed information from the Road Sign Information* (RSI) function to ASL may be incorrect in such cases the driver must intervene him/herself and accelerate or brake to a suitable speed.
WARNING
· The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
· The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system.
· Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
31 Speed Limiter 32 Automatic Speed Limiter 33 Speed Limiter 34 Road Sign Information
288
* Option/accessory.
Symbol for automatic speed limiter The sign symbol (displayed alongside the stored speed, "70", in the centre of the speedometer) can be shown in three colours with the fol-
lowing meanings:
Colour of Meaning sign symbol
Greenish yel- The automatic speed limiter
low
is active.
Grey
The automatic speed limiter is set in standby mode.
Orange
Automatic speed limiter is in temporary standby mode - e.g. due to a road sign not being read.
Symbol for which speed limiter function is active The symbol display in the driver display changes depending on whether it is cruise control or automatic cruise control that is active.
Symbol
SL ASL
WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode.
Sign symbol after "70" = Automatic Speed Limiter is activated.
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270) · Activating or deactivating the automatic
speed limiter (p. 289)
· Changing the tolerance for the automatic
speed limiter (p. 290)
· Limitations for automatic speed limiter
(p. 291)
· Speed limiter (p. 285) · Road Sign Information* (p. 278)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating or deactivating the automatic speed limiter
The automatic speed limiter function (ASL35) can be activated and deactivated as a supplement to the speed limiter (SL36).
Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view.
· GREEN button indication the function is
activated. Press the steering wheel button to start the automatic speed limiter
with the current speed.
· GREY button indication the function is
deactivated. Normal speed limiter is activated instead.
35 Automatic Speed Limiter 36 Speed Limiter
}} * Option/accessory. 289
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
NOTE
· If the automatic speed limiter function
is activated, road sign information
(RSI37) is shown in the driver display even if the Road Sign Information is not activated.
· To remove road sign information from
the driver display, you must deactivate both the automatic speed limiter and Road Sign Information.
· When the automatic speed limiter
function is activated but Road Sign Information is deactivated, no warnings are given from Road Sign Information. Road Sign Information must also be activated in order to receive warnings.
Deactivating the automatic speed limiter To deactivate the automatic speed limiter: Tap on the button in the function view.
> GREY button indication ASL is switched off and SL is activated instead.
WARNING After switching from ASL to SL the car will no longer follow the signed speed limit but only the stored maximum speed.
Related information · Speed limiter (p. 285) · Automatic speed limiter (p. 288) · Limitations for automatic speed limiter
(p. 291)
· Road Sign Information* (p. 278)
Changing the tolerance for the automatic speed limiter
The Automatic Speed Limiter function (ASL38) can be set for different tolerance levels. The tolerance is adjusted in the same way as the speed setting is in the speed limiter. If, for example, the car follows a signed speed limit of 70km/h (43 mph) the driver can instead choose to allow the car to maintain 75 km/h (47 mph).
Buttons and symbols for the function
37 Road Sign Information 38 Automatic Speed Limiter
290
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Press the steering wheel button (1) until 70 km/h (43 mph) in the centre of the speedometer (2) changes to 75 km/h (47 mph). > After which, the car uses the selected tolerance 5 km/h (4 mph) as long as signs passed are showing 70 km/h (43 mph).
The tolerance is followed until a road sign with a lower or higher speed is passed - then the car follows the new signed speed limit instead and the tolerance is deleted from the memory.
NOTE
The maximum selectable tolerance is +/- 10 km/h (5 mph).
Related information · Automatic speed limiter (p. 288)
· Limitations for automatic speed limiter
(p. 291)
· Road Sign Information* (p. 278)
Limitations for automatic speed limiter
Automatic speed limitation (ASL39) takes place using speed information from the Road Sign Information function* (RSI40) not from the speed limit road signs that the car passes. If road sign information cannot interpret and provide speed information to the driver support systems, the automatic speed limiter is set in standby mode and changes to normal speed limiter. In such cases the driver must intervene and brake to a suitable speed.
The automatic speed limiter will be reactivated when road sign information can once again interpret and provide speed information.
Related information · Speed limiter (p. 285)
· Automatic speed limiter (p. 288)
· Road Sign Information* (p. 278)
Cruise control
The cruise control (CC41) helps the driver maintain an even speed, which can result in more relaxed driving on motorways and long, straight roads in regular traffic flows.
Buttons and symbols for the function : Activates cruise control from standby
mode and resumes stored speed : Increases the stored speed : From standby mode activates
cruise control and stores current speed : From active mode deactivates/
changes cruise control to standby mode : Reduces stored speed
39 Automatic Speed Limiter 40 Road Sign Information RSI 41 Cruise Control
}} * Option/accessory. 291
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Marker for stored speed
The car's current speed
Stored speed
NOTE
In cars equipped with adaptive cruise control* (ACC42), it is possible to switch between cruise control and adaptive cruise control.
42 Adaptive Cruise Control
WARNING
· The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
· The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system.
· Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Using engine braking instead of the foot brake With Cruise Control, speed is regulated with less frequent application of the foot brake. On a downhill gradient it may sometimes be desirable to start moving a little faster and limit the acceleration by engine braking. In this
case the driver can temporarily disable foot brake application by Cruise Control.
To do so, proceed as follows:
Depress the accelerator pedal about halfway down and release. > Cruise Control will disengage its automatic foot braking and then uses engine braking only.
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270)
· Selecting and activating cruise control
(p. 293)
· Deactivating cruise control (p. 293)
· Standby mode for cruise control (p. 294)
· Set the stored speed for driver support
(p. 319)
· Change between cruise control and adap-
tive cruise control* in the centre display (p. 301)
292
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Selecting and activating cruise control
The cruise control function (CC43) must first be selected and activated in order to be able to regulate the speed.
In order to start the cruise control from the standby mode, the car's current speed must be 30 km/h (20 mph) or higher.
1. Press (1) or (3) to scroll to the symbol
for cruise control
(4).
> The symbol is grey cruise control is in standby mode.
2. When cruise control is selected press
the steering wheel button vate.
(2) to acti-
> The symbol is white cruise control is started and the current speed is stored as maximum speed. The lowest speed that can be stored is 30 km/h (20 mph).
Reactivating cruise control to the last stored speed When cruise control is selected press
the steering wheel button to activate.
> The cruise control markings and symbols in the driver display change colour from GREY to WHITE -- the car will now follow the most recently stored speed again.
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow when the speed is resumed with the steering wheel button.
Related information · Cruise control (p. 291)
· Deactivating cruise control (p. 293)
· Standby mode for cruise control (p. 294)
Deactivating cruise control
Cruise control (CC44) can be deactivated and switched off.
1. Press the steering wheel button (2). > The symbol and indicators turn grey cruise control is set in standby mode.
2. Press the steering wheel button (1) or (3) to change to another function. > The driver display's symbol and indicator for cruise control (4) are switched off which deletes the stored maximum speed.
43 Cruise Control
44 Cruise Control
}}
293
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Related information · Cruise control (p. 291)
· Change between cruise control and adap-
tive cruise control* in the centre display (p. 301)
· Selecting and activating cruise control
(p. 293)
· Standby mode for cruise control (p. 294)
Standby mode for cruise control
Cruise control (CC45) can be deactivated and set in standby mode. This can take place due to driver intervention or automatically. Standby mode means that the function is selected in the driver display but not activated. In this case, cruise control does not regulate speed.
Standby mode on driver intervention Cruise control is deactivated and set to standby mode if any of the following occur:
· The foot brake is used.
· The gear selector is moved to N position.
· The clutch pedal is held depressed for
longer than 1 minute.
· The driver maintains a speed higher than
the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then control the speed himself/herself.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic standby mode Activation of automatic standby mode can be due to one of the following:
· The wheels are losing traction.
· The engine speed is too low/high.
· Brake temperature is too high.
· Speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph).
The driver must then control the speed himself/herself.
Related information · Cruise control (p. 291)
· Selecting and activating cruise control
(p. 293)
· Deactivating cruise control (p. 293)
45 Cruise Control 294
* Option/accessory.
Adaptive cruise control*46
The adaptive cruise control (ACC47) can help the driver to maintain a constant speed, combined with a preset time interval to the vehicle ahead.
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the vehicle ahead. An adaptive cruise control can provide a more relaxing driving experience on long journeys on motorways and long straight main roads in smooth traffic flows. The driver selects the desired speed and a time interval to the vehicle ahead. If the camera and radar unit detects a slower vehicle in front of the car, the speed is adapted automatically via the preset time interval to the vehicle.
When the road is clear again the car returns to the selected speed.
The adaptive cruise control aims to:
· regulate the speed smoothly. In situations
that demand sudden braking the driver must brake himself/herself. This applies in cases of large speed differences or if the vehicle in front brakes suddenly. Due to the limitations of the radar unit, braking may come unexpectedly or not at all.
· follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane
at a time interval set by the driver. If the radar unit cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the speed set and stored by the driver. This also takes place if the speed of the vehicle ahead increases and exceeds the stored speed.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
· The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
· The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system.
· Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of driver support components must only be performed at a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
46 This function can come as either standard or an option depending on the market. 47 Adaptive Cruise Control
}} * Option/accessory. 295
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270)
· Controls for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 296)
· Display mode for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 297)
· Selecting and activating adaptive cruise
control* (p. 298)
· Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 301)
· Symbols and messages for adaptive
cruise control* (p. 303)
· Warning from driver support in the event
of a collision risk (p. 318)
· Set time interval to vehicle ahead (p. 320)
· Set the stored speed for driver support
(p. 319)
· Automatic braking with driver support
(p. 322)
· Change of target with driver support
(p. 319)
· Overtaking Assistance* (p. 317)
Controls for adaptive cruise control*48
A summary of how adaptive cruise control (ACC49) is controlled using the left-hand keypad on the steering wheel and how the function is shown in the display.
: From standby mode - activates and stores the current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/ changes to standby mode
: Activates the function from standby mode and resumes stored speed
: Increases the stored speed : Reduces stored speed
Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead
Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead
Target vehicle indicator: The function has detected and is following a target vehicle at the preset time interval
Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead
Related information · Adaptive cruise control* (p. 295)
· Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 301)
48 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. 49 Adaptive Cruise Control
296
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Display mode for adaptive cruise control*50
The following image example shows how Adaptive cruise control (ACC51) can be shown in the display in the different context. Speed
Indication of speeds Stored speed Speed of vehicle ahead Current speed of your car
Time interval The time interval is only adjusted to the vehicle ahead by the Adaptive cruise control when the distance symbol shows two vehicles. At the same time a speed range is marked.
When driving In the following illustrative example, the road sign information* (RSI52) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).
(68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow.
The previous illustration shows that the adaptive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the same time is following a vehicle ahead which is keeping the same speed. Related information
· Adaptive cruise control* (p. 295) · Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 301)
The previous illustration shows that the adaptive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h
50 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. 51 Adaptive Cruise Control 52 Road Sign Information
* Option/accessory. 297
DRIVER SUPPORT
Selecting and activating adaptive cruise control*53
Adaptive cruise control (ACC54) must first be selected and then activated to enable it to control speed and distance.
To start the function requires the following:
· The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
· There must be a vehicle (the "target vehi-
cle") within reasonable distance in front of the car, or the current speed must be at least 15 km/h (9 mph).
· For cars with manual gearbox. Speed
must be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).
1. Press the steering wheel button (2) or (3) to scroll to the adaptive cruise control symbol (4).
> The symbol is grey the adaptive cruise control is in standby mode.
2. When speed limiter is selected press the steering wheel button (1) to activate.
> The symbol is white the speed limiter is started and the current speed is stored as maximum speed.
Reactivating adaptive cruise control to the last stored speed When the adaptive cruise control is
selected press the steering wheel button to activate.
> The cruise control markings and symbols in the driver display change colour from GREY to WHITE -- the car will now follow the most recently stored speed again.
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow when the speed is resumed with the steering wheel button.
Related information · Adaptive cruise control* (p. 295)
· Deactivating adaptive cruise control*
(p. 299)
· Change between cruise control and adap-
tive cruise control* in the centre display (p. 301)
· Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 301)
53 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. 54 Adaptive Cruise Control
298
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Deactivating adaptive cruise control*55
The adaptive cruise control (ACC56) can be deactivated and switched off.
1. Press the steering wheel button (1). > The symbol and indicators turn grey the adaptive cruise control is set in standby mode. The indicator for time interval and symbol for target vehicle, if activated, are also switched off.
2. Press the steering wheel button (2) or (3) to change to another function. > The driver display's symbol and indicator for adaptive cruise control (4) are switched off which deletes the stored maximum speed.
WARNING
· With the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode, the driver must intervene and regulate both speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.
· When the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode and the car comes too close to a vehicle ahead, the driver may be warned of the short distance by the Distance Warning* function instead.
Related information · Adaptive cruise control* (p. 295)
· Selecting and activating adaptive cruise
control* (p. 298)
· Change between cruise control and adap-
tive cruise control* in the centre display (p. 301)
· Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 301)
Standby mode for adaptive cruise control*57
Adaptive cruise control (ACC58) can be deactivated and set to standby mode. This can take place due to driver intervention or automatically. Standby mode means that the function is selected in the driver display but not activated. Adaptive cruise control does not then regulate the speed or distance to the vehicle in front.
Standby mode on driver intervention The adaptive cruise control is deactivated and set in standby mode if any of the following occurs:
· The foot brake is used.
· The gear selector is moved to N position.
· The driver maintains a speed higher than
the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
· The clutch pedal is depressed for approx. 1
minute - applies to cars with manual gearbox.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
55 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
56 Adaptive Cruise Control
}}
* Option/accessory. 299
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
· With the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode, the driver must intervene and regulate both speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.
· When the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode and the car comes too close to a vehicle ahead, the driver may be warned of the short distance by the Distance Warning* function instead.
Automatic standby mode
WARNING With automatic standby mode, the driver is warned via an acoustic signal and a message on the driver display. · The driver must then regulate the car's
speed, apply the brakes as needed and maintain a safe distance to other vehicles.
Automatic standby mode may be engaged in the event of one of the following:
· One of the systems that Adaptive cruise
control is dependent on stops working, e.g. stability control / anti-skid (ESC59).
· The driver opens the door.
· The driver takes off the seatbelt.
· The engine speed is too low/high.
· One or more wheels lose traction.
· The brake temperature is high.
· The parking brake is applied.
· The camera and radar unit is covered by
e.g. snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/ radio waves are blocked).
· The speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and
ACC is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a stationary vehicle or an object, such as a speed bump.
· The speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and
the vehicle ahead turns off so that ACC no longer has a vehicle to follow.
· The speed is reduced to below 30 km/h
(20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual gearbox.
Related information · Adaptive cruise control* (p. 295)
· Selecting and activating adaptive cruise
control* (p. 298)
· Deactivating adaptive cruise control*
(p. 299)
· Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 301)
57 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. 58 Adaptive Cruise Control 59 Electronic Stability Control
300
* Option/accessory.
Limitations for adaptive cruise control*60
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC61) may have limitations in certain situations.
Steep roads and/or heavy load Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfaces. The function may have difficulty in keeping the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes - in which case, be extra attentive and ready to brake.
Do not use adaptive cruise control if the car has a heavy load or a trailer is connected to the car.
Drive mode unavailable Drive mode Off Road cannot be selected when the adaptive cruise control is activated.
WARNING
· This is not a collision avoidance sys-
tem. The driver is always responsible and must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle ahead.
· The function does not brake for
humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for low trailers, oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects.
· Do not use the function in demanding
situations, such as in city traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Related information · Adaptive cruise control* (p. 295)
· Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 395)
60 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. 61 Adaptive Cruise Control 62 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. 63 Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control*62 in the centre display
When the normal cruise control (CC63) is selected in the driver display, it is possible to change to adaptive cruise control (ACC64) in the centre display's function view.
Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view.
· GREEN button indication adaptive
cruise control is deactivated and normal cruise control is set in standby mode.
· GREY button indication normal cruise
control is deactivated and adaptive cruise control is set in standby mode.
A symbol in the driver display shows which cruise control is active:
Cruise control (CC)
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
A
A
A WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode
}} * Option/accessory. 301
DRIVER SUPPORT || Related information
· Adaptive cruise control* (p. 295) · Cruise control (p. 291)
64 Adaptive Cruise Control 302
* Option/accessory.
Symbols and messages for adaptive cruise control*65
A number of symbols and messages regarding the Adaptive cruise control (ACC66) can be shown in the driver display.
65 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. 66 Adaptive Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
}} * Option/accessory. 303
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Symbol
Message
The symbol is WHITE
Specification The car is maintaining the stored speed.
Adaptive Cruise Contr. Unavailable The symbol is GREY
Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.
Adaptive Cruise Contr. Service required The symbol is GREY
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Windscreen sensor
Clean the windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit's detectors.
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information · Adaptive cruise control* (p. 295)
304
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Pilot Assist*67
Pilot Assist can help the driver to drive the car between the lane's side markings as well as to maintain an even speed, combined with a preselected time interval to the vehicle ahead. Get to know Pilot Assist
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the vehicle ahead and detects side markings.
Camera and radar unit Distance readers Readers, side markings Pilot Assist helps to control your car and you may need to drive a few kilometres with Pilot Assist before you feel completely at home with the function. It is important to know
about all of the function's applications and limitations in order to safely use all of the advantages.
The Pilot Assist function is primarily intended for use on motorways and similar major roads where it can contribute to more comfortable driving and a more relaxed driving experience.
The driver selects the desired speed and a time interval to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist scans the distance to the vehicle ahead and the lane's side markings on the road surface using the camera unit. The preset time interval is maintained with automatic speed adjustment whilst the steering assistance helps to position the car in the lane.
Pilot Assist regulates the speed with acceleration and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being used to adjust the speed.
Pilot Assist strives to:
· regulate the speed smoothly. In situations
that demand sudden braking the driver must brake himself/herself. This applies in cases of large speed differences or if the car in front brakes suddenly. Due to the limitations of the camera and radar unit,
braking may come unexpectedly or not at all.
· follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane
at a time interval set by the driver. If the radar unit cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the speed set and stored by the driver. This also takes place if the speed of the vehicle ahead increases and exceeds the stored speed.
Position of the car in the lane When Pilot Assist helps to steer, it attempts to place the car halfway between the visible lane markings. For a smoother drive, it is a good idea to allow the car to find a good position. The driver can always adjust the position him/ herself by increasing the steering input. It is important that the driver checks to make sure the car is positioned safely in the lane.
If Pilot Assist does not position the car in an appropriate way in the lane, it is recommended to turn Pilot Assist off or switch to adaptive cruise control*.
67 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
}}
* Option/accessory. 305
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Steering assistance The current status of steering assistance is indicated by the colour of the steering wheel's symbol:
tance
· GREEN steering wheel indicates active steering assis-
· GREY steering wheel (as in illustration) indicates deactivated steering assistance.
Pilot Assist steering assistance takes into account the speed of the preceding car and the lane markings. The driver can at any time ignore the Pilot Assist steering recommendation and steer in another direction, e.g. to change lane or avoid an obstruction on the road.
If Pilot Assist cannot interpret the lane unambiguously, e.g. if the camera and radar unit does not see the lane's side markings, Pilot Assist temporarily deactivates steering assistance, but resumes it if the lane can be interpreted again - although the speed and distance control functions remain active. The steering wheel vibrates slightly when deactivated temporarily in order to alert the driver to the change.
WARNING
Pilot Assist steering assistance is automatically deactivated and is resumed without prior warning.
Round bends and when the road splits Pilot Assist interacts with the driver, who should therefore not wait for the steering assistance from Pilot Assist but should always be prepared to increase his/her own steering input, especially in bends.
When the car approaches an exit or if the lane splits, the driver should steer towards the desired lane so that Pilot Assist can detect the desired direction.
Hands on the steering wheel In order for Pilot Assist to function, the driver's hands must be on the steering wheel. It is also important for the driver always to carry on being active and alert when driving as Pilot Assist is unable to read all situations and the function may toggle between off and on without prior warning.
If Pilot Assist detects that the driver does not keep his/her hands on the steering wheel, the system gives a warning with a symbol and text message in the driver display in order to prompt the driver to actively steer the car.
If the driver's hands still cannot be detected on the steering wheel after a few seconds, the prompt to actively steer the car is repeated, supplemented by an acoustic signal.
If Pilot Assist cannot detect the driver's hands on the steering wheel after a further few seconds, the warning signal becomes intensive and the steering function is deactivated. Pilot Assist must then be restarted using the steer-
ing wheel button .
306
WARNING
· The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
· The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system.
· Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of driver support components must only be performed at a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270)
· Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*
(p. 310)
· Display mode for Pilot Assist* (p. 308)
· Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 313)
· Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 316)
· Controls for Pilot Assist* (p. 307)
· Warning from driver support in the event
of a collision risk (p. 318)
· Change of target with driver support
(p. 319)
· Set time interval to vehicle ahead (p. 320)
· Set the stored speed for driver support
(p. 319)
· Automatic braking with driver support
(p. 322)
· Overtaking Assistance* (p. 317)
Controls for Pilot Assist*68
A summary of how Pilot Assist is controlled using the left-hand keypad on the steering wheel and how the function is shown in the display.
Buttons and symbols for the function. : Switches from adaptive cruise control* to Pilot Assist : From standby mode - activates Pilot Assist and stores the current speed : From active mode - deactivates/ changes Pilot Assist to standby mode : Activates Pilot Assist from standby mode and resumes the stored speed and time interval : Increases the stored speed
68 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
}}
* Option/accessory. 307
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
: Reduces stored speed
Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead
Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead
: Switches from Pilot Assist to adaptive cruise control
Function symbol
Symbols for target car
Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead
Symbol for activated/deactivated steering assistance
Related information · Pilot Assist* (p. 305)
Display mode for Pilot Assist*69
The following image example shows how Pilot Assist can be shown in the display in different contexts.
Speed
Time interval Pilot Assist only regulates the time interval to the vehicle ahead when the distance symbol shows a vehicle (1) above the steering wheel symbol.
Pilot Assist steering assistance is only active when the steering wheel symbol (2) has changed from GREY to GREEN.
When driving In the following illustrative example, the road sign information (RSI70) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).
Indication of speeds. Stored speed Speed of vehicle ahead Current speed of your car
69 This function can come as either standard or an option depending on the market. 70 Road Sign Information
308
* Option/accessory.
The previous illustration shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow.
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since the lane's side markings cannot be detected.
DRIVER SUPPORT
The previous illustration shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow. Pilot Assist provides steering assistance as the lane markings can be detected.
Related information · Pilot Assist* (p. 305) · Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 313)
The previous illustration shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the same time is following a vehicle ahead which is keeping the same speed.
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since the lane's side markings cannot be detected.
The previous illustration shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the same time is following a vehicle ahead which is keeping the same speed.
Here, Pilot Assist also provides steering assistance since the lane's side markings can be detected.
* Option/accessory. 309
DRIVER SUPPORT
Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*71
Pilot Assist must first be selected and then activated to be able to control speed and distance and to give steering assistance.
Green steering wheel indicates that Pilot Assist is providing steering assistance. In order to start the Pilot Assist it is required that.
· The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
· The lane's edge markings must be clear
and must be detected by the car.
· There must be a vehicle (the "target vehi-
cle") within reasonable distance in front of the car, or the current speed must be at least 15 km/h (9 mph).
· The speed must not exceed 140 km/h (87
mph).
· The driver must keep his/her hands on the
steering wheel.
· There must be a vehicle (the "target vehi-
cle") within reasonable distance in front of the car, or the current speed must be at least 15 km/h (9 mph).
· For cars with manual gearbox. Speed
must be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).
1. Press (1) or (3) to scroll to the symbol for Pilot Assist (4).
> The symbol is grey Pilot Assist is in standby mode.
2. When Pilot Assist is selected press the steering wheel button (2) to activate.
> The symbol is white Pilot Assist is started and the current speed is stored as maximum speed.
Reactivating Pilot Assist to last stored speed When Pilot Assist is selected press the
steering wheel button to activate. > The cruise control markings and sym-
bols in the driver display change colour from GREY to WHITE -- the car will now follow the most recently stored speed again.
WARNING A significant increase in speed may follow when the speed is resumed with the steering wheel button.
Related information · Pilot Assist* (p. 305) · Deactivate Pilot Assist* (p. 311) · Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 313)
71 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
310
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Deactivate Pilot Assist*72
Pilot Assist can be deactivated and switched off.
Green steering wheel indicates that Pilot Assist is providing steering assistance. 1. Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The symbol and indicators turn grey Pilot Assist is set in standby mode. The indicator for time interval and symbol for target vehicle, if activated, are also switched off.
2. Press the steering wheel button (1) or (3) to change to another function. > The driver display's symbol and indicator for Pilot Assist (4) are switched off which deletes the stored maximum speed.
WARNING
· With Pilot Assist in standby mode, the
driver must intervene and steer, regulating both speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.
· When Pilot Assist is in standby mode
and the car comes too close to a vehicle ahead, the driver is warned of the short distance by the distance warning* function instead.
Related information · Adaptive cruise control* (p. 295)
· Selecting and activating adaptive cruise
control* (p. 298)
· Change between cruise control and adap-
tive cruise control* in the centre display (p. 301)
· Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 301)
· Temporary disabling of steering assistance
with Pilot Assist* (p. 312)
Standby mode for Pilot Assist*73
Pilot Assist can be deactivated and set in standby mode. This can take place due to driver intervention or automatically. Standby mode means that the function is selected in the driver display but not activated. In this case, Pilot Assist does not regulate the speed or distance to the vehicle in front, or provide steering assistance.
Standby mode on driver intervention Pilot Assist is deactivated and set in standby mode if any of the following occurs:
· The foot brake is used.
· The gear selector is moved to N position.
· The direction indicators are used for
longer than 1 minute.
· The driver maintains a speed higher than
the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
· The clutch pedal is depressed for
approx. 1 minute - applies to cars with manual gearbox.
72 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
}}
* Option/accessory. 311
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Automatic standby mode
WARNING With automatic standby mode, the driver is warned via an acoustic signal and a message on the driver display.
· The driver must then regulate the car's
speed, apply the brakes as needed and maintain a safe distance to other vehicles.
Automatic standby mode may be engaged in the event of one of the following.
· One of the systems that Pilot Assist is
dependent on stops working, e.g. stability control / anti-skid 74.
· Hands not holding the steering wheel. · The driver opens the door. · The driver takes off the seatbelt. · The engine speed is too low/high. · One or more wheels lose traction. · The brake temperature is high. · The parking brake is applied. · The camera and radar unit is covered by
e.g. snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/ radio waves are blocked).
· The speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and
Pilot Assist is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a stationary vehicle or an object, such as a speed bump.
· The speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and
the vehicle ahead turns off so that Pilot Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow.
· The speed is reduced to below 30 km/h
(20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual gearbox.
Related information · Pilot Assist* (p. 305)
· Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*
(p. 310)
· Deactivate Pilot Assist* (p. 311)
· Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 313)
73 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. 74 Electronic Stability Control 75 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
Temporary disabling of steering assistance with Pilot Assist*75
Pilot Assist steering assistance can be temporarily disabled and resumed without prior warning. When the direction indicators are used, Pilot Assist steering assistance is temporarily disengaged. When the direction indicator is switched off, steering assistance is reactivated automatically if the lane's edge markings can still be detected.
If Pilot Assist is unable to interpret the lane clearly, e.g. if the camera or radar unit is unable to see the side markings for the lane, Pilot Assist temporarily disables steering assistance speed and distance regulation functions remain active. Steering assistance is resumed when the lane can be interpreted again. In these situations, slight vibration in the steering wheel may alert the driver to the fact that steering assistance has been deactivated temporarily.
Related information · Pilot Assist* (p. 305)
· Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*
(p. 310)
312
* Option/accessory.
· Deactivate Pilot Assist* (p. 311) · Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 313)
Limitations of Pilot Assist*76
The Pilot Assist function may have limitations in certain situations. The Pilot Assist function is an aid which can help the driver in many situations. But the driver is at all times responsible for maintaining a safe distance to surrounding objects and a correct position in the lane.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
In certain situations, Pilot Assist steering assistance may have difficulty helping the driver in the right way or it may be automatically deactivated - in which case, the use of Pilot Assist is not recommended. Examples of such situations may be that:
· the lane markings are unclear, worn,
missing, or they cross each other, or if there are several sets of lane markings.
· the lane division is changed, e.g. when
the lanes split or merge, as well as on slip roads.
· at roadworks and sudden changes in
the roadway, e.g. when the lines may stop marking the correct route.
· edges or other lines than lane markings
are present on or near the road, e.g. kerbs, joints or repairs to the road surface, edges of barriers, roadside edges or strong shadows.
· the lane is narrow or winding.
· the lane contains ridges or holes.
· weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain,
snow or fog or slush or impaired view
76 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
}} * Option/accessory. 313
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
with poor light conditions, back-light-
ing, wet road surface etc.
The driver should also note that Pilot Assist has the following limitations:
· High kerbs, roadside barriers, tempo-
rary obstacles (traffic cones, safety barriers, etc.) are not detected. Alternatively, they may be detected incorrectly as lane markings, with a subsequent risk of contact between the car and such obstacles. The driver must ensure him/herself that the car is at a suitable distance from such obstacles.
· The camera and radar sensor does not
have the capacity to detect all oncoming objects and obstacles in traffic environments, e.g. potholes, stationary obstacles or objects which completely or partially block the route.
· Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians,
animals, etc.
· The functions steering assist is force
limited, which means that Pilot Assist cannot always help the driver to steer and keep the car within the lane.
· In cars equipped with Sensus
Navigation*, the function has the option of using information from map data, which may result in varied performance.
· Pilot Assist is switched off if the power
steering for speed related steering force is working with reduced power e.g. during cooling due to overheating.
WARNING Pilot Assist must only be used if there are clear lane lines painted on each side of the lane. All other use involves increased risk of contact with surrounding obstacles that cannot be detected by the function.
WARNING
· This is not a collision avoidance sys-
tem. The driver is always responsible and must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle ahead.
· The function does not brake for
humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for low trailers, oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects.
· Do not use the function in demanding
situations, such as in city traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads.
The driver always has the possibility of correcting or adjusting a steering intervention
imposed by Pilot Assist and can turn the steering wheel to the desired position.
Steep roads and/or heavy load Bear in mind that Pilot Assist is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfaces. The function may have difficulty in keeping the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes in which case, be extra attentive and ready to brake.
Do not use Pilot Assist if the car has a heavy load or a trailer is connected to the car.
NOTE
Pilot Assist cannot be activated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected to the car's electrical system.
Drive mode unavailable Off Road drive mode cannot be selected when Pilot Assist is activated.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations.
314
* Option/accessory.
Related information · Pilot Assist* (p. 305)
· Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 395)
· Speed-dependent steering force (p. 270)
· Drive modes* (p. 424)
DRIVER SUPPORT * Option/accessory. 315
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*77
A number of symbols and messages regarding Pilot Assist can be shown via the driver display.
Symbol
Message
Grey steering wheel symbol
Specification
Indicates deactivated steering assistance. When Pilot Assist provides steering assistance, the steering wheel is green.
Symbol for hands on the steering wheel The system cannot detect whether the driver has his/her hands on the steering wheel. Place your hands on the steering wheel and actively steer the car.
Windscreen sensor
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
Clean the windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit's detectors.
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
77 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
Related information · Pilot Assist* (p. 305)
· Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 313)
316
* Option/accessory.
Overtaking Assistance*
Overtaking Assistance can help the driver when overtaking other vehicles. The function can be used with adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist*. When adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist is following another vehicle and the driver indicates the intention to overtake by activating the direction indicator78, the systems help by accelerating the vehicle towards the vehicle ahead before the driver's vehicle reaches the overtaking lane.
The function then delays reducing speed in order to avoid premature braking when the driver's car is approaching a slower vehicle.
The function remains active until the driver's vehicle has cleared the overtaken vehicle.
WARNING
Be aware that this function can be activated in more situations than during overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator is used to indicate a change of lane or exit to another road the car will then accelerate briefly.
WARNING
· The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
· The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system.
· Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270)
· Use Overtaking Assistance (p. 317)
· Adaptive cruise control* (p. 295)
· Pilot Assist* (p. 305)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Use Overtaking Assistance
Overtaking assistance can be used with adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist*. There are a number of criteria if Overtaking Assistance is to be used. The following conditions must exist for Overtaking Assistance to be activated:
· there must be a vehicle in front (the "tar-
get vehicle")
· your car's current speed is
at least 70 km/h (43 mph)
· the stored speed must be high enough
for overtaking to take place safely.
To start the Overtaking Assistance:
Activate the direction indicator.
Use the left-hand direction indicator in a left-hand drive car right in a right-hand drive car. > Overtaking Assistance is started.
78 On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
}} * Option/accessory. 317
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
When using the Overtaking Assistance System, the driver should be aware that there may be undesired acceleration if the conditions suddenly change.
Some situations should therefore be avoided, such as if:
· the car is approaching an exit to turn-
off in the same direction as overtaking would normally occur.
· the vehicle ahead slows down before
the driver's car has crossed over into the overtaking lane.
· the traffic in the overtaking lane slows
down.
· a right-hand drive car is driven in a
county with left-hand traffic (or vice versa).
Situations of this kind can be avoided by temporarily setting adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist in standby mode.
Related information · Overtaking Assistance* (p. 317)
· Adaptive cruise control* (p. 295)
· Pilot Assist* (p. 305)
· Standby mode for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 299)
· Standby mode for Pilot Assist* (p. 311)
Warning from driver support in the event of a collision risk
The driver support systems of adaptive cruise control* and Pilot Assist* can warn the driver if the distance to the vehicle ahead suddenly becomes too short.
acoustic warning are activated to alert the driver that immediate intervention is required.
WARNING The driver support systems only warn of vehicles which their radar unit has detected hence a warning may not be given, or it may be given with a certain delay. Never wait for a warning. Apply the brakes when the situation requires.
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270) · Adaptive cruise control* (p. 295) · Pilot Assist* (p. 305)
Audio and symbol for collision warning
Acoustic signal in the event of a risk of collision
Warning signal in the event of a risk of collision
Distance measurement with the camera and radar unit
Adaptive cruise control and Pilot Assist use approx. 40% of the capacity of the foot brake. If the car needs to be braked more heavily than the driver support is capable of and the driver does not brake, the warning lamp and
318
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Change of target with driver support
The driver supports of adaptive cruise control* and Pilot Assist*, in combination with automatic transmission, have a change of target function at certain speeds. Change of target
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there may be stationary traffic in front. When the driver supports are following another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and changes target vehicle from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle the driver supports will slow down for the stationary vehicle.
WARNING
When the driver supports are following another vehicle at speeds in excess of approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the driver supports will ignore the stationary vehicle and instead accelerate to the stored speed.
· The driver must then intervene him/
herself and brake.
Automatic standby mode with change of target The driver supports are disengaged and set in standby mode:
· when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and the driver supports are uncertain whether the target object is a stationary vehicle or another object, such as a speed bump.
· when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and the vehicle ahead turns off so that the driver supports no longer have a vehicle to follow.
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270)
· Adaptive cruise control* (p. 295)
· Pilot Assist* (p. 305)
Set the stored speed for driver support
It is possible to set stored speed for the speed limiter, cruise control, adaptive cruise control* and Pilot Assist* functions.
: Increases the stored speed : Reduces stored speed Stored speed
}}
* Option/accessory. 319
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Change a set speed with short presses on the steering wheel buttons (1) or (2) or by pressing and holding them.
· Short presses: Each press changes the
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph).
· Press and hold: Release the button
when the speed indicator (3) has moved to the desired speed.
> The speed set after the last button press is stored in the memory.
Effect of the accelerator pedal If the driver increases the car's speed using the accelerator pedal before pressing the
steering wheel button (1), the speed stored will be the car's speed when the button is depressed, provided the driver's foot is on the accelerator pedal at the moment when the button is depressed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Possible speed
Automatic gearbox The driver support functions can follow another vehicle at speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph).
Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from almost stationary up to 140 km/h (87 mph).
Note that the lowest programmable speed is 30 km/h (20 mph) even though it is capable of following another vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph) cannot be selected/stored.
Manual gearbox the driver support functions can follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph).
Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 140 km/h (87 mph).
The lowest programmable speed is 30 km/h (20 mph) the maximum speed is 200 km/h (125 mph).
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270)
· Speed limiter (p. 285)
· Cruise control (p. 291)
· Adaptive cruise control* (p. 295)
· Pilot Assist* (p. 305)
Set time interval to vehicle ahead
It is possible to set the time interval to the vehicle ahead to be maintained by the adaptive cruise control* and Pilot Assist* functions.
Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the driver display as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line represents about 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.
NOTE
When the symbol in the driver display shows a car and a steering wheel, Pilot Assist follows a vehicle in front at a preset time gap.
When only one steering wheel is shown, there is no vehicle within a reasonable distance ahead.
320
* Option/accessory.
NOTE When the symbol in the driver display shows two cars, adaptive cruise control is following the vehicle in front at a pre-set time interval. When only one car is shown, there is no vehicle within a reasonable distance ahead.
Control for time interval. Decrease time interval Increase time interval Distance indicator
Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to increase or decrease the time interval. > The distance indicator (3) shows the current time interval.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time interval to vary significantly in certain situations in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front smoothly and comfortably. At low speed, when the distances are short, the adaptive cruise control increases the time interval slightly.
NOTE
· The higher the speed the longer the
calculated distance in metres for a given time interval.
· Only use the time intervals permitted
by local traffic regulations.
· If the driver supports do not seem to
respond with a speed increase when activated, it may be because the time window to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the set time window.
WARNING
· Only use a time window that suits the
current traffic conditions.
· The driver should be aware that short
time windows limit the amount of time available to react and take action in an unexpected traffic situation.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information · Drive modes when using time interval to
vehicles (p. 322)
· Driving support systems (p. 270) · Adaptive cruise control* (p. 295) · Pilot Assist* (p. 305)
* Option/accessory. 321
DRIVER SUPPORT
Drive modes when using time interval to vehicles
The driver can select different driving styles for how driver support should maintain the preset time interval to the vehicle ahead. Selection is made via the drive mode control DRIVE MODE.
Select one of the following options:
· Eco The driver support focuses on good
fuel economy, which means longer time interval to the vehicle ahead.
· Comfort The driver support focuses on
following the set time interval to the vehicle ahead as smoothly as possible.
· Dynamic* The driver support focuses on
following the set time interval to the vehicle ahead more closely, which in certain cases may mean heavier acceleration and braking.
Related information · Set time interval to vehicle ahead (p. 320)
· Driving support systems (p. 270)
· Drive modes* (p. 424)
Automatic braking with driver support
The driver supports of adaptive cruise control* and Pilot Assist* have a special brake function in slow traffic and while stationary. In certain situations, the parking brake is applied in order to keep the car stationary.
Brake function in slow queues and while stationary For shorter stops in connection with inching in slow traffic or at traffic lights, driving is automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the vehicle in front starts moving again then the driver support function is set in standby mode with automatic braking.
The function is reactivated in one of the following ways:
· Press the steering wheel button .
· Depress the accelerator pedal.
> The function resumes following the vehicle ahead if it starts moving forward within approx. 6 seconds.
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow when the speed is resumed with the steering wheel button.
WARNING Driver supports only warn of obstacles which their radar unit has detected hence a warning may not be given, or it may be given with a certain delay.
· Never wait for a warning or interven-
tion. Apply the brakes when the situation requires.
NOTE
The driver supports can hold the car stationary for a maximum of 10 minutes then the parking brake is applied and the function is disengaged.
Before the driver supports can be reactivated, the parking brake must be released.
322
* Option/accessory.
Cessation of automatic braking In some situations, automatic braking ceases on coming to a standstill and the function is set in standby mode. This means that the brakes are released and the car may start to roll - the driver must therefore intervene and brake the car himself/herself to keep it stationary.
This may take place in any of the following situations:
· The driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal.
· The parking brake is applied.
· The gear selector is moved to P, N, or R
position.
· The driver sets the adaptive cruise control
or Pilot Assist to standby mode.
Automatic activation of parking brake The Parking brake is applied if the function is holding the car stationary with the foot brake and:
· The driver opens the door or takes off
his/her seatbelt.
· The function has kept the car stationary
for more than approx. 10 minutes.
· The brakes have overheated.
· The driver switches the engine off.
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270)
· Adaptive cruise control* (p. 295)
· Pilot Assist* (p. 305)
· Brake functions (p. 409)
79 Lane Keeping Aid
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane assistance
The function of the Lane Keeping Aid (LKA79) is to help the driver to reduce the risk of the car accidentally leaving its own lane on motorways and similar major routes. Lane Keeping Aid steers the car back into its lane and/or alerts the driver with vibrations in the steering wheel. Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed range 65200 km/h (40125 mph) on roads with clearly visible side lines. On narrow roads the function may be unavailable, in which case it goes into standby mode. The function becomes available again when the road is wide enough.
A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane.
}}
* Option/accessory. 323
DRIVER SUPPORT ||
Lane assistance steers the car back into its lane.
applying a slight torque to the steering wheel.
· Warning activated: If the car is about to
cross a lane line, the driver is warned by means of vibrations in the steering wheel.
There is also an option where both steering assistance and warning are activated simultaneously.
NOTE
When a direction indicator/flasher is switched on, there are no steering corrections or alerts from lane assistance.
WARNING
· The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
· The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system.
· Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Lane assistance warns with steering wheel vibrations. Depending on settings, lane assistance acts in accordance with the following:
· Assist activated: When the car is
approaching a lane line, the function will actively steer the car back into its lane by
324
Lane assistance does not intervene
Lane assistance does not engage on sharp inside curves. In some situations, lane assistance allows lane lines to be crossed without intervening with either steering assistance or a warning e.g. when using the direction indicators or if the car is allowed to cut the corners in bends.
Hands on the steering wheel For steering assistance with lane assistance to work, the driver must have his/her hands on the steering wheel, which the system will continue to monitor.
If the driver does not keep his/her hands on the steering wheel, a warning signal is heard and a message encourages the driver to steer the car actively:
· Lane Keeping Aid Apply steering
If the driver follows the prompt to start steering, the function is set in standby mode and this message is shown:
· Lane Keeping Aid Standby until
steering applied
The function will then be unavailable until the driver starts to steer the car again.
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270)
· Activating or deactivating lane assistance
(p. 325)
· Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 326)
· Symbols and messages for lane assis-
tance (p. 327)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating or deactivating lane assistance
The Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) function (LKA80) is optional the driver can choose to activate or deactivate this function.
Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view.
· GREEN button indication the function is
activated.
· GREY button indication the function is
deactivated.
Related information · Lane assistance (p. 323) · Selecting assistance option for lane assis-
tance (p. 326)
· Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 326)
325
DRIVER SUPPORT
Selecting assistance option for lane assistance
The driver can select how the Lane Keeping Aid (LKA81) should react if the car leaves its lane. 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
in the centre display's top view.
2. In the event of Lane Keeping Aid Mode, select how the function should react:
· Assist the driver is given steering
assistance without a warning.
· Warning the driver is only warned by
steering wheel vibration.
· Both the driver is given a warning
both from the steering wheel vibrating and from steering assistance.
Related information · Lane assistance (p. 323)
Limitations of Lane assistance
In certain demanding conditions lane assistance (LKA82) may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such cases it is recommended to switch off this function. Examples of such conditions are:
· road works
· winter road conditions
· poor road surface
· a very "sporty" driving style
· poor weather with reduced visibility
· roads with unclear or non-existent side
markings
· sharp edges or lines other than the lane's
side markings
· as the steering servo for speed-dependent
steering wheel resistance is working at reduced power e.g. when cooling due to overheating.
The function is unable to detect barriers, rails or similar obstacles at the side of the carriageway.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Related information · Lane assistance (p. 323) · Speed-dependent steering force (p. 270) · Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 395)
80 Lane Keeping Aid 81 Lane Keeping Aid 82 Lane Keeping Aid
326
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for lane assistance
A number of symbols and messages regarding lane assistance (LKA83) can be shown
Symbol
Message
on the driver display. Here are some examples.
Specification
Driver support system
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA.
Reduced functionality Service required
Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.
83 Lane Keeping Aid
}} 327
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Symbol
Message
Lane Keeping Aid
Apply steering
Specification
The LKA steering assistance does not function if the driver does not have his/her hands on the steering wheel. Follow the instruction and steer the car.
Lane Keeping Aid Standby until steering applied
LKA is set in standby mode until the driver starts to steer the car again.
A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshopA.
Related information · Lane assistance (p. 323) · Display mode for lane assistance (p. 329) · Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 326)
328
Display mode for lane assistance
Lane assistance (LKA84) is visualised by symbols in the driver display depending on the situation.
Here are some examples of symbols and the situations in which they are shown:
Unavailable
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information · Lane assistance (p. 323) · Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 326)
Available
Unavailable -- the lane lines in the symbol are GREY.
The Lane assistance cannot detect the lane lines, the speed is too low or the road is too narrow.
Indication of steering assistance/warning
Available -- the lane lines in the symbol are WHITE.
Lane assistance is scanning one or both lane lines.
Steering assistance/warning - the lane lines in the symbol are COLOURED.
Lane assistance indicates that the system is giving a warning and/or attempting to steer the car back into the lane.
84 Lane Keeping Aid
329
DRIVER SUPPORT
City SafetyTM
City Safety85 can use lights, sound and a brake pulse warning to alert the driver to pedestrians, cyclists, larger animals and vehicles.
Function overview Acoustic signal in the event of a risk of collision Warning signal in the event of a risk of collision Distance measurement with the camera and radar unit
The function can help the driver avoid a collision when, for example, driving in heavy traffic, where changes in the traffic ahead coupled with inattentiveness can lead to an incident. City Safety then activates brief, heavy braking
and the car normally stops just behind the vehicle in front.
The function helps the driver by automatically braking the car in the event of an imminent risk of collision if the driver does not react in time by braking and/or swerving.
City Safety is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation. The function is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention. Automatic braking takes place only after or at the same time as the collision warning.
The driver or passengers are not normally aware of City Safety - it only intervenes in a situation where a collision is immediately imminent.
WARNING
· The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
· The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system.
· Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270)
· Subfunctions for City Safety (p. 331)
· Setting the warning distance for City
Safety (p. 333)
85 The function is not available in all markets.
330
DRIVER SUPPORT
· Detection of obstacles with City Safety
(p. 334)
· City Safety brakes for oncoming vehicles
(p. 338)
· Automatic braking in the event of an impe-
ded evasive manoeuvre with City Safety (p. 337)
· City Safety in cross traffic (p. 336)
· Limitations of City Safety (p. 339)
· Messages for City Safety (p. 342)
Subfunctions for City Safety
City Safety86 can help to prevent a collision or reduce the collision speed. The function consists of several subfunctions.
Ability to reduce speed If the speed difference between the driver's car and the obstacle is greater than the following specified speeds, the City Safety autobrake function cannot prevent a collision but it can mitigate the consequences of a collision.
Vehicles For a vehicle in front, City Safety can reduce the speed by up to 60 km/h (37 mph).
Cyclists For a cyclist, City Safety can reduce the speed by up to 50 km/h (30 mph).
Pedestrians For a pedestrian, City Safety can reduce speed by up to 45 km/h (28 mph).
Large animals In the event of a risk of a collision with a large animal, City Safety can reduce the car's speed by up to 15 km/h (9 mph).
The brake function for large animals is primarily intended to reduce the force of the impact at higher speeds and is most effective at speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph) but less effective at lower speed.
The steps of City Safety City Safety carries out three steps in the following order:
1. Collision warning
2. Brake support
3. Auto Brake
1 - Collision warning The driver is first warned of a potentially imminent collision.
City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles that are stationary or moving in the same direction as the car and are ahead. City Safety can also detect pedestrians, cyclists or large animals that are crossing the road in front of the car.
In the event of a risk of collision with a pedestrian, larger animal, cyclist or vehicle, the driver is alerted by means of a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warning. There is no brake pulse warning at lower speeds, sudden driver braking or acceleration. The brake pulse frequency varies according to the car's speed.
86 The function is not available in all markets.
}}
331
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| 2 - Brake support If the risk of collision has increased further after the collision warning then the brake support is activated.
Brake support reinforces the driver's braking action if the system considers that the braking is not sufficient to avoid a collision.
3 - Auto Brake The automatic brake function is activated last.
If in this situation the driver has not yet started to take evasive action and the risk of collision is imminent then the automatic braking function is deployed - this takes place irrespective of whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then takes place with full brake force in order to reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to avoid a collision.
The seatbelt tensioner can be activated in connection with the engagement of the automatic brake function.
In some situations, the action of Auto-brake may begin with light braking and then progress to full brake action.
When City Safety has prevented a collision with a stationary object, the car remains stationary in anticipation of positive action by the driver. If the car has been braked to avoid collision with a slower vehicle in front, its speed is reduced to match that of the vehicle in front.
NOTE On cars with manual gearbox, the engine stops when the Auto-brake function has stopped the car, unless the driver has managed to depress the clutch pedal beforehand.
The driver can always interrupt a braking intervention by firmly depressing the accelerator pedal.
NOTE When City Safety brakes, the brake lights come on.
When City Safety is activated and brakes the vehicle, the driver display shows a text message to the effect that the function is/has been active.
WARNING City Safety must not be used by the driver to change his/her driving style - the driver must not rely on City Safety alone and allow it to do the braking.
Related information · City SafetyTM (p. 330) · City Safety in cross traffic (p. 336)
· City Safety brakes for oncoming vehicles
(p. 338)
· Limitations of City Safety (p. 339)
· Seatbelt tensioner (p. 49)
332
DRIVER SUPPORT
Setting the warning distance for City Safety
City Safety87 is always activated, but the driver can select the warning distance for the function.
NOTE
The City Safety function cannot be deactivated. It is activated automatically when the engine/electric operation is started and remains switched on until the engine/electric operation is switched off.
The warning distance determines the sensitivity of the system and regulates the distance at which a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warning should be deployed.
To select warning distance:
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in the centre display's top view.
2. Under City Safety Warning, select either Late, Normal or Early to set the desired warning distance.
If the Early setting produces too many warnings, which could be perceived as irritating in certain situations, the Normal or Late warning distance can be selected.
When warnings are perceived as being too frequent or disturbing, the warning distance can be reduced, which reduces the total number of warnings and instead leads to City Safety giving a warning at a later stage.
The Late warning distance should therefore only be used in exceptional cases, as in dynamic driving.
WARNING
· No automatic system can guarantee
100% correct function in all situations. Therefore, never test City Safety by driving at people, animals or vehicles this may cause severe damage and injury and risk lives.
· City Safety warns the driver when
there is a risk of a collision, but it cannot shorten the driver's reaction time.
· Even if the warning distance has been
set to Early warnings could be perceived as being late in certain situations, e.g. when there are large differences in speed or if vehicles ahead suddenly brake heavily.
· With the warning distance set at Early,
the warnings will come more in advance. This may mean that the warnings come more frequently than at the warning distance Normal, but it is recommended since it can make City Safety more effective.
Related information · City SafetyTM (p. 330)
· Limitations of City Safety (p. 339)
· Rear Collision Warning* (p. 349)
87 The function is not available in all markets.
* Option/accessory. 333
DRIVER SUPPORT
Detection of obstacles with City Safety
City Safety88 can help the driver to detect vehicles, cyclists, large animals and pedestrians.
Vehicles City Safety detect most vehicles that are stationary or moving in the same direction as the driver's own car. This function can also detect oncoming vehicles and cross traffic in certain cases.
In order that City Safety shall be able to detect a vehicle in the dark, the vehicle's front and rear lights must be working and clearly illuminated.
Cyclists
Examples of what City Safety interprets as a cyclist -- with clear body outline and bicycle outline. Good performance requires that the system function that detects a cyclist must receive the clearest possible information about the body and bicycle outline, requiring the ability to identify the bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body plus a normal human pattern of movement. If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are not visible to the function's camera then the system cannot detect a cyclist. For the function to be able to detect a cyclist, he/she must be an adult and riding a bicycle designed for adults.
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support, but it cannot detect all cyclists in all situations and, for example, cannot see:
· partially obscured cyclists.
· cyclists if the background contrast for
the cyclists is poor.
· cyclists wearing clothing that obscures
the body outline.
· bicycles loaded with large objects.
Warnings and brake interventions could be late or not occur at all. The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed.
88 The function is not available in all markets. 334
DRIVER SUPPORT
Pedestrians
Examples of what the system regards as pedestrians with clear body outlines. Good performance requires that the system function that detects a pedestrian must receive the clearest possible information about the body outline, requiring the ability to identify the head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body plus a normal human pattern of movement. In order that it shall be possible to detect a pedestrian there must be a contrast with the background and this will be affected by such things as clothes, the background and the weather. With poor contrast the pedestrian may either be detected late or not at all, which may mean that warnings and braking are late or omitted.
City Safety can also detect pedestrians in the dark if they are illuminated by the car's headlamps.
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support, but it cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations and, for example, cannot see:
· partially obscured pedestrians, people
in clothing that hides their body contour or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm (32 in.).
· pedestrians if the background contrast
for the pedestrians is poor.
· pedestrians who are carrying larger
objects. Warnings and brake interventions could be late or not occur at all. The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed.
Large animals
Examples of what City Safety interprets as large animals - standing still or walking slowly and with clear body outline. Good performance requires that the system function that detects a large animal (e.g. elk and horse) must receive the clearest possible information about the body outline, requiring the ability to identify the animal directly from the side in combination with what is a normal pattern of movement for the animal. If parts of the animal's body are not visible to the function's camera then the system cannot detect the animal. City Safety can also detect large animals in the dark if they are illuminated by the car's headlamps.
}}
335
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support, but it cannot detect all large animals in all situations and, for example, cannot see:
· partially obscured large animals.
· larger animals seen from the front or
from behind.
· large animals that run or move quickly.
· large animals if the background con-
trast for the animals is poor.
· small animals such as dogs and cats,
for example.
Warnings and brake interventions could be late or not occur at all. The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed.
Related information · City SafetyTM (p. 330)
· Limitations of City Safety (p. 339)
89 The function is not available in all markets.
City Safety in cross traffic
City Safety89 can help the driver when turning and crossing the path of another oncoming vehicle at an intersection.
· the oncoming vehicle must have its head-
lamps switched on.
Related information · City SafetyTM (p. 330) · Limitations of City Safety (p. 339)
Sector in which City Safety can detect oncoming crossing vehicles.
For City Safety to detect an oncoming vehicle on a collision course, the oncoming vehicle must first enter the sector in which City Safety can analyse the situation.
The following further criteria must also be fulfilled:
· your car must be travelling at no less than
4 km/h (3 mph)
· your car must turn to the left in markets
with right-hand traffic (or to the right in left-hand traffic)
336
Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic
In some cases City Safety may have difficulty helping the driver deal with collision risks due to oncoming cross traffic.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Related information · City Safety in cross traffic (p. 336) · Limitations of City Safety (p. 339) · Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 395)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Automatic braking in the event of an impeded evasive manoeuvre with City Safety
City Safety90 has the facility to assist the driver by automatically braking the car earlier when it is not possible to avoid a collision by only steering away. City Safety assists the driver by continuously attempting to anticipate whether there are "escape routes" to the side in case a slow or stationary vehicle ahead is discovered at a late stage.
Examples are:
· Stability control ESC intervenes in the
event of slippery driving conditions.
· If the oncoming vehicle is detected too
late.
· If the oncoming vehicle is obscured by
something.
· If the oncoming vehicle has headlamps
switched off.
· If the oncoming vehicle drives in an unpre-
dictable manner, for example, abruptly changes lanes at a late stage.
90 The function is not available in all markets.
Your car (1) "sees" no options for evading the vehicle ahead (2) and can therefore auto-brake earlier.
Your car Slow/stationary vehicle
}} 337
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| City Safety does not intervene with the autobrake function as long as the driver him/ herself has the opportunity to avoid a collision via a steering manoeuvre.
However, if City Safety anticipates that an evasive manoeuvre is not possible due to traffic in an adjacent lane, the function can assist the driver by automatically starting to brake at an earlier stage.
Related information · City SafetyTM (p. 330)
· Limitations of City Safety (p. 339)
City Safety brakes for oncoming vehicles
City Safety can assist the driver to use emergency braking for an oncoming vehicle in your car's lane. If an oncoming vehicle enters your car's lane and a collision is unavoidable, City Safety can reduce the car's speed with a view to reducing the violence of the impact.
Your car Oncoming vehicles
· your car's lane must have clear lane mark-
ings
· your car must be positioned straight in its
own lane
· the oncoming vehicle must be within your
car's lane markings
· the oncoming vehicle must have its head-
lamps switched on
· this function can only handle "front to
front" collisions
· this function can only detect vehicles with
four wheels.
WARNING Warnings and brake interventions due to an impending collision with an oncoming vehicle always come very late.
Related information · City SafetyTM (p. 330) · Limitations of City Safety (p. 339)
For this function to work, the following criteria must be met:
· your car must be travelling at more than
4 km/h (3 mph)
· the road section must be straight
338
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of City Safety
The City Safety91 function may have limitations in certain situations.
Surroundings
Low objects Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for projecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bonnet limit the function.
Skidding On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the capacity of City Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations, the anti-lock brakes and the stability control ESC92 are designed to give the best possible braking force with maintained stability.
Oncoming light The visual warning signal in the windscreen may be difficult to notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are being worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead.
Heat In the event of high passenger compartment temperature, caused by e.g. strong sunlight, the visual warning signal in the windscreen may be temporarily disengaged.
91 The function is not available in all markets. 92 Electronic Stability Control
The camera and radar unit's field of view The camera's field of vision is limited, which is why pedestrians, large animals, cyclists and vehicles in some situations cannot be detected, or they are detected later than anticipated.
Dirty vehicles may be detected later than others and if it is dark, motorcycles may be detected late or not at all.
If a text message in the driver display indicates that the camera or radar unit is obstructed, City Safety may be unable to detect pedestrians, large animals, cyclists, vehicles or road lines ahead of the car. This means that the functionality of City Safety may be reduced.
However, an error message is not shown in all situations where the windscreen sensors are obstructed. The driver must therefore take care to keep the area of windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit clear.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of driver support components must only be performed at a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Driver intervention Reversing When your own car is reversing, City Safety is temporarily deactivated. Low speed City Safety is not activated at very low speeds - below 4 km/h (3 mph) - and the system therefore does not intervene in situations where your car is approaching a vehicle ahead very slowly, e.g. when parking. Active driver Driver commands are always prioritised, which is why City Safety does not intervene or postpone warning/intervention in situations where the driver is steering and accelerating in a decisive manner, even if a collision is unavoidable. Active and aware driving behaviour can therefore delay a collision warning and intervention in order to minimise unnecessary warnings.
}}
339
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Important warnings
WARNING Driver supports only warn of obstacles which their radar unit has detected hence a warning may not be given, or it may be given with a certain delay. · Never wait for a warning or interven-
tion. Apply the brakes when the situation requires.
WARNING
· Warnings and brake interventions
could be implemented late or not at all if a traffic situation or external influences mean that the camera and radar unit cannot detect pedestrians, cyclists, large animals or vehicles correctly.
· For vehicles to be detected at night,
their headlamps and rear lamp cluster must be switched on and shining clearly.
· The camera and radar unit has a limited
range for pedestrians and cyclists. The system can provide effective warnings and brake interventions as long as the relative speed is below 50 km/h (30 mph). For stationary or slow-moving vehicles, warnings and brake interventions are effective at vehicle speeds up to 70 km/h (43 mph). Speed reduction for large animals is less than 15 km/h (9 mph) and can be achieved at vehicle speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph). The warning and brake intervention for large animals is less effective at lower speeds.
· Warnings for stationary or slow-mov-
ing vehicles as well as large animals
may be disengaged due to darkness or poor visibility.
· Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).
· Do not place, stick or mount anything
on the outside or inside of the windscreen in front of or around the camera and radar unit -- this can interfere with camera-dependent functions.
· Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of
the camera sensor may reduce its functionality, fully deactivate it or give incorrect function response.
340
WARNING
· The City Safety auto-brake function
can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed, but to ensure full brake performance the driver should always depress the brake pedal even when the car auto-brakes.
· The warning is only activated if there is
a high risk of collision you must therefore never wait for a collision warning.
· The warning and brake intervention for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).
· City Safety does not activates any
auto-brake functions in the event of heavy acceleration.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Market limitation City Safety is not available in all countries. If City Safety does not appear in the centre display's Settings menu, the car is not equipped with this function.
Search path in the top view of the centre display:
· Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Related information · City SafetyTM (p. 330) · Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 395)
DRIVER SUPPORT 341
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for City Safety
A number of messages regarding City Safety can be shown in the driver display. Here are some examples.
Message
Specification
City Safety Automatic intervention
When City Safety brakes or has done an automatic braking, several of the driver display symbols may be illuminated in connection with a text message being shown.
City Safety
Reduced functionality Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA.
A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshopA.
Related information · City SafetyTM (p. 330)
342
Steering assistance at risk of collision
The function Collision avoidance can help the driver reduce the risk of the car leaving its lane unintentionally and/or colliding with another vehicle or obstacle by actively steering the car back into its lane and/or swerving. The function consists of these subfunctions:
· Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
· Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision
· Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision*
After automatic engagement, the driver display indicates that this has occurred via a text message:
Collision avoidance Automatic intervention
WARNING
· The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
· The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system.
· Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
NOTE
It is always the driver who decides how much the car should steer the car can never take command.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270) · Activating or deactivating steering assis-
tance in the event of a collision risk (p. 344)
· Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
(p. 344)
· Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision (p. 345)
· Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision* (p. 346)
· Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 347)
· Symbols and messages for steering assis-
tance upon risk of collision (p. 348)
* Option/accessory. 343
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating or deactivating steering assistance in the event of a collision risk
The steering assistance function is optional the driver can choose to activate or deactivate it.
Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view.
· GREEN button indication the function is
activated.
· GREY button indication the function is
deactivated. This function is activated automatically each time the engine is started93.
NOTE
When the Collision avoidance function is deactivated, all subfunctions are switched off:
· Steering assistance at risk of road
departure
· Steering assistance at risk of oncom-
ing collision
· Steering assistance at risk of rear-end
collision*
Even though it is possible to deactivate the function, it is advisable for the driver to always have it activated since it improves driving safety in most cases.
Related information · Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 343)
· Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 347)
Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
Steering assistance has a number of subfunctions. Steering assistance in the event of runoff risk can help the driver and reduce the risk of the car accidentally leaving the road by actively steering the car back onto the road. The function has two activation levels on intervention:
· Steering assistance only
· Steering assistance with brake interven-
tion
Steering assistance only
Intervention with steering assistance
93 In certain markets, the setting used when the engine is switched off is reactivated. 344
* Option/accessory.
Steering assistance with brake intervention
driving the car, activation of the function will be delayed.
Related information · Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 343)
· Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 347)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision
Steering assistance has a number of subfunctions. Steering assistance upon risk of headon collision can help a distracted driver who does not notice that the car is heading into the opposite lane.
Intervention with steering assistance and braking
Brake intervention helps in situations where steering assistance alone is not sufficient. The brake force is adapted automatically depending on the situation at the time of road run-off.
The function is active within the speed range 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) on roads with clearly visible lane markings/lines.
A camera scans the edges of the road and the painted side markings. If the car is about to leave the side of the road, the car is steered back onto the road and if the steering intervention is not enough to avoid run-off, the brakes are also activated.
However, the function does not intervene with either steering assistance or brake intervention if the direction indicators are used. And if the function detects that the driver is actively
The function can assist by guiding the car back to its own lane.
Oncoming vehicles Your car At the same time as steering intervention is activated, collision warning for driver support is also activated. However, the brake pulse included in the collision warning will not be activated.
}}
345
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| The function is active within the speed range 60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly visible lane markings/lines.
If the car is about to leave its own lane while an oncoming vehicle is approaching at the same time, the function can help the driver to steer the car back into its own lane.
However, the function does not intervene with steering assistance if the direction indicator is used. And if the function detects that the driver is actively driving the car, activation of the function will be delayed.
Related information · Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 343)
· Warning from driver support in the event
of a collision risk (p. 318)
· Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 347)
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end collision*
Steering assistance has a number of subfunctions. Steering assistance if there is a risk of rear-end collision can help a distracted driver who does not notice that the car is about to leave its own lane while an oncoming vehicle is approaching at the same time, either from behind or in the blind spot.
The function can assist by steering the car back to its own lane.
Other vehicle in the blind spot Your car If the car is about to leave its own lane while another vehicle is in the blind spot, or another vehicle is approaching rapidly in an adjacent lane at the same time, the function can help
the driver to steer the car back into its own lane.
The function can even assist if the driver intentionally changes lanes using direction indicators without noticing that another vehicle is approaching.
The function is active within the speed range 60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly visible lane markings/lines.
The lamps in the door mirrors flash during steering intervention, regardless of whether the BLIS94 function is activated. An acoustic signal can also be heard.
Related information · Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 343)
· BLIS* (p. 350)
· Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 347)
94 Blind Spot Information
346
* Option/accessory.
Limitations for steering assistance at risk of collision
In certain situations the function may have limited functionality and fail to intervene in the following cases, for example:
· for small vehicles, such as motorcycles
· if the majority of the car has steered into
the adjacent lane
· on roads/in lanes with unclear or non-exis-
tent lane markings
· outside the speed range 60-140 km/h
(37-87 mph)
· as the steering servo for speed-dependent
steering wheel resistance is working at reduced power e.g. when cooling due to overheating.
Other demanding situations can include:
· road works
· winter road conditions
· narrow roads
· poor road surface
· a very "sporty" driving style
· poor weather with reduced visibility.
In these demanding situations, the function may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such cases it is recommended to switch off this function.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Related information · Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 343)
· Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
(p. 344)
· Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision (p. 345)
· Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision* (p. 346)
DRIVER SUPPORT * Option/accessory. 347
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for steering assistance upon risk of collision
A number of symbols and messages regarding steering assistance may be shown in the driver display. Here are some examples.
Symbol
Message
Collision avoidance
Automatic intervention
Specification
When the function is activated, a message is shown to the driver indicating that the system has been activated.
Windscreen sensor
The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information · Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 343)
· Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 347)
348
Rear Collision Warning*95
The Rear Collision Warning96 (RCW) function can help the driver to avoid being hit by a vehicle approaching from behind. Drivers in vehicles behind can be warned about an imminent collision by the function flashing intensively with the direction indicators.
If, at a speed below 30 km/h (20 mph), the function detects that the car is in danger of being hit from behind, the seatbelt tensioners may tension the front seatbelts. The Whiplash Protection System is also activated in the event of a collision.
Immediately before a collision from behind, this function may also activate the foot brake in order to reduce the forward acceleration of the car during the collision. However, the foot brake is only activated if the car is stationary. The foot brake releases immediately if the accelerator pedal is depressed.
This function is activated automatically each time the engine is started.
WARNING
· The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
· The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system.
· Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270)
· Limitations of Rear Collision Warning*
(p. 349)
· Whiplash Protection System (p. 45)
95 Rear collision warning. 96 The function is not available in all markets. 97 Rear collision warning.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of Rear Collision Warning*97
In certain cases the Rear Collision Warning (RCW) may have difficulty helping the driver in the event of a collision risk. This can, for example, be if:
· the vehicle approaching from behind is
detected too late
· the vehicle approaching from behind
changes lane at the last moment
· a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is con-
nected to the car's electrical system - the function is then deactivated automatically.
NOTE In certain markets, RCW does not give a warning with the direction indicators due to local traffic regulations - in such cases, this part of the function is deactivated.
NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations.
}}
* Option/accessory. 349
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Related information · Rear Collision Warning* (p. 349) · Setting the warning distance for City Safety (p. 333) · Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 395)
BLIS*
The BLIS98 function is intended to help the driver detect vehicles diagonally behind and to the side of the car so as to provide assistance in heavy traffic on roads with several lanes in the same direction.
98 Blind Spot Information 350
Location of BLIS lamp
BLIS is a driver aid intended to give a warning of:
· vehicles in the car's blind spot
· quickly approaching vehicles in the left
and right lanes closest to the car.
Principle of BLIS
Zone in blind spot
Zone for quickly approaching vehicle
The system is designed to react when:
· your car is overtaken by other vehicles
· another vehicle is quickly approaching
your car.
When BLIS detects a vehicle in Zone 1 or a quickly approaching vehicle in Zone 2, the indicator lamp on the door mirror on the affected side illuminates with a constant glow. If the driver activates the direction indicator on the same side as the warning, the indicator lamp will change over from a constant glow to flashing with a more intense light.
* Option/accessory.
BLIS is active when the driver's vehicle is travelling at a speed above 10 km/h (6 mph).
If passing vehicles drive more than 15 km/h (9 mph) faster than the driver's vehicle, BLIS will not react.
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.
WARNING
· The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
· The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system.
· Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270)
· Activating or deactivating BLIS (p. 351)
· Limitations of BLIS (p. 352)
· Messages for BLIS (p. 353)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating or deactivating BLIS
The BLIS99 function can be activated or deactivated.
Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view.
· GREEN button indication the function is
activated.
· GREY button indication the function is
deactivated. If BLIS is activated when starting the engine, the function is confirmed by the door mirror indicator lamps blinking once.
If BLIS was deactivated when the engine was switched off, it will continue to be deactivated when the engine is next started and no indicator lights will then be illuminated.
Related information · BLIS* (p. 350) · Limitations of BLIS (p. 352)
99 Blind Spot Information
* Option/accessory. 351
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of BLIS
The BLIS100 function may have limitations in certain situations.
WARNING
· BLIS does not work on sharp bends.
· BLIS does not work when the car is
reversing.
Keep the surface indicated clean on both the left and right-hand sides of the car101.
Examples of limitations:
· Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
may reduce the functions and deactivate alerts.
· The BLIS function is automatically deacti-
vated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected to the car's electrical system.
· For good performance of BLIS, there
should be no bicycle rack, luggage carrier or similar mounted on the car's towbar.
NOTE This function uses the car's radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Related information · BLIS* (p. 350) · Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 395)
100Blind Spot Information 101 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
352
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for BLIS
A number of messages regarding BLIS102 can be shown in the driver display. Here are some examples.
Message
Specification
Blind spot sensor Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA.
Blind spot system off Trailer attached
BLIS and CTAB have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system.
A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. B Cross Traffic Alert*
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshopA.
Related information · BLIS* (p. 350)
· Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 356)
102Blind Spot Information
* Option/accessory. 353
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driver Alert Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function is intended to help make the driver aware that he or she is starting to drive less consistently, e.g. if the driver becomes distracted or starts to fall asleep. The objective for the function is to detect slowly deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily intended for major roads. The function is not intended for city traffic. The function is activated when speed exceeds 65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long as the speed is over 60 km/h (37 mph).
Driver Alert Control reads the position of the car in the lane. A camera detects the edge markings painted on the carriageway and compares the alignment of the road with the driver's steering wheel movements.
The car is being driven erratically in the lane.
If driving behaviour becomes noticeably inconsistent, the driver is alerted by this symbol in the driver display, combined with an acoustic signal and the text message Time to take a break.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation* and has the function Rest Stop Guidance activated, suggestions for an appropriate place for a break are also displayed.
The warning is repeated after a time if driving behaviour has not improved.
WARNING Driver Alert Control should not be used to extend a period of driving. The driver should instead plan for breaks at regular intervals and make sure they are well rested.
WARNING An alarm from Driver Alert Control should be taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her own condition. If the alarm sounds or you feel fatigued: · Stop the car safely as soon as possible
and rest. Studies have shown that it is just as dangerous to drive while tired as it is to drive under the influence of alcohol or other stimulants.
354
* Option/accessory.
WARNING
· The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
· The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system.
· Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270)
· Activating or deactivating Driver Alert
Control (p. 355)
· Select rest stop guidance in the event of a
warning from Driver Alert Control (p. 355)
· Limitations of Driver Alert Control
(p. 356)
Activating or deactivating Driver Alert Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function can be activated or deactivated. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Select My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert.
3. Select or deselect Alertness Warning to activate or deactivate the function.
Related information · Driver Alert Control (p. 354)
· Limitations of Driver Alert Control
(p. 356)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Select rest stop guidance in the event of a warning from Driver Alert Control
In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*, the driver can activate a guide that can automatically suggest an appropriate rest area when Driver Alert Control (DAC) issues a warning. It is possible to select whether the Rest Stop Guidance function should be activated or deactivated.
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.
2. Select My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert.
3. Select or deselect Rest Stop Guidance to activate or deactivate the function.
Related information · Driver Alert Control (p. 354)
· Limitations of Driver Alert Control
(p. 356)
* Option/accessory. 355
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function may have limitations in certain situations. In some cases the system may issue a warning despite driving ability not deteriorating, for example:
· in strong side winds · on rutted road surfaces.
WARNING In some cases, driving behaviour is not affected despite driver fatigue e.g. when using the Pilot Assist* function resulting in the driver not getting a warning from DAC. It is therefore important to always stop and take a break at the slightest feeling of fatigue, regardless of whether the function has given a warning.
NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Related information · Driver Alert Control (p. 354) · Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 395)
103Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing.
Cross Traffic Alert*103
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a driver support that supplements BLIS104 and is designed to help the driver detect traffic crossing behind the car when it is reversing. The auto-brake subfunction can help the driver to stop the car in the event of a risk of collision with an unobserved vehicle.
Examples of areas where Cross Traffic Alert can assist the driver to detect obstacles during reversing. The function is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In favourable conditions it may also be able to detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and pedestrians. The function is only active if the car rolls backwards or if reverse gear has been selected.
If the function senses that something is approaching from the side, this is indicated with:
· an acoustic signal - the sound is heard in
the left-hand or right-hand speaker according to the direction from which the object approaches.
· an illuminated icon in the Park Assist
System graphic on the screen.
· an icon on the Park assist camera top
view.
Illuminated icon for Cross Traffic Alert in the Park Assist System graphic on the screen. If the driver does not observe the warning from the function and a collision is unavoidable, the auto-brake function engages in order to stop the car, after which the driver display
356
* Option/accessory.
shows an explanatory text message on why the car was braked.
WARNING
· The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
· The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system.
· Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270)
· Activating or deactivating Cross Traffic
Alert* (p. 357)
104Blind Spot Information
DRIVER SUPPORT
· Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 358) · Messages for Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 360) · BLIS* (p. 350) · Park Assist* (p. 361)
Activating or deactivating Cross Traffic Alert*105
The driver can choose to switch off the Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) function.
Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view.
· GREEN button indication the function is
activated.
· GREY button indication the function is
deactivated.
The function is activated automatically each time the engine is started.
Related information · Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 356)
· Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 358)
· Messages for Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 360)
* Option/accessory. 357
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert*106
The Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) function with auto-brake may have limited functionality in certain situations. Brake intervention is active at speeds below 15 km/h.
WARNING
The auto-brake subfunction can only detect and brake for other vehicles that are moving not for stationary obstacles, a cyclist or a pedestrian, for example.
The function has a certain limitation the sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehicles or obstructions, for example.
Here are some examples of situations where the function's "field of vision" may be already limited and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be detected until they are very close:
The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.
In an angled parking slot Cross Traffic Alert may be completely "blind" on one side.
Blind sector.
Sector in which the function can detect/"see". However, as your car slowly reverses, the angle it makes with the obstructing vehicle/ object changes and the blind sector rapidly decreases.
105Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing. 106Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing.
358
* Option/accessory.
Examples of further limitations
· The auto-brake subfunction only detects
moving vehicles and therefore cannot "see" and brake for stationary obstacles, a cyclist or a pedestrian, for example.
· Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
may reduce the functions and deactivate alerts.
· CTA is automatically deactivated if a
trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected to the car's electrical system.
· For good performance of CTA, there
should be no bicycle rack, luggage carrier or similar mounted on the car's towbar.
NOTE
This function uses the car's radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Related information · Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 356)
· Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 395)
DRIVER SUPPORT * Option/accessory. 359
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert*107
A number of messages regarding Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) can be shown in the driver display. Here are some examples.
Message
Specification
Blind spot sensor Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA.
Blind spot system off Trailer attached
BLISB and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system.
A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. B Blind Spot Information System
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshopA.
Related information · Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 356) · BLIS* (p. 350) · Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 358)
107Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing. 360
* Option/accessory.
Park Assist*
The Parking Assistance System (PAS108) uses sensors to assist the driver when manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating the distance to obstacles through acoustic signals combined with a graphic in the centre display.
Screen view showing obstacle zones and sensor sectors. The centre display shows an overview of the relationship between the car and detected obstacles. The highlighted sector indicates the location of the obstacle. The closer the car symbol is to a highlighted sector box at the front/back, the shorter the distance between the car and detected obstacle.
The side sectors change colour as the distance between the car and an object is reduced.
The shorter the distance to the obstacle, the faster the signal sounds. Other sound from the audio system is muted automatically.
The acoustic signal for obstacles ahead and to the sides is active when the car is moving but stops after the car has been stationary for approx. 2 seconds. The acoustic signal for obstacles behind is also active when the car is stationary.
At a distance within approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from an obstacle behind or in front of the car, the tone is constant and the active sensor field closest to the car symbol is filled.
At a distance within approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) from an obstacle To the sides, the tone pulses intensively and the active sector field changes colour from ORANGE to RED.
The volume of the parking assistance signal can be adjusted while the signal is sounding by means of the [>II] knob on the centre console. Adjustment can also be performed in the top view's Settings menu option.
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE
Except in the sector nearest to the car symbol, audible warnings are only given for objects directly in the path of the car.
WARNING
· The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
· The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system.
· Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
108Park Assist System
}} * Option/accessory. 361
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270)
· Park Assist Pilot front, rear and along the
sides* (p. 362)
· Activating or deactivating the parking
assistance system* (p. 363)
· Symbols and messages for Park Assist
Pilot (p. 366)
· Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 364)
Park Assist Pilot front, rear and along the sides*
Parking Assistance System (PAS109) has different behaviour depending on which part of the car is approaching an obstacle.
Forwards
NOTE Parking assistance is deactivated when the parking brake is used or P mode is selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.
IMPORTANT When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember that these must not obscure the sensors the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an obstacle.
Backwards
109Park Assist System 362
The warning signal has a constant tone at less than approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from an obstacle.
The Parking Assistance System's front detectors are activated automatically when the engine is started. They are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph).
The measuring range is approx. 80 cm (2.5 ft) in front of the car.
The warning signal has a constant tone at less than approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from an obstacle.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
The sensors for reverse are activated if the car rolls backward without a gear engaged or when the gear lever is moved to reverse position.
The measuring range is approx. 1.5 metres (5 ft) behind the car.
When reversing with a trailer connected to the car's electrical system, parking assistance backward is deactivated automatically.
NOTE
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to be switched off manually in order that the sensors do not react to them.
Along the sides
The warning signal pulses intensively at less than approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) from an obstacle. Parking assistance side sensors are activated automatically when the engine is started. They are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph). The measuring range is approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) from the sides. However, the detection range of the side sensors increases significantly when the steering angle of the front wheels is increased, and obstacles of up to approx. 90 cm (3 ft) located diagonally behind or in front of the vehicle are detected when the steering wheel is turned.
Related information · Park Assist* (p. 361) · Sensor fields for parking assistance sys-
tem (p. 372)
Activating or deactivating the parking assistance system*
The Parking Assistance System (PAS110) can be activated or deactivated. The front and side parking assistance detectors are activated automatically when the engine is started. The rear detectors are activated if the car rolls backwards or when reverse gear is engaged.
Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view.
· GREEN button indication the function is
activated.
· GREY button indication the function is
deactivated.
In cars equipped with a park assist camera*, Park Assist Pilot can also be activated or deactivated from the relevant camera view.
Related information · Park Assist* (p. 361)
· Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 364)
* Option/accessory. 363
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of Parking assistance
The Parking Assistance System (PAS111) cannot detect everything in all situations and may therefore have limited functionality in some cases. A driver should be aware about the following examples of Park Assist Pilot's limitations:
WARNING
· The parking sensors have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
· Pay particular attention if there are
people and animals near the car.
· Bear in mind that the front of the car
may swing out towards oncoming traffic during the parking manoeuvre.
WARNING Pay additional attention while reversing when this symbol is shown if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is mounted and electrically connected to the car. The symbol indicates that
the parking assistance sensors rearward are switched off and will not warn of any obstacles.
IMPORTANT
Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and are then temporarily not detected by the sensors - the pulsating tone may then unexpectedly stop instead of changing over to the expected constant tone.
The sensors cannot detect high objects, such as projecting loading docks.
· In such situations, pay extra attention
and manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly slowly or stop the current parking manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of damage to vehicles or other objects since information from the sensors is not always reliable in such situations.
110 Park Assist System 111 Park Assist System
364
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning signals that are caused by external sound sources with the same ultrasonic frequencies that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, exhaust noises from motorcycles, etc.
NOTE
Since a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, towbar protrusion is included when the function measures the distance to an object behind the car.
Related information · Park Assist* (p. 361)
DRIVER SUPPORT * Option/accessory. 365
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot
Symbols and messages for Parking Assistance System (PAS112) can be shown in the
Symbol
Message
driver display and/or the centre display. Here are some examples.
Specification The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings for obstacles/objects.
Park Assist System Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
Park Assist System Unavailable Service required
A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message persists, contact a workshopA.
Related information · Park Assist* (p. 361) · Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 364)
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA.
112 Park Assist System
366
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park assist camera*
Park assist camera (PAC113) can assist the driver when manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating obstacles with a camera image and graphics in the centre display. The park assist camera is a support function which is activated automatically when reverse gear is selected or manually via the centre display.
Lines - activates/deactivates park assist lines
Towbar* - activates/deactivates the towbar park assist line*116
CTA* - activates/deactivates Cross Traffic Alert Objects/obstacles may be closer to the car than they appear to be on screen.
WARNING
· The parking sensors have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
· Pay particular attention if there are
people and animals near the car.
· Bear in mind that the front of the car
may swing out towards oncoming traffic during the parking manoeuvre.
Example of camera view. Zoom114 - zoom in/out
360° view* - activates/deactivates all cameras
PAS115 - activates/deactivates the parking assistance sensors
113 Park Assist Camera 114 The park assist lines are switched off when zooming in. 115 Park Assist System 116 Not available for all models and markets.
}} * Option/accessory. 367
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
· The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
· The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system.
· Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270)
· Park assist camera locations and surveil-
lance areas* (p. 368)
· Park assist lines for park assist camera*
(p. 370)
· Sensor fields for parking assistance sys-
tem (p. 372)
· Activate park assist camera (p. 374)
· Symbols and messages for Park assist
camera (p. 375)
· Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 395)
· Park Assist* (p. 361)
· Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 356)
Park assist camera locations and surveillance areas*
The Park assist cameras (PAC117) can display a composite 360° view and separate views for each of the four cameras: rear, front, left or right camera view.
368
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
360° view*
The "field of vision" of the parking cameras with approximate coverage area.
The 360° view function activates all parking cameras, whereupon the four sides of the car are shown simultaneously in the centre display, which helps the driver to observe what is around the car when manoeuvring at slow speeds. From the 360° view, each camera view can be activated separately:
· Press the screen for the desired "field of
vision" of the camera, e.g. on the surface in front of/above the front camera.
A camera symbol on the centre display's car symbol indicates which of the cameras is active.
If the car is also equipped with Park Assist System* then distance to detected obstacles is illustrated with fields in different colours.
The cameras can be activated automatically or manually.
Backwards
Objects shown in the centre display may appear slightly tilted -- this is normal.
Forwards
The backwards-facing camera is fitted above the registration plate.
The backward-facing camera shows a wide area behind the car. For certain models, part of the bumper can be seen as well as the towbar in some cases.
The forwards parking camera is located in the grille.
The front camera can be helpful on an exit road with limited visibility to the sides, e.g. when driving out of a garage. It is active at speeds up to 25 km/h (16 mph) - following which, the front camera is switched off.
If the car does not reach 50 km/h (30 mph) and the speed falls below 22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute after the forward-facing camera has been extinguished, the camera is reactivated.
117 Park Assist Camera
}} * Option/accessory. 369
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| The sides
The side cameras are positioned in each door mirror. The side cameras can show what is along each side of the car.
Related information · Park assist camera* (p. 367) · Activate park assist camera (p. 374) · Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 395)
Park assist lines for park assist camera*
The Park assist cameras (PAC118) indicate the position of the car in relation to its surroundings by displaying lines on the screen.
lel parking, reversing into tight spaces and when connecting a trailer.
The lines on the screen are projected as if they were at ground level behind the car and respond directly to steering wheel movements, showing the driver the path the car will take - also when the car is turning.
These park assist lines include the car's most protruding parts, e.g. towbar, door mirrors and corners.
NOTE
· When reversing with a trailer which is
not connected electrically to the car, the park assist lines on the display show the route the car will take not the trailer.
· The screen shows no park assist lines
when a trailer is connected electrically to the car's electrical system.
· Park assist lines are not shown when
zooming in.
118 Park Assist Camera
Example of park assist lines
Park assist lines show the intended route for the car's external dimensions with the current steering wheel angle - this can facilitate paral-
370
* Option/accessory.
IMPORTANT
· Remember, that with the rear camera
view selected, the monitor only displays the area behind the car. Be aware of the sides and front of the car when manoeuvring in reverse.
· The same applies vice versa - note
what happens to the rear parts of the car when the front camera view is selected.
· Note that the park assist lines show
the shortest route. Therefore, pay extra attention to the car's sides so that they do not go against/over something when the steering wheel is turned when driving forward or that the front sweeps against/over something when the steering wheel is turned when reversing.
Park assist lines in 360° view*
Towbar assist line*
DRIVER SUPPORT
360° view with park assist lines
With the 360° view, park assist lines are shown behind, in front of and at the side of the car (depending on the direction of travel):
· When driving forwards: Front lines
· When reversing: Side lines and reversing
lines
With front or rear camera selected, the park assist lines appear regardless of the car's direction of travel.
With one side camera selected, the park assist lines only appear when reversing.
Towbar with park assist line Towbar - activates the towbar assist line.
Zoom - zoom in/out. To use the camera for connecting a trailer:
}} * Option/accessory. 371
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| 1. Press Towbar (1). > The park assist lines for the towbar's intended path appear - the car's park assist lines will disappear at the same time.
Park assist lines for both car and towbar cannot be shown at the same time.
2. Press Zoom (2) when a more precise manoeuvring is required. > The camera view zooms in.
Related information · Park assist camera* (p. 367) · Park assist camera locations and surveil-
lance areas* (p. 368)
· Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 395)
· Towbar* (p. 457)
Sensor fields for parking assistance system
If the car is equipped with the Parking Assistance System (PAS119) then the distance is shown in the Parking Assistance Camera (PAC120) 360° view with coloured fields for each sensor that registers an obstacle.
Sensor fields backwards and forwards
The screen can show coloured sensor fields on the car symbol.
The fields for the sensors for forwards and reverse change colour as the distance to the
119 Park Assist System 120Park Assist Camera
372
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
obstacle decreases from AMBER through ORANGE to RED.
Field colour reverse
Distance in metres (feet)
Yellow
0.6-1.5 (2.0-4.9)
Orange
0.30.6 (1.02.0)
Red
0-0.3 (0-1.0)
Field colour forwards
Yellow Orange
Red
Distance in metres (feet)
0.60.8 (2,02.6) 0.30.6 (1.02.0)
0-0.3 (0-1.0)
For RED sensor fields, the pulsating acoustic signal changes over to a constant tone.
Sensor field to the sides Warning signals depend on the intended route of the car. When the steering wheel is turned, therefore, there may also be a warning for obstacles diagonally in front of or diagonally behind the car, not just straight ahead or directly behind.
Parking sensor sectors where obstacles can be detected.
Left-hand side front sensor field
Obstacle sector in the car's intended route forwards depending on steering wheel angle
Sector with RED field colour and intensively pulsing tone
Right-hand side rear sensor field
Obstacle sector in the car's intended route in reverse depending on steering wheel angle.
The colour of the side fields changes with reduced distance to the obstacle from AMBER to RED.
Colour of side fields
Distance in metres (feet)
Yellow
0.250.9 (0.83.0)
Red
00.25 (00.8)
In the case of RED sensor fields, the acoustic signal changes from pulsing to intensively pulsing.
Related information · Park Assist* (p. 361)
· Park assist camera* (p. 367)
· Park assist camera locations and surveil-
lance areas* (p. 368)
· Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 395)
* Option/accessory. 373
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activate park assist camera
The park assist camera (PAC121) is activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged or manually with one of the centre display's function buttons.
Camera view when reversing When reverse gear is engaged, the screen shows the 360° view if it or any of the side views was the last used camera view, otherwise the rear view is shown.
Camera view for manual camera activation
Activate the parking camera with this button in the centre display's function view.
The screen then initially shows the last used camera view. However, after each engine start, the previously shown side view is replaced by the 360° view and the previously shown zoomed rear view is replaced by the rear view.
· GREEN button indication the function is
activated.
· GREY button indication the function is
deactivated.
Automatic deactivation of camera The front view extinguishes at 25 km/h (16 mph) to avoid distracting the driver it reactivates automatically if the speed drops to 22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute, on the condition that the speed has not exceeded 50 km/h (31 mph).
Other camera views are extinguished at 15 km/h (9 mph) and not reactivated.
Related information · Park assist camera* (p. 367)
· Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 364)
· Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 395)
121 Park Assist Camera 374
* Option/accessory.
Symbols and messages for Park assist camera
Symbols and messages for Park assist camera (PAC122) can be shown in the driver dis-
Symbol
Message
play and/or the centre display. Here are some examples.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Specification
The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings and field marks for obstacles/objects.
The camera is disengaged.
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Park Assist System Unavailable Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA.
A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
122Park Assist Camera
}} 375
DRIVER SUPPORT || A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message persists, contact a workshopA. Related information
· Park assist camera* (p. 367) · Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 395)
376
* Option/accessory.
Park Assist Pilot*
Park Assist Pilot (PAP123) can assist the driver to manoeuvre the car while parking. The function can also assist with steering when driving out from parallel parking. The function first checks if a space is large enough and if so then assists the driver to steer the car into the space.
The centre display indicates with symbols, graphics and text the various operations to be carried out and when to do so.
WARNING
· The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
· The driver is advised to read all sec-
tions in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system.
· Driver support functions are not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270)
· Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot*
(p. 378)
· Using Park Assist Pilot* (p. 379)
DRIVER SUPPORT
· Leaving parallel parking with Park Assist
Pilot* (p. 382)
· Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 382) · Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 385)
123Park Assist Pilot
* Option/accessory. 377
DRIVER SUPPORT
Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot*
Park Assist Pilot (PAP124) can be used for both parallel and perpendicular parking. Parallel parking
Perpendicular parking
Related information · Park Assist Pilot* (p. 377)
· Leaving parallel parking with Park Assist
Pilot* (p. 382)
The principal of parallel parking.
The function parks the car using the following steps:
1. A parking space is identified and measured.
2. The car is reversed into the space.
3. The car is positioned in the space by means of driving forward/backward.
With the Park Out function, a parallel-parked car can also get help from the function with leaving the parking space.
Principle for perpendicular parking.
The function parks the car using the following steps:
1. A parking space is identified and measured.
2. The car is reversed into the space and then positioned in the space by means of driving forward/backward.
NOTE
When leaving a parking space, the Park Out function must only be used for a parallel-parked car - it does not work for a perpendicular-parked car.
124Park Assist Pilot 378
* Option/accessory.
Using Park Assist Pilot*
Park Assist Pilot (PAP125) helps the driver park via three steps. The function can also help the driver to leave a parking space. This function measures space and steers the car the driver's job is to:
· keep an eye on what is happening around
the car
· follow the instructions in the centre dis-
play
· select a gear (reverse/forward) an
acoustic signal indicates when the driver should change gear
· regulate and maintain a safe speed
· brake and stop.
Symbols, graphic and/or text appear on the centre display when the different steps are to be performed.
The function can be activated if the following criteria are met once the engine has been started:
· No trailer is attached to the car
· Speed is lower than 30 km/h (20 mph).
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE
The distance between the car and parking spaces should be 0.51.5 metres (1.65.0 ft) while the function is searching for a parking space.
Parking with Park Assist Pilot The function parks the car using the following steps:
1. A parking space is identified and measured.
2. The car is reversed into the space.
3. The car is positioned into the space - the system may then request that the driver changes gear and brakes.
Find and measure parking spaces The function can be activated in the centre display's function view.
It can also be accessed from the camera views.
· GREEN button indication the function is
activated.
· GREY button indication the function is
deactivated.
Principle for searching before parallel parking.
Principle for searching before perpendicular parking. Drive at a maximum of 30 km/h (20 mph) before parking.
125Park Assist Pilot
}} * Option/accessory. 379
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| 1. Tap on the Park In button in the function view or in the camera view.
> The function searches for a parking space and checks whether it is big enough.
2. Be prepared to stop the car when the graphic and message on the centre display state that a suitable parking space has been found.
> A pop-up window is shown.
3. Select Parallel parking or Perpendicular parking and select reverse gear.
NOTE
The function searches the area for parking, displays instructions and guides the car in on its passenger side. But if required the car can also be parked on the driver's side of the street:
· Activate the direction indicator to the
driver's side - then the system searches for a parking space on that side of the car instead.
Reversing in to the parking space
Principle for reversing into parallel parking.
Principle for reversing into perpendicular parking. 1. Check that the area behind the car is clear,
then engage reverse gear.
2. Reverse slowly and carefully without touching the steering wheel - and no faster than 7 km/h (4 mph).
3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the centre display.
NOTE
· Keep your hands away from the steer-
ing wheel when the function is activated.
· Make sure that the steering wheel is
not hindered in any way and can rotate freely.
· To achieve optimum results - wait until
the steering wheel is fully turned before starting to drive backward/ forward.
380
Positioning the car in the parking space
Principle for positioning during parallel parking.
Principle for positioning during perpendicular parking. 126Park Assist Pilot
DRIVER SUPPORT
1. Move the gear selector to the gear position as instructed by the system, wait until the steering wheel has been turned and drive forward slowly.
2. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the centre display.
3. Select reverse gear and drive slowly backwards.
4. Be prepared to brake the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the centre display.
The function is deactivated automatically and the graphics and message show that parking is complete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct the car's position. Only the driver can determine whether the car is properly parked.
IMPORTANT
The warning distance is shorter when the sensors are used by Park Assist Pilot (PAP126) compared with when Park Assist System uses the sensors.
Auto-brake during parking sequence If the parking sensors detect a vehicle or pedestrian within the intended route in front of
or behind the car during a parking manoeuvre, the car is auto-braked to stationary.
The driver display then shows a pop-up message where the driver can choose to cancel the parking manoeuvre by tapping on Cancel, or tap Resume to continue the parking sequence.
Proceed as follows after selecting Resume:
Check that there is free space around the car and follow the instructions in the centre display, such as:
To continue Gently accelerate away from object.
Related information · Park Assist Pilot* (p. 377)
· Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 382)
* Option/accessory. 381
DRIVER SUPPORT
Leaving parallel parking with Park Assist Pilot*
The Park Out function can help the driver to leave a parking space when the car is parallel parked.
NOTE
When leaving a parking space, the Park Out function must only be used for a parallel-parked car - it does not work for a perpendicular-parked car.
The Park Out function is activated in the centre display's function view or in the camera view.
· GREEN button indication the function is
activated.
· GREY button indication the function is
deactivated. 1. Tap on the Park Out button in the func-
tion view or in the camera view.
2. Use the direction indicator to select the direction in which the car should leave the parking space.
3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the centre display - follow the instructions in the same way as for the parking procedure.
Note the steering wheel can "spring" back when the function is completed - the driver may then need to turn the steering wheel back to the maximum steering angle in order to leave the parking space.
If the function considers that the driver can leave the parking space without any extra manoeuvring then the function will be stopped, even if the driver may consider that the car is still in the parking space.
Related information · Park Assist Pilot* (p. 377)
· Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 382)
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot*
The Park Assist Pilot (PAP127) function cannot detect everything in all situations and may therefore have limited functionality. A driver should be aware about the following examples of Park Assist Pilot limitations.
WARNING
· The parking sensors have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
· Pay particular attention if there are
people and animals near the car.
· Bear in mind that the front of the car
may swing out towards oncoming traffic during the parking manoeuvre.
IMPORTANT
Objects situated higher than the sensor detection area are not included when calculating the parking manoeuvre, which could cause the function to swing into the parking space too early such parking spaces should be avoided for this reason.
127 Park Assist Pilot 382
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Parking is discontinued A parking sequence will be discontinued:
· if the driver moves the steering wheel
· if the car is driven too quickly - above
7 km/h (4 mph)
· if the driver presses Cancel in the centre
display
· when the anti-lock brakes or the Elec-
tronic stability control are engaged - e.g. when a wheel loses grip on a slippery road
· as the steering servo for speed-dependent
steering wheel resistance is working at reduced power e.g. when cooling due to overheating
· when the parking sensors detect a vehicle
or pedestrian within the intended route in front of or behind the car during a parking manoeuvre, the car is auto-braked to stationary.
Where applicable, a message in the centre display states the reason for a parking sequence being discontinued.
IMPORTANT
Under certain circumstances, the function is unable to find parking spaces - one reason for this may be the fact that there is interference with the sensors from external sound sources which emit the same ultrasound frequencies as those with which the system works.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent measurement.
Driver responsibility The driver should bear in mind that the function is an aid not an infallible, fully-automatic function. The driver must therefore be prepared to interrupt a parking step.
There are also a few details to bear in mind while parking, e.g.:
· The driver is always responsible for deter-
mining whether the space selected by the function is suitable for parking.
· Do not use the function if snow chains or
a spare wheel are fitted.
· Do not use the function if cargo items are
protruding from the car.
· Heavy rain or snow may cause the system
to measure the parking space incorrectly.
· During the search and check-measure-
ment of the parking space, the function may miss objects positioned deep in the parking space.
· Parking spaces on narrow streets are not
always feasible, since the space required for manoeuvring may not be sufficient.
· Use approved tyres128 with the correct
tyre pressure - this affects the ability of the function to park the car.
· The function bases itself on the locations
of vehicles already parked nearby if they are inappropriately parked, your own car's tyres and wheel rims may be damaged by contact with the kerb.
· Perpendicular parking spaces may be
missed or offered unnecessarily if one
128"Approved tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted on delivery from the factory.
}}
383
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
parked car is protruding more than other
parked cars.
· The function is designed for parking on
straight streets not sharp curves or bends. For this reason, make sure the car is parallel to the potential parking spaces when the function measures the space.
Related information · Park Assist Pilot* (p. 377)
· Speed-dependent steering force (p. 270)
· Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 395)
384
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for Park Assist Pilot*
Messages for Park Assist Pilot (PAP129) can be shown in the driver display and/or the centre display. Here are some examples.
Message
Specification
Park Assist System Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Park Assist System Unavailable Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA.
A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshopA.
Related information · Park Assist Pilot* (p. 377)
· Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 382)
129Park Assist Pilot
* Option/accessory. 385
DRIVER SUPPORT
Radar unit
The radar unit is used by several driver support systems and has the task of sensing other vehicles.
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270)
· Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 395)
· Recommended maintenance for camera
and radar unit (p. 398)
· Type approval for radar device (p. 387)
Radar unit location The radar unit is used by the following functions:
· Distance Warning* · Adaptive cruise control* · Pilot Assist* · Lane assistance · City Safety · Steering assistance at risk of collision
Modification of the radar unit could result in its use being illegal.
386
* Option/accessory.
Type approval for radar device
Here you can find type approval for the car's radar units for adaptive cruise control* (ACC130), Pilot Assist* and BLIS*131.
Market
ACC & PA
BLIS
Symbol
Type approval
DRIVER SUPPORT
Botswana
Brazil
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
Modelo: L2C0054TR
4122-14-8645
EAN: (01)07897843840855
Este equipamento não tem direito à proteção contra interferência prejudicial e não pode causar interferência em sistemas devidamente autorizados.
03563-17-05364
130Adaptive Cruise Control 131 Blind Spot Information
}} * Option/accessory. 387
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Market
ACC & PA
BLIS
Europe
The United
Arab Emirates
(UAE)
Ghana
Symbol
Type approval
Hereby, Delphi Electronics and Safety declares that L2C0054TR / L2C0055TR are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU (RED). The original declaration of conformity can be accessed at the following link www.delphi.com/automotive-homologation. Frequency Band: 76GHz 77GHz Maximum Output Power: 55dBm EIRP The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety / 2151 E. Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA
Hereby, Hella KgaA Hueck & Co. Declares that the radio equipment type RS4 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: www.hella.com/vcc. Technical information: Frequency range: 24.05 ... 24.25 GHz Transmission power: 20 dBm (maximum) EIRP Manufacturer and Address: Manufacturer: Hella KGaA Hueck & Co. Address: Rixbecker Straße 75, 59552 Lippstadt, Germany
Registered No: ER37536/15 Dealer No: DA37380/15
Registered No: ER53878/17 Dealer No: DA44932/15
NCA Approved: 1R3-1M-7E1-0B7
388
Market Indonesia Jamaica Jordan
DRIVER SUPPORT
ACC & PA
BLIS
Symbol
Type approval
37295/POSTEL/2014 4927 Certificate number: 50459/SDPPI/2017 Country of origin Germany Certificate number: 53578/SDPPI/2017 Country of origin China PLG ID: 6051 This product contains a Type Approved Module by Jamaica: SMA "RS4". Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2014/255 Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD) Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2017/63 Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Malaysia
CID F 15000578
Morocco
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC NUMÉRO D'AGRÉMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014 DATE D'AGRÉMENT: 26/12/2014
}}
389
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Market Mexico
ACC & PA
BLIS
Symbol
Type approval
IFETEL: RLVDEL215-0299
Radar de corto alcance RS4 Hella KGaA Hueck & Co IFETEL: RLVHERS17-0286 La operación de este equipo esta sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Moldova
Nigeria
Connection and use of this communications equipment is permitted by the Nigerian Communications Commission.
Oman
390
Market
ACC & PA
BLIS
Symbol
Type approval
Russia
Serbia Singapore South Africa
011 14 011 17 DA 105753 DA 103238 TA-2014/1824 TA-2016/3407
DRIVER SUPPORT
}} 391
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Market South Korea
Taiwan Thailand
ACC & PA
BLIS
Symbol
Type approval
Certification No. MSIP-CMI- DPH-L2C0054TR
R-CMM-HLA-RS4
(A) ,
CCAB15LP0560T3
CCAB17LP0470T5
,,
;, , ,
.
392
DRIVER SUPPORT
Market Ukraine
ACC & PA
BLIS
Symbol
Type approval
Delphi
,
RACAM/SRR2
(
)
(
679 24
2009 .)
Delphi
: Delphi.
: 24,05 24,25
: 20 ( .) EIRP
HELLA GmbH & Co. KGaA
,
2014/53/ .
www.hella.com/vcc
: 24,05 24,25
: 20 ( .) EIRP
RS4 :
Vietnam
Zambia
}} 393
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Type approval for radio equipment
Market
Symbol
Type approval
Europe
Hereby, Volvo cars, declares that all radio equipment's are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU.
Japan
R 204-750001
This device is granted pursuant to the Japanese Radio Law and the Japanese Telecommunications Business Law. This device should not be modified (otherwise the granted designation number will become invalid).
For detailed information on type approval, go to volvocars.com/support.
Related information · Radar unit (p. 386) · Adaptive cruise control* (p. 295) · Pilot Assist* (p. 305) · BLIS* (p. 350)
394
* Option/accessory.
Camera unit
The camera unit is used by several driver support systems and has the task of for example detecting lane lines or traffic signs.
Related information · Driving support systems (p. 270)
· Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 395)
· Recommended maintenance for camera
and radar unit (p. 398)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations for camera and radar unit
The camera and radar unit has certain limitations which in turn also limit those functions that use the unit. A driver should be aware about the following examples of limitations.
Location of the camera unit
The camera unit is used by the following functions:
· Adaptive cruise control* · Pilot Assist* · Lane assistance* · Steering assistance at risk of collision · City Safety · Driver Alert Control* · Road Sign Information* · Active main beam* · Park Assist*
}} * Option/accessory. 395
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Common limitations for camera and radar Blocked unit
The marked area must be cleaned regularly and kept free from stickers, objects, shade film, etc. The camera unit is placed inside the upper section of the windscreen together with the car's radar unit. Do not place, stick or mount anything on the inside or outside of the windscreen, in front of or around the camera and radar unit this may interfere with camera and radar-based functions. This may result functions being reduced, being switched off completely or giving incorrect function responses. High temperature At very high temperatures the camera and radar unit can temporarily be switched off for 132An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
about 15 minutes after the engine is started so as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera and radar unit restarts automatically when the temperature has fallen sufficiently.
Damaged windscreen
NOTE
If not rectified it can lead to reduced performance for the driver support systems that use the camera and radar unit. This may result functions being reduced, being switched off completely or giving incorrect function responses.
The following is also applicable so as not to risk incorrect function for the driver supports that use the radar unit:
· If a scratch, crack or stone chip appears
on the windscreen in front of any of the "windows" for the camera and radar unit and covers an area of approx. 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or more, a workshop132 must be contacted so that the windscreen can be replaced.
· Volvo recommends not repairing cracks,
scratches or stone chips in the area in front of the camera and radar unit the entire windscreen should be replaced instead.
· Before replacing a windscreen, contact a
workshop132 to verify that the correct windscreen has been ordered and will be fitted.
· The same type of windscreen wipers or
windscreen wipers approved by Volvo must be fitted when the windscreen is replaced.
· When replacing the windscreen, the cam-
era and radar unit must be recalibrated by a workshop132 to ensure the functionality of all the camera and radar-based systems in the car.
Further limitations for radar
Vehicle speed The radar unit's ability to detect a vehicle ahead is greatly reduced if the speed of the vehicle ahead is very different to the speed of your own car.
396
Limited field of vision
The radar unit has a limited field of vision. In some situations another vehicle is not detected, or the detection is made later than expected.
DRIVER SUPPORT
vehicle that drives in between your car and the vehicle ahead.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane can remain undetected.
In bends, the radar unit may detect a different vehicle than intended or lose a detected vehicle from view.
Low trailers
dust storms and snow flurries. Under such conditions, the functions of camera-dependent systems could be significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings can also significantly reduce camera function when it is used to scan the carriageway to detect pedestrians, cyclists, large animals and other vehicles.
The radar unit's field of vision
Sometimes the radar unit is late at detecting vehicles at close distances - e.g. a
Low trailer in radar shadow
Low trailers can also be difficult for the radar unit to detect, or are not detected at all - the driver should therefore be particularly careful when driving behind low trailers when the adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist* is activated.
Further limitations for camera
Impaired vision The cameras have limitations similar to the human eye, i.e. may "see" worse in for example intense snowfall or rain, dense fog, heavy
}} * Option/accessory. 397
DRIVER SUPPORT
|| Further limitations for Park assist camera* Blind sectors
There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields of vision. In the park assist camera's 360° view* obstacles/objects may "vanish" in the gaps between the individual cameras.
WARNING Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it only looks like a relatively small part of the image is obscured, a relatively large sector could be hidden from view. An obstacle could thereby go undetected until the car is very close to it. Light conditions The camera image is adjusted automatically according to prevailing light conditions.
Because of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness and quality. Poor light conditions can result in reduced image quality.
NOTE
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on the rear of the car could obscure the camera's view.
Related information · Camera unit (p. 395) · Radar unit (p. 386) · Recommended maintenance for camera
and radar unit (p. 398)
· Park assist camera* (p. 367) · Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)
Recommended maintenance for camera and radar unit
In order that the camera and radar units shall function correctly, they must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
NOTE Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or no function.
Location of the parking sensors
398
* Option/accessory.
Related information · Camera unit (p. 395) · Radar unit (p. 386) · Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 395)
· Park assist camera* (p. 367)
Location of rear radar units. Keep the surface indicated clean on both the left and right-hand sides of the car.
· To ensure best possible functionality, the
surfaces in front of the sensors must be kept clean.
· Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in
the area of the sensors.
· Clean camera lenses regularly with luke-
warm water and car shampoo - be careful not to scratch the lenses.
IMPORTANT Maintenance of driver support components must only be performed at a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
DRIVER SUPPORT * Option/accessory. 399
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for camera and radar unit
Here are examples of some of the display messages and symbols regarding the camera and radar units that can be shown in the driver display.
Detector blocked If the driver display shows this symbol and the message Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual, this means that
the camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehicles, cyclists, pedestrians and large animals in front of the car, and that the car's camera-based and radar-based functions may be disrupted.
The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown, along with the appropriate action:
Cause
The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or covered with ice or snow.
Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera view.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals or camera view.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera and radar unit.
Strong oncoming light
Action
Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered road surface.
Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
No action. The camera unit is reset automatically in more favourable light conditions.
400
Defective camera If a camera sector is black and contains this symbol then it means that the camera is out of order.
The car's left-hand camera is out of order. A black camera sector is also shown in the following instances, but then without the symbol for defective camera:
· open door · open tailgate · folded-in door mirror.
Rear parking camera
WARNING Pay additional attention while reversing when this symbol is shown if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is mounted and electrically connected to the car. The symbol indicates that
the parking assistance sensors rearward are switched off and will not warn of any obstacles.
Related information · Camera unit (p. 395) · Radar unit (p. 386) · Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 395)
· Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)
DRIVER SUPPORT 401
STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the car
The car is started using the start button beside the steering wheel when the remote control key is in the passenger compartment.
Start button location.
WARNING Before starting: · Fasten the seatbelt. · Adjust the seat, steering wheel and
mirrors.
· Make sure that the brake pedal can be
fully depressed. The remote control key is not physically used when starting the car since it is equipped with support for keyless starting (Passive start).
To start the car:
1. The remote control key must be inside the car. For cars with Passive Start, the key needs to be located in the front part of the passenger compartment. With the option for keyless locking/unlocking* of the car, the key can be anywhere in the car.
2. Hold the brake pedal depressed1 fully. For cars with automatic gear changing, make sure that gear position P or N is selected. For cars with a manual gearbox, make sure that the gear lever is in neutral position or that the clutch pedal is depressed.
3. Press the start button.
NOTE
For diesel-engined cars, there may be a slight delay before starting is initiated.
When the engine is started, the starter motor works until the engine is started or until its overheating protection triggers.
Error messages If the Car key not found message is shown in the driver display when starting, place the remote control key by the backup reader. Then try to start the car again.
Backup reader's location.
NOTE
When the remote control key is positioned by the backup reader, make sure that there are no car keys, metal objects or electronic apparatus by the backup reader, (e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers). Several car keys close to one another by the backup reader may cause interference with each other.
1 If the car is moving, the engine can be started simply by pressing the button.
404
* Option/accessory.
IMPORTANT If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts wait for 3 minutes before making a further attempt. Starting capacity increases if the battery is allowed to recover.
WARNING Never remove the remote control key from the car while driving or during towing.
WARNING Always take the remote control key out from the car when leaving the car and make sure the car's electrical system is in ignition position 0 - especially if there are children in the car.
NOTE The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is done in order that the emissions system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the environment.
Related information · Switching off the car (p. 405) · Ignition positions (p. 406)
· Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 181)
· Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 455)
· Selecting ignition mode (p. 407)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Switching off the car
The car is switched off using the start button beside the steering wheel.
Start button location. To switch off the car: Press the start button - the car is switched
off. If the gear selector for cars with an automatic gearbox is not in position P or if the car rolls: Press the start button and hold it
depressed until the car is switched off. Related information
· Starting the car (p. 404) · Ignition positions (p. 406) · Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 181)
}}
405
STARTING AND DRIVING
· Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 455)
· Selecting ignition mode (p. 407)
Ignition positions
The car's electrical system can be set in different levels/positions and in this way make the different functions available. In order to facilitate the use of a limited number of functions with the engine switched off, the car's electrical system can be set in three different levels 0, I and II. These levels are described with the denomination "ignition position" throughout the owner's manual.
The following table shows the functions available in each ignition position/level:
Level Functions
0 · Odometer, clock and tempera-
ture gauge are illuminatedA.
· Power* seats can be adjusted.
· The power windows can be
used.
· The centre display is started
and can be usedA.
· The infotainment system can
be usedA.
In this mode, the functions are controlled by time and are switched off automatically after a short while.
I · Panoramic roof, power win-
dows, 12V power socket in the passenger compartment, Bluetooth, navigation, phone, ventilation fan and windscreen wipers can be used.
· Power seats can be adjusted.
· 12 V power sockets* in the
cargo area can be used.
· The infotainment system is
started automatically if it was running when the car was left.
Power is taken from the battery in this ignition position.
406
* Option/accessory.
Level Functions
II · The headlamps come on.
· Warning/indicator lamps illumi-
nate for 5 seconds.
· Several other systems are acti-
vated. However, heating in seat cushions and the rear window can only be activated after the car has been started.
This ignition position consumes a lot of current from the battery and should therefore be avoided!
A Also activated when the door is opened.
Related information · Starting the car (p. 404)
· Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 181)
· Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 455)
· Selecting ignition mode (p. 407)
Selecting ignition mode
The car's electrical system can be set in different levels/positions and in this way make the different functions available. Selecting ignition position
Start button location.
· Ignition position 0 Unlock the car and
store the remote control key inside the car.
NOTE To reach level I or II without starting the engine - do not depress the brake pedal, or the clutch pedal for cars with manual gear changing, when these ignition positions are to be selected.
STARTING AND DRIVING
· Ignition position I Depress the start
button and release.
· Ignition position II Press and hold the
button depressed for approx. 5 seconds. Then release the button.
· Back to ignition position0 To return to
ignition position 0 from position I and II press the start button.
Related information · Starting the car (p. 404) · Switching off the car (p. 405) · Ignition positions (p. 406) · Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 181) · Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 455)
407
STARTING AND DRIVING
Alcohol lock*
The function of the alcohol lock is to prevent the car from being driven by individuals under the influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be started the driver must take a breath test that verifies that he/she is not under the influence of alcohol. Alcohol lock calibration takes place in accordance with each market's limit value in force for driving legally. The car has an interface for the electrical connection of the different makes and models of alcohol lock recommended by Volvo. The interface facilitates alcohol lock connection, and gives the option of an integrated function including messages related to the alcohol lock in the car's main display. For information about a specific alcohol lock, please refer to the owner's manual from the respective alcohol lock manufacturer.
WARNING
The alcohol lock is an aid and does not exempt the driver from responsibility. It is always the responsibility of the driver to be sober and to drive the car safely.
Related information · Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 408)
· Before starting the engine with the alcohol
lock* (p. 409)
· Starting the car (p. 404)
· Ignition positions (p. 406)
408
Bypass of the alcohol lock*
In the event of an emergency situation or if the alcohol lock is out of order, it is possible to bypass the alcohol lock in order to drive the car. For deactivation via the alcohol lock, see supplier's manual. Related information
· Alcohol lock* (p. 408) · Before starting the engine with the alcohol
lock* (p. 409)
· Starting the car (p. 404) · Ignition positions (p. 406)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Before starting the engine with the alcohol lock*
The alcohol lock is activated automatically and is then ready for use when the car is opened.
To bear in mind In order to obtain correct function and as accurate a measurement result as possible:
· Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes
before the breath test.
· Avoid excess windscreen washing - the
alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an incorrect measurement result.
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the engine can be restarted within 30 minutes without a new breath test.
Related information · Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 408) · Alcohol lock* (p. 408) · Starting the car (p. 404) · Ignition positions (p. 406)
Brake functions
The car's brakes are used to reduce the speed or prevent the car from rolling. In addition to the foot brake and parking brake, the car is equipped with several automatic brake assist functions. These can assist the driver by not needing to keep his/her foot on the brake pedal when at a traffic light, when starting on an uphill gradient or when driving on a downhill gradient.
Depending on the car's equipment, the following auto braking functions are available:
· Automatic brake when stationary (Auto
Hold)
· Hill start assist (Hill Start Assist)
· Auto braking after a collision
· City Safety
· Hill descent control (Hill Descent Control)*
Related information · Foot brake (p. 409)
· Parking brake (p. 412)
· Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 415)
· Auto braking after a collision (p. 417)
· Help when starting on a hill (p. 416)
· City SafetyTM (p. 330)
· Hill descent control* (p. 436)
Foot brake
The foot brake is part of the brake system. The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If a brake circuit is damaged, the brake pedal may engage deeper. Higher pressure on the pedal will therefore be needed to produce the normal braking effect.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a brake servo.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine is running.
If the foot brake is used when the engine is switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and a higher pedal pressure must be used to brake the car.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy load the brakes should be relieved by using engine braking in manual gearshift mode. Engine braking is most efficiently used if the same gear is used downhill as up. Use drive mode Off Road* for increased engine braking while driving on steep downhill gradients at low speeds.
Anti-lock braking system The car has anti-lock brakes (ABS2), which prevents the wheels from locking while brak-
}}
* Option/accessory. 409
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| ing and allows maintained steering control. Vibration may be felt in the brake pedal when this is engaged and this is normal.
A short test of the ABS system is made automatically after the car has been started when the driver releases the brake pedal. A further automatic test of the system may be made at low speed. The test may be felt as pulses in the brake pedal.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol Specification
Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and check for the cause of the brake fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started: Automatic function check.
Constant glow for more than 2 seconds: Fault in the ABS system. The car's normal brake system is still working, but without the ABS function.
WARNING
If both the warning lamps for brake fault and ABS fault illuminate at the same time, a fault has occurred in the brake system.
· If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is
normal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest workshop and have the brake system checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
· If the brake fluid is below the MIN level
in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid. The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.
Related information · Brake assistance (p. 410)
· Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 415)
· Help when starting on a hill (p. 416)
· Braking on wet roads (p. 411)
· Braking on gritted roads (p. 411)
· Brake system maintenance (p. 411)
· Brake lights (p. 147)
Brake assistance
The brake assist system (BAS3) helps to increase brake force during braking, and can thereby shorten the braking distance. The system detects the way in which the driver brakes and increases brake force where necessary. The brake force can be boosted up to the level when the ABS system is engaged.
NOTE
When BAS is activated, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary.
Related information · Foot brake (p. 409)
2 Anti-lock Braking System 3 Brake Assist System
410
STARTING AND DRIVING
Braking on wet roads
When driving for a prolonged period of time in heavy rain without braking, the braking effect may be delayed slightly when next using the brakes. This may also be the case after a car wash. It is then necessary to depress the brake pedal more forcefully. You should therefore maintain a greater distance to the vehicles in front.
Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads or using a car wash. This warms up the brake discs, enabling them to dry faster and protecting them against corrosion. Bear in mind the current traffic situation when braking.
Related information · Foot brake (p. 409)
· Braking on gritted roads (p. 411)
Braking on gritted roads
When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt may form on the brake discs and brake linings. This may extend braking distance. You should therefore maintain a greater safety distance to vehicles in front. In addition, make sure you do the following:
· Brake now and again to remove any layer
of salt. Make sure that other road users are not put at risk by the braking.
· Gently depress the brake pedal after fin-
ishing driving and before starting your next trip.
Related information · Foot brake (p. 409)
· Braking on wet roads (p. 411)
Brake system maintenance
Check brake system components regularly for wear. To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. After replacing brake linings and brake discs, braking effect is only adapted after they have been "worn in" for a few hundred kilometres (miles). Compensate for the reduced braking effect by depressing the brake pedal harder. Volvo recommends only fitting brake linings that are approved for your Volvo.
IMPORTANT
The wear on the brake system's components must be checked regularly.
Contact a workshop for information about the procedure or engage a workshop to carry out the inspection - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information · Foot brake (p. 409)
411
STARTING AND DRIVING
Parking brake
The parking brake prevents the car from rolling away from stationary by means of mechanically locking/blocking two wheels.
Related information · Activating and deactivating the parking
brake (p. 412)
· Parking on a hill (p. 414)
· In the event of a fault in the parking brake
(p. 414)
· Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 415)
Activating and deactivating the parking brake
Use the parking brake to prevent the car from rolling from stationary.
Activating the parking brake
A faint electric motor noise can be heard when the electrically-operated parking brake is being applied. The noise can also be heard during the automatic function checking of the parking brake. If the car is stationary when the parking brake is activated, it only acts on the rear wheels. If it is activated when the car is moving then the normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts on all four wheels. Brake function changes over to the rear wheels when the car is almost stationary.
412
1. Pull the control upward.
> The symbol in the driver display illuminates when the parking brake is activated.
2. Check that the car is stationary.
Symbol in the driver display
Symbol Specification
The symbol is illuminated when the parking brake is activated.
If the symbol flashes, it indicates a fault has occurred. Read the message in the driver display.
Automatic activation The parking brake is activated automatically
· when the car is switched off and the set-
ting for automatic activation of the parking brake is activated in the centre display.
· when gear position P is selected on a
steep hill4.
· if the Auto hold (Automatic brake when
stationary) function is activated and
· the car has been stationary for a long
time (5-10 minutes)
· the car is switched off
· the driver leaves the car.
Emergency brake In an emergency, the parking brake can be activated when the car is in motion by pulling and holding up the control. Braking stops when the control is released, or if the accelerator pedal is depressed.
NOTE An acoustic signal sounds while emergency braking is active at high speeds. Deactivating the parking brake
Deactivate manually To deactivate the parking brake, the engine needs to be running. 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. 2. Press the control down.
> The parking brake releases and the symbol in the driver display extinguishes.
Deactivate automatically 1. Start the car.
4 Applies to automatic gearbox.
STARTING AND DRIVING
2. With automatic gearbox: Depress the brake pedal firmly. Select gear position D or R and depress the accelerator pedal. With manual gearbox: Depress the clutch pedal and select an appropriate gear. Release the clutch pedal and accelerate. > The parking brake releases and the symbol in the driver display extinguishes.
NOTE For automatic deactivation, either the driver has to have put on their seatbelt or the driver door has to be closed.
Related information · Automatic parking brake activation setting
(p. 414)
· In the event of a fault in the parking brake
(p. 414)
· Parking brake (p. 412) · Parking on a hill (p. 414)
413
STARTING AND DRIVING
Automatic parking brake activation setting
Choose whether the parking brake is to be activated automatically when the car is switched off. To change setting:
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.
2. Press My Car Parking Brake and Suspension to select or deselect the function Auto Activate Parking Brake.
Related information · Activating and deactivating the parking
brake (p. 412)
· Parking brake (p. 412)
Parking on a hill
Always use the parking brake when parking on a hill.
WARNING
Always use the parking brake when parking on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the automatic transmission's P position is not sufficient to hold the car stationary in all situations.
If the car is parked facing uphill:
· Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
· Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
Heavy load uphill A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the car to roll backward when the parking brake is released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid this by pulling the control upwards while driving the car away. Release the control when the engine achieves traction.
Related information · Activating and deactivating the parking
brake (p. 412)
In the event of a fault in the parking brake
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if it is not possible to deactivate or activate the parking brake after several attempts. An acoustic warning signal sounds when driving with the parking brake activated.
If the car has to be parked before a possible fault is rectified then the wheels must be turned as if parking on a hill and the gear selector must be in position P, or engage first gear if the car has a manual gearbox.
Low battery voltage If the battery voltage is too low then the parking brake can be neither deactivated nor activated. Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too low.
Replacing the brake linings The rear brake linings must be replaced at a workshop due to the design of the electricallyoperated parking brake - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
414
Symbols in the driver display Symbol Specification
If the symbol flashes, it indicates a fault has occurred. See the message in the driver display.
Fault in brake system. See the message in the driver display.
Information message in driver display.
Related information · Activating and deactivating the parking
brake (p. 412)
· Parking on a hill (p. 414) · Starter battery (p. 597) · Volvo service programme (p. 582)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Automatic braking when stationary
Automatic brake when stationary (Auto hold) means that the driver can release the brake pedal while maintaining braking effect when the car has stopped at traffic lights or a junction. When the car has stopped, the brakes are activated automatically. The function can use either foot brake or parking brake to hold the car stationary and it works on all gradients. When driving off, the brakes are released automatically if the driver is wearing the seatbelt and/or the driver's door is closed.
NOTE
When braking to a standstill on an uphill or downhill slope, the brake pedal should be depressed a little harder before being released to ensure the car does not roll.
The parking brake is activated if
· the car is switched off
· the driver's door is opened
· the driver's seatbelt is unbuckled
· the car has been stationary for a longer
time (5-10 minutes).
Symbols in the driver display Symbol Specification
The symbol is illuminated when the function uses the foot brake to keep the car stationary.
The symbol is illuminated when the function uses the parking brake to keep the car stationary.
Related information · Activating and deactivating the automatic
brake at a standstill (p. 416)
· Foot brake (p. 409) · Parking brake (p. 412) · Help when starting on a hill (p. 416)
415
STARTING AND DRIVING
Activating and deactivating the automatic brake at a standstill
The automatic brake function at a standstill is activated using the button in the tunnel console.
Press the button in the tunnel console to activate or deactivate the function. > The indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated. Activated function remains even when the car is started next time.
Applicable when switching off If the function is active and holds the car with the foot brake (A-symbol illuminated in the driver display), the brake pedal must be depressed at
the same time as the button is depressed in order to deactivate.
· The function remains deactivated until it is
reactivated.
· When the function is deactivated, hill start
assist (HSA) remains active to prevent the car from rolling backwards when starting on an uphill gradient.
Related information · Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 415)
Help when starting on a hill
Hill start assist (HSA5) prevents the car from rolling backwards when starting on an uphill gradient. When reversing uphill, it prevents the car from rolling forwards. The function means that the pedal pressure in the brake system remains for several seconds while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal to accelerator pedal.
The temporary braking effect releases after several seconds or when the driver starts to drive away.
The Hill Start Assist is activated when stopping on a sleep slope. The function is available even when the automatic braking when stationary (Auto hold) function is deactivated.
Related information · Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 415)
· Foot brake (p. 409)
416
STARTING AND DRIVING
Auto braking after a collision
In the event of a collision in which the activation level is reached for the pyrotechnic seatbelt tensioners or airbags, or if a collision with a large animal is detected, the car's brakes are automatically applied. This function is to prevent or reduce the effects of any subsequent collision. After a serious collision there is a risk that it is no longer possible to control and steer the car. In order to avoid or mitigate a possible further collision with a vehicle or an object in the vehicle's path, the auto braking system is activated automatically and brakes the car in a safe manner.
Brake lights and hazard warning lights are activated during braking. When the car has stopped, the hazard warning lights continue to flash and the parking brake is applied.
If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a risk of being hit by following traffic, the system can be overridden by the driver depressing the accelerator pedal.
The function assumes that the brake system is intact after the collision.
Related information · Rear Collision Warning* (p. 349)
· BLIS* (p. 350)
· Brake functions (p. 409)
5 Hill Start Assist
Regenerative braking*
The car recovers kinetic energy during braking in order to reduce fuel consumption and emissions.
The battery symbol is shown in the driver display when the car is generating power for the battery6.
The function is available in all drive modes together with gear position D or M.
Activating brake regeneration Brake regeneration is activated by gentle pressure on the brake pedal or during engine braking.
Regeneration increases during engine braking when manual gearshift mode M is selected.
Related information · Drive modes* (p. 424)
· Changing gear with automatic gearbox
(p. 419)
Gearbox
The gearbox is part of the car's powertrain (power transmission) between engine and drive wheels. The function of the gearbox is to change the gear ratio depending on speed and power requirements. There are two main types of gearbox, manual and automatic.
The manual gearbox has six gears and the automatic gearbox has eight. The number of gear changes means that the engine's torque and power range can be used effectively. In the automatic gearbox, two of the gears are overdrive gears that save fuel when driving at constant engine speed.
It is also possible to select gears manually with the automatic gearbox. The driver display shows the selected gear position.
Related information · Automatic gearbox (p. 418)
· Manual gearbox (p. 418)
· Gear shift indicator (p. 423)
* Option/accessory. 417
STARTING AND DRIVING
Manual gearbox
With a manual gearbox, the driver selects a suitable gear manually, according to speed and power requirements at the time. Changing gear
Overview of gear lever and shift patterns. Neutral position (N)
The manual gearbox has six gears; the shifting pattern is shown on the gear lever.
· Depress the clutch pedal fully during each
gear change.
· Take your foot off the clutch pedal
between gear changes.
Reverse gear inhibitor The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear during normal forward travel.
· Follow the shifting pattern on the gear
lever and start from neutral position before moving it to the R position.
· Engage reverse gear only when the car is
stationary.
During parking
WARNING Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear is not sufficient to hold the car in all situations.
Related information · Gearbox (p. 417) · Automatic gearbox (p. 418) · Gear shift indicator (p. 423)
Automatic gearbox
Gears are selected automatically so that you can drive as energy-efficiently as possible. The gearbox also has a manual gearshift mode.
Overview of gear lever and shift pattern in the driver display. The driver display shows the selected gear position:
Related information · Changing gear with automatic gearbox
(p. 419)
· Changing gear with steering wheel pad-
dles* (p. 421)
· Gear selector inhibitor (p. 422) · Kick-down function (p. 422)
6 The symbol is valid for cars with 48V battery.
418
* Option/accessory.
· Launch function* (p. 423)
· Gear shift indicator (p. 423)
· Manual gearbox (p. 418)
· Symbols and messages for automatic
gearbox (p. 423)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Changing gear with automatic gearbox
Change gear position by pressing the springloaded gear selector forwards or backwards, or sideways for manual shifting.
Changing gear
Gear positions Parking P
Overview of gear lever and gear positions.
Overview of gear lever and position P.
Parking is activated with the P button located next to the gear selector.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P position is engaged.
Select position P for parking. The car can start in position P. The car must be stationary when the P position is selected.
To park - first apply the parking bake and then select P position.
}} * Option/accessory. 419
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
WARNING
Always use the parking brake when parking on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the automatic transmission's P position is not sufficient to hold the car stationary in all situations.
NOTE
To be able to lock the car and arm the alarm, the gear position must be in P.
Help functions
The system will change to the P position automatically:
· if the car is switched off in position D or R.
· if the driver unfastens the seatbelt and
opens the driver's door when the car is running in a mode other than P.
To park a car without wearing the seatbelt and with the door open - exit the P position by selecting R or D again.
If the car is switched off in N position there is no automatic change-over to P position. This makes it possible to wash the car in an automatic car wash.
Reverse R Select position R to reverse. The car must be stationary when the R position is selected.
Neutral N The car freewheels in position N. The car can start in position N. Apply the parking brake if the car is stationary with the gear selector in the N position. In order to change from N position to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition position must be II. Some gearbox variants require the engine to be running. Drive position - D D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and down takes place automatically based on the level of acceleration and speed. The car must be stationary when changing gear from R position to D position. Manual position M
Overview of manual gear position in the driver display.
In M position, it is possible to change gear manually. The car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal is released.
Position M is selected by moving the gear selector backwards from the D position.
· Press the gear selector to the right to "+"
(plus) to change up one step and release it.
· Press the gear selector to the left to ""
(minus) to change down one step and release it.
· Press the gear selector backwards to
return to the D position.
The gearbox automatically shifts down if the speed decreases to a level lower than appropriate for the selected gear, in order to avoid jerking and stalling.
Related information · Automatic gearbox (p. 418)
· Gear selector inhibitor (p. 422)
· Changing gear with steering wheel pad-
dles* (p. 421)
· Kick-down function (p. 422)
420
* Option/accessory.
Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*
The steering wheel paddles are a complement to the gear selector and make it possible to change gear manually without releasing hands from the steering wheel.
The function is available in position D or M.
In M position the steering wheel paddles are automatically activated.
STARTING AND DRIVING
"-": Selects the next lower gear.
"+": Selects the next higher gear.
Switch To change gear:
Pull one of the paddles backwards towards the steering wheel - and release.
A gear change occurs at each pull of the paddle, provided that the engine speed does not leave the permitted range. The driver display shows the current gear.
Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel paddles in manual gearshift mode.
Activating the steering wheel paddles in position D To be able to change gear with the steering wheel paddles, they must be activated:
Pull one of the paddles toward the steering wheel.
> A figure in the driver display indicates current gear.
Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel paddles.
Deactivating the steering wheel paddles in position D Manual deactivation Pull the right-hand paddle (+) toward the
steering wheel and hold in place until the number in the driver display extinguishes. > The gearbox returns to position D. Automatic deactivation The steering wheel paddles are deactivated after a short time if they are not used. This is indicated by the number in the driver display extinguishing. The exception is during engine braking - then the paddles are activated for as long as engine braking is in progress.
}}
* Option/accessory. 421
STARTING AND DRIVING || Related information
· Automatic gearbox (p. 418) · Changing gear with automatic gearbox
(p. 419)
· Gear shift indicator (p. 423)
7 Only possible with automatic gearbox. 422
Gear selector inhibitor
The gear selector inhibitor prevents accidental changing between different gear positions in an automatic gearbox.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor The automatic gear selector inhibitor has special safety systems.
From park position P or neutral position N In order to move the gear selector from P or N position to another gear position, the engine must be running.
If the gear selector is in the N position and the car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked.
Message in the driver display If the gear selector is inhibited a message is shown in the driver display e.g. Gear lever Press brake pedal to activate gear lever.
The gear selector is not inhibited mechanically.
Related information · Automatic gearbox (p. 418)
· Changing gear with automatic gearbox
(p. 419)
Kick-down function
Kick-down7 can be used when maximum acceleration is needed such as for overtaking. When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the way to the floor (beyond the position normally regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is immediately engaged. This is known as kickdown.
If the accelerator is released from the kickdown position, the gearbox automatically changes up.
Safety function To prevent over-revving of the engine, the gearbox control program has a protective downshift inhibitor.
The gearbox does not permit downshifting/ kick-down which would result in an engine speed high enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at high engine speed the original gear remains engaged.
On kick-down the car can shift down one or more steps at a time, depending in engine speed. The car shifts up when the engine has reached is maximum engine speed in order to prevent engine damage.
Related information · Automatic gearbox (p. 418)
Launch function*
Launch can be used when maximum acceleration is required from stationary. The function is available in the following drive modes: Dynamic, Comfort and Individual.
Activate Launch Make sure the car is stationary and the wheels are pointing straight forward.
1. Move to gear position D.
2. Depress the brake pedal fully.
3. Then fully depress the accelerator pedal.
4. Release the brake pedal within 2 seconds.
NOTE If the Launch function does not work, wait a few minutes and let the drivetrain cool down to working temperature before retrying.
IMPORTANT The drivetrain is subject to wear and tear when using Launch and therefore the function is only available a limited number of times.
Related information · Automatic gearbox (p. 418)
Symbols and messages for automatic gearbox
If a fault should occur in the gearbox, a symbol and a message are shown in the driver display.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to any drive system components, the working temperature of the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of overheating, a warning symbol illuminates in the driver display and a text message is shown - follow the recommendation given.
Symbol Specification
An error has occurred in the transmission.
Read the message in the driver display.
Hot or overheated gearbox.
Read the message in the driver display.
Temporary fault on drivetrain.
Read the message in the driver display.
Related information · Automatic gearbox (p. 418)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Gear shift indicator
The gear shift indicator in the driver display shows the current gear during manual gearshifting and when it is appropriate to engage the next gear for optimum fuel economy. For eco-driving during manual gear changing, it is important to drive in the right gear and to change gear in good time. With manual gearbox
An up-arrow indicates a recommended change to a higher gear, and a down-arrow a recommended change to a lower gear.
}} * Option/accessory. 423
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| With automatic gearbox
The gear shift indicator shows the current gear in the driver display and indicates recommended shifting to a higher gear by a flashing plus sign. Related information
· Automatic gearbox (p. 418) · Manual gearbox (p. 418)
All-wheel drive*
All-wheel drive (AWD8) means that the car is driving all four wheels at the same time, which improves traction. To achieve the best possible traction, the motive force is distributed automatically to the wheels with the best grip. The system continuously calculates the need for torque to the rear wheels, and can immediately redistribute up to half of the motor's torque to the rear wheels.
All-wheel drive also has a stabilising effect at higher speeds. Under normal driving conditions, the majority of power is transmitted to the front wheels. When stationary, the allwheel drive is always engaged in preparation for maximum traction during acceleration.
All-wheel drive characteristics vary depending on the selected drive mode.
Related information · Drive modes* (p. 424)
· Low speed control* (p. 435)
· Gearbox (p. 417)
Drive modes*
Selection of drive mode affects the car's driving characteristics in order to enhance the driving experience and facilitate driving in special situations. Using the drive modes it is possible to quickly have access to the car's numerous functions and settings for different driving needs. The following systems are adapted to maintain driving characteristics that are as good as possible in each drive mode:
· Steering
· Engine/gearbox9/all-wheel drive*
· Brakes
· Shock absorption
· Driver display
· Start/stop function
· Climate settings
Select the drive mode adapted for the current driving conditions. Remember that not all drive modes are available in all situations.
Selectable drive modes When the car starts, it is in Comfort mode and the start/stop function is activated. The drive mode can be changed when the car has been started, e.g. to the Individual mode.
8 All Wheel Drive 9 Applies to automatic gearbox.
424
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
When the Individual mode is selected, it is possible to make adjustments for specific preferences, e.g. to show the tachometer.
Comfort The Comfort mode is the car's normal mode. These settings mean that the car feels comfortable, the steering is light, the shock absorption is soft and body's movement is smooth.
This drive mode is the certification mode for carbon dioxide emissions.
Eco
· Adapt the car for more energy-efficient
and environmentally-conscious driving with the Eco mode.
The drive mode means, for example, that the Start/Stop function is activated and the output of certain climate settings is reduced.
When driving in Eco mode, the driver display shows an eco-meter that indicates in real time how economical your driving is.
Off Road
· Maximise the car's traction when driving
in difficult terrain and on poor roads.
The steering is light, the all-wheel drive* operation and low speed function with hill descent
control (HDC10) are activated. Start/Stop function is deactivated.
The drive mode can only be activated at low speeds and the speedometer shows the range for speed limitation. If this speed is exceeded, Off Road mode is suspended and another drive mode is activated.
In the Off Road mode the driver display has a compass between the speedometer and tachometer.
NOTE
The driving mode is not designed to be used on public roads.
Dynamic
· Dynamic mode means that the car has
sportier characteristics and faster response to accelerating.
The gear changes become faster and more distinct, and the gearbox prioritises a gear with greater traction.
Steering response is faster and shock absorption is harder11 which means that the body follows the roadway in order to reduce roll during cornering.
Start/Stop function is deactivated.
The Dynamic mode is also available in the Polestar Engineered version*.
10 Hill Descent Control 11 Applies to Four-C.
}} * Option/accessory. 425
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| Individual
· Adapting a drive mode according to indi-
vidual preferences. Select a drive mode to start from, and then adjust the settings according to the desired driving characteristics. These settings are saved in the active driver profile and are available each time the car is unlocked with the same remote control key. An individual drive mode is only available if it is first activated in the centre display.
Settings view12 for individual drive mode.
1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press My Car Individual Drive Mode
and select Individual Drive Mode.
3. In Presets, select a drive mode to start from: Eco, Comfort, Dynamic or Polestar Engineered*.
Possible adjustments apply to settings for:
· Driver Display · Steering Force · Powertrain Characteristics · Brake Characteristics · Suspension Control · ECO Climate · Start/Stop.
Related information · Changing drive mode* (p. 427) · Drive mode Eco (p. 427) · Economical driving (p. 438) · Start/stop function (p. 430) · Low speed control* (p. 435) · Hill descent control* (p. 436) · All-wheel drive* (p. 424) · Driver profiles (p. 124) · Regenerative braking* (p. 417)
12 The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. 426
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Changing drive mode*
Select the drive mode adapted for the current driving conditions.
Change the drive mode using the button in the centre console. Remember that not all drive modes are available in all situations.
To change drive mode:
2. Select the drive mode in one of two ways:
· Tap the desired drive mode directly on
the touchscreen to select and activate the drive mode.
· Press the DRIVE MODE button again
to move the cursor to the desired drive mode. The selected drive mode is activated after a short delay.
Related information · Drive modes* (p. 424)
· Activating and deactivating drive mode
Eco with the function button (p. 429)
· Activating and deactivating low-speed
driving* using a function button (p. 435)
· Activating and deactivating hill descent
control* with the function button (p. 437)
1. Press the DRIVE MODE button.
> A pop-up menu is opened in the centre display with the active drive mode highlighted.
13 Only cars with automatic gearbox.
Drive mode Eco
Drive mode Eco can help you with more ecofriendly driving, with greater fuel economy. Use this drive mode to save fuel and the environment.
The following properties are adapted for Eco mode:
· Gearbox gearshift points13.
· Engine management and response from
the accelerator pedal.
· The Eco Coast13 freewheel function is
activated and engine braking is deactivated when the accelerator pedal is released at speeds between 65 and 140 km/h (40 and 87 mph).
· Some of the climate control system's set-
tings work at reduced power or are deactivated.
· The driver display shows information in an
ECO gauge which facilitates environmentally-conscious and fuel-efficient driving.
Free-wheel function Eco Coast13 The freewheel function Eco Coast means in practice that engine braking ceases, meaning in turn that the car's kinetic energy is used to freewheel for longer distances. When the driver releases the accelerator pedal the gearbox is automatically disengaged from the
}}
* Option/accessory. 427
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| engine whose speed is reduced to idling speed with reduced consumption.
The function is best used where it is possible to freewheel a long way e.g. roads with a slight downhill gradient or when there is a predictable speed reduction to freewheel into a zone with a lower speed limit.
Activating the freewheel function The function is activated when the accelerator pedal is fully released, in combination with the following parameters:
· Drive mode Eco is activated.
· The gear selector is in D position.
· Speed within the range of
approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph).
· The road's downhill gradient is not steeper
than approx. 6%.
The driver display shows COASTING when the freewheel function is being used.
Limitations The freewheel function is not available if
· engine and/or gearbox are not at normal
operating temperature
· the gear selector is moved from the D
position to manual position
· the speed is outside the range of
approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph)
13 Only cars with automatic gearbox.
· the road's downhill gradient is steeper
than approx. 6%
· Manual gear changing is performed with
the steering wheel paddles*.
Deactivating and switching off the freewheel function In certain situations it may be desirable to deactivate or switch off the function in order to use engine braking. Examples of such situations may be on steep downhill gradients or before an imminent overtaking manoeuvre - in order to be able to do it in the safest way possible.
Deactivate the freewheel function as follows
· actuate the accelerator or brake pedal
· move the gear selector to manual position
· Changing gear with steering wheel pad-
dles*.
Switch off the freewheel function as follows
· change drive mode*
· switch off drive mode Eco in the function
view.
Even without the freewheel function, it is possible to freewheel for short distances. This, in turn, reduces consumption. However, for the best fuel economy it is better to have the freewheel function activated and be able to freewheel for longer distances.
Cruise control Eco Cruise When using the cruise control in the Eco drive mode, the car's acceleration and deceleration will be lower compared to other drive modes, which enables further fuel savings. This means that the car's speed can be slightly above or below the set speed.
· On a smooth road, the car's speed can
deviate from the set speed when the cruise control is active and the car freerolls.
· On a steep uphill slope, the car's speed
drops until a downshift is made13, then reduced acceleration starts in order to achieve the set speed.
· On a downhill slope where the car free-
rolls, the car's speed can be slightly above or below the set speed. The function uses normal engine braking to maintain the set speed. The foot brake is also used if necessary.
428
* Option/accessory.
Eco gauge in the driver display
The ECO gauge indicates how fuel-efficient the driving is:
· With fuel-efficient driving, the gauge
shows a low value with the pointer in the green zone.
· With non-fuel-efficient driving, e.g. during
heavy braking or heavy acceleration, the gauge shows a high value. The ECO gauge also has an indicator to show how a reference driver would drive the car under the same driving conditions. This is indicated with the short pointer on the gauge. ECO climate control In the Eco drive mode, eco climate control is activated automatically in the passenger compartment in order to reduce energy consumption.
NOTE
When the Eco drive mode is activated, several parameters in the climate control system's settings are changed, and several electricity consumer functions are reduced. Certain settings can be reset manually, but full functionality is only regained by switching off Eco drive mode or adapting Individual* drive mode with full climate functionality.
In the event of difficulties due to misting, press the button for max. defroster which has normal functionality.
Related information · Changing drive mode* (p. 427)
· Activating and deactivating drive mode
Eco with the function button (p. 429)
· Drive modes* (p. 424)
· Economical driving (p. 438)
· Start/stop function (p. 430)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Activating and deactivating drive mode Eco with the function button
There is a function button for Eco drive mode in the centre display's function view unless the car was equipped with a drive mode button in the centre console. The Eco mode is deactivated when the engine is switched off, and it must therefore be activated after each time the engine is started. The driver display shows ECO when the function is activated.
Selecting Eco drive mode in the centre display function view Press the Driving Mode ECO button to
activate or deactivate the function.
> An indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated.
Related information · Drive mode Eco (p. 427) · Changing drive mode* (p. 427) · Drive modes* (p. 424)
* Option/accessory. 429
STARTING AND DRIVING
Start/stop function
With the start/stop function, the engine switches off temporarily when the car has stopped e.g. at traffic lights or in a traffic queue, and then starts again when it is needed. The start/stop function reduces fuel consumption, which in turn contributes to reduced exhaust emissions.
The system makes it possible to adopt an environmentally-conscious driving style by allowing the car to engine auto-stop when possible.
Related information · Driving with start/stop function (p. 430)
· Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 432)
· Drive modes* (p. 424)
Driving with start/stop function
The start/stop function temporarily switches off the engine when stationary and then starts it automatically when required. The Start/Stop function is available when the car is started and can be activated if certain conditions have been met.
The driver display indicates when the function is
· available
· active
· not available.
All of the car's normal systems such as lighting, radio, etc. work normally, even when the engine is auto-stopped. However some equipment may have its output temporarily reduced e.g. the climate control system's fan speed or extremely high volume on the audio system.
Auto-stop The following is required for the engine to auto-stop:
With automatic gearbox
· Stop the car with the foot brake and then
keep your foot on the brake pedal - the engine stops automatically.
With manual gearbox
· Declutch, set the gear lever in neutral
position and release the clutch pedal - the engine stops automatically.
In drive mode Comfort or Eco, the engine may auto-stop before the car is completely stationary.
With adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist activated, the engine auto-stops approximately 3 seconds after the car has stopped.
Autostart The following is required for the engine to auto-start:
430
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
With automatic gearbox
· Release the brake pedal - the engine will
autostart and you can continue driving. On an uphill gradient hill start assist (HSA14) engages, which prevents the car from rolling backwards.
· When the Auto Hold function is activated,
auto-start is delayed until the accelerator pedal is depressed.
· When adaptive cruise control or Pilot
Assist is activated, the engine will autostart when the accelerator pedal is
depressed, or by pressing the button on the left keypad of the steering wheel.
· Maintain foot pressure on the brake pedal
and depress the accelerator pedal - the engine auto-starts.
· On a downhill gradient: Release pressure
on the brake pedal slightly so that the car begins to roll - the engine will auto-start after a slight speed increase.
With manual gearbox
· With the gear lever in neutral position:
Depress the clutch pedal or depress the accelerator pedal - the engine starts.
· On a downhill gradient: Release pressure
on the brake pedal slightly so that the car
begins to roll - the engine will auto-start after a slight speed increase. Symbols in the driver display
White - Appears in the tachometer when the function is available.
Green - Appears in the tachometer when the function is active and the engine is auto-stopped.
Grey - The function is not available when this symbol is struck through and greyed out. If no symbol is displayed, the function is disabled.
The function is active and the engine is auto-stopped.
Related information · Deactivating the start/stop function
(p. 432)
· Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 432)
· Start/stop function (p. 430)
· Help when starting on a hill (p. 416)
· Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 415)
14 Hill Start Assist
431
STARTING AND DRIVING
Deactivating the start/stop function
In certain situations it may be desirable to deactivate the start/stop function.
Deactivate using the Start/ Stop function button in the centre display's function view. The indication in the button is switched off when the function is deactivated.
The function is deactivated until
· it is reactivated · the drive mode is changed to Eco or
Comfort
· the next time the car is started.
Related information · Driving with start/stop function (p. 430) · Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 432)
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
For the Start/Stop function to work requires that a number of conditions are met. If any condition is not met, this will be indicated in the driver display.
The engine does not auto-stop The engine does not auto-stop in the following cases:
· The car has not reached approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph) after starting.
· After a number of repeated auto stops,
speed must again exceed approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) before the next auto stop.
· The driver has not fastened the seatbelt.
· The engine is not at normal operating tem-
perature.
· The ambient temperature is below
approx. -5 °C (23 °F) or above approx. 37 °C (98 °F).
· The windscreen's electric heating is acti-
vated.
· The environment in the passenger com-
partment deviates from the set values.
· The car is in reverse.
· The driver is making large steering wheel
movements.
· The road is very steep.
· The bonnet is opened.
· When driving at high altitudes when the
engine has not reached operating temperature.
· The ABS system has been activated.
· In the event of heavy braking (even with-
out the ABS system having been activated).
· Many starts during a short period of time
have activated the starter motor's thermal protection.
· The exhaust system's particulate filter is
full.
· A trailer is connected to the car's electrical
system.
The following applies to automatic gearbox:
· The gearbox is not at normal operating
temperature.
· The gear selector is in M (±) position.
· If traffic conditions allow it (for example in
a traffic jam).
The engine does not auto-start In the following cases the engine does not auto-start after having auto-stopped:
With automatic gearbox:
· The driver is unbelted, the gear selector is
in P position and the driver's door is open - a normal start must take place.
432
With manual gearbox:
· The driver is unrestrained.
· A gear is engaged without declutching.
Involuntary stop with manual gearbox If the engine does not restart, proceed as follows:
1. Check that the driver side's seatbelt is locked in the seatbelt buckle.
2. Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine starts automatically.
3. In certain cases the gear lever must be set in neutral position. A message is shown in the driver display - follow the recommendation given.
The engine auto-starts without the brake pedal having been released In the following cases, the engine auto-starts even if the driver does not take his/her foot off the brake pedal:
· High humidity in the passenger compart-
ment forms misting on the windows.
· The environment in the passenger com-
partment deviates from the set values.
· Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.
· The bonnet is opened.
· The car starts to roll or increase speed
slightly if the car auto-stopped without being completely stationary.
The following applies to automatic gearbox:
· The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened with
the gear selector in D or N position.
· The gear selector is moved from D to R or
M (±) position.
· The driver's door is opened with the gear
selector in D position - a "ping" sound and text message indicate that the ignition is on.
WARNING Do not open the bonnet when the engine has auto-stopped. Switch off the engine normally before lifting up the bonnet.
Related information · Start/stop function (p. 430) · Driving with start/stop function (p. 430) · Deactivating the start/stop function
(p. 432)
STARTING AND DRIVING 433
STARTING AND DRIVING
Level control* and shock absorption
Level control and shock absorption are regulated automatically in the car.
Shock absorption (Four-C) On a car equipped with Four-C the shock absorption is adapted according to the drive
Symbol
Message Suspension Service required
mode selected and the speed of the car. Shock absorption is normally set for optimum comfort and is regulated continuously depending on the road surface, the car's acceleration, braking and cornering.
Symbols and messages If a fault arises with the level control, a message is shown in the driver display.
Specification A fault has occurred. Visit a workshopA as soon as possible.
A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information · Drive modes* (p. 424)
434
* Option/accessory.
Low speed control*
The low speed control function (LSC15) facilitates and improves traction for driving offroad and on slippery surfaces, such as with a caravan on grass or a boat trailer on a launch ramp.
In a car with drive mode button*, the function is included in the Off Road drive mode. The function is adapted for off-road driving and driving with a trailer at low speed, up to approx. 40 km/h (25 mph).
Low speed control prioritises low gears and traction. If the car is all-wheel drive, the motive force is distributed evenly in order to provide as good traction as possible on all wheels and to reduce the risk of wheel spin. The accelerator pedal is less responsive in order to facilitate traction and speed control at low speed.
The function is activated together with hill descent control, (HDC16) which means that speed down steep hills can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, reducing the need to use the brake pedal. The system facilitates a low and even speed while driving on steep downhill gradients.
NOTE When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of the accelerator pedal and engine response are changed.
NOTE The driving mode is not designed to be used on public roads.
NOTE The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required.
Related information · Activating and deactivating low-speed
driving* using a function button (p. 435)
· Changing drive mode* (p. 427) · Hill descent control* (p. 436) · All-wheel drive* (p. 424)
15 Low Speed Control 16 Hill Descent Control
STARTING AND DRIVING
Activating and deactivating lowspeed driving* using a function button
There is a function button for low-speed driving with Hill Descent Control in the centre display's function view unless the car was equipped with a drive mode button in the centre console. Select low-speed driving in the centre display function view Press the Hill Descent Control button to
activate or deactivate the function.
> An indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated.
This function is disabled automatically when the engine is switched off.
NOTE The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required.
}}
* Option/accessory. 435
STARTING AND DRIVING || Related information
· Low speed control* (p. 435) · Changing drive mode* (p. 427)
17 Hill Descent Control 18 Low Speed Control 436
Hill descent control*
Hill descent control (HDC17) is a low speed function with enhanced engine braking. The function makes it possible to increase or reduce the car's speed on steep downhill gradients using only the accelerator pedal, without using the foot brake.
In a car with drive mode button*, the function is included in the Off Road drive mode. Hill descent control is adapted for off-road driving at low speeds and facilitates driving on steep downhill gradients with difficult surfaces. The driver does not need to use the brake pedal, but can instead focus on steering.
WARNING
HDC does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.
Function Hill descent control allows the car to roll at inching speed both forward and backward, assisted by the brake system. The speed can be increased by using the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator pedal is then released the car slows back down to crawling speed,
regardless of the gradient of the hill and without the need for the foot brake to be used. The brake lights are switched on when the function is operating.
The driver can brake and reduce crawling speed, or stop the car at any time by using the foot brake.
The function is activated together with low speed control (LSC18) which facilitates driving and improves traction for driving off-road and on slippery surfaces. The systems are designed for use at low speed, up to approx. 40 km/h (25 mph).
* Option/accessory.
Points to remember when driving with HDC · If the function is disabled while driving on
a steep downhill gradient, the braking effect will gradually decrease.
With automatic gearbox
· HDC can be used in gear position D, R,
and with 1st or 2nd gear with manual gear changing.
· It is not possible to change to 3rd gear or
higher with manual gear changing.
With manual gearbox
· HDC only brakes in 1st gear or with
reverse gear (R). There is no active braking in higher gears even though the function is not deactivated until approx. 40 km/h (25 mph).
NOTE
When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of the accelerator pedal and engine response are changed.
NOTE The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required.
Related information · Activating and deactivating hill descent
control* with the function button (p. 437)
· Changing drive mode* (p. 427) · Low speed control* (p. 435) · All-wheel drive* (p. 424)
NOTE
The driving mode is not designed to be used on public roads.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Activating and deactivating hill descent control* with the function button
There is a function button for hill descent control with Hill Descent Control in the centre display's function view unless the car was equipped with a drive mode button in the centre console. Selecting hill descent control in the centre display function view Hill descent control only works at low speeds. Press the Hill Descent Control button to
activate or deactivate the function.
> An indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated.
This function is disabled automatically when the engine is switched off.
NOTE The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required.
}}
* Option/accessory. 437
STARTING AND DRIVING || Related information
· Hill descent control* (p. 436) · Changing drive mode* (p. 427)
19 Applies to automatic gearbox. 438
Economical driving
A more economical driving style can contribute to lower fuel consumption.
Before driving · If possible, precondition the car before
driving.
· If preconditioning is not possible when it
is cold outside, use seat heating and steering wheel heating first of all. Avoid warming up the whole of the interior which takes energy from the starter battery.
· Avoid warming up the car using idling.
· Choice of tyres and tyre pressure can
affect energy consumption - seek advice on suitable tyres from an authorised Volvo dealer.
· Remove unnecessary items from the car -
the greater the load the higher the consumption.
While driving · Activate drive mode Eco.
· Use gear position D as often as possible19.
· When driving with manual gear changing,
drive in the highest gear possible. Use the gear shift indicator.
· Drive at a steady speed and keep a good
distance to other vehicles and objects in
order to avoid braking, use engine braking if possible.
· High speed results in increased energy
consumption since the wind resistance increases with speed.
· In a cold climate, reduce electrical heating
of windows, mirrors, seats and steering wheel, if possible.
· Avoid driving with open windows. · Do not hold the car stationary on a hill
with the accelerator pedal. Instead, activate the function for automatic braking when stationary.
· Use the trip computer to see instantane-
ous fuel consumption.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving, such as downhill, this deactivates important systems such as the power steering and brake servo.
After driving · If possible, park in an acclimated garage.
Related information · Drive mode Eco (p. 427)
· Start and switch off preconditioning*
(p. 208)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
· Checking tyre pressure (p. 542)
· Activating and deactivating the automatic
brake at a standstill (p. 416)
· Start/stop function (p. 430)
· Trip computer (p. 80)
Preparations for a long trip
Before a driving holiday or some other type of long journey, it is important to check the car's functions and equipment particularly carefully. Check that
· the engine is working normally and that
fuel consumption is normal
· there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid)
· braking effect on braking works as
intended
· the tyres have sufficient tread depth and
pressure. Change to winter tyres when driving to areas where there is a risk of snowy or icy road surfaces
· starter battery charging is good
· the wiper blades are in good condition
· a warning triangle and high-visibility vest
are located in the car - legally required in certain countries
Related information · Checking tyre pressure (p. 542)
· Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 659)
· Filling washer fluid (p. 638)
· Winter driving (p. 440)
· Economical driving (p. 438)
· Settings for car modem* (p. 520)
· Recommendations for loading (p. 570) · Driving with a trailer (p. 461) · Pilot Assist* (p. 305) · Speed limiter (p. 285) · Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 557)
* Option/accessory. 439
STARTING AND DRIVING
Winter driving
For winter driving it is important to perform certain checks of the car in order to ensure that it can be driven safely. Check the following in particular before the cold season:
· The engine coolant must contain 50%
glycol. This mixture protects the engine against frost down to approx. -35°C (-31°F). To avoid health risks, different types of glycol must not be mixed.
· The fuel tank must be kept filled to pre-
vent condensation.
· Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting in cold weather and also reduce fuel consumption while the engine is cold.
· The condition of the starter battery and
charge level must be inspected. Cold weather places great demands on the starter battery and its capacity is reduced by the cold.
· Use washer fluid with antifreeze to avoid
ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
See the separate section for engine oil recommendations.
Slippery driving conditions To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recommends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is a risk of snow or ice.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries. Studded tyres are not permitted in all countries.
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts.
Related information · Engine oil -- specifications (p. 653) · Winter tyres (p. 555) · Snow chains (p. 556) · Braking on gritted roads (p. 411) · Braking on wet roads (p. 411) · Filling washer fluid (p. 638) · Starter battery (p. 597) · Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 636)
· Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 635)
· Topping up coolant (p. 596) · Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 655)
Driving in water
Wading means the car being driven through water e.g. on a flooded road. Driving in water must be performed with great caution. The car can be driven through water to a maximum depth of 45 cm (17 inches) at no more than walking speed. Extra caution should be exercised when passing through flowing water.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed and do not stop the car. When the water has been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake function is achieved. Water and mud for example can make the brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake function.
· If necessary, clean the contacts for the
electric heater and trailer coupling after driving in water and mud.
· Do not let the car stand with water over
the sills for any long period of time - this could cause electrical malfunctions.
440
IMPORTANT
· Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
· If water enters the transmission, it
reduces the lubricating ability of the oil, which shortens the service life of related systems.
· Damage to any component, engine,
transmission, turbocharger, differential or its internal components caused by flooding, hydrostatic locking or oil shortage, is not covered by the warranty.
· In the event of the engine stalling in
water, do not try restart - tow the car from the water to a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk of engine breakdown.
Related information · Recovery (p. 468)
· Low speed control* (p. 435)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Opening and closing the fuel filler flap
The car must be unlocked for the fuel filler flap to be opened20.
In the driver display, the arrow next to the tank symbol indicates which side of the car the fuel filler flap is located.
Filling fuel
The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel filler system.
Refuelling the car at a petrol station
1. Open the fuel filler flap with a gentle press on the rear of the flap.
2. After refuelling is finished - close the flap with a gentle press.
Related information · Filling fuel (p. 441)
· Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 450)
It is important to feed the pump nozzle past the filler pipe's two openable hatches before starting to fuel the car.
Fuelling instruction:
1. Switch off the car and open the fuel filler flap.
20 Only locking and unlocking with the remote control key, keyless* or via Volvo On Call affects the status of the fuel filler flap.
}} * Option/accessory. 441
STARTING AND DRIVING || 2.
4. Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump nozzle cuts out the first time. > The tank is full.
NOTE Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.
Choose fuel that is approved for use in the car in accordance with the identifier21 on the inside of the fuel filler flap. See information on approved fuels and the identifier in the sections on "Petrol" and "Diesel" respectively.
3. Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler opening. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The pump nozzle must be pushed past both caps before refuelling is started.
Topping up fuel from a fuel can When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel located in the foam block under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
1. Open the fuel filler flap.
2. Insert the funnel in the fuel filler opening. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The funnel's pipe must be pushed past both caps before filling can be started.
Applicable to cars with fuel-driven auxiliary heater* Never use the fuel-driven heater when the car is in a filling station area.
Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Related information · Opening and closing the fuel filler flap
(p. 441)
· Petrol (p. 443) · Diesel (p. 445) · Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 446)
21 The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe by 12 October 2018 at the latest.
442
* Option/accessory.
Handling of fuel
Do not use fuel with a lower quality than that recommended by Volvo, as this will negatively affect engine power and fuel consumption.
WARNING Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting fuel splashes in the eyes. In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swallowed.
WARNING Fuel which spills onto the ground can be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel. Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury.
IMPORTANT
Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels which are not recommended will invalidate Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary service agreements; this is applicable to all engines.
Related information · Petrol (p. 443) · Diesel (p. 445)
· Handling AdBlue® (p. 449)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Petrol
It is important to use the correct fuel during refuelling. Petrol is available with different octane ratings that are adapted for different types of driving. Only use petrol from well-known producers. Never use fuel of dubious quality. The petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard. Identifier for petrol
Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap. The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe by 12 October 2018 at the latest. These are the identifiers that apply for current standard fuels in Europe. Petrol with the following identifiers may be used in cars with petrol engine:
}}
443
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
E5 is a petrol with maximum
2.7% oxygen and maximum
5 volume % ethanol.
E10 is a petrol with maximum 3.7% oxygen and maximum 10 volume % ethanol.
IMPORTANT
· Fuel that contains up to 10 percent by
volume ethanol is permitted.
· EN 228 E10 petrol (max 10 percent by
volume ethanol) is approved for use.
· Ethanol higher than E10
(max. 10 percent by volume ethanol) is not permitted, e.g. E85 is not permitted.
Octane rating · RON 95 can be used for normal driving.
· RON 98 is recommended for good power
and low fuel consumption.
· An octane rating lower than RON 95 must
not be used.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C (100 °F), fuel with the highest octane rating is recommended for adapted performance and fuel economy.
IMPORTANT
· Use only unleaded petrol to avoid dam-
aging the catalytic converter.
· Fuel containing metallic additives must
not be used.
· Do not use any additives which have
not been recommended by Volvo.
Related information · Handling of fuel (p. 443) · Filling fuel (p. 441) · Petrol particle filter (p. 444) · Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 659)
Petrol particle filter22
Petrol cars are fitted with particle filters for more efficient emission control. Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in the petrol particle filter during normal driving. In normal driving conditions, passive regeneration takes place, which leads to the particles being oxidised and burned away. The filter is emptied in this way.
If the car is driven at low speed or with repeated cold starts in low outside temperature, active regeneration may be necessary. Regeneration of the particulate filter is automatic and normally takes 10-20 minutes. Fuel consumption may temporarily increase during regeneration.
When driving short distances at low speeds in a petrol car The capacity of the emissions system is affected by how the car is driven. Driving varying distances and at different speeds is important in order to achieve performance that is as energy-efficient as possible.
Driving short distances at low speeds (or in cold climates) frequently, where the engine does not reach normal operating temperature, can lead to problems that can eventually cause a malfunction and trigger a warning message. If the vehicle is mostly driven in city traffic, it is important to regularly drive at
444
STARTING AND DRIVING
higher speeds to allow the emissions system to regenerate.
· The car should be driven on A-roads at
speeds in excess of 70 km/h (44 mph) for at least 20 minutes between each refuelling.
Related information · Petrol (p. 443)
Diesel
It is important to use the correct fuel during refuelling. Diesel is available in different qualities adapted to different conditions. Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers. Never use fuel of dubious quality. Diesel fuel must fulfil the EN 590 or SS 155435 standard. Paraffinic diesel (HVO, XTL) according to the EN 15940 standard can be used. Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants in the fuel, such as excessively high volumes of sulphur and metals.
Identifier
fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe by 12 October 2018 at the latest.
This is the identifier that applies for current standard fuel in Europe. Diesel with the following identifiers may be used in cars with diesel engine:
B7 is diesel with maximum 7 volume % fatty acid methyl ester (FAME).
22 Applicable to certain variants.
Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding
At low temperatures (lower than 0 °C (32 °F)) a paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which may lead to starting problems. The fuel qualities that are sold must be adapted for season and climate zone, but for extreme weather conditions, old fuel or moving between climate zones, paraffin precipitate may occur.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is reduced if the tank is kept well filled.
}}
445
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| When refuelling, check that the area around the fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the paintwork. Wash off any spillage with detergent and water.
IMPORTANT
Diesel fuel must:
· fulfil the EN 590, EN 15940 and/or
SS 155435 standards
· have a sulphur content not exceeding
10 mg/kg
· have a maximum of 7 vol % FAME23
(B7).
Related information · Handling of fuel (p. 443)
· Filling fuel (p. 441)
· Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 446)
· Diesel particulate filter (p. 447)
· Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 448)
· Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 659)
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
· Special additives
· Marine diesel fuel
· Heating oil
· FAME24 and vegetable oil.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.
23 Fatty Acid Methyl Ester 24 Diesel fuel with maximum 7 vol % FAME (B7) is permitted.
446
Empty tank and diesel engine
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starvation, the fuel system needs a few moments to carry out a check. Before starting the car after the fuel tank has been filled with diesel - proceed as follows:
1. The remote control key must be inside the car.
2. Set the car in ignition position II press the start button without depressing the brake pedal Or clutch pedal and hold the button depressed for approx. 4 seconds. Then release the button.
3. Wait approx. one minute.
4. Start the engine.
NOTE
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel shortage:
· Stop the car on as flat/level ground as
possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk of air pockets in the fuel supply.
Points to remember when filling with a fuel can When filling diesel with a fuel can, use the funnel located under the floor hatch in the cargo
STARTING AND DRIVING
area. Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe firmly into the filler pipe. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The funnel's pipe must be pushed past both caps before filling can be started.
Related information · Filling fuel (p. 441)
· Diesel (p. 445)
· Tool kit (p. 551)
Diesel particulate filter
Diesel cars are fitted with particle filters for more efficient emission control. Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in the diesel particle filter during normal driving. When these conditions have been met, regeneration starts to burn off the particles and empty the filter. To start regeneration, the engine must have reached normal operating temperature. Regeneration of the particulate filter is automatic and normally takes 10-20 minutes.
NOTE
The following may arise during regeneration:
· a smaller reduction of engine power
may be noticed temporarily
· fuel consumption may increase tempo-
rarily
· a smell of burning may arise.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the engine then reaches normal operating temperature more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter is completely filled with particles, it may be difficult to start the engine and the filter is non-functional. Then there is a risk that the filter will need to be replaced.
When driving short distances at low speeds in a diesel car The capacity of the emissions system is affected by how the car is driven. Driving varying distances and at different speeds is important in order to achieve performance that is as energy-efficient as possible.
Driving short distances at low speeds (or in cold climates) frequently, where the engine does not reach normal operating temperature, can lead to problems that can eventually cause a malfunction and trigger a warning message. If the vehicle is mostly driven in city traffic, it is important to regularly drive at higher speeds to allow the emissions system to regenerate.
· The car should be driven on A-roads at
speeds in excess of 60 km/h (38 mph) for at least 20 minutes between each refuelling.
}} * Option/accessory. 447
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| Related information · Diesel (p. 445)
· Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 448)
· Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 659)
Emission control with AdBlue®25
AdBlue is an additive used in the SCR26 system to reduce emissions of noxious substances from a diesel engine. In the SCR system, the AdBlue and the nitrous oxide exhaust gas substance are converted to nitrogen and water vapour, which significantly reduces the emissions of harmful nitrous oxides.
AdBlue AdBlue is a colourless liquid consisting of 32.5% urea27 in deionised water and is manufactured in accordance with the ISO 22241 standard. It is specially developed for SCR cleaning technology for diesel engines.
AdBlue has its own tank in the car which is topped up via a separate filler pipe behind the fuel filler flap. Consumption depends on driving style, outside temperature and the operating temperature of the system.
Conditions for driving with AdBlue There must always be AdBlue of the correct quality in the AdBlue tank before the car can be started. The SCR system is very sensitive to contaminants.
The emission control system continuously monitors the tank level, quality and dosage of
AdBlue. If something is wrong, a message is shown in the driver display.
IMPORTANT
AdBlue is required for the function of the SCR system and legal emissions compliance. It is illegal to modify or manipulate the AdBlue supply system in any way so that no AdBlue reagent is consumed when it is required for legal exhaust emissions compliance. Any such tampering may be a criminal offence which may lead to legal prosecution actions.
It is not permitted to operate the car with an empty AdBlue tank, since it will no longer be compliant with the legal requirements for exhaust emissions. Therefore, the car is equipped with a warning system to inform when AdBlue refilling is required. When the fill level in the AdBlue tank is getting low, warnings are displayed to inform that AdBlue refilling is required.
25 Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA) 26 Selective Catalytic Reduction 27 CO(NH2)2
448
Related information · Handling AdBlue® (p. 449)
· Checking and filling with AdBlue®
(p. 450)
· Symbols and messages for AdBlue®
(p. 452)
Handling AdBlue®28
AdBlue consists primarily of water (approx. 67.5% water and 32.5% urea). The fluid is not flammable but should be handled with care since it can irritate the eyes and skin.
Points to remember when handling Avoid inhaling vapour as well as contact with skin and eyes. Preferably use gloves that prevent irritation to sensitive skin when handling the fluid.
WARNING
Action for first aid:
· For inhalation - get fresh air.
· For skin contact - wash the skin with
soap and water.
· For contact with the eyes - rinse imme-
diately with a lot of water.
· For ingestion - rinse the mouth thor-
oughly. Do not induce vomiting.
Seek medical attention if the discomfort remains or if a large quantity has been ingested.
Action in the event of a spill AdBlue spilled on the ground, the car or painted surfaces must be rinsed thoroughly with water. Avoid releasing into the drainage system.
28 Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Storage AdBlue must be stored in tightly sealing original packaging at a temperature above -11 °C (12 °F) and below 30 °C (86 °F). The fluid must not be stored in direct sunlight.
AdBlue freezes at -11 °C (12 °F) but can be used again when the solution has thawed.
Related information · Checking and filling with AdBlue®
(p. 450)
· Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 448)
449
STARTING AND DRIVING
Checking and filling with AdBlue®
Check the AdBlue level regularly and top up if the message for low AdBlue level is shown in the driver display. The AdBlue consumption is dependent on driving style, if the AdBlue tank is allowed to drain completely then it will no longer be possible to start the car.
NOTE
Never run the AdBlue tank dry. Fill the tank in good time before it is empty.
If the tank is run dry, it will not be possible to start the engine after it is switched off not the regular way or using aids.
The only way to be able to restart after driving the tank empty is to refill AdBlue of specified quality, with the minimum being the quantity shown in the driver display.
Checking AdBlue level 1.
Open the Car Status app in the app view.
2.
Press Status to show the AdBlue level.
Graphic for AdBlue level in the centre display. Each cursor represents approx. 25% of a full tank. When less than 25 % of the tank remains available, the colour of the remaining cursor changes to amber, and at less than 10 % it turns red.
450
Filling with AdBlue When the AdBlue level starts to become low, a symbol illuminates in the driver display and the AdBlue level low message is shown.
Do not overfill the tank. The amount of AdBlue that can be filled is shown in the app Car Status.
Use AdBlue of the correct quality 29
1. Open the fuel filler flap with a gentle press on the rear of the flap.
2.
3. Fill slowly/in portions, in order to avoid air pockets.
WARNING When filling from the AdBlue pump at a filling station, it is advisable to use the pump adapted for passenger cars. The AdBlue pump for heavy vehicles can also be used.
IMPORTANT Wipe away any spilled AdBlue. Exercise caution to prevent AdBlue from coming into contact with the car's paintwork. If it does, rinse with plenty of water since the fluid can affect the paintwork.
Open the blue cover for the smaller filler pipe intended for AdBlue.
Related information · Handling AdBlue® (p. 449)
· Symbols and messages for AdBlue®
(p. 452)
· Tank capacity for AdBlue® (p. 657)
29 ISO 22241
STARTING AND DRIVING 451
STARTING AND DRIVING
Symbols and messages for AdBlue®30
The emission control system continuously monitors the level, quality and dosage of AdBlue. If something is wrong, a message is shown in the driver display.
Symbol
Message AdBlue level low
AdBlue dosing and AdBlue quality
Specification The AdBlue level is low and the tank needs to be topped up.
The system does not function as it should. Contact a workshopA to check the function.
30 Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA) 452
Symbol
Message Refill AdBlue
STARTING AND DRIVING
Specification The AdBlue level is critically low and the tank needs to be topped up immediately.
Engine start prohibited and e.g.: Fill a minimum of 4.5 litres of AdBlue
Engine start prohibited Service of AdBlue system needed to allow restart
The car cannot be started before AdBlue has been filled. Fill with AdBlue to the amount specified in the driver display, or contact a workshopA.
Note that the car must be level for the level gauge to be able to correctly register the amount of AdBlue filled.
When starting after filling AdBlue, follow the instructions regarding empty tank and diesel engine.
The system does not function as it should. Contact a workshopA to check the function.
A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information · Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 450) · Handling AdBlue® (p. 449) · Book service and repair (p. 585) · Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 446)
453
STARTING AND DRIVING
Overheating in the engine and drive system
Under certain conditions, e.g. hard driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk that the engine and drive system may overheat in particular with a heavy load.
· In the event of overheating, the engine's
power may be limited temporarily.
· Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front
of the grille when driving in hot climates.
· If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system becomes too high then a warning symbol is illuminated and the driver display shows the message Engine temperature High temperature Stop safely. Stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes and cool down.
· If the message Engine temperature
High temperature Turn off engine or Engine coolant Level low, turn off engine is shown, stop the car and switch off the engine.
· In the event of overheating in the gearbox,
an alternative gear shift program will be selected31. In addition, a built-in protection function is activated that, amongst other things, illuminates a warning symbol and the driver display shows the message Transmission warm Reduce speed to
31 Applies to automatic gearbox.
lower temperature or Transmission hot Stop safely, wait for cooling. Follow the recommendation given, reduce speed or stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes to enable the gearbox to cool down.
· If the car overheats, the air conditioning
may be switched off temporarily.
· Do not turn the engine off immediately
you stop after a hard drive.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to operate for a time after the engine has been switched off.
Symbols in the driver display Symbol Specification
High engine temperature. Follow the recommendation given.
Low level, coolant. Follow the recommendation given.
Gearbox hot/overheated/cooled. Follow the recommendation given.
Related information · Topping up coolant (p. 596) · Driving with a trailer (p. 461) · Preparations for a long trip (p. 439) · Gear shift indicator (p. 423)
454
STARTING AND DRIVING
Overloading the starter battery
The electrical functions in the car load the starter battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the ignition position II when the car is switched off. Instead, use ignition position I which uses less power. Also, be aware of different accessories that load the electrical system. Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the car is switched off. Examples of such functions are:
· ventilation fan
· headlamps
· windscreen wiper
· audio system (high volume).
If the starter battery voltage is low, a message is shown in the driver display. The energy-saving function then shuts down certain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan and/or audio system.
In which case, charge the starter battery by starting the car and then running it for at least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is more effective during driving than running the engine at idling speed while stationary.
Related information · Starter battery (p. 597)
· Ignition positions (p. 406)
Using jump starting with another battery
If the starter battery is discharged then the car can be started with current from another battery.
Attachment points for the jump leads. When jump starting the car, the following steps are recommended to avoid short circuits or other damage: 1. Set the car's electrical system in ignition
position 0. 2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage
of 12 V. 3. If the donor battery is installed in another
car - switch off the donor car's engine and make sure that the two cars do not touch each other.
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment.
5. Open the positive jump-starting point's cover (2).
6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp onto the car's positive jump-starting point (2).
7. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).
8. Connect the black jump lead's other clamp onto the car's negative jump-starting point (4).
9. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed securely so that there are no sparks during the starting attempt.
10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
}}
455
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| 11. Start the engine in the car with the discharged battery.
IMPORTANT Do not touch the connections between cable and car during the starting attempt. There is a risk of sparks forming.
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order first the black and then the red. Make sure that none of the black jump lead's clamps comes into contact with the car's positive jump-starting point/donor battery's positive terminal or the clamp connected to the red jump lead.
WARNING
High voltage can be dangerous in the event of incorrect intervention. Do not touch anything on the batteries that is not clearly described in the owner's manual.
· 48 V support battery must never be
used for jump-starting.
· External electrical equipment must not,
under any circumstances, be connected to the 48 V battery.
· The 48 V battery may only be serviced
and replaced by a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
WARNING
· The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.
· Do not connect the jump leads to any
fuel system component or any moving part. Be careful of hot engine parts.
· The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
· If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.
· Never smoke near the battery.
456
NOTE
If the starter battery has been discharged so much that the car has no normal electrical functions and the engine is then jumpstarted with an external battery or a battery charger, the Start/stop function may continue to be activated. If the Start/stop function then auto-stops the engine shortly afterwards, there is a great risk that engine auto-start will fail due to insufficient battery capacity, because the battery has not had the time to recharge.
If the car has been jump-started, or if there is insufficient time to charge the battery with a battery charger, the Start/stop function is temporarily deactivated until the battery has been recharged by the car. In an outside temperature of approx. +15 °C (approx. 60 °F), the battery needs to be charged for at least 1 hour by the car. In a lower outside temperature, the charging time may increase to 34 hours. The recommendation is to charge the battery using an external battery charger.
Related information · Starting the car (p. 404)
· Ignition positions (p. 406)
· Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 181)
· Selecting ignition mode (p. 407)
· Support battery (p. 599)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Towbar*
The car can be equipped with a towbar that makes it possible to tow e.g. a trailer behind the car. There may be different towbar variants available for the car. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
IMPORTANT When the engine is switched off, the constant battery voltage to the trailer connector can be switched off automatically so as not to drain the starter battery.
IMPORTANT The towball needs regular cleaning and lubrication with grease in order to prevent wear.
NOTE When a hitch with a vibration damper is used, the towball must not be lubricated. This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack that is clamped in around the towball.
}}
* Option/accessory. 457
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| Related information · Extendable and retractable towbar* (p. 459) · Driving with a trailer (p. 461) · Towbar-mounted bicycle rack* (p. 465) · Specifications for towbar* (p. 458)
Specifications for towbar*
Dimensions and mounting points for towbar.
Dimensions, mounting points in mm (inches)
A
939 (37)
B
72 (2.8)
C
6 (0.24)
D
145 (5.7)
E
88 (3.5)
F
Side beam tilts 8 degrees
G
353 (13.9)
H
1048 (41.3)
I
524 (20.6)
Related information · Towbar* (p. 457)
· Towing capacity and towball load
(p. 648)
458
* Option/accessory.
Extendable and retractable towbar*
The retractable tow hook is easy to retract or extend as required. In the retracted position, the towbar is completely concealed.
WARNING Follow the instructions for retracting and extending the towbar carefully.
WARNING Do not press the extend/retract button if a trailer or accessory is attached to the tow bar.
Extending the towbar
WARNING Avoid standing close to the bumper in the centre behind the car when extending the towing hitch.
1.
Open the tailgate. A button for extending/ retracting the towbar is located on the right-hand side at the rear of the cargo area. An indicator lamp in the button must illuminate with a constant orange glow for the extension function to be active.
STARTING AND DRIVING
2. Press and release the button extension might not start if the button is pressed for too long.
> The towbar extends out and down in an unlocked position - the indicator lamp flashes orange. The tow hook is ready to continue moving to the locked position.
}} * Option/accessory. 459
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| 3.
Move the towbar to its end position, where it is secured and locked in place the indicator lamp illuminates with a constant orange glow. > The towbar is ready for use.
IMPORTANT When the tow bar is activated by pressing a key and has been placed in the unlocked position: Wait at least 2 seconds before the tow bar is moved to the locked position. If the tow bar does not remain in the locked position, wait another few seconds and try again. Do not kick the tow bar.
WARNING
2.
Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable in the intended bracket.
NOTE
Power save mode activates after a while and the indicator lamp goes out. The system is reactivated by closing and opening the tailgate. This applies when retracting or extending the towbar.
If the car detects a connected trailer electrically, the indicator lamp stops illuminating with a constant glow.
Retracting the towbar
IMPORTANT
Make sure that there is no plug or adapter in the electrical socket when retracting the towbar.
1. Open the tailgate. Press and release the button on the right-hand side at the rear of the cargo area - retraction might not start if the button is pressed for too long. > The towbar automatically lowers in an unlocked position - the indicator lamp in the button flashes orange.
Lock the towbar by moving it back to its retracted position, where it is locked.
> The indicator lamp will now illuminate with a constant glow if the towbar is correctly retracted.
460
IMPORTANT
When the tow bar is activated by pressing a key and has been placed in the unlocked position:
Wait at least 2 seconds before the tow bar is moved to the locked position. If the tow bar does not remain in the locked position, wait another few seconds and try again.
Do not kick the tow bar.
Related information · Driving with a trailer (p. 461) · Towbar* (p. 457)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Driving with a trailer
When driving with a trailer, there are a number of points that are important to think about regarding the towbar, the trailer and how the load is positioned in the trailer. Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight.
The car is supplied with the necessary equipment for towing a trailer.
· The car's towbar must be of an approved
type.
· Distribute the load on the trailer so that
the weight on the towbar complies with the specified maximum towball load. Towball load is calculated as part of the car's payload.
· Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-
mended pressure for a full load.
· The engine is loaded more heavily than
usual when driving with a trailer.
· Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km (620 miles).
· The brakes are loaded much more than
usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear when shifting manually and adjust your speed.
· Follow the regulations in force for the per-
mitted speeds and weights.
· Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
· The maximum indicated trailer weight only
applies to heights up to 1000 metres above sea level (3280 ft). At higher elevations, the engine output and the vehicle's climbing ability are reduced due to the reduced air density, and the maximum trailer load must therefore be reduced. The weight of the car and trailer must be decreased by 10% for each additional 1000 m (3280 ft) or part thereof.
· Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 12%.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes, in combination with poorer fuel quality than recommended, are factors that considerably increase the car's fuel consumption.
Trailer connector An adapter is required if the car's towbar has a 13 pin connector and the trailer has a 7 pin connector. Use an adapter approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground.
}}
* Option/accessory. 461
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
IMPORTANT
When the engine is switched off, the constant battery voltage to the trailer connector can be switched off automatically so as not to drain the starter battery.
Trailer weights
WARNING Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow.
Level control* The car's system for level control endeavours to maintain a constant height regardless of load (up to the maximum permissible weight). When the car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly, which is normal.
When driving in hilly terrain and hot climates Under certain circumstances, there may be a risk of overheating when towing a trailer. If the engine and drive system overheats, a warning symbol comes on in the driver display and a message is displayed.
The following applies for cars with automatic gearbox:
The automatic gearbox adapts the gears depending on load and engine speed.
Steep inclines Do not lock the automatic gearbox in a higher gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not always a good idea to drive at a high gear with low engine speed.
Parking on a hill 1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
2. Activate the parking brake.
3. Select gear position P.
4. Release the brake pedal.
Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill 1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
2. Select gear position D.
3. Releasing the parking brake.
4. Release the brake pedal and start driving off.
Related information · Trailer stability assist* (p. 463)
· Checking trailer lamps (p. 464)
· Towing capacity and towball load
(p. 648)
· Overheating in the engine and drive sys-
tem (p. 454)
· Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 655)
· Extendable and retractable towbar*
(p. 459)
462
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Trailer stability assist*
The function of trailer stability assist (TSA32), which is included in the stability system ESC33, is to stabilise cars towing trailers in situations where they begin snaking. The function is available with towbar installation, contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
Reasons for snaking The snaking phenomenon can occur with any car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs at high speeds. However, there is a risk of it occurring at lower speeds if the trailer is overloaded or the load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a triggering factor, e.g.:
· Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
· Car with trailer drives on an uneven road
surface or in a pothole.
· Sweeping steering wheel movements.
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even impossible to suppress. This makes the car/trailer combination difficult to control and there is a risk that you could, for example, end up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
Trailer stability assist function The trailer stability assist function continually monitors the car's movements, particularly lateral movements. If snaking is detected, the front wheels are individually braked. This serves to stabilise the car/trailer combination. This is often enough to help the driver regain control of the car.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time that trailer stability assist intervenes, the car/trailer combination is braked with all wheels and engine power is reduced. Once snaking has been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer combination is stable once again, the system stops regulating and the driver once again has full control of the car.
NOTE
The stability function is deactivated if the driver chooses to activate ESC Sport Mode via the menu system in the centre display.
Trailer stability assist may fail to intervene if the driver uses severe steering wheel movements to try to rectify the snaking because in such a situation the system cannot determine whether it is the trailer or the driver causing the snaking.
When Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) is operating, the ESC symbol flashes in the driver display.
NOTE Retrofitting a towbar requires an update of the car's software, contact a Volvo dealer.
Related information · Driving with a trailer (p. 461) · Electronic stability control (p. 271)
32 Trailer Stability Assist 33 Electronic Stability Control
* Option/accessory. 463
STARTING AND DRIVING
Checking trailer lamps
When connecting a trailer - check that all the trailer lamps work before departure.
Direction indicators and brake lights on the trailer If one or more of the trailer's direction indicators or brake light bulbs is broken, the driver display shows a symbol and a message. Other lights on the trailer must be checked manually by the driver before setting off.
Symbol Message
· Trailer turn indicator Right
turn indicator malfunction
· Trailer turn indicator Left
turn indicator malfunction
· Trailer brake light Malfunc-
tion
If any lamp for the trailer's direction indicators is broken, the driver display symbol for direction indicators will also flash more quickly than normal.
Rear fog lamp on trailer When connecting the trailer, the rear fog lamp may not light up on the car. In such cases, the rear fog lamp function switches to the trailer. Upon activation of the rear fog lamp, check
therefore that the trailer is equipped with a rear fog lamp to travel safely.
Checking trailer lamps*
Automatic checking After a trailer is connected electrically, it is possible to check that the trailer lamps are working via an automatic lamp activation. The function helps the driver check that the trailer lamps are working before starting off.
The car must be switched off to perform the check.
1. When a trailer is connected to the towbar, the Automatic Trailer Lamp Check message is shown in the driver display.
2. Confirm the message by pressing the right-hand steering wheel keypad's O button. > The lamp check starts.
3. Exit the car to check lamp functionality. > All trailer lamps start to flash - then the lamps are switched on one at a time.
4. Visually check that all lamps available on the trailer are operational.
5. After a moment, all lamps on the trailer flash again. > The check is complete.
Switching off automatic checking The automatic checking function can be switched off in the centre display.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting.
3. Deselect Automatic Trailer Lamp Check.
Manual checking If the automatic checking is switched off then it is possible to start the check manually.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting.
3. Select Manual Trailer Lamp Check. > The lamp check starts. Exit the car to check lamp functionality.
Related information · Driving with a trailer (p. 461)
464
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Towbar-mounted bicycle rack*
When using a bicycle rack, the bicycle racks that Volvo has developed are recommended. This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in order to achieve the maximum possible safety during a journey. Volvo's bicycle racks are available for purchase at authorised Volvo dealers.
Carefully follow the instructions enclosed with the bicycle rack.
· Bicycle rack including load must weigh a
maximum of 75 kg (165 pounds).
· The bicycle rack may be designed for a
maximum of three bicycles.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the bicycle rack may cause damage to the towbar and car.
The bicycle rack can loosen from the towbar if it
· is incorrectly fitted on the towball
· is overloaded, see the bicycle rack's
instructions for maximum load weight
· is used for carrying something other
than bicycles.
The car's driving characteristics are affected when a bicycle rack is fitted on the towbar. For example due to:
· increased weight
· reduced acceleration capacity
· reduced ground clearance
· changed braking capacity.
Recommendations for loading bicycles on the bicycle rack The larger the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the towball, the greater the load on the towbar.
Load according to the following recommendations:
· Fit the heaviest bicycle furthest in, closest
to the car.
· Keep the load symmetrical and as close to
the centre of the car as possible e.g. by loading the bicycles facing alternately if several bicycles are loaded.
· Remove loose objects from the bicycle for
transportation, e.g. bicycle basket, battery, child seat. Partly to reduce the load on the towbar and bicycle rack, and partly to reduce the wind resistance, which affects fuel consumption.
· Do not use protective covers on the bicy-
cles. This may affect manoeuvrability, impair visibility and increase fuel con-
sumption. It may also lead to an increased load on the towbar.
Related information · Towbar* (p. 457)
* Option/accessory. 465
STARTING AND DRIVING
Towing
During towing, the car is towed by another vehicle by means of a towline. Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for towing before the towing begins.
Preparations and towing
IMPORTANT Some gearbox variants make it impossible to shift out of P unless the engine is running. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for assistance when towing, or summon professional help for recovery.
IMPORTANT Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward. · Do not tow cars with automatic trans-
mission at speeds higher than 80 km/h (50 mph) or for distances in excess of 80 km (50 miles).
WARNING · Check that the steering lock is
unlocked before towing.
· Ignition position II must be active - in
ignition position I all airbags are deactivated.
· Always keep the remote control key in
the car when it is being towed.
WARNING The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off - the brake pedal needs to be depressed about 5 times more heavily and the steering is considerably heavier than normal.
1. Activate the car's hazard warning flashers.
2. Secure the towline in the towing eye.
3. Deactivate the steering lock by unlocking the car.
4. Set the car in ignition position II - press the start button without depressing the brake pedal and hold the button depressed for approx. 4 seconds. Then release the button.
5. Move the gear selector to neutral position and release the parking brake.
If the battery voltage is too low, the parking brake cannot be disengaged. Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too low. > The towing vehicle can now start tow-
ing.
6. Keep the towline taut when the towing vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot gently pressed on the brake pedal thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.
7. Be prepared to brake to stop.
Jump starting Do not tow the car to jump start the engine. Use a donor battery if the starter battery is discharged and the engine does not start.
IMPORTANT
The catalytic converter may be damaged during attempts to tow-start the engine.
Related information · Fitting and removing the towing eye
(p. 467)
· Hazard warning flashers (p. 147) · Recovery (p. 468)
466
· Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 455)
· Selecting ignition mode (p. 407)
· Gearbox (p. 417)
Fitting and removing the towing eye
Use the towing eye for towing. The towing eye is screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or rear.
Fitting the towing eye
STARTING AND DRIVING
Front: Remove the cover press the lid. > The cover pivots around its centre line
and can then be removed.
Take out the towing eye from the foam block under the floor in the cargo area.
Rear: Remove the cover Use a coin, key or similar to pry the lid out using the marking.
> Fold out the cover completely and detach.
}} 467
STARTING AND DRIVING
|| 4. Screw in the towing eye until it reaches its end stop.
may be damaged if you try to pull it up using the towing eye.
· If necessary, raise the car by using the
recovery vehicle's lifting device. Do not use the towing eye.
WARNING No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up onto the flatbed platform.
Screw the eye in firmly. For example, thread through the wheel bolt wrench* and use it as a lever.
IMPORTANT
It is important that the towing eye is firmly screwed into place - right in until it stops.
Points to remember before using the towing eye
· The towing eye may be used to pull the
car up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform. The car's position and ground clearance determine whether it is possible.
· If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp
is too steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is inadequate, then the car
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
Removing the towing eye Unscrew and remove the towing eye after
use and return it to its foam block.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper.
Related information · Towing (p. 466) · Recovery (p. 468) · Tool kit (p. 551)
Recovery
For recovery, the car is taken away with the help of another vehicle. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
The towing eye can be used to pull the car up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform.
The car's position and ground clearance determine whether it is possible to pull it up onto a flatbed platform. If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you try to pull it up. The car should then be lifted using the recovery vehicle's lifting device.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
468
* Option/accessory.
IMPORTANT Note that the car must always be transported with the wheels rolling forward.
Related information · Fitting and removing the towing eye
(p. 467)
STARTING AND DRIVING
HomeLink®*34
HomeLink®35 is a programmable remote control, integrated in the car's electrical system, which can remotely control up to three different devices (e.g. garage door opener, alarm system, outdoor and indoor lighting) and thereby replace the remote controls for them. General
The figure is schematic - the version may vary. Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 Indicator lamp
HomeLink® is supplied built-in to the interior rearview mirror. The HomeLink® panel consists of three programmable buttons and one indicator lamp in the mirror glass.
For more information about HomeLink®, visit homelink.com or call 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number +49 6838 907 277)36.
Save the original remote controls for future programming (e.g. when changing to another car or for use in another vehicle).
IMPORTANT The programming for the buttons should be deleted when the car is sold.
Related information · Using HomeLink®* (p. 472) · Programming HomeLink®* (p. 470) · Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 472)
34 Applies to certain markets. 35 HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation. 36 Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator.
* Option/accessory. 469
STARTING AND DRIVING
Programming HomeLink®*37
Follow these instructions to program HomeLink®, reset all programming or reprogram individual buttons.
NOTE In certain vehicles the ignition must be switched on or in "accessory position" before HomeLink® can be programmed or used. If possible, fit new batteries in the remote control that shall be replaced by HomeLink® for faster programming and improved transmission of the radio signal. The HomeLink® buttons should be reset before programming.
WARNING While programming HomeLink®, the garage door or gate being programmed may activate. For this reason, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or gate while programming is in progress. The car should be outside the garage while a garage door opener is being programmed.
1. Aim the remote control towards the HomeLink® button to be programmed and hold it approx. 2-8 cm (approx. 1-3 inches) from the button. Do not obstruct the indicator lamp on HomeLink®.
Note: The ability of some remote controls to program HomeLink® is improved at a distance of approx. 15-20 cm (approx. 6-12 inches). Bear this in mind if problems occur with the programming.
2. Press and hold depressed both the button on the remote control and the button to be reprogrammed on HomeLink®.
3. Do not release the buttons until the indicator lamp has switched from flashing slowly (approx. once per second) to either flashing quickly (approx. 10 times per second) or illuminating with a constant glow.
> If the indicator lamp illuminates with a constant glow: Indication that the programming has finished. Press the programmed button twice to activate.
If the indicator lamp flashes quickly: The device to be programmed to
HomeLink® may have a security function that requires extra steps. Test by pressing the programmed button twice to see whether the programming is working. Otherwise, continue with the following steps.
37 Applies to certain markets. 470
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
4. Locate programming button38 on the receiver for the garage door or similar. It is normally located close to the antenna's bracket on the receiver.
5. Depress and release the receiver's programming button once. The programming must be completed within 30 seconds of the button being depressed.
6. Press and release the button on HomeLink® that you want to program. Repeat the sequence of pressing/holding/ releasing a second time and, depending on the receiver model, even a third time.
> Programming is now be complete and the garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed button is depressed.
In the event of programming problems, contact HomeLink® at homelink.com, or call
00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number +49 6838 907 277)39.
Reprogramming individual buttons To reprogram an individual HomeLink® button, proceed as follows:
1. Press the desired button and hold it depressed for approx. 20 seconds.
2. Once the indicator lamp on HomeLink® starts to flash slowly, programming can continue as normal.
Note: If the button to be reprogrammed is not programmed with a new unit, it will resume the previously saved programming.
Resetting the HomeLink® buttons It is only possible to reset all of the HomeLink® buttons at the same time, not each button individually. Individual buttons can only be reprogrammed.
Press and hold depressed the outer buttons (1 and 3) on HomeLink® for approx. 10 seconds.
> When the indicator lamp changes over from a constant glow to starting to flash, the buttons are reset and ready to be reprogrammed.
Related information · Using HomeLink®* (p. 472)
· HomeLink®* (p. 469)
· Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 472)
38 Button designation and colour varies between manufacturers. 39 Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator.
* Option/accessory. 471
STARTING AND DRIVING
Using HomeLink®*40
When HomeLink® is fully programmed it can be used in place of the separate original remote controls. Depress the programmed button. The garage door, gate, alarm system or similar is activated (may take a few seconds). If the button is depressed for more than 20 seconds then the reprogramming is started. The indicator lamp illuminates or flashes when the button has been depressed. Naturally the original remote controls can still be used in parallel with HomeLink® if required.
NOTE
When the ignition has been switched off, HomeLink® works for at least 7 minutes.
WARNING
· If HomeLink® is used to control a
garage door or gate, ensure that nobody is near the door or gate while it is in motion.
· Do not use HomeLink® for any garage
door that does not have safety stop and safety reverse.
Related information · HomeLink®* (p. 469)
· Programming HomeLink®* (p. 470)
· Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 472)
NOTE
HomeLink® cannot be used if the car is locked and the alarm is armed* from the outside.
Type approval for HomeLink®*41
Type approval for EU Gentex Corporation hereby declares that HomeLink® Model UAHL5 complies with the Radio equipment directive 2014/53/EU.
Wavelength within which the radio equipment functions:
· 433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P. · 868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P. · 868.70MHz-868.20MHz <25mW E.R.P. · 869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P. · 869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.
Certificate holder address: Gentex Corporation, 600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI 49464, USA
For more information, search support information on type approval at volvocars.com
Related information · HomeLink®* (p. 469)
40 Applies to certain markets. 41 Applies to certain markets.
472
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Compass*
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction42 in which the front of the car is pointing.
Rearview mirror with compass. Eight different compass directions are shown
by their English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west) and NW (north west). Related information
· Activating and deactivating the compass*
(p. 473)
· Calibrating the compass* (p. 473)
Activating and deactivating the compass*
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction43 in which the front of the car is pointing.
The compass is activated automatically when the car is started.
To deactivate/activate the compass manually:
Depress the button on the underside of the rearview mirror using e.g. a paper clip.
> If the compass is deactivated when the car is switched off, it will not be activated the next time the car is started. In this case, the compass needs to be activated manually.
Related information · Compass* (p. 473)
· Calibrating the compass* (p. 473)
Calibrating the compass*
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The compass44 should be calibrated if the car is moved between several magnetic zones.
1. Stop the car in a large open area free from steel structures and high-voltage power lines.
2. Start the car and switch off all electrical equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and ensure that all doors are closed.
NOTE
Calibration may fail or not start at all if electrical equipment is not switched off.
3. Hold the button on the underside of the rearview mirror depressed for approx. 3 seconds (use a paper clip, for example). The number for the current magnetic zone is shown.
42 A rearview mirror with a compass is available as an option on certain markets and models only.
43 A rearview mirror with a compass is available as an option on certain markets and models only.
44 A rearview mirror with a compass is available as an option on certain markets and models only.
}}
* Option/accessory. 473
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Magnetic zones. 4. Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone (115) is shown. See the map of magnetic zones for the compass. 5. Wait until the display returns to showing the character C, or hold the button on the underside of the rearview mirror depressed for approx. 6 seconds until the character C is shown. 6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direction is shown in the display, indicating that calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration.
7. Cars with heated windscreen*: If the character C is shown in the display when the heated windscreen is activated, perform the calibration in accordance with point 6 above with the heated windscreen activated.
8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
Related information · Compass* (p. 473)
· Activating and deactivating the compass*
(p. 473)
474
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Sound, media and Internet
The audio and media system consists of media player and radio. You can also connect a phone via Bluetooth to use handsfree functions or play music wirelessly in the car. When the car is connected to the Internet you can also use apps for media playback.
Related information · Media player (p. 486)
· Radio (p. 480)
· Phone (p. 502)
· Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
· Apps (p. 477)
· Voice recognition (p. 130)
· Ignition positions (p. 406)
· Driver distraction (p. 40)
· Managing system updates via the Down-
load Centre (p. 583)
· License agreement for audio and media
(p. 526)
Overview of audio and media
Control the functions with your voice, steering wheel keypad or the centre display. The number of speakers and amplifiers depends on which audio system the car is equipped with.
System updating The audio and media system is continuously improved. It is recommended to download system updates when new ones are available.
Audio settings
The sound reproduction quality is preset, but it can be adjusted as well. The volume is normally adjusted with the volume control below the centre display or with the right-hand steering wheel keypad. This applies, for example, during playback of music, radio, ongoing phone calls and active traffic messages.
Sound reproduction The sound system is pre-calibrated by means of digital signal processing. This calibration takes into account loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment acoustics, listener position, etc., for each combination of car model and audio system. There is also a dynamic calibration that takes into account the setting of the volume control and vehicle speed.
Personal preferences Various settings are available in the top view
under Settings Sound depending on the car's audio system.
Premium Sound* (Harman Kardon) · Equaliser equalizer setting.
· Balance balance between right/left
loudspeakers and balance between front/ rear loudspeakers.
· System Volumes adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
476
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Control, Park Assist and Phone Ringtone.
High Performance* · Tone settings for bass, treble, equalizer,
etc.
· Balance balance between right/left
loudspeakers and balance between front/ rear loudspeakers.
· System Volumes adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice Control, Park Assist and Phone Ringtone.
Performance · Tone and Balance balance between
speakers and setting of e.g. bass, treble and equalizer.
· System Volumes adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice Control, Park Assist and Phone Ringtone.
Related information · Sound experience* (p. 477)
· Media player (p. 486)
· Settings for voice recognition (p. 134)
· Settings for phone (p. 510)
· Sound, media and Internet (p. 476)
· Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
Sound experience*
Sound experience is an app that provides access to further audio settings. Sound Experience is opened from the app view in the centre display. The following settings can be defined, depending on the audio system fitted to the car:
· Seat Optimisation the sound can be
adjusted so that it can primarily be adapted for Driver, All and Rear.
· Surround - surround sound mode with
level settings.
· Tone settings for bass, treble, equalizer,
etc.
Related information · Audio settings (p. 476)
· Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
Apps
The app view contains apps that give access to some of the car's services. Swipe from right to left1 across the centre display's screen in order to access the app view from the home view. Apps that have been downloaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded functions, such as FM radio, are found here.
App view (generic image, basic apps vary by market and model)
}}
* Option/accessory. 477
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
|| Some basic apps are always available. More apps such as web radio and music services can be downloaded when the car is connected to the Internet.
Certain apps are only available for use if the car is connected to the Internet.
Start an app by pressing the app in the centre display's app view.
All the apps used should be updated to the latest version.
Related information · Downloading apps (p. 478)
· Updating apps (p. 479)
· Deleting apps (p. 479)
· Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 495)
· Android Auto* (p. 499)
· Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
· Storage space on hard disk (p. 525)
· User terms and conditions and data shar-
ing (p. 523)
Downloading apps
New apps can be downloaded when the car is connected to the Internet.
NOTE Data download may affect other services that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect on other services is experienced as disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to switch off or interrupt other services.
NOTE When downloading using a phone, pay extra attention to the data traffic costs.
1. Open the Download Centre app in the app view.
2. Select New apps in order to open a list of apps that are available but not installed in the car.
3. Tap on the row for an app in order to expand in the list and get more information about the app.
4. Select Install in order to start the download and installation of the desired app. > The status of the download and installation is shown while it is in progress.
A message is shown if a download cannot be started for the moment. The app will remain in the list and it is possible to try to start a download again.
Cancelling the download Tap on Abort to cancel a download in pro-
gress.
Note that only the download can be cancelled, when the installation phase has started, this cannot be cancelled.
Related information · Apps (p. 477)
· Updating apps (p. 479)
· Deleting apps (p. 479)
· Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
· Managing system updates via the Down-
load Centre (p. 583)
· Storage space on hard disk (p. 525)
1 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. 478
* Option/accessory.
Updating apps
The apps can be updated when the car is connected to the Internet.
NOTE Data download may affect other services that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect on other services is experienced as disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to switch off or interrupt other services.
NOTE When downloading using a phone, pay extra attention to the data traffic costs.
If an app is being used during an ongoing update, it will be restarted in order for the installation to be completed. Update all 1. Open the Download Centre app in the
app view.
2. Select Install all. > Updating is started.
Update some 1. Open the Download Centre app in the
app view.
2. Select Application updates in order to open a list of all available updates.
3. Locate the desired app and select Install. > Updating is started.
Related information · Apps (p. 477)
· Downloading apps (p. 478)
· Deleting apps (p. 479)
· Managing system updates via the Down-
load Centre (p. 583)
· Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Deleting apps
Apps can be uninstalled when the car is connected to the Internet. An app that is being used must be closed in order for the uninstallation to be completed. 1. Open the Download Centre app in the
app view.
2. Select Application updates in order to open a list of all installed apps.
3. Locate the desired app and select Uninstall in order to start the uninstallation of the app. > When the app has been uninstalled, it disappears from the list.
Related information · Apps (p. 477) · Downloading apps (p. 478) · Updating apps (p. 479) · Managing system updates via the Down-
load Centre (p. 583)
· Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
* Option/accessory. 479
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Radio
It is possible to listen to the FM bands and to digital radio (DAB)*. When the car is online, it is also possible to listen to Internet radio.
· RDS radio (p. 485) · Internet-connected car* (p. 517) · Voice control of radio and media (p. 134) · Media player (p. 486)
Start radio
The radio is started from the centre display app view. 1. Open the required frequency band (e.g.
FM) from the app view.
The radio can be operated using voice recognition, the steering wheel keypad or the centre display.
Related information · Start radio (p. 480) · Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 481)
· Save radio channels in the Radio Favour-
ites app (p. 483)
· Settings for radio (p. 483) · Digital radio* (p. 485)
480
2. Select a radio station. Related information
· Radio (p. 480) · Searching for radio stations (p. 482)
* Option/accessory.
· Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 481)
· Save radio channels in the Radio Favour-
ites app (p. 483)
· Settings for radio (p. 483)
· Voice control of radio and media (p. 134)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Changing radio band and radio station
There are instructions here for changing the radio band, the list in the radio band and the radio station in the selected list. Changing radio band Swipe to show the app view in the centre display and select the preferred radio band (e.g. FM), or open the driver display's app menu using the right-hand keypad on the steering wheel and make your selection from there. Changing lists within the frequency band
1. Press Library.
2. Select playback from Stations, Favourites, Genres or Ensembles2.
3. Tap on the desired station from the list.
Favourites - only plays back selected favourite channels.
Genres - only plays back channels broadcasting the selected genre/programme type, e.g. pop or classical.
Changing stations within the selected list Press on or under the centre dis-
play or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. > The highlight moves up or down one
place in the selected playlist.
You can also change radio station in the selected list via the centre display.
Related information · Radio (p. 480)
· Searching for radio stations (p. 482)
· Voice control of radio and media (p. 134)
· Save radio channels in the Radio Favour-
ites app (p. 483)
· Settings for radio (p. 483)
· App menu in the driver display (p. 92)
2 Only applies to digital radio (DAB*).
* Option/accessory. 481
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Searching for radio stations
The radio automatically compiles a station list of the radio stations within the area that are transmitting the strongest signals.
Manual tuning
· Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 481)
· Voice control of radio and media (p. 134)
· Settings for radio (p. 483)
The parameters you can search on depend on the frequency band selected:
· FM - station, genre and frequency. · DAB* - ensembles and stations.
1. Press Library.
2. Press . > Search view with keyboard is opened.
3. Enter the search terms. > Searching takes place with each input of a character and the search results are shown by category.
Searching manually makes it possible to find and tune to stations that are not on the automatically compiled list of the strongest stations in the area.
On changing over to manual tuning, the radio no longer changes frequency automatically when reception is poor.
Press Manual tuning, pull the control or press or . With a long press, the search jumps to the next available station in the frequency band. It is also possible to use the right keypad on the steering wheel.
Related information · Radio (p. 480)
· Start radio (p. 480)
482
* Option/accessory.
Save radio channels in the Radio Favourites app
It is possible to add a radio channel to the Radio favourites app and the favourites list for the radio band (e.g. FM). Instructions on how to add and remove radio channels can be found below.
Radio Favourites The Radio Favourites app shows saved radio channels from all frequency bands.
1. Open the app Radio favourites from the app view.
2. Tap on the desired station in the list to start listening.
Adding and removing radio favourites 1. Tap on to add a channel to or from
frequency band favourites and the Radio Favourites app.
2. Tap on Library, select Edit and tap on to remove a radio channel from the favourites.
When a radio channel is saved from a station list, the radio will automatically search for the best frequency. But if a radio channel is saved
from a manual station search, the radio does not automatically change to a stronger frequency.
If a radio channel is removed from the Radio Favourite app, the channel will also be removed from the favourites list for the relevant frequency band.
Related information · Radio (p. 480)
· Start radio (p. 480)
· Searching for radio stations (p. 482)
· Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 481)
· Voice control of radio and media (p. 134)
· Settings for radio (p. 483)
· App menu in the driver display (p. 92)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Settings for radio
There are various radio functions to activate and deactivate. Cancelling traffic messages The broadcast of traffic messages etc. can be temporarily interrupted by tapping on in the right-hand steering wheel keypad or by tapping on Cancel in the centre display. Activating and deactivating radio functions Drag down the top view and select Settings
Media and the desired radio band to view available functions.
}} 483
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
|| AM/FM Radio3
· Show Broadcast Information: shows
information on programme content, artists, etc.
· Freeze Program Name: select to stop
the programme service name from scrolling continuously. Instead it freezes after 20 seconds.
· Select Announcements: · Local Interruptions: interrupts the
current media playback and broadcasts information about traffic disruptions in the neighbourhood. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is finished. The Local Interruptions function is a geographically restricted version of the Traffic Announcements function. The Traffic Announcements function must be activated at the same time.
· News : interrupts the current media
playback and broadcasts news. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the news broadcast is finished.
· Alarm: interrupts the current media
playback and sends alerts about major accidents and disasters. Playback of
previous media source is resumed when the message is finished.
· Traffic Announcements: interrupts
the current media playback and broadcasts information about traffic disruptions. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is finished.
DAB* (digital radio)
· Sort Services: option for how channels
will be sorted. Either alphabetically or by service number.
· DAB To DAB Handover: starts the func-
tion for linking within DAB. If reception of a radio channel is lost, another channel is found automatically in another channel group (ensemble).
· DAB To FM Handover: starts the func-
tion for linking between DAB and FM. If reception of a radio channel is lost, an alternative FM frequency is searched for automatically.
· Show Broadcast Information: select to
show radio text or selected types of radio text, e.g. artist.
· Show Program Related Images: select
whether or not to show images for programmes on the screen.
· Select Announcements: select the types
of messages to be received while DAB is playing. Selected messages will interrupt the current media playback to play back the message. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is finished.
· Alarm: interrupts the current media
playback and sends alerts about major accidents and disasters. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is finished.
· Traffic Flash: receives information
about traffic disruptions.
· News Flash: receives news.
· Transport Flash: receives information
about public transport, e.g. ferry and train timetables.
· Warning/Services: receives informa-
tion about incidents of lower significance than the Alarm function, e.g. power failures.
Related information · Radio (p. 480)
· Digital radio* (p. 485)
· Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 112)
3 AM radio availability varies depending on model and/or market. 484
* Option/accessory.
RDS radio
RDS (Radio Data System) means that the radio automatically changes to the strongest transmitter. RDS provides the ability to receive e.g. traffic information and to search for certain programme types. RDS links FM transmitters into a network. An FM transmitter in such a network sends information that gives an RDS radio the following functions:
· Switch automatically to a stronger trans-
mitter if reception in the area is poor.
· Search for programme category, e.g. pro-
gramme types or traffic information.
· Receive text information on current radio
programme.
NOTE
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only selected parts of its functionality.
When broadcasting news or traffic messages, the radio can switch stations, interrupting the audio source currently in use. The radio returns to the previous audio source and volume when the set programme type is no longer broadcast. To go back earlier, press on the right-hand steering wheel keypad or tap Cancel in the centre display.
4 Digital Audio Broadcasting
Related information · Radio (p. 480)
· Settings for radio (p. 483)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Digital radio*
Digital radio (DAB4) is a digital broadcasting system for radio. The radio supports DAB, DAB+ and DMB5.
The radio can be operated using voice recognition, the steering wheel keypad or the centre display.
The digital radio app is launched from app view in the centre display.
Digital radio is played back in the same way as other radio bands, such as FM. Besides the option to select playback from Stations, Favourites and Genres, there is also the option to select playback from subchannels and Ensembles. An ensemble is a set of radio channels (a channel group) broadcasting on the same frequency. In the cases where the radio channel transmits its logotype, it is downloaded and shown beside the station name (download time varies).
}}
* Option/accessory. 485
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
|| DAB subchannel Secondary components are usually named subchannels. These are temporary and can contain e.g. translations of the main programme into other languages. Subchannels are indicated with an arrow symbol in the channel list.
Related information · Link between FM and digital radio*
(p. 486)
· Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 481)
· Searching for radio stations (p. 482) · Save radio channels in the Radio Favour-
ites app (p. 483)
· Voice control of radio and media (p. 134) · Settings for radio (p. 483)
Link between FM and digital radio*
The function enables the digital radio (DAB) to switch from a channel with poor or no reception to the same channel in another channel group (ensemble) with better reception, within DAB and/or between DAB and FM.
DAB to DAB and DAB to FM linking 1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press Media DAB.
3. Tick/untick DAB To DAB Handover and/or DAB To FM Handover in order to activate/deactivate the respective functions.
Related information · Digital radio* (p. 485)
· Radio (p. 480)
· Settings for radio (p. 483)
Media player
The media player can play back audio from external audio sources connected via the USB port or Bluetooth. It can also play back video format via the USB port. When the car is connected to the internet, it is also possible to listen to web radio, audio books and music services via apps.
The media player is operated from the centre display, but several functions can be operated using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad or voice control. The radio is operated in the media player and is described in a separate section.
5 Digital Multimedia Broadcasting 486
* Option/accessory.
Related information · Media playback (p. 487) · Controlling and changing media (p. 488) · Searching media (p. 489) · Apps (p. 477) · Radio (p. 480) · Video (p. 491)
· Media via Bluetooth® (p. 492) · Media via USB port (p. 493) · Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
Media playback
The media player is controlled from the centre display. Several functions can also be operated using the steering wheel's righthand keypad or voice control.
The media player also operates the radio, which is described in a separate section.
Starting the media source
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
USB memory 1. Insert the USB memory. 2. Open the app USB from the app view. 3. Select what to play back.
> Playback begins. Mp3 player and iPod®
NOTE To start playback from iPod, use the iPod app (not USB). When an iPod is used as audio source, the car's audio and media system has a menu structure that is similar to the iPod player's own menu structure.
1. Connect media source. 2. Start playback from the connected media
source. 3. Open the app (iPod, USB) from the app
view. > Playback begins.
App view. (Generic image, basic apps vary by market and model.)
}} * Option/accessory. 487
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
|| Bluetooth connected device 1. Activate Bluetooth in the media source.
2. Connect media source.
3. Start playback from the connected media source.
4. Open the app Bluetooth from the app view. > Playback begins.
Media with Internet connection Play back media from Internet-connected apps:
1. Connect the car to the Internet.
2. Open the current app from the app view. > Playback begins.
Read the separate section on how apps are downloaded. Video 1. Connect media source.
2. Open the app USB from the app view.
3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play back. > Playback begins.
Apple CarPlay CarPlay is described in a separate section. Android Auto Android Auto is described in a separate section.
Related information · Managing the app menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 92)
· Radio (p. 480)
· Controlling and changing media (p. 488)
· Connecting a device via USB port
(p. 493)
· Connecting a device via Bluetooth®
(p. 492)
· Downloading apps (p. 478)
· Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
· Video (p. 491)
· Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 495)
· Android Auto* (p. 499)
· Voice control of radio and media (p. 134)
· Compatible media formats (p. 494)
Controlling and changing media
The playback of media can be controlled with voice control, steering wheel keypad or the centre display.
The media player can be operated by voice recognition, from the steering wheel keypad or the centre display.
Volume - turn the control knob under the cen-
tre display or press
on the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad in order to increase
or decrease the volume.
Play/pause - tap on the image belonging to the song being played back, the physical but-
ton under the centre display or on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
488
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Change track/song - tap on the desired track in the centre display, press on or under the centre display or on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. Fast forward/move in time - tap on the time axis in the centre display and drag sideways, or press and hold or under the centre display or on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. Changing media - select from previous sources in the app, in the app view, press on the desired app or select with the steering wheel's right-hand keypad via the app menu
. Library - tap on the button to play back from the library.
Shuffle - tap on the button to shuffle the playback order.
Similar - tap on the button in order to use Gracenote to search for similar music on the USB device and to create a playlist from it. The playlist can contain a maximum of 50 songs.
Change device - tap on the button in order to switch between USB devices when several are connected.
Related information · Media player (p. 486) · Searching media (p. 489) · Audio settings (p. 476) · Apps (p. 477)
· Gracenote® (p. 490) · Voice control of radio and media (p. 134)
Searching media
It is possible to search by artist, composer, song titles, album, video, audio book, playlist and, when the car is connected to the Internet, podcasts (digital media via Internet).
1. Press . > Search view with keyboard is opened.
2. Enter the search terms. 3. Press Search.
> Connected devices are searched and the search results are listed by category.
Swipe sideways across the screen to show each category separately. Related information
· Media player (p. 486) · Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
}}
* Option/accessory. 489
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
· Media playback (p. 487) · Enter the characters, letters and words
manually in the centre display (p. 117)
Gracenote®
Gracenote identifies artist, album, song titles and associated images, which are shown during playback. Gracenote MusicID® is a standard for music recognition. Information on the music can be presented by means of the identification and analysis of the metadata in the music files. Sometimes metadata from different sources can be inconsistent or inadequate.
Gracenote has support for phonetic processing of artist name, album titles and genres, and in this way, voice control can be used to play back music.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press Media Gracenote®.
3. Select settings for Gracenote data:
· Gracenote® Online Search - searches in
Gracenote's online database for playing media.
· Gracenote® Multiple Results - selects
how to display Gracenote data if there are more than one search results.
1 - the file's original data are used.
2 - Gracenote data are used.
3 - Gracenote or original data can be selected.
· None - no results are shown.
Updating Gracenote The content of the Gracenote database is updated continuously. Download the latest update to take advantage of improvements.
For information and downloading see volvocars.com/support.
Related information · Media playback (p. 487)
· License agreement for audio and media
(p. 526)
· Voice control of radio and media (p. 134)
490
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Video
Videos on USB-connected devices can be played back using the media player. No picture is shown when the car starts to move, but only the audio is played back. The picture is shown again when the car is stationary.
Information on compatible formats for media can be found in a separate section.
Related information · Playing a video (p. 491)
· Playing back DivX® (p. 491)
· Settings for video (p. 492)
· Compatible media formats (p. 494)
Playing a video
Videos are played using the USB app in the app view. 1. Connecting a media source (USB device).
2. Open the app USB from the app view.
3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play back. > Playback begins.
Finding video files may be problematic if the USB device also contains music and audio tracks. In this case, it is possible to find them by going to Library and selecting the video tab.
Related information · Video (p. 491)
· Playing back DivX® (p. 491)
· Settings for video (p. 492)
· Compatible media formats (p. 494)
Playing back DivX®
This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play back purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) films.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Tap Video DivX® VOD and retrieve the registration code.
3. Go to vod.divx.com for more information and to complete the registration.
Related information · Video (p. 491) · Playing a video (p. 491) · Settings for video (p. 492) · Compatible media formats (p. 494)
491
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Settings for video
Certain language settings can be changed for video playback. With the video player in full screen mode, or by opening the top view and pressing
Settings Media Video, the following can be adjusted: Audio Language and Subtitle Language.
Related information · Video (p. 491)
Media via Bluetooth®
The car's media player is equipped with Bluetooth and can wirelessly play audio files from external Bluetooth devices, such as mobile phones and tablets. For the media player to be able to play back audio files wirelessly from an external device, the device must first be connected to the car via Bluetooth.
Related information · Connecting a device via Bluetooth®
(p. 492)
· Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 503)
· Media playback (p. 487)
· Compatible media formats (p. 494)
Connecting a device via Bluetooth®
Connect a Bluetooth® device to the car for wireless playback of media and to provide the car with an Internet connection where possible. Many phones on the market now have wireless Bluetooth® technology, but not all of them are fully compatible with the car.
For information on compatibility, see volvocars.com/support.
The procedure for connecting a media device is the same as for connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth®.
Related information · Media via Bluetooth® (p. 492)
· Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 503)
· Media playback (p. 487)
492
Media via USB port
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or MP3 player, can be connected to the audio system via the car's USB port. Devices with rechargeable batteries are recharged when connected via USB and the ignition is in position I, II or the engine is running.
The content of the external source can be loaded more quickly if it only consists of compatible formats. Video files can also be played back via the USB port.
Certain MP3 players have their own file system that the car does not support.
Related information · Connecting a device via USB port
(p. 493)
· Media playback (p. 487)
· Video (p. 491)
· Ignition positions (p. 406)
· Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 494)
· Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 495)
· Android Auto* (p. 499)
Connecting a device via USB port
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or MP3 player, can be connected to the audio system via one of the car's USB ports. The phone must be connected to the USB port with white frame (when there are two USB ports) when using Apple CarPlay* and Android Auto*.
USB inputs (type A) under the centre display.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
USB inputs* (type C) on rear of tunnel console for charging telephones and tablets for example6.
Related information · Media playback (p. 487) · Media via USB port (p. 493) · Media player (p. 486) · Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 494)
· Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 494)
· Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 495) · Android Auto* (p. 499)
6 It is not possible to playback media in the car's audio or media system via this input.
* Option/accessory. 493
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Technical specifications for USB devices
The following specifications must be met to allow the contents of the USB devices to be read. No folder structure will be shown in the centre display during playback.
Files Folders Folder levels Playlists Items in a playlist Subfolders
Max number 15 000 1 000 8 100 1 000 No limit
Technical specification for USB A connector · Type A socket
· Version 2.0
· Voltage supply 5 V
· Current supply max. 2.1 A
Technical specification for USB C connector · Type C socket
· Version 3.1
· Voltage supply 5 V · Current supply max. 3.0 A
Related information · Media via USB port (p. 493)
494
Compatible media formats
The following file formats must be used for media playback.
Audio files
For- File extension mat
Codec
MP3 .mp3
MPEG1 Layer III, MPEG2 Layer III, MP3 Pro (mp3 compatible), MP3 HD (mp3 compatible)
AAC .m4a, .m4b, .aac AAC LC (MPEG-4 part III Audio), HE-AAC (aacPlus v1/v2)
WMA .wma
WMA8/9, WMA9/10 Pro
WAV .wav
LPCM
FLAC .flac
FLAC
Video files Format MP4 MPEG-PS
File extension .mp4, .m4v .mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v
Format AVI AVI (DivX) ASF
File extension .avi .avi, .divx .asf, .wmv
Subtitles Format
File extension
SubViewer
.sub
SubRip
.srt
SSA
.ssa
DivX®
DivX certified devices have been tested for high-quality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback. When you see the DivX logo, you have the freedom to play DivX films.
Profile Video codec Resolution Bit rate Frame rate File extension Max file size
DivX Home Theater DivX, MPEG-4 720x576 4.8Mbps 30 fps .divx, .avi 4 GB
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Audio codec
Subtitles
Special functions
Reference
MP3, AC3
XSUB
Multiple subtitles, multiple audio, resume play
Meets all requirements of the DivX Home Theater profile. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX Home Theater video.
Related information · Media player (p. 486)
· Video (p. 491)
· Playing back DivX® (p. 491)
Apple® CarPlay®*
CarPlay7 gives you the option to listen to music, make phone calls, get directions, send/receive messages and use Siri, all while you stay focused on your driving.
CarPlay works with selected iOS devices. If the car does not already support CarPlay there is the option to install it retroactively. Contact a Volvo dealer to install CarPlay.
Information about which apps are supported and which iOS devices are compatible is available on Apple's website: www.apple.com/ios/ carplay/. Using apps that are not compatible with CarPlay may sometimes mean that the connection between the device and the car is broken. Please note that Volvo is not responsible for the content in CarPlay.
When using map navigation via CarPlay no guidance is shown in the driver display, but only in the centre display.
When navigation is started through Apple CarPlay, ongoing native turn-by-turn route guidance will be ended.
The CarPlay apps can be controlled via the centre display, the iOS device or using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad (applies to certain functions). The apps can also be voicecontrolled using Siri. A long press on the
}}
* Option/accessory. 495
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
|| steering wheel button starts voice control using Siri and a short press activates the car's own voice control. If Siri breaks off too early, hold the steering wheel button 8 depressed.
By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge the following: Apple CarPlay is a service provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not responsible for Apple CarPlay or its features/applications. When using Apple CarPlay, certain information from your car (including its position) is transferred to your iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you are fully responsible for your and any others person's use of Apple CarPlay.
Related information · Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 496)
· Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 498)
· Voice recognition (p. 130)
· Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 122)
Using Apple® CarPlay®*
To use CarPlay9, Siri voice control must be activated on your iOS device. The device also needs an Internet connection via Wi-Fi or the mobile network for all functions to work.
Connect an iOS device and start CarPlay
NOTE
CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth is deactivated. A phone or media player connected to the car via Bluetooth will therefore not be available when CarPlay is active. An alternative Internet source must be used to connect to the Internet for the car's apps. Use Wi-Fi or the car's built-in modem*.
To start CarPlay from an iOS device that has not been connected previously:
1. Connect an iOS device with support for CarPlay to the USB port. In the cases where there are two USB ports, the one with the white frame around the port must be used.
2. Read the terms and conditions and then tap on Accept to connect. > The subview with CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown.
3. Tap on the desired app. > The app starts.
7 Availability may vary depending on market. 8 Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc. 9 Availability may vary depending on market.
496
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Starting CarPlay To start CarPlay from an iOS device that has been connected previously:
1. Connect an iOS device to the USB port. In the cases where there are two USB ports, the one with the white frame around the port must be used.
> If the setting for automatic start is selected - the name of the device will be shown. The tile with CarPlay is opened automatically in the cases where the home view is shown when connecting the iOS device.
2. If the tile with CarPlay does not open automatically, tap on the device name. The subview with CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown.
3. If an app is active in the same tile, tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view.
> The subview with CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown.
4. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
CarPlay runs in the background if another app is started, or is already active when connecting, in the same tile. To show CarPlay in the subview again - tap on the CarPlay icon in the app view.
Switch the connection between CarPlay and iPod
CarPlay to iPod 1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Continue to Communication Apple CarPlay.
3. Untick the box for the iOS device that shall no longer start CarPlay automatically when the USB cable is connected.
4. Disconnect and connect the iOS device to the USB port.
5. Open the app iPod from the app view.
iPod to CarPlay 1. Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view.
2. Read the information in the pop-up window and then tap on OK.
3. Disconnect and connect the iOS device to the USB port. > The subview with Apple CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown10.
Related information · Connecting a device via USB port (p. 493)
· Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 495)
· Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 498)
· Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 518)
· Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 519)
· Voice recognition (p. 130)
10 Apple, CarPlay, iPhone and iPod are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
* Option/accessory. 497
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Settings for Apple® CarPlay®*
Settings for iOS device connected with CarPlay11,12.
Automatic start 1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Continue to Communication Apple CarPlay and select setting:
· Tick the box - CarPlay starts automati-
cally when the USB cable is connected.
· Untick the box - CarPlay does not start
automatically when the USB cable is connected.
If the car is shared by a lot of people, such as in a car pool, it is worth noting that a maximum of 20 iOS devices can be stored simultaneously in the list. When the list is full and a new device is connected the oldest one is deleted.
To delete the list, the settings must be reset in the centre display (factory reset).
System volumes 1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and make the settings for the following:
· Voice Control · Navi Voice Guidance · Phone Ringtone
Related information · Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 495)
· Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 496) · Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 122)
11 Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc. 12 Availability may vary depending on market. 13 Availability may vary depending on market.
498
Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®*
Here are some useful tips for using CarPlay®13.
· Update your iOS device with the latest
version of the iOS operating system and ensure that the apps have been updated.
· In the event of a problem with CarPlay,
disconnect the iOS device from the USB port and reconnect. Otherwise, try to close the app on the device that is not working and then restart the app, or try closing all apps and restart your device.
· If the apps do not appear when CarPlay
starts (black screen), try minimising and expanding the tile for CarPlay.
· Using apps that are not compatible with
CarPlay may sometimes mean that the connection between the iOS device and the car is broken. Information about supported apps and compatible telephone devices can be found on the Apple website. You can also search for CarPlay in the App Store to find information about apps that are compatible with CarPlay on your market.
· Using Siri it is possible to write/dictate
and read out messages. Messages are read out and dictated in the language
* Option/accessory.
selected in the settings for Siri. When the message is written/dictated, no text will be shown in the centre display instead, the text will appear on the iOS device. When Siri is used, note that the telephone's microphones are used and that the quality is therefore dependent on the position of the telephone.
· If the device is connected to the car via
Bluetooth, the connection will be interrupted when CarPlay is used. Resume the Internet connection in the car by sharing the Internet via the Wi-Fi hotspot from the device.
· Some of the CarPlay functions (such as
voice call and messages) mean that use of the car's own functions is stopped and CarPlay is shown automatically instead. If this behaviour is not wanted, deselect the display of the equivalent function in CarPlay under the phone's settings for notifications.
· CarPlay only works with iPhone14.
NOTE
Availability and functionality may vary depending on market.
Related information · Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 495)
· Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 518)
14 Apple, CarPlay and iPhone are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc. 15 Availability may vary depending on market.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Android Auto*
Android Auto15 gives you the option to listen to music, make phone calls, get directions and use car-adapted apps from an Android device. Android Auto works with selected Android devices.
Information about which apps are supported and which Android devices are compatible is available on the website: www.android.com/ auto/. For third-party apps, see Google Play. Please note that Volvo is not responsible for the content in Android Auto. Android Auto is started from the app view. After Android Auto has been started once, the app will be started automatically the next time
}}
* Option/accessory. 499
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
|| the device is connected. Automatic start can be deactivated under settings.
NOTE
When a device is connected to Android Auto it is possible to stream via Bluetooth to another media player. Bluetooth is active while Android Auto is being used.
When using map navigation via Android Auto there is no guidance in the driver display, but only in the centre display.
Android Auto can be controlled via the centre display using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad or voice control. Holding down the steering wheel button starts Google Assistant and a short press deactivates it.
By using Android Auto, you acknowledge the following: Android Auto is a service provided by Google Inc. under its terms and conditions. Volvo Cars is not responsible for Android Auto or its features or applications. When you use Android Auto, your car transfers certain information (including its location) to your connected Android phone. You are fully responsible for your and any other person's use of Android Auto.
Related information · Using Android Auto* (p. 500)
· Settings for Android Auto* (p. 501)
16 Availability may vary depending on market. 500
Using Android Auto*
To use the Android Auto16 app, the app must be installed on your Android device and the device must be connected to the car's USB port.
NOTE For installation of Android Auto to be possible, the car must be equipped with two USB ports (USB hub)*. If the car only has one USB port then it is not possible to use Android Auto.
The first time an Android is connected 1. Connect your Android device to the USB
input with a white frame. 2. Read the information in the pop-up win-
dow and then tap on OK. 3. Tap on Android Auto in the app view. 4. Read the terms and conditions and then
tap on Accept to connect. > The subview with Android Auto is
opened and compatible apps are shown. 5. Tap on the desired app. > The app starts.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Previously connected Android 1. Connect your device to the USB input
with a white frame.
> If the setting for automatic start is selected - the name of the device is shown.
2. Tap on the device name the tile with Android Auto is opened and compatible apps are shown.
3. If the setting for automatic start is not selected - open the Android Auto app from the app view.
> The subview with Android Auto is opened and compatible apps are shown.
4. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
Android Auto runs in the background if another app is started in the same subview. To show Android Auto in the subview again - tap on the Android Auto icon in the app view.
Related information · Android Auto* (p. 499)
· Settings for Android Auto* (p. 501)
· Connecting a device via USB port (p. 493)
· Voice recognition (p. 130)
Settings for Android Auto*
Settings for an Android device that has been connected for the first time with Android Auto17.
Automatic start 1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press Communication Android Auto and select setting:
· Tick the box - Android Auto starts auto-
matically when the USB cable is connected.
· Untick the box - Android Auto does not
start automatically when the USB cable is connected.
A maximum of 20 Android devices can be stored in the list. When the list is full and a new device is connected the oldest one is deleted.
A factory reset has to be executed in order to clear the list.
System volumes 1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and make the settings for the following:
· Voice Control · Navi Voice Guidance · Phone Ringtone
Related information · Android Auto* (p. 499) · Using Android Auto* (p. 500) · Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 122)
17 Availability may vary depending on market.
* Option/accessory. 501
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Tips for using Android Auto*
Here are some useful tips for using Android Auto18.
· Ensure that your apps are updated.
· When starting the car, wait until the cen-
tre display has started, connect the device and then open Android Auto from the app view.
· In the event of problems with Android
Auto, disconnect your Android device from the USB port and then reconnect via USB. Otherwise, try closing the app on the device and then restarting the app.
· When a device is connected to Android
Auto it is still possible to playback media via Bluetooth to another media player. The Bluetooth function is on when Android Auto is used.
· If the icon for Android Auto is greyed out,
this means no device is connected. When you connect your device the icon will be illuminated. If the icon is not visible at all then the car does not have support for connecting a device for this purpose.
· If the device is connected to the car via
Bluetooth, the connection will be interrupted when Android Auto is used. Resume the Internet connection in the car by sharing the Internet via the Wi-Fi hotspot from the device.
18 Availability may vary depending on market.
Related information · Android Auto* (p. 499)
· Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 518)
502
Phone
A phone with Bluetooth can be connected wirelessly to the car's built-in hands-free system. The audio and media system acts as handsfree, with the facility to remotely control a selection of the phone's functions. The phone can still be operated with its own keys even if it is connected to the car. When a phone has been connected online and connected with the car, it can be used make calls, send/receive messages, play back media wirelessly and be used as an Internet connection. The phone is operated from the centre display, but also via voice recognition and the app menu, which are accessed from the right-hand steering wheel keypad.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Overview
Microphone. Phone. Wireless phone charger. Phone operation from centre display. Keypad for operating phone functions that are shown in the driver display and voice recognition. Driver display. Related information
· Managing phone calls (p. 507) · Managing the phone book (p. 509) · Managing text messages (p. 508) · Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 503)
· Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth automatically (p. 505)
· Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth manually (p. 506)
· Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 506)
· Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 506)
· Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 507)
· Wireless phone charger* (p. 511)
· Settings for phone (p. 510)
· Voice recognition (p. 130)
· Managing the app menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 92)
· Audio settings (p. 476)
· Connect the car to the Internet via a Blue-
tooth-enabled phone (p. 518)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time
Connect a phone with Bluetooth activated to then be able to make calls from the car, send/ receive messages, play back media wirelessly and connect the car to the Internet. It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices connected at once, in which case one of them can only play back wirelessly. The most recently connected phone will automatically be connected to make calls, send/receive messages, play back media and provide an Internet connection. It is possible to change what the phone is to be used for under Bluetooth Devices via the settings menu in the centre display's top view. Your mobile phone needs to be equipped with Bluetooth and support tethering.
After the device has been connected/registered a first time via Bluetooth, it no longer needs to be visible/discoverable, but only have Bluetooth activated. A maximum of 20 connected Bluetooth devices can be stored in the car.
There are two options for connecting. Either search the phone from the car or search the car from the phone.
Option 1 - search phone from car 1. Make the phone searchable/visible via
Bluetooth.
}}
* Option/accessory. 503
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
|| 2. Open the phone tile in the centre display.
· If there is no phone connected to the
car, tap on Add phone.
· If there is a phone connected to the car,
tap on Change . In the pop-up window, tap on Add phone. > Available Bluetooth devices are listed. The list is updated as new devices are detected.
3. Tap on the name of the phone to be connected.
4. Check that the specified number code in the car matches that in the phone. In which case, choose to accept in both places.
5. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any options for phone contacts and messages.
NOTE
· The message function must be acti-
vated in certain phones.
· Not all mobile phones are fully compat-
ible and may therefore not show contacts and messages in the car.
Option 2 - search car from phone 1. Open the phone tile in the centre display.
· If there is no phone connected to the
car, tap on Add phone Make car discoverable.
· If there is a phone connected to the car,
tap on Change . In the pop-up window, tap on Add phone Make car discoverable.
2. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
3. Search on the phone for Bluetooth devices. > Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
4. Select the name of the car on the phone.
5. A pop-up window for the connection is shown in the car. Confirm the connection.
6. Check that the specified number code in the car matches the one shown in the external device. In which case, choose to accept in both places.
7. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any options for phone contacts and messages.
NOTE
· The message function must be acti-
vated in certain phones.
· Not all mobile phones are fully compat-
ible and may therefore not show contacts and messages in the car.
NOTE
If the phone's operating system is updated then the connection may be broken. In which case, delete the phone from the car and then connect again.
Related information · Phone (p. 502) · Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth automatically (p. 505)
· Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth manually (p. 506)
· Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 506)
· Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 506)
· Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 507)
· Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 510)
504
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
· Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
· Connect the car to the Internet via a Blue-
tooth-enabled phone (p. 518)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically
It is possible to connect a phone to the car automatically via Bluetooth. The phone has to have been connected to the car for the first time. It is only the two last connected phones that can be connected automatically.
1. Activate Bluetooth in the phone before setting the car in ignition position I.
2. Set the car in ignition position I or higher. > The phone will connect.
Related information · Phone (p. 502)
· Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 503)
· Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth manually (p. 506)
· Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 506)
· Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 506)
· Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 507)
· Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 510)
· Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
· Connect the car to the Internet via a Blue-
tooth-enabled phone (p. 518)
· Ignition positions (p. 406)
* Option/accessory. 505
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually
It is possible to connect a phone to the car manually via Bluetooth. The phone has to have been connected to the car for the first time. 1. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
2. Open the subview for phone. > Connected phones are listed.
3. Tap on the name of the phone to be connected. > The phone will connect.
Related information · Phone (p. 502)
· Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 503)
· Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth automatically (p. 505)
· Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 506)
· Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 506)
· Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 507)
· Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 510)
· Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
· Connect the car to the Internet via a Blue-
tooth-enabled phone (p. 518)
Disconnecting a Bluetoothconnected phone
It is possible to disconnect a phone connected to Bluetooth, and it will then no longer be connected to the car.
· When the phone is out of range of the car
it is automatically disconnected. If disconnection occurs during an active call, then the call will be continued on the phone.
· It is also possible to disconnect the phone
by manually deactivating Bluetooth.
Related information · Phone (p. 502)
· Settings for phone (p. 510)
· Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 506)
· Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 507)
· Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 510)
Switch between Bluetoothconnected phones
It is possible to switch between a number of Bluetooth-connected phones. 1. Open the tile for the phone.
2. Tap on Change or drag down the top view and tap on Settings Communication Bluetooth Devices Add device. > Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
3. Tap on the phone to be connected.
Related information · Phone (p. 502)
· Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 503)
· Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 510)
· Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 506)
· Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 507)
506
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
It is possible to remove phones from the list of registered Bluetooth devices, for example. 1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press Communication Bluetooth Devices. > Registered Bluetooth devices are listed.
3. Tap on the device to be removed.
4. Tap on Remove device and confirm your selection. > The device is no longer registered to the car.
Related information · Phone (p. 502)
· Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 503)
· Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 506)
· Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 506)
· Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 510)
Managing phone calls
Call handling in the car for a Bluetooth-connected phone.
Generic illustration.
Making phone calls 1. Open the subview for phone. 2. Select call from call history, enter number
using the keypad or via the contact list. It is possible to search or browse in the contact list. Tap on in the contact list in order to add a contact under Favourites. 3. Press to make a call. 4. Tap on to end the call. You can also make calls from the call log via the app menu, which is accessed from the right-hand steering wheel keypad .
Making multi-party calls During a call:
1. Press Add call.
2. Choose to make a call from the call log, favourites or the contact list.
3. Tap on an entry/row in the call log, or tap
on alongside the contact in the contact list.
4. Tap on Swap call to switch between the parties.
5. Tap on to end the active call.
Conference calls During an active multi-party call:
1. Tap on Join calls to merge the active multi-party call.
2. Tap on to end the call.
Incoming phone calls Incoming phone calls are shown in the driver display and the centre display. Manage the call on the right-hand steering wheel keypad or in the centre display.
1. Tap on Answer/Reject.
2. Tap on to end the call.
Incoming phone call during an active call 1. Tap on Answer/Reject.
2. Tap on to end the call.
}}
507
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
|| Private call During the current call, press Privacy and select setting:
· Switch to mobile phone - the hands-
free function is disconnected and the call continues on your mobile phone.
· Driver focused - the microphone in the
roof on the passenger side is switched off and the call continues with the car's handsfree function.
Related information · Phone (p. 502)
· Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 503)
· Controlling a telephone with voice recog-
nition (p. 133)
· Managing the app menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 92)
· Enter the characters, letters and words
manually in the centre display (p. 117)
· Managing the phone book (p. 509)
· Managing text messages (p. 508)
· Audio settings (p. 476)
Managing text messages19
Message handling in the car for a Bluetoothconnected phone. In some phones, the message function must be activated. Not all phones are compatible. In such cases, they cannot display contacts and messages in the car.
Managing text messages in the centre display Text messages are only shown in the centre display if the setting is selected.
Press Messages in the app view to manage text messages in the centre display.
Reading text messages in the centre display
Press the icon to get the message read aloud.
Sending text messages in the centre display20 1. You can reply to a message or create a
new message.
· Reply to message -- tap on the contact
whose message you wish to reply to, then tap on Answer.
· Create new message - tap on Create
new. Select a contact or enter a number.
2. Compose the message.
3. Press Send.
Managing text messages in the driver display Text messages are only shown in the driver display if the setting is selected.
Reading a new text message in the driver display To have the message read aloud select
Read out with the steering wheel keypad.
Dictating a reply in the driver display After the text message has been read out, it is possible to reply briefly with dictation if the car is connected to the Internet.
Press Answer with the steering wheel keypad. A dictation dialogue starts.
19 Valid in certain markets only. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information. 20 Only certain phones can send messages via the car. The connected phone must support the Bluetooth Message Access Profile (MAP).
508
Message notification It is possible to activate and deactivate notifications in the text message settings.
Related information · Phone (p. 502)
· Settings for text messages (p. 509)
· Settings for phone (p. 510)
· Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
· Controlling a telephone with voice recog-
nition (p. 133)
· Enter the characters, letters and words
manually in the centre display (p. 117)
· Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 503)
· User terms and conditions and data shar-
ing (p. 523)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Settings for text messages
Settings for text messages on connected phone. 1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press Communication Text Messages and select settings:
· Notification in centre display - shows
message notifications in the centre display's status bar.
· Notification in driver display - dis-
plays notifications in the driver's display and incoming messages can be managed using the steering wheel's righthand keypad.
· Text message tone - select tone for
incoming text messages.
Related information · Phone (p. 502)
· Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 503)
· Managing text messages (p. 508)
· Settings for phone (p. 510)
Managing the phone book
When a phone is connected to the car with Bluetooth, contacts can be managed directly in the centre display. Up to 3000 contacts can be shown from the phone selected in the centre display.
Browse between the letters and to find a matching contact. Depending on existing contacts in the phone book, only matching letters are shown. Search contacts - tap on to search for a phone number of name in the contact list. Favourites - tap on to add/remove a contact to/from the favourites list.
}} * Option/accessory. 509
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
|| Sorting The contact list is sorted in alphabetical order where special characters and numbers are sorted under . It is possible to sort by first name or surname, and this setting is adjusted in the telephone setup.
Related information · Phone (p. 502) · Settings for phone (p. 510) · Controlling a telephone with voice recog-
nition (p. 133)
· Enter the characters, letters and words
manually in the centre display (p. 117)
· Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 503)
Settings for phone
When the telephone is connected to the car, the following settings can be made: 1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press Communication Phone and select settings:
· Ringtones - select ringtone. It is possi-
ble to use a ringtone from the phone or the car. Some phones are not fully compatible and their ringtones may therefore not be available for use in the car.
· Sort Order - select sort order of con-
tact list.
Related information · Phone (p. 502)
· Settings for text messages (p. 509)
· Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 510)
· Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 503)
· Audio settings (p. 476)
Settings for Bluetooth devices
Settings for Bluetooth-connected devices. 1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press Communication Bluetooth Devices and select settings:
· Add device - starts the pairing of a new
device.
· Previously paired devices - lists regis-
tered/paired devices.
· Remove device - removes the connected
device.
· Allowed services for this device - sets
device usage options: calling, sending/ receiving messages, streaming media and as Internet connection.
· Internet connection - connects the car to
the Internet via the device's Bluetooth connection.
Related information · Phone (p. 502)
· Settings for phone (p. 510)
· Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
· Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 503)
510
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Wireless phone charger*
There is a charging plate for wireless phone charging located in the tunnel console.
A condition for being able to charge the phone is that it supports wireless charging (Qi). Phones not equipped with wireless charging receivers can often be supplemented with a shell that makes wireless charging possible.
WARNING Wireless charging may affect the operation of an implanted pacemaker or other medical devices. If you have one, it is recommended to consult with your doctor before using the wireless charging system.
Related information · Phone (p. 502) · Using the wireless telephone charger*
(p. 511)
· Certificate for wireless charger (p. 513)
Using the wireless telephone charger*
The rubber plate under the centre display makes it possible to charge phones without the need to use the phone's cable.
Wireless phone charger in front of gear lever
WARNING Wireless charging may affect the operation of an implanted pacemaker or other medical devices. If you have one, it is recommended to consult with your doctor before using the wireless charging system. You can switch the charging plate on and off via the function view in the centre display. The default mode is that the charging plate is not activated. When the charging plate is switched on, a message is shown about the risks to users with an implanted pacemaker or
other devices that could be affected by the charging plate. Confirm that the charging plate should be switched on in the centre display. To use the wireless charging plate: 1. Check that the charging plate is switched
on in the function view of the centre display. 2. Remove all other objects from the charging plate and position the phone in the centre of the charging plate. > Phone charging is started and the
symbol is shown at the top in the centre display.
IMPORTANT Avoid storing cards with Near Field Communication (NFC), such as debit cards for contactless payment, together with the phone. This type of card can be destroyed when charging is in progress.
NOTE Some phones may become hot during wireless charging. This is normal.
}}
* Option/accessory. 511
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
|| If the phone does not charge:
· Check that the charging plate is switched
on in the function view of the centre display.
· Check that the charging plate is free from
other objects.
· Check that the phone supports wireless
charging (Qi).
· Remove the case from the phone if one is
fitted.
· Lift the phone and position it in the centre
of the charging plate once again.
· Check that the car is running.
If the phone is positioned incorrectly, or if objects prevent charging on the charging plate, a message is shown in the centre display.
IMPORTANT Keep the phone and charging plate free of other objects while charging to avoid overheating.
Related information · Phone (p. 502) · Wireless phone charger* (p. 511) · Certificate for wireless charger (p. 513) · Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 112)
512
* Option/accessory.
Certificate for wireless charger
Country/ Area Mexico: RCPVAPVO 18-1919 Paraguay:
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Taiwan:
2018-11-1-000541
NCC :
}} 513
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
|| Country/ Area
Ukraine:
: 107 - 115
:5 (
), 63
: N / A
: 2
NFC
: 13,56 ,
+/- 0,01%
: 10
: -
.(LG Electronics Inc) 10, '
Frequency range 111 /
: 42
-
,
;
global/support/cedoc/cedoc.
:
.
, 5- , .
,
, 08112,
.: +38(044) 585 63 00
: Alla Haidai (ahaidai@winner.ua)
(
)
10- ,
-,
/
WC510MVV20 -
, 07796,
:https://www.lg.com/
514
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Country/ Area
USA/ Canada
FCC ID : BEJWC510MVV20
IC : 2703H-WC510MVV20
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS-Gen,RSS-216 rules of Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Any changed or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with FCC RF Radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 15cm between the radiator and your body.
IDéclaration d'avertissement ISED
Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquerd'interferences nuisibles, et
(2) Cet appareil doit accepter toute interference recue, y compris les interferences pouvant entrainerun fonctionnement indesirable.
Les changements ou modifications non expressement approuves par LG Vehicle Components Company pourraient annuler l'autorite de l'utilisateura utilizer l'equipement.
Déclaration d'exposition aux radiations RF de l'ISED: Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements RF de l'ISED définies pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet appareil et son antenne ne doivent pas être situés ou fonctionner conjointement avec une autre antenne ou un autre émetteur.
}} 515
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
|| Country/ Area Cet équipement doit être installé pour fonctionner avec une distance minimale de 10cm entre le radiateuret le corps de l'utilisateur final.
Related information · Wireless phone charger* (p. 511) · Using the wireless telephone charger*
(p. 511)
· License agreement for audio and media
(p. 526)
516
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Internet-connected car*
When the car is connected to the Internet, it is possible for example to use web radio and music services via apps, download software and contact your retailer from the car. The car is connected via Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or with the car's built-in modem* (SIM card).
When the car is connected to the Internet, it is possible to share the car's Internet connection (Wi-Fi hotspot) so that other devices such as tablets can access the Internet21.
The Internet status is indicated by a symbol in the centre display's status bar.
NOTE Data is transferred when using the internet (data traffic), which can have a cost. Activation of data roaming can result in further charges. Contact your network operator about the cost for data traffic.
NOTE When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi or the car modem*.
NOTE When using Android Auto, it is possible to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth or the car modem*.
Related information · Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 112)
· Connect the car to the Internet via a Blue-
tooth-enabled phone (p. 518)
· Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 518)
· Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 519)
· Apps (p. 477)
· No or poor Internet connection (p. 521)
· Sharing Internet access from the car via a
Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 520)
· Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 522)
· Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 522)
· Volvo ID (p. 26)
· User terms and conditions and data shar-
ing (p. 523)
Before connecting the car to the Internet, search support information on terms and conditions for services and privacy policy for customers at volvocars.com.
21 This does not apply in the case of connection with Wi-Fi.
* Option/accessory. 517
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone
Create an Internet connection via Bluetooth by sharing your phone's Internet access and access several online services in the car. 1. To be able to connect the car to the Inter-
net via a Bluetooth-connected phone, the phone has to have already been connected to the car via Bluetooth for a first time.
2. Make sure that your phone supports tethering and that this function is activated. On an iPhone, this function is known as "tethering". On Android phones, this function may have different names but is frequently known as "hotspot". For iPhones, the menu page "tethering" must also be open until the Internet connection has been established.
3. If the phone has been connected via Bluetooth previously, press Settings in the centre display top view.
4. Press Communication Bluetooth Devices.
5. Tick the box for Bluetooth Internet connection under the heading Internet connection.
6. If another connection source has been used, confirm the option to change connection. > Your car is now connected to the Internet via the Bluetooth-connected phone.
NOTE The telephone and network provider must support tethering (Internet connection sharing), and the subscription must include data.
NOTE When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi or the car modem*.
Related information · Internet-connected car* (p. 517) · Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 519)
· Connecting a phone to the car via Blue-
tooth for the first time (p. 503)
· Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 518)
· Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 495) · No or poor Internet connection (p. 521) · Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 510)
Connect the car to the Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi)
Create an Internet connection via Wi-Fi by tethering your phone and access online services in the car. 1. Make sure that your phone supports teth-
ering and that this function is activated. On an iPhone, this function is known as "tethering". On Android phones, this function may have different names but is frequently known as "hotspot". For iPhones, the menu page "tethering" must also be open until the Internet connection has been established.
2. Press Settings in the top view.
3. Continue to Communication Wi-Fi.
4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the box for Wi-Fi.
5. If another connection source has been used, confirm the option to change connection.
6. Tap on the network name of the network to be connected.
7. Enter the network password.
> The car connects to the network.
Note that certain phones switch off tethering after the contact with the car has been disconnected, e.g. when leaving the car and until the next time it is used. The tethering in the phone
518
* Option/accessory.
therefore needs to be reactivated the next time it is used. When a phone is connected to the car, it is saved for future use. To show a list of saved networks or manually delete saved networks, go to Settings Communication Wi-Fi
Saved networks.
NOTE The telephone and network provider must support tethering (Internet connection sharing), and the subscription must include data.
Technical and safety requirements for Wi-Fi connection, are described in a separate section. Related information
· Internet-connected car* (p. 517) · Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 522) · No or poor Internet connection (p. 521) · Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 522)
Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card)
It is possible to establish an Internet connection via the car modem and a personal SIM card (P-SIM)*. Cars equipped with Volvo On Call will use the Internet connection with car modem for the services. 1.
Fit a personal SIM card into the holder under the cargo area floor. Note that a mini SIM is required to fit the car's card reader. 2. Press Settings in the top view. 3. Press Communication Car Modem Internet.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the box for Car modem Internet.
5. If another connection source has been used, confirm the option to change connection.
6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code. > The car connects to the network.
NOTE
Note that the SIM card used for Internet connection via P-SIM cannot have the same telephone number as the SIM card that the phone uses. If this is disregarded, it will not be possible to route calls correctly to the telephone. Therefore, use a SIM card with a separate telephone number for the Internet connection, or a data card that does not handle telephone calls and is therefore unable to disrupt the function of the telephone.
Related information · Internet-connected car* (p. 517) · Folding up the cargo area floor (p. 573) · No or poor Internet connection (p. 521) · Settings for car modem* (p. 520)
* Option/accessory. 519
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Settings for car modem*
The car is equipped with a modem that can be used to connect the car to the Internet. It is also possible to share the Internet connection via Wi-Fi. 1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press Communication Car Modem Internet and select settings:
· Car modem Internet - select whether to
use the car modem as Internet connection.
· Data usage - tap on Reset resets the
counters for received and sent data volume.
· Network.
Select network operator - automatic or manual selection of network operator.
Data roaming - if the box is ticked, the car modem will attempt to connect to the Internet when the car is abroad and outside its home network. Note that this may result in heavy costs. Check your roaming agreement for data traffic abroad with your network provider in your home country.
· SIM card PIN.
Change PIN - a maximum of 4 digits can be entered.
Disable PIN - select whether the PIN code shall be required for access to the SIM card.
· Send request code -- used e.g. to top up
or check the balance on a prepaid card. Functionality depends on the provider.
NOTE
Note that the SIM card used for Internet connection via P-SIM cannot have the same telephone number as the SIM card that the phone uses. If this is disregarded, it will not be possible to route calls correctly to the telephone. Therefore, use a SIM card with a separate telephone number for the Internet connection, or a data card that does not handle telephone calls and is therefore unable to disrupt the function of the telephone.
Related information · Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 519)
· No or poor Internet connection (p. 521)
Sharing Internet access from the car via a Wi-Fi hotspot
When the car is online, its Internet connection can be shared to allow other devices to use it22.
22 Does not apply when the car is online via Wi-Fi. 520
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
The network operator (SIM card) must support tethering (sharing of the Internet connection).
1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press Communication Car Wi-Fi Hotspot.
3. Tap on Network name and name the shared connection.
4. Tap on Password and select a password to be entered on connecting devices.
5. Tap on Frequency band and select the frequency on which the hotspot is to transmit data. Note that selection of frequency band is not available in all markets.
6. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the box for Car Wi-Fi Hotspot.
7. If Wi-Fi has been used as a connection source, confirm the option to change connection. > It is now possible for external devices to connect to the car's tethering (Wi-Fi hotspot).
NOTE
Activation of Wi-Fi-hotspot can result in further charges from your network operator.
Contact your network operator about the cost for data traffic.
Connection status is indicated by the symbol in the centre display's status bar.
Press Connected devices to see a list of the currently connected devices.
Related information · Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 112)
· Internet-connected car* (p. 517) · No or poor Internet connection (p. 521)
No or poor Internet connection
Factors that affect the Internet connection. The amount of data transferred is dependent on the services or apps in use in the car. For example, streaming audio can require large amounts of data which requires a good connection and good signal strength.
Phone to car The speed of the Internet connection may vary depending on the location of the phone in the car. Move the phone closer to the centre display in order to increase the signal strength. Ensure that there is no source of interference in between.
Phone to network operator The speed of the mobile network varies depending on the coverage in the present location. Poor network coverage may occur, for example in tunnels, in mountainous country, in deep valleys or indoors. The speed also depends on the agreement you have with your network.
NOTE
In the event of problems with data traffic, contact your network operator.
Restarting the phone If there are problems with the Internet connection then it may help to restart the phone.
}}
* Option/accessory. 521
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
|| Related information · Internet-connected car* (p. 517) · Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 522)
Remove Wi-Fi network
Removing a network that is not to be used. 1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Continue to Communication Wi-Fi Saved networks.
3. Tap on Forget alongside the network to be removed.
4. Confirm the selection. > The car will no longer connect to the network in future.
Remove all networks All networks can be removed simultaneously by restoring factory settings. Please note that all user data and system settings are reset to original factory settings.
Related information · Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
· No or poor Internet connection (p. 521)
· Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 122)
· Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 518)
Wi-Fi technologies and security
Possible network types to connect to. It is only possible to connect to the following types of network:
· Frequency -- 2.4 or 5 GHz23.
· Standards -- 802.11 a/b/g/n.
· Security type -- WPA2-AES-CCMP.
The car's Wi-Fi system is designed to handle Wi-Fi devices inside the car.
If several devices operate on the frequency at the same time then it may result in reduced performance.
Related information · Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
23 Selection of frequency is not available on all markets. 522
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
User terms and conditions and data sharing
The first time certain services and apps are started, a pop-up window with the headings Terms and conditions and Data sharing may be shown. The purpose is to inform about Volvo's user terms and conditions and policy for data sharing. By accepting data sharing, the user accepts that certain information is sent from the car. This is required so that certain services and apps can have full functionality.
The data sharing function for online services and apps is deactivated as default24. Data sharing needs to be activated so that certain online services and apps in the car can be used. Data sharing can be set from the centre display's settings menu or in connection with the services or apps being started in the centre display.
Privacy and data sharing With the software update made available November 2017, privacy and data sharing settings were introduced for online services and downloaded apps. The settings can be found under Privacy and data in the settings menu in the car's centre display.
There you can select the online services which are allowed to share data. Data sharing for
24 Does not apply to Volvo On Call*.
downloaded apps can also be deactivated there. Note that services and apps cannot be used as intended if data sharing is deactivated.
After a factory reset or e.g. a workshop visit or software update, the data sharing settings may have been reset to their default settings. In which case, reactivate data sharing for online services and for downloaded apps.
NOTE
Privacy and data sharing settings are unique for every driver profile.
Related information · Activating and deactivating data sharing
(p. 523)
Activating and deactivating data sharing
Data sharing for services and apps required can be set in the centre display's settings menu. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press System Privacy and data.
3. Select activation or deactivation of data sharing for individual services and all apps.
If data sharing has not been activated for an online service or downloaded apps, this can be done when they are started in the centre display. If this is the first time a service is started, or e.g. after a factory reset or certain software updates, Volvo's terms and conditions for online services need to be approved. Note that data sharing will then also be activated for other services or apps for which sharing has already been approved.
NOTE
After a visit to a Volvo workshop, you may need to reactivate data sharing so that the online services and apps shall work again.
Related information · User terms and conditions and data shar-
ing (p. 523)
* Option/accessory. 523
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Data sharing for services
If you have not activated data sharing for an online service or for downloaded apps, you can do this in connection with starting them in your centre display. If this is the first time you are starting a service, or e.g. after a factory reset or certain software updates, you also need to approve Volvo's terms and conditions for online services.
Activate data sharing when you start a service 1. Select the function or service to be acti-
vated.
> If this is the first time you are using the service and also after e.g. a factory reset or certain software updates, you first need to approve Volvo's terms and conditions for online services in order to continue.
2. Select to approve data sharing for the service or to cancel.
If you select to approve, data sharing is activated and you can start to use the service.
Activate data sharing when you start an app To approve data sharing for an app that needs the function, start the app and tap on Allow in the pop-up window.
You can deactivate data sharing for services and apps in the settings menu under System
Privacy and data Data Sharing.
524
Storage space on hard disk
It is possible to view how much free space there is on the car's hard disk. Storage information for the car's hard disk, including total capacity, available capacity and how much space is used for installed apps can be shown. The information is available under
Settings System System Information
Storage.
Related information · Apps (p. 477)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET 525
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
License agreement for audio and media
A license is an agreement for the right to operate a certain activity or the right to use someone else's entitlement according to the terms and conditions in the agreement. The following texts are Volvo's agreements with manufacturers/developers. Dirac Unison®
Dirac Unison co-optimises the loudspeakers in frequency, time and space for the best possible bass integration and clarity. It enables a faithful reproduction of the acoustic characteristics of specific performance venues. Using advanced algorithms, Dirac Unison controls all loudspeakers digitally based on acoustic highprecision measurements. Like a conductor of an orchestra, it guarantees that the loudspeakers perform in perfect unison.
DivX®
DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logotypes are trademarks belonging to DivX, LLC and are used under licence. This DivX Certified® device can play back DivX® Home Theater video files up to 576p (including .avi, .divx). Download free software on www.divx.com to create, play back and stream digital video. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play back purchased DivX Video-onDemand (VOD) films. Get the registration code by locating the DivX VOD section in the device's settings menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete the registration. Patent numbers Protected by one or more of the following US patents. 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052.
Gracenote®
Parts of the content are copyright © of Gracenote or its suppliers. Gracenote,Gracenote logo and logotype, "Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote MusicID are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote, Inc. in the USA and/or other countries.
526
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
This program or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California, USA ("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote ("Gracenote software") activates this program to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track and title ("Gracenote data") from online servers or embedded databases (together called "Gracenote servers") and in order to perform other actions. You may only use Gracenote data in accordance with the intended end-user functions for this program or this device.
You agree to only use Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers for your own personal non-commercial use. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit this Gracenote software or any Gracenote data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
You agree that your non-exclusive right to use Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers will be terminated if you violate these restrictions. If your license is terminated you agree to cease all use of Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers. Gracenote holds exclusive rights to all Gracenote data, all Gracenote software and all
Gracenote servers, including all ownership rights. Gracenote will under no circumstances have any obligation to pay you for any information you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce the company's rights under this agreement against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track enquiries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to enable the Gracenote service to count enquiries without knowing anything about who you are. Additional information is available on the web page for Gracenote's privacy policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote software and everything included in Gracenote data are licensed to you "as is". Gracenote provides no undertakings or warranties, express or implied, as to the accuracy of the Gracenote data contained in the Gracenote servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote servers or to change data categories for any reason that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is provided that the Gracenote software or Gracenote servers are fault-free or that the Gracenote software or Gracenote servers will operate without interruption. Gracenote has no obligation to provide you with new, improved or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future,
and the company reserves the right to discontinue its services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. GRACENOTE DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE RESULTS OBTAINED THROUGH YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR A GRACENOTE SERVER. GRACENOTE WILL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR REVENUES.
© Gracenote, Inc. 2009
Sensus software
This software uses parts of sources from clib2 and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994), and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990, 1993), The Regents of the University of California. All or some portions are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
}}
527
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
|| permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the name of the <ORGANIZATION> nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
This software uses parts of sources from "libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January 26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000] Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and either this permission notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/ projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.
This software is based in parts on the work of the FreeType Team.
This software uses parts of SSLeay Library: Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). All rights reserved
Linux software
This product contains software licensed under GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc.
528
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
You have the right of acquisition, modification, and distribution of the source code of the GPL/LGPL software.
You may download Source Code from the following website at no charge: http:// www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/ download/TVM_8351_013
The website provides the Source Code "As Is" and without warranty of any kind.
By downloading Source Code, you expressly assume all risk and liability associated with downloading and using the Source Code and complying with the user agreements that accompany each Source Code.
Please note that we cannot respond to any inquiries regarding the source code.
camellia:1.2.0 Copyright (c) 2006, 2007
NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Corporation). All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Unicode: 5.1.0 COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files and any associated documentation (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any associated documentation (the "Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a) the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in associated documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in each modified Data File or in the Software as well as in the documentation associated with the Data File(s) or Software that the data or software has been modified.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
}}
529
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
|| COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale,
use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
Declaration of Conformity
530
Country/ Area
Brazil:
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário isto e, náo tem direito a protecão contra interferéncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferéncia a sistemas operando em caráter primário. Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br
EU:
The United Arab Emirates:
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-city. Hyogo, 669-1513, Japan
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation hereby declares that this type of radio equipment [Audio Navigation Unit] conforms with directive 2014/53/EU.
For more information, search support information at www.volvocars.com.
}} 531
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Country/
Area Kazakhstan:
Model name: NR 0V Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Exporting country: Japan
532
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Country/ Area
China:
1.
2.4 - 2.4835 GHz
(EIRP) 10dBi 100 mW 20 dBm
10dBi 20 dBm / MHz(EIRP)
20 ppm
( 2.4-2.4835GHz ) -80 dBm / Hz (EIRP)
() (±2.5 )
· -36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz) ·
-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz)
·
-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz)
·
-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz)
·
-30 dBm / 1 MHz ( 1 - 12.75 GHz)
2. ( )
3.
4.
5.
}} 533
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
|| Country/ Area
Korea:
B ( ) (B )
,
.
.
Malaysia:
This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998, Communications and Multimedia (Technical Standards) Regulations 2000. To retrieve your device's serial number, please visit (volvocars.com/support) and search for "SIRIM Label Verification".
Device category: Navigation equipment for vehicle (Bluetooth)
Model: NR-0V
Type Approval No.:
RDBV/25A/1118/S(18-4228), RDBV/26A/1118/S(18-4229), RDBV/37A/0619/S(19-2241), RDBV/39A/0619/S(19-2240)
534
Country/ Area
Mexico:
Taiwan:
Related information · Sound, media and Internet (p. 476)
· Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
· Media player (p. 486)
· Gracenote® (p. 490)
· Sensus - online connectivity and entertain-
ment (p. 32)
· Certificate for wireless charger (p. 513)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET * Option/accessory. 535
WHEELS AND TYRES
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres
The function of the tyres is to carry load, provide grip on the road surface, dampen vibration and protect the wheel from wear. The tyres greatly affect the car's driving characteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure and speed rating are important for how the car performs. The car is fitted with tyres according to the tyre information sticker found on the driver's side door pillar (between the front door and the rear door).
WARNING A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control over the car.
Recommended tyres On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo original tyres that have the VOL1 marking on the side of the tyres. These tyres are carefully adapted to the car. In the event of changing tyres, it is therefore important that the new tyres also have this marking in order for the car's driving characteristics, comfort and fuel consumption to be maintained.
1 There may be deviations for certain tyre dimensions.
New tyres
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible when you replace them. This is especially important with regard to winter tyres. The last four digits in the sequence mean the week and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking (Department of Transportation), and this is stated with four digits, for example 0717. The tyre is then manufactured in week 07, year 2017. Tyre age All tyres older than 6 years old should be checked by an expert even if they seem undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are hardly ever or never used. The func-
tion can therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that are stored for future use. Examples of external signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discolouration.
Tyre economy · Maintain the correct tyre pressure.
· Avoid fast starts, heavy braking and
squealing tyres.
· Tyre wear increases with speed.
· Correct wheel alignment is very important.
· Unbalanced wheels worsen tyre economy
and travelling comfort.
· The tyres must have the same direction of
rotation during their entire service life.
· When you change tyres, the tyres with the
best tread must be fitted on the rear wheels to reduce the risk of oversteer during heavy braking.
· If you drive over kerbstones or deep holes
you can damage the tyres and/or wheel rims permanently.
Tyre rotation The car has no mandatory tyre rotation. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition affect how quickly the tyres age and
538
wear. Correct tyre pressure results in more even wear.
To avoid differences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns forming on the tyres, the front and rear wheels should be switched with each other. A suitable distance for the first change is approx. 5000 km (approx. 3100 miles) and then at 10000 km (approx. 6200 miles) intervals.
Volvo recommends the an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth. If significant differences in wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth) between tyres have already occurred, then the least worn tyres must always be fitted on the rear. Understeer is normally easier to correct than oversteer, and leads to the car continuing forwards in a straight line rather than having the rear end skidding to one side, resulting in possible complete loss of control over the car. This is why it is important for the rear wheels never to lose grip before the front wheels.
Storing wheels and tyres When you store complete wheels (tyres fitted on wheel rims) they should be hung up or positioned lying on their sides on the floor.
Tyres not fitted on rims must be stored lying on their sides or standing upright, but not hung up.
IMPORTANT
Tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and dark place, and should never be stored close to solvents, petrol, oils, etc.
WARNING
· Wheel rim size and tyre size for your
Volvo are specified to meet stringent requirements for stability and driving characteristics. Unapproved combinations of wheel rim size and tyre size may have a negative effect on the car's stability and driving characteristics.
· Any damage caused by the fitting of
unapproved combinations of wheel rim size and tyre size is not covered by the new car warranty. Volvo accepts no liability for death, personal injury or any costs caused by such installations.
Related information · Checking tyre pressure (p. 542)
· Tyres' rotation direction (p. 541)
· Tread wear indicators on the tyres
(p. 542)
· Tyre pressure monitoring system*
(p. 545)
· Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 557)
· Dimension designation for tyre (p. 540)
WHEELS AND TYRES
· Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 663) · Recommendations for loading (p. 570)
* Option/accessory. 539
WHEELS AND TYRES
Dimension designation for tyre
Designations for tyre dimension, load index and speed rating. The car has an approval for the complete vehicle with certain combinations of wheel rims and tyres.
Designation of dimensions All tyres have a dimension designation, for example: 235/55 R18 100V.
235 Tyre width (mm)
55 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre width (%)
R Radial ply
18 Rim diameter in inches
100 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre load, tyre load index (LI)
V Speed rating for maximum permitted speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case 240 km/h (149 mph).)
Load index Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a load index (LI). The car's weight determines the load capacity required of the tyres.
Speed rating Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum speed. Tyre speed rating, SS (Speed Symbol), must at least correspond with the car's top speed. The table below shows the maximum permitted speed for each speed rating (SS). The only exception to these regulations is winter tyres2, where a lower speed rating may be used. If such a tyre is selected, the car must not be driven more quickly than the tyre is rated for. For example, cars with Q rating tyres must be driven at speeds not exceeding 160 km/h (100 mph). The road conditions and applicable road traffic rules determine how quickly the car can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres.
NOTE
The maximum permitted speed is specified in the table.
Q 160 km/h (100 mph) (used only on winter tyres)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
W 270 km/h (168 mph)
Y 300 km/h (186 mph)
WARNING The lowest permitted tyre load index (LI) and speed rating (SS) for the tyres for each respective engine variant are shown in the specifications, which can be found in the printed owner's manual. If a tyre with too low a load index or speed rating is used, it may overheat and be damaged.
Related information · Tyres (p. 538) · Dimension designation for wheel rim
(p. 541)
· Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 663) · Minimum permitted tyre load index and
speed rating for tyres (p. 665)
2 Both those with metal studs and those without. 540
WHEELS AND TYRES
Dimension designation for wheel rim
Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in accordance with the examples in the table below. The car has an approval for the complete vehicle with certain combinations of wheel rims and tyres.
All wheel rims have a dimension designation, for example: 7.5Jx18x50.5.
7.5 Rim width in inches
J
Rim flange profile
18 Rim diameter in inches
50.5 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel centre to wheel contact surface against the hub)
Related information · Tyres (p. 538)
· Dimension designation for tyre (p. 540)
· Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 663)
Tyres' rotation direction
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to only turn in one direction have the direction of rotation marked with an arrow.
NOTE Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the same type and dimension, and also the same make.
Related information · Tyres (p. 538)
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
· The tyre must always rotate in the same
direction throughout its lifespan.
· Tyres should only be switched between
front and rear positions, never between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa.
· If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's
braking characteristics and capacity to force rain and slush out of the way are adversely affected.
· Tyres with the greatest tread depth should
always be fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of skidding).
541
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tread wear indicators on the tyres
Tread wear indicators show the status of the tyre's tread depth.
A tread wear indicator is a narrow elevation across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's tread pattern. On the side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down to 1.6 mm (1/16 inch), the tread will be level in height with the tread wear indicators. Change to new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and snow. Related information
· Tyres (p. 538)
Checking tyre pressure
Correct tyre pressure helps to improve driving stability, save fuel and extend the service life of the tyres. Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature. Driving on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could result in the tyres overheating and being damaged. Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road noise and driving characteristics.
Check the tyre pressures monthly. Use the recommended tyre pressure for cold tyres in order to maintain good tyre performance. Tyre pressure that is too low or too high may cause uneven wear on the tyres.
WARNING
· Tyre pressure that is too low is the
most common cause of tyre failure and may result in serious cracks in the tyre, the tread loosening or the tyre exploding, with unexpected loss of control of the car and increased risk of personal injury.
· Tyres with pressure that is too low
reduce the load capacity of the car.
Cold tyres The tyre pressure must be checked when the tyres are cold. Tyres are considered cold when they have the same temperature as the surrounding air. This temperature is normally reached when the car has been parked for at least three hours.
After having driven approximately 1.6 km (1 mile) these tyres are considered as warm. If you have to drive further than this to inflate the tyres, first check and record the tyre pressure and inflate to a suitable tyre pressure when you arrive at the pump.
When the outside temperature changes, the tyre pressure also changes. A decrease in temperature of 10 degrees causes the tyre pressure to decrease 1 psi (7 kPa). Check the tyre pressure regularly and adjust to the correct pressure, which is specified on the car's tyre information decal or certification label.
If you check the tyre pressure when the tyres are warm then you must never release any air. The tyres are warm due to driving and it is normal for the pressure to increase above the recommended pressure for cold tyres. A warm tyre with tyre pressure equal to or below the recommendation for cold tyres may have a pressure that is far too low.
542
Related information · Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 543)
· Recommended tyre pressure (p. 544)
· Tyre pressure monitoring system*
(p. 545)
· Tyres (p. 538)
WHEELS AND TYRES
Adjusting tyre pressure
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. The tyre pressure must therefore sometimes be adjusted in order to maintain the recommended tyre pressure. Use the recommended tyre pressure for cold tyres in order to maintain good tyre performance and even tread wear.
NOTE
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours after the car has been driven). After a few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.
1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tyre and then press the tyre pressure gauge firmly down onto the valve.
2. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure, see the decal on the door pillar on the driver's side showing the recommended pressure for factory fitted tyres.
3. Refit the dust cap.
NOTE
· After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
· Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.
4. Check the tyres visually for any implanted nails or other objects that could puncture the tyre and cause leakage.
5. Check the sidewalls for any cavities, cuts, bumps or other irregularities.
6. Repeat this for all tyres, including the spare tyre*.
NOTE
If you have over-inflated, release air by pressing in the metal pin in the centre of the valve. Then check the pressure again using the tyre pressure gauge.
Some spare tyres require a higher tyre pressure than other tyres. Check in the tyre pressure table or on the tyre pressure label.
}} * Option/accessory. 543
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| Related information · Recommended tyre pressure (p. 544) · Checking tyre pressure (p. 542) · Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit (p. 561) · Approved tyre pressures (p. 667)
Recommended tyre pressure
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (between frame and rear door) shows which pressures the tyres should have at different loads and speed conditions.
Improved fuel economy with ECO pressure For a light load (max. 3 people) and a speed of up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO pressures can be chosen for good fuel economy. However, the lower comfort pressures are recommended instead if improved noise and travelling comfort are desired.
Related information · Checking tyre pressure (p. 542)
· Approved tyre pressures (p. 667)
Tyre pressure label location The decal displays the designation for the factory-fitted tyres on the car, as well as load limits and tyre pressure.
NOTE It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and locations in the car. The information that applies to your particular car can be found on the decal on the car.
544
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
The tyre pressure monitoring system3 gives a warning with an indicator symbol in the driver display when the pressure in one or more of the car's tyres is too low.
This symbol illuminates to indicate low tyre pressure. Check the tyre pressure in the Car Status app in the centre display.
If there is a fault in the system the tyre pressure warning symbol flashes for approximately one minute and then remains illuminated.
System description The tyre pressure monitoring system measures differences in rotation speed between the different wheels via the ABS system in order to be able to determine whether they have the correct tyre pressure. If the tyre pressure is too low, the tyre's diameter is changed and, as a result, so is its rotation speed. By comparing the tyres with each other the system can determine whether one or more tyres have pressure that is too low.
General information on the tyre monitoring
system In the information below, the tyre monitoring system is referred to generically as TPMS.
Each tyre, including the spare tyre*, should be checked once a month. When checking, the tyre should be cold and have the air pressure recommended by the car manufacturer specified on the tyre pressure label or in the tyre pressure table. If the car has tyres of a different size than that recommended by the manufacturer, find out what the correct air pressure level is for these.
As an extra safety feature, the car is equipped with a tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS), which shows when the air pressure in one or more tyres is too low. When the indicator symbol for low air pressure is lit, stop and check the tyres as soon as possible and inflate to the correct air pressure.
Driving with tyres that have tyre pressure that is too low may cause the tyre to overheat, which can cause a tyre failure. Low tyre pressure also reduces fuel efficiency as well as tyre service life, and can affect car handling and stopping ability. Note that TPMS does not replace regular tyre maintenance. It is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure, even if the limit for low tyre pressure has not been reached so that the indicator symbol illuminates.
The car is also equipped with a TPMS system fault indicator, which indicates when the system is not functioning correctly. The TPMS
system fault indicator is combined with the indicator symbol for low tyre pressure. When the system detects a fault, the symbol in the driver display will flash for about one minute and then remain illuminated. This procedure will be repeated when the car is started until the fault has been rectified. When the symbol is illuminated, the system's ability to detect or warn of low tyre pressure may be affected.
A TPMS system fault can occur for several reasons, such as after changing to a spare tyre, or changing tyres or wheels that prevent TPMS from functioning correctly.
Always check the indicator symbol for TPMS after changing one or more tyres in order to ensure the new tyre or wheel is working correctly with TPMS.
To bear in mind · Always save a new tyre pressure in the
system after changing a wheel or adjusting tyre pressure.
· If you change to tyres of a different size to
the ones fitted at the factory, the system must be reset by storing a new tyre pressure for these tyres to avoid false warnings.
· If a spare wheel* is used, it is possible that
the tyre pressure monitoring system does
3 Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS)
}}
* Option/accessory. 545
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
not work correctly due to the differences
between the wheels.
· The system does not replace the need for
regular tyre inspection and maintenance.
· It is not possible to switch off the tyre
pressure monitoring system.
WARNING
· Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
failure, which could result in the driver losing control of the car.
· The system cannot indicate sudden
tyre damage in advance.
Related information · Recommended tyre pressure (p. 544)
· See tyre pressure status in the centre dis-
play* (p. 547)
· Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 548)
· Saving a new reference value for tyre pres-
sure monitoring* (p. 546)
· Messages for tyre pressure monitoring*
(p. 549)
Saving a new reference value for tyre pressure monitoring*
In order for the system for tyre pressure monitoring4 to work correctly, a reference value for the tyre pressure must be saved. This must take place every time the tyres are changed or the tyre pressure is changed so that the system can warn about low pressure correctly. For example, when driving with a heavy load or at high speed above 160 km/h (100 mph), the tyre pressure should be adjusted in accordance with Volvo's recommended tyre pressure values. The system is then reset by saving a new tyre pressure.
Perform the following procedure to store a new tyre pressure as a reference value in the system:
1. Switch off the car.
2. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure, see the decal on the door pillar on the driver's side showing the recommended pressure for factory fitted tyres.
3. Start the car.
4. Open the Car Status app in the app view.
5. Press TPMS.
NOTE
The car must be stationary for the Store Pressure button to be selectable.
6. Press Store Pressure.
7. Tap on OK to confirm that the tyre pressure in all four tyres has been checked and adjusted.
8. Drive the car until the new tyre pressure has been saved. The new tyre pressure is stored when the car is driven at a speed above 35 km/h (22 mph). > When sufficient data has been collected for the system to be able to detect low tyre pressure, the animation showing storage progress disappears from the centre display. The system does not provide additional confirmation that a new tyre pressure has been saved.
If storing fails, a message is shown: Storing pressure unsuccessful. Try again.
4 Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS) 546
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
WARNING The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, which is invisible and odourless, but highly toxic. The procedure to save a new tyre pressure must therefore always be performed outdoors or in a workshop with exhaust extraction.
Related information · Recommended tyre pressure (p. 544) · Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 543) · See tyre pressure status in the centre dis-
play* (p. 547)
· Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 548)
· Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 545)
See tyre pressure status in the centre display*
With the system for tyre pressure monitoring5, tyre pressure status can be viewed in the centre display.
Checking status Several minutes driving above 35 km/h (22 mph) are required for the system to become active.
1. Open the Car Status app in the app view.
2. Tap on TPMS to show the status of the tyres.
Related information · Saving a new reference value for tyre pres-
sure monitoring* (p. 546)
· Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 548)
· Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 545)
· Car status (p. 584)
· Messages for tyre pressure monitoring*
(p. 549)
The figure is schematic. Layout may vary depending on car model or updated software. 5 Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS)
* Option/accessory. 547
WHEELS AND TYRES
Action in the event of warning for low tyre pressure
When the system for tyre pressure6 warns that tyre pressure is too low, action is required.
Check and rectify the tyre pressure when the indicator symbol for the system is illuminated and the Tyre pressure low message is shown.
1. Switch off the car.
2. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres with a tyre pressure gauge.
3. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure, see the decal on the door pillar on the driver's side showing the recommended pressure for factory fitted tyres.
4. Always save a new tyre pressure in the system via the centre display after the tyre pressure has been adjusted.
Note that the indicator symbol does not extinguish until the low tyre pressure has been rectified and storing a new tyre pressure has been started.
NOTE
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours after the car has been driven). After a few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.
NOTE
· After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
· Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.
WARNING
· Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
failure, which could result in the driver losing control of the car.
· The system cannot indicate sudden
tyre damage in advance.
Related information · Recommended tyre pressure (p. 544)
· Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 543)
· Saving a new reference value for tyre pres-
sure monitoring* (p. 546)
· See tyre pressure status in the centre dis-
play* (p. 547)
· Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 545)
· Inflating tyres with the compressor from
the puncture repair kit (p. 561)
6 Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS) 548
* Option/accessory.
Messages for tyre pressure monitoring*
A number of messages for the tyre pressure
monitoring system7 can be shown. Here are some examples.
Driver display: Tyre pressure low Check Car Status app in center display
The indicator symbol switches on to indicate that there is low tyre pressure in one or more tyres. See the Car Status app in the centre display for more information.
Driver display: Tyre pressure system Temporarily unavailable
The indicator symbol flashes and changes to constant glow after approx. 1 minute. The system is currently unavailable, activated shortly.
Driver display: Tyre pressure system Service required
The indicator symbol flashes and changes to constant glow after approx. 1 minute. The system is not working correctly, contact a
workshopA.
A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Related information · Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 545)
· Saving a new reference value for tyre pres-
sure monitoring* (p. 546)
· Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 548)
· Car status (p. 584)
· Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)
Changing wheel
Wheel changes must always be performed correctly. Instructions on how a wheel is removed and mounted and what is important to remember are provided below. Check that the tyre dimension is approved for use on the car.
WARNING
· If a wheel must be changed in a traf-
ficked environment, passengers must stand in a safe place.
· Use a jack designed for the car when
changing tyres. Use supports to secure the car for all other work.
· Never crawl under the car or reach
under with a part of your body when it is raised on a jack.
· Passengers must leave the car when it
is raised on the jack.
7 Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS)
}} * Option/accessory. 549
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
IMPORTANT
· When the jack* is not in use it must be
stored in its storage space under the cargo area floor.
· The jack included with the car is only
designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used to jack up the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment.
Removing a wheel Read through all instructions before beginning. Take out the tools needed before jacking up the car.
1. Activate the hazard warning flashers and set out a warning triangle if a wheel shall be changed in a trafficked location.
2. Make sure that the parking brake is activated and engage gear position P.
3. Chock in front of and behind the wheels that remain on the ground. Use, for example, heavy wooden blocks or large stones.
4. Screw together the towing eye with the wheel wrench to the stop position.
5. Remove the plastic caps from the wheel bolts with the intended tool.
6. With the car still on the ground, use the wheel bolt wrench/towing eye to undo the wheel bolts ½-1 turn by pressing downwards (anticlockwise). Always start with the lockable wheel bolts*.
7. Follow the instructions for how to safely raise the car with the jack.
8. Raise the car high enough to allow the wheel to be removed to move freely. Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel.
Mounting a wheel 1. Clean the surfaces between wheel and
hub.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts thoroughly. Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel bolts.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot rotate.
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is important that the wheel bolts are tightened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm (103 foot-pound). Check the tightening torque with a torque wrench.
5. Refit the plastic caps over the wheel bolts. 6. Check the tyre pressure and save the new
tyre pressure in the system for tyre pressure monitoring*.
550
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
WARNING The wheel bolts may need to be re-tightened several days after the wheel change. Temperature differences and vibration may mean that they are not attached equally as tightly.
Tool kit
Tools that can be useful during towing, wheel changes or similar are found in the car's cargo area.
· Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 557)
· Fitting and removing the towing eye
(p. 467)
NOTE
· After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
· Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.
Related information · Warning triangle (p. 579)
· Raise the car (p. 587)
· Tool kit (p. 551)
· Saving a new reference value for tyre pres-
sure monitoring* (p. 546)
All tools are located in the foam block under the cargo area floor.
Jack*
Tool for removing the plastic caps from the wheel bolts Funnel for filling fluids
Wheel wrench* and towing eye
If the car is fitted with a spare wheel*, there is a jack and a wheel bolt wrench.
Related information · Folding up the cargo area floor (p. 573) · Changing wheel (p. 549) · Jack* (p. 552)
* Option/accessory. 551
WHEELS AND TYRES
Jack*
The jack can be used to raise the car, for example, to change to a wheel.
IMPORTANT
· When the jack* is not in use it must be
stored in its storage space under the cargo area floor.
· The jack included with the car is only
designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used to jack up the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment.
The jack needs to be cranked together to the correct position in order to have space.
Related information · Folding up the cargo area floor (p. 573)
· Tool kit (p. 551)
· Raise the car (p. 587)
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts are used to attach the wheels to the hubs. Only use rims that are tested and approved by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories.
Check the tightening torque of the wheel bolts with a torque wrench.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel bolts.
WARNING The wheel bolts may need to be re-tightened several days after the wheel change. Temperature differences and vibration may mean that they are not attached equally as tightly.
IMPORTANT
The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140 Nm. (103 foot-pound). Overtightening or loose tightening may damage the nuts and the bolts.
Lockable wheel bolt kit* To loosen or tighten the lockable wheel bolts turn the wrench in the lock bolt until it fully engages in the code grooves. Always start with the lockable wheel bolts if the wheel shall
552
* Option/accessory.
be removed. When fitting the wheel, finish with the lock screw.
IMPORTANT
Remember not to use bending force when you loosen/tighten the wheel bolts. This could damage the code groove in the lock bolt and the wheel wrench and so make it impossible to fit/remove the wheel.
When the wheel wrench is not in use it must be stored in its place in the foam block under the cargo area floor. It is important to remember this if the car is due to visit a workshop in order to have the tool available. If you lose the wrench, contact your Volvo dealer.
Related information · Changing wheel (p. 549) · Tool kit (p. 551)
Spare wheel*
The spare wheel, the Temporary Spare type, can be used to temporarily replace a punctured normal wheel. The spare wheel is only designed for temporary use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as possible.
The car's driving characteristics can be changed when the spare wheel is used and the ground clearance is reduced. Do not wash the car in an automatic car wash if the Temporary Spare is being used.
Recommended tyre pressure must be maintained regardless of the position of the temporary spare wheel on the car.
If the spare wheel is damaged, a new one can be purchased from a Volvo dealer.
WHEELS AND TYRES
WARNING
· Never drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) with a spare wheel fitted on the car.
· The car must never be driven fitted
with more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.
· The car may have different driving cha-
racteristics while driving with the spare wheel. The spare wheel must be replaced with a normal wheel as soon as possible.
· The spare wheel is smaller than the
normal wheel, which affects the car's ground clearance. Look out for high kerbs and do not machine-wash the car.
· Follow the manufacturer's recom-
mended tyre pressure for the spare wheel.
· On all-wheel drive cars, the drive on
the rear axle can be disengaged.
· If the spare wheel is fitted to the front
axle then it is not possible to use snow chains at the same time.
· The spare wheel must not be repaired.
}} * Option/accessory. 553
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
IMPORTANT
The car must not be driven with tyres of different sizes or with a spare wheel other than the one supplied with the car. Using different-sized wheels can cause serious damage to the car's transmission.
Related information · Changing wheel (p. 549)
· Recommended tyre pressure (p. 544)
Handling the spare wheel*
Follow these instructions for handling the spare wheel.
Taking out the spare wheel
Taking out the spare wheel
The illustration is generic and appearance may differ.
Applicable to cars with 48 V support battery.
The spare wheel is located under the cargo area floor in the spare wheel well with the outside down. The spare wheel is secured with the same bolt that attaches in the body. The foam block contains all the tools for changing a wheel.
1. Fold up the cargo area floor.
2. Undo the retaining screw.
3. Lift out the spare wheel.
The illustration is generic and appearance may differ.
Applicable to cars without 48V support battery.
The spare wheel is located under the load floor and is attached by a strap. The foam block contains all the tools for changing a wheel.
1. Fold up the cargo area floor.
2. Undo the straps and lift out the spare wheel.
554
* Option/accessory.
Storing the punctured tyre 1. Screw back the mounting screw that held
the spare wheel in place.
IMPORTANT
Do not attempt to unscrew the lower part of the mounting screw if it is secured in the body. There is a risk it may break.
If the lower attachment of the mounting screw does loosen from the body underneath the spare wheel, refit it in the hole and turn clockwise to reattach it.
· Tool kit (p. 551) · Changing wheel (p. 549)
WARNING For cars with 48V battery, the screw is attached in the battery box instead of the body. If the lower part of the mounting screw remains fitted when the spare wheel has been removed, it should be removed to avoid risk of crushing when the damaged tyre is put back in place.
2. Put the tools back in their right place in the foam block.
3. Then fold down the cargo area floor and place the punctured tyre in the cargo area.
Related information · Spare wheel* (p. 553) · Folding up the cargo area floor (p. 573)
WHEELS AND TYRES
Winter tyres
Winter tyres are adapted for winter road conditions. Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four wheels.
Tips for changing to winter tyres When summer and winter wheels are changed, mark which side of the car they were mounted on, for example L for left and R for right.
Contact a Volvo dealer for advice on which rim and tyre type suit your car best.
Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for 500-1000 km (300-600 miles), so the studs settle properly into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
Laws regarding the use of studded tyres may vary. Always follow local laws and regulations.
Tread depth Road conditions with ice, slush and low temperatures place considerably higher demands }}
* Option/accessory. 555
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recommends not to drive on winter tyres that have a tread depth of less than 4 mm (0.15 inches).
Related information · Changing wheel (p. 549) · Winter driving (p. 440)
· Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 542) · Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 663) · Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)
Snow chains
Use of snow chains and/or winter tyres can help to improve the traction in winter conditions. Volvo recommends that snow chains are not used on wheel dimensions greater than 18 inches.
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent chains designed for the car model, and tyre and rim dimensions. Only single-sided snow chains are permitted.
In the event of uncertainty about the show chain, Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. The wrong snow chains may cause serious damage to the car and lead to an accident.
IMPORTANT
Snow chains can be used on the car with the following restrictions:
· Always follow the mounting instruc-
tions from the manufacturer carefully. Fit the chains as tensioned as possible and tension them at regular intervals.
· Snow chains must only be used on the
front wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).
· In some cases, snow chains must NOT
be used, such as if accessory, aftermarket or "special" tyres and wheels are fitted that have a different size to the original tyres and wheels. Sufficient distance must be maintained between the chains and brakes, suspension and body components.
· Check local regulations with regard to
using snow chains before fitting them.
· Never exceed the chain manufacturer's
specified maximum speed. You must never exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) under any circumstances.
· Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns
when driving with snow chains.
· Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
556
· Driving with snow chains may have a
negative effect on the car's driving characteristics. Avoid fast or sharp turns, as well as braking with locked wheels.
· Some types of chain that are firmly
tensioned affect brake components and must therefore NOT be used.
You can obtain more information on snow chains from a Volvo dealer.
Related information · Winter driving (p. 440)
WHEELS AND TYRES
Emergency puncture repair kit
The emergency puncture repair kit8, is used to seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust the air pressure in the tyre.
Cars equipped with spare tyre* do not have the puncture repair kit. The puncture repair kit consists of a compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid. The sealing works as a temporary repair.
NOTE
The sealing fluid is effective at sealing tyres with tread punctures but has limited ability to seal tyres with sidewall punctures. Do not use the emergency puncture repair kit on tyres displaying larger slits, cracks or similar damage.
NOTE
The compressor is intended for temporary emergency puncture repair and is approved by Volvo.
Location The puncture repair kit is located in the foam block under the cargo area floor.
Sealing fluid expiry date The bottle of sealing fluid must be replaced if the bottle's expiry date has passed (see the decal on the bottle). Treat the old bottle as environmentally hazardous waste.
Related information · Using a puncture repair kit (p. 558)
· Inflating tyres with the compressor from
the puncture repair kit (p. 561)
· Tyres (p. 538)
8 Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK)
* Option/accessory. 557
WHEELS AND TYRES
Using a puncture repair kit
The emergency puncture repair kit (TMK9) can be used to seal a puncture. Read through all instructions before use.
Overview
Sealing fluid bottle Bottle opening Connection for bottle Air hose Connection valve
Connecting
Label, maximum permitted speed Switch Electrical cable Bottle bracket Pressure reducing valve Pressure gauge Decal, warning for wheel cover
9 Temporary Mobility Kit
558
WARNING
Please keep the following points in mind when using the tyre sealing system:
· The sealing fluid bottle contains 1) rub-
ber latex, natural and 2) ethanediol. These substances are harmful if swallowed.
· The contents of this bottle may cause
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be potentially harmful to the respiratory tract, the skin, the central nervous system, and the eyes.
Precautions:
· Store out of the reach of children.
· Harmful if ingested.
· Avoid prolonged or repeated contact
with the skin. If sealing fluid has come into contact with your clothes, remove them.
· Wash thoroughly after handling.
First aid:
· Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Get medical attention if symptoms occur.
· Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for
least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting
WHEELS AND TYRES
the upper and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if symptoms occur.
· Inhalation: Move the exposed person
to fresh air. If irritation persists, get medical attention.
· Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting
unless directed to do so by medical personnel. Get medical attention.
· Disposal: Dispose of this material and
its container at a hazardous or special waste collection point.
WARNING Do not remove the bottle or air hose when the puncture repair kit is being used.
1. Preparations
Set up the warning triangle and activate the hazard warning lights if a tyre is being sealed in a trafficked location.
If the puncture was caused by a nail or similar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It helps to seal the hole.
2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted speed that is affixed on one side of the compressor. Affix it visibly on the windscreen as a reminder to observe the speed limit. You should not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used.
In addition, remove the warning decal and attach it firmly to the side of the wheel so that it doesn't fall off.
3. Check that the switch is in position 0 (Off), and locate the electrical cable and the air hose.
4. Fit the sealing fluid bottle in the compressor so that the red arrows on the compressor and bottle meet, and then turn clockwise until it clicks.
The bottle is equipped with a non-return valve which means that the fluid does not come out unless it is fitted in the compressor.
5. Attach the air hose to the bottle's opening and turn clockwise until it clicks.
6. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the air hose's valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
7. Begin puncture repair Connect the electrical cable to the closest 12 V socket and start the car.
NOTE Make sure that none of the other 12 V sockets is in use when the compressor is operating.
WARNING Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.
WARNING Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation.
}} 559
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| 8. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I (On). When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar (88 psi), but the pressure drops after about 30 seconds.
WARNING Never stand next to the tyre when the compressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Call roadside assistance for recovery to a tyre centre. Volvo recommends an authorised tyre centre.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT The compressor must not be operated for longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pressure is 1.8 bar (22 psi) and maximum is 2.5 bar (36 psi). Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
To access the pressure reducing valve, the sealing fluid bottle must first be removed. Remove the bottle in the following order:
1. Remove the air hose from the tyre valve.
2. Remove the air hose from the bottle.
3. Remove the bottle from the compressor.
4. Refit the air hose directly in the compressor.
5. Refit the air hose to the tyre valve.
6. Release air using the pressure reducing valve.
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar (22 psi) then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Call roadside assistance for recovery to a tyre centre. Volvo recommends an authorised tyre centre.
11. Switch off the compressor and detach the electrical cable.
12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre valve and refit the dust cap on the tyre.
NOTE
· After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
· Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.
13. Clean the air hose before putting it away and be careful that there is no leakage of sealing fluid.
14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km (2 miles) at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) so that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre, and then perform a follow-up check.
WARNING Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during the first few rotations of the tyre. Make sure that nobody is standing near the car and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto them when the car is driven away. The distance should be at least 2 metres (7 feet).
560
15. Follow-up inspection
Connect the air hose on the tyre valve and screw in the valve connection to the bottom of the tyre valve's thread. The compressor must be switched off.
16. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure gauge.
· If it is below 1.3 bar (19 psi) then the
tyre is insufficiently sealed. The journey should not be continued. Call roadside assistance for recovery.
· If the tyre pressure is higher than
1.3 bar (19 psi), the tyre must be inflated to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa = 14.5 psi). Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.
The sealing fluid bottle and hose must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that these replacements be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING Maximum mileage with tyres containing sealing fluid is 200 km (120 miles).
NOTE The compressor is an electrical device. Follow local regulations related to waste management.
Related information · Recommended tyre pressure (p. 544) · Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 557) · Inflating tyres with the compressor from
the puncture repair kit (p. 561)
WHEELS AND TYRES
Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit
The car's original tyres can be inflated using the compressor in the emergency puncture repair kit. 1. The compressor must be switched off.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0 (Off), and take out the electrical cable and the air hose.
2. Attach the air hose directly into the compressor's bottle bracket and turn clockwise until it clicks.
Move the warning decal to the side of the compressor. It does not need to be attached to the wheel cover unless the sealing fluid is used.
3. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the air hose's valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
}} 561
WHEELS AND TYRES
|| 4. Connect the electrical cable to the closest 12 V socket and start the car.
WARNING Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation.
WARNING Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.
5. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I (On).
IMPORTANT Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.
6. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on the tyre pressure label on the driver side door pillar. Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
7. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air hose and the electrical cable.
8. Refit the dust cap on the tyre.
NOTE · After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
· Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.
NOTE The compressor is an electrical device. Follow local regulations related to waste management.
Related information · Recommended tyre pressure (p. 544) · Using a puncture repair kit (p. 558) · Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 557)
562
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Passenger compartment interior
Overview of the passenger compartment's interior and storage locations. Front seat
Storage compartment in door panel, card holder on left of steering wheel, storage under driver's seat1, sun visor and glovebox with extensible hook.
Storage compartment for legroom, electrical socket and USB port above the wireless phone charger*, cup holder and storage under armrest in tunnel console.
Rear seat
1 A maximum of 1 kg (2.2 lbs) can be stored here.
Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holder* in the centre seat backrest, storage pocket* on the
front seat backrest and also USB ports* in the tunnel console.
WARNING Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision.
IMPORTANT Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for example, are easily scratched by metal objects. Do not place keys, phones and other items on sensitive surfaces.
Related information · Emptying the ashtray* (p. 566) · Using the cigarette lighter* (p. 566) · Electrical sockets (p. 567) · Using the glovebox (p. 568) · Sun visors (p. 570) · Tunnel console (p. 565) · Wireless phone charger* (p. 511) · Connecting a device via USB port (p. 493)
564
* Option/accessory.
Tunnel console
The tunnel console is located between the front seats.
Storage compartment with cup holder. Waste bin*2 that can be removed and emptied. Storage compartment under the armrest. Climate controls for the rear seat climate functions* or storage compartment. There are also USB ports underneath*.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WARNING Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision.
IMPORTANT Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for example, are easily scratched by metal objects. Do not place keys, phones and other items on sensitive surfaces.
NOTE One of the detectors for the alarm* is located under the tunnel console's cup holder. Avoid leaving coins, keys and other metal objects in the cup holder, since this may trigger the alarm.
NOTE The USB sockets can be used for charging a mobile phone or tablet, for example. Only the front USB input can be used to play media in the car's audio system.
Related information · Emptying the ashtray* (p. 566) · Using the cigarette lighter* (p. 566) · Passenger compartment interior (p. 564) · Electrical sockets (p. 567) · Climate controls (p. 195)
2 Only in cars with automatic gearbox.
* Option/accessory. 565
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Using the cigarette lighter*
The cigarette lighter can be a complement to the 12 V socket in the front section of the tunnel console.
Related information · Passenger compartment interior (p. 564)
· Emptying the ashtray* (p. 566)
Emptying the ashtray*
When there is a cigarette lighter fitted in the car there is a detachable ashtray in the tunnel console.
Cigarette lighter in tunnel console, front seat. 1. Press the button on the lighter.
> The button jumps up when the lighter starts to glow.
2. Pull the lighter out from the socket and use the glow to give a light.
3. Refit the lighter in the socket.
WARNING Take care when the lighter is activated so that the glowing part does not, for example, damage the interior or injure passengers.
566
1. Detach the ashtray by pulling it straight up and empty the contents.
2. Refit the ashtray in the tunnel console.
WARNING Exercise caution with smouldering glow and ash so that they do not damage the interior or injure passengers, for example. Only extinguish cigarettes on the intended surface.
Related information · Passenger compartment interior (p. 564) · Using the cigarette lighter* (p. 566)
* Option/accessory.
Electrical sockets
There is one 12V electrical socket in the tunnel console and one 12V electrical socket* in the luggage compartment/cargo area. If a problem occurs with an electrical socket, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. 12 V electrical socket
12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, front seat. The 12 V sockets can be used for various accessories designed for this, such as music players, cooler boxes and mobile phones.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
12 V electrical socket in cargo area*.
Related information · Passenger compartment interior (p. 564) · Using electrical sockets (p. 567)
Using electrical sockets
12 V sockets can be used for various accessories designed for this, such as music players, cooler boxes and mobile phones. For the sockets to supply current, the car's electrical system must be set in the lowest ignition position I. The sockets are then active as long as the starter battery level does not become too low.
If the engine is switched off and the car is locked, the sockets are deactivated. If the engine is switched off and the car is not locked, or is locked with double lock temporarily deactivated, then the sockets continue to be active for a further seven minutes.
NOTE
Remember that use of the electrical socket with the engine switched off entails a risk of discharging the starter battery, which can limit functionality.
Accessories that are connected to the electrical sockets may be activated even when the car's electrical system is disconnected or if preconditioning is used. For this reason, disconnect the connectors when they are not in use in order to avoid the starter battery being discharged.
}} * Option/accessory. 567
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
||
WARNING
· Do not use accessories with large or
heavy connectors - they can damage the socket or come loose when driving.
· Do not use accessories that can cause
interference to the car's radio receiver or electrical system for example.
· Position the accessory so that it is not
at risk of injuring the driver or passengers in the event of heavy braking or collision.
· Keep an eye on connected accessories
as they can generate heat that can burn passengers or the interior.
Using 12 V sockets 1. Remove the blanking plug (tunnel con-
sole) or fold down the cover (cargo area) in front of the socket and plug in the accessory's connector.
2. Unplug the accessory's connector and refit the blanking plug (tunnel console) or fold up the cover (cargo area) when the socket is not in use or if the socket is left unattended.
IMPORTANT
Maximum socket output is 120 W (10 A) per socket.
Related information · Electrical sockets (p. 567)
· Passenger compartment interior (p. 564)
Using the glovebox
The glovebox is located on the passenger side. The printed owner's manual and maps can be kept in the glovebox, for example. There is also space for a pen and card holder.
Glovebox with extensible hook. The hook on the glovebox can be extended when the glovebox is open so that it can be used after the glovebox has been closed.
IMPORTANT Fold in the hook completely before the glovebox is closed, otherwise it can break off.
Locking and unlocking the glovebox* The glovebox can be locked, e.g. when the car is taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar. The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked with the accompanying key.
568
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
The key's designated storage space. The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
The figure is schematic - the design may vary. Locking the glovebox: Insert the key in the glovebox lock cylinder.
Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise.
Pull out the key.
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.
Using the glovebox as a cooled area* The glovebox can be used for cooling of e.g. drinks or food. The cooling works when the climate control system is active (i.e. when the car is set in ignition position II or when the engine is running).
The figure is schematic - the design may vary. Activating cooling.
Deactivating cooling.
Activate or deactivate the cooling by moving the control to the end position toward the passenger compartment/glovebox.
Related information · Passenger compartment interior (p. 564) · Private locking (p. 263)
* Option/accessory. 569
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Sun visors
There are sun visors in the roof in front of the driver seat and the front seat passenger seat which can be folded down and angled out to the side when necessary.
The figure is schematic - the design may vary. The mirror lighting* is switched on automatically when the guard is lifted up. The mirror frame incorporates a holder for e.g. cards or tickets.
Related information · Passenger compartment interior (p. 564)
Cargo area
The car has a flexible cargo area that makes it possible to transport and secure large objects. By folding down the backrests in the rear seat, the cargo area can become quite spacious. Use the load retaining eyelets or bag holders available for holding the load securely in place. The parcel shelf can be both easily removed and stored under the cargo area floor to make space for bulky loads.
The car's towing eye and puncture repair kit or spare wheel* are stored under the cargo area floor.
Related information · Recommendations for loading (p. 570)
· Bag hooks (p. 572)
· Load retaining eyelets (p. 573)
· Remove and store the parcel shelf
(p. 577)
Recommendations for loading
There are a number of things that are important to bear in mind when loading the car. Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight.
WARNING The car's driving properties change depending on the weight and positioning of the load.
Loading in the cargo area Good things to remember when loading:
· Position the load firmly against the rear
seat's backrest.
· Heavy objects should be placed as low as
possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on lowered backrests.
· Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.
· Secure all loads to the load retaining eye-
lets with straps or web lashings.
WARNING A loose object weighing 20 kg (44 pounds) can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg (2200 pounds).
570
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WARNING Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the load and the side windows if the car is loaded to above the top edge of the door windows. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants. Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with something soft. Switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading/unloading long items. Otherwise you may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load into a drive position - and the car could then move off.
Increasing the space in the cargo area To expand the cargo area and simplify loading, the rear seat's backrest can be lowered. Note that objects must not prevent the function of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the rear seat's backrests is folded down.
A through-load hatch* in the rear seat can be folded down for carrying long and narrow loads.
Related information · Load retaining eyelets (p. 573)
· Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
(p. 177)
· Through-load hatch in the rear seat*
(p. 573)
· Roof load and loading on load carriers
(p. 571)
· Level control* and shock absorption
(p. 434)
· Weights (p. 647)
Roof load and loading on load carriers
For loading on the car's roof, the load carriers that Volvo have developed are recommended. This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in order to achieve the maximum possible safety during a journey. Volvo's load carriers are available for purchase at authorised Volvo retailers.
Carefully follow the installation instructions supplied with the carriers.
· Distribute the load evenly over the load
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.
· Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps.
· If the load is longer than the car at the
front, e.g. a canoe or kayak, fit the towing eye to its front socket and attach the bungee to this.
· The size of the area exposed to the wind,
and therefore fuel consumption, increase with the size of the load.
· Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,
heavy braking and hard cornering.
}}
* Option/accessory. 571
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
||
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving characteristics are altered by roof loads.
Follow the car's specifications with regard to weights and maximum permitted load.
Related information · Recommendations for loading (p. 570)
· Weights (p. 647)
Bag hooks
Bag hooks keep carrier bags in place and prevent them from overturning and spreading their contents across the cargo area.
Along the sides
Under the floor hatch*
There is a bag hook in the side panel on each side of the cargo area.
IMPORTANT
The bag hooks may be loaded with a maximum of 5 kg (11 lbs).
1. Lift the handle in the centre of the cargo area floor and fold up the floor.
2. Move the cargo area floor forward to upright position and fit it in the adjustment groove on each side. > It is now possible to hang bags with handles at a suitable height on the hooks.
In glovebox There is also an extensible hook in the glovebox that can be used for hanging up a bag.
Related information · Recommendations for loading (p. 570)
· Using the glovebox (p. 568)
· Fitting and removing the safety net*
(p. 575)
572
* Option/accessory.
Load retaining eyelets
Use the load retaining eyelets to attach straps in order to anchor items in the cargo area.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Through-load hatch in the rear seat*
The hatch in the rear seat's backrest can be opened to transport long narrow items, e.g. skis.
Folding up the cargo area floor
The cargo area floor can be secured in raised position using the support arm. 1. Grip the handle to fold up the cargo area
floor.
2. Fold up the support arm and secure the end in the socket on the underside of the cargo area floor.
WARNING Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which protrude may cause injury under violent braking. Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Related information · Recommendations for loading (p. 570) · Weights (p. 647)
1. In the cargo area, grip the hatch's handle and fold down the hatch.
2. Fold forward the armrest in the rear seat.
3. Adjust the centre seat's head restraint upwards so that the steel tubes do not block the hatch opening.
If the private locking function is used then the through-load hatch must be closed.
Related information · Recommendations for loading (p. 570)
· Private locking (p. 263)
· Load retaining eyelets (p. 573)
> The cargo area floor remains in raised position.
}} * Option/accessory. 573
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
|| With folding cargo area floor*
Release folding cargo area floor*
2.
The folding cargo area floor can be released
to facilitate access to e.g. the SIM card
holder or the lower storage area.
1.
Lift the handle in the middle of the folding cargo area floor and fold it forwards.
Related information · Cargo area (p. 570)
Fold the folding cargo area floor forwards.
Press the lock spring as indicated by the arrow until it stops. Maintain the pressure.
At the same time, lift the cargo area floor a few millimetres up from the base.
3. Release the pressure from the lock spring, but continue holding up the cargo area floor.
574
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
4.
Fitting and removing the safety
net*
The safety net prevents loads from being thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the event of sudden braking. The safety net is fitted into four mounting points.
Carry on holding up the cargo area floor and press the lock spring on the other side as indicated by the arrow.
> If the actions in section 2 have been completed correctly, the cargo area floor should now have been released from its side brackets.
The cargo area floor can be placed carefully back onto the lock springs without being locked in position.
NOTE The cargo area floor is also secured with hinges at the front. Volvo recommends leaving the cargo area floor in its front hinges.
5. Press on the cargo area floor to lock it back into its brackets.
Related information · Cargo area (p. 570)
For reasons of safety, the safety net must always be fastened and anchored as described below.
The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and can be secured two different locations in the car:
· Rear fitting - behind the rear seat.
· Front fitting - behind the front seats.
}} * Option/accessory. 575
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
||
WARNING
Loads in the luggage compartment must be anchored well, and also using a correctly fitted safety net.
Fitting the safety net
WARNING It is necessary to ensure that the upper securing points of the safety net are fitted correctly and that the puller-straps are hooked in properly. Damaged safety nets must not be used.
NOTE With forward mounting, the safety net is most easily mounted via one of the rear doors.
1. Unfold the safety net with the upper attachment hooks facing up.
2. Hook one retaining hook of the net into the 4. front or rear roof mounting with the anchoring strap locks turned towards you.
Remove any clothing hooks from the roof bracket by turning it a quarter turn clockwise on the left-hand side and a quarter turn anticlockwise on the right-hand side respectively.
Applies to left-hand side.
3. Hook the net's second attachment hook to the roof bracket on the opposite side.
Take care to press forward the net's retaining hooks for each respective roof mounting's front end position.
Rear fitting.
For rear fitting:
With the net fitted in the rear roof mountings, hook the safety net's puller-straps into the front load retaining eyelets in the cargo area.
576
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Front fitting.
For front fitting:
With the net fitted in the front roof mountings, hook the anchoring straps into the outer eyes on the rear of the seat slide rails - it is easier if the backrests are straightened and the seats are moved forward slightly.
Pay attention to make sure that you do not press the seat and backrest hard against the net when they are moved back again only adjust until the seat or backrest makes contact with the net.
IMPORTANT
If a seat or backrest is pushed backwards hard into the safety net, the net and roof mounts may be damaged.
5. Tension the safety net with the anchoring straps.
Removing the safety net The safety net can be easily removed and folded up.
1. Reduce safety net tension by pressing the button in the anchoring strap lock and feeding out a little of the anchoring strap on each side.
2. Press in the catches and detach both of the anchoring strap's hooks.
3. Undo the upper attachments and release the net from the roof mountings.
4. Fold up the net and store it in its case.
Refit any clothing hook if required.
Related information · Recommendations for loading (p. 570)
· Load retaining eyelets (p. 573)
Remove and store the parcel shelf
The parcel shelf can be removed to increase the size of the cargo area. Removing parcel shelf
Detach the parcel shelf's lifting eyes on both sides. Unhook the parcel shelf at the front edge and remove it.
}}
577
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
|| Parcel shelf storage beneath the cargo area floor
With folding cargo area floor*: 1.
First aid kit*
The first aid kit contains first aid equipment. Store the first aid kit behind the elastic strap, if the car is equipped with one of these.
The removed parcel shelf can be stored under the cargo area floor.
Fold up the cargo area floor and secure it in raised position with the support arm.
Turn the upper side of the parcel shelf downwards and lower it into the space with the rear part facing forwards.
Fold up the folding cargo area floor forwards to be able to lower the parcel shelf downwards with the upper side turned down and the rear part facing forwards.
2. Fold the cargo area floor back to level position.
Related information · Cargo area (p. 570)
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
Related information · Cargo area (p. 570)
578
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Warning triangle
Use the warning triangle to warn other road users if the car is stationary in traffic. Also activate the hazard warning flashers.
Storage spaces The warning triangle is located in the compartment on the inside of the tailgate.
Folding up the warning triangle
Open the hatch by first turning the knob a quarter turn and then pulling the hatch from its brackets in the top and bottom edges.
Press the latch that secures the warning triangle slightly to the right and remove the case.
Remove the warning triangle from the case, unfold it and put the ends together.
Fold out the warning triangle's support legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suitable place with regard to traffic.
Make sure that the warning triangle and case are properly secured in their storage space and that the hatch is fully closed after use.
Related information · Cargo area (p. 570)
· Hazard warning flashers (p. 147)
579
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo service programme
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service programme as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service and maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel, special tools and service literature that can provide the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Related information · Car status (p. 584)
· Book service and repair (p. 585)
· Connection of equipment to the car's
diagnostic socket (p. 38)
· Servicing the climate control system
(p. 590)
· Brake system maintenance (p. 411)
· Engine compartment overview (p. 592)
Data transfer between car and workshop via Wi-Fi
Volvo's workshops have a specific Wi-Fi network for data transfer between your car and the workshop. Your workshop visit will be simpler and more efficient when the transfer of diagnostic information and software can take place via the workshop's network. During a workshop visit, your service technician may want to connect your car to the workshop's network via Wi-Fi to perform fault-tracing and software download. For this type of communication, the car only connects to a workshop's network. It is not possible to connect the car to another Wi-Fi network, such as at home, in the same way as to a workshop's network.
Connection with the remote control key Connection is normally handled by the service technician who then uses the remote control key buttons. That's why it's important to take a key with buttons with you for the workshop visit. Press three times on the lock button on the remote control key to connect the car to the workshop's network via Wi-Fi.
When the car is connected to a Wi-Fi net-
work, the display.
symbol appears in the centre
WARNING The car must not be driven when connected to the workshop's networks and systems.
Related information · Managing system updates via the Down-
load Centre (p. 583)
· Book service and repair (p. 585)
582
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Download Center
Several of the car's systems can be updated from the centre display with an online car1.
The Download Centre app is started from app view in the centre display and enables:
· searching for and updating system soft-
ware
· updating map data for Sensus Navigation* · downloading, updating and uninstalling
apps.
Related information · Managing system updates via the Down-
load Centre (p. 583)
· Downloading apps (p. 478) · Updating apps (p. 479) · Deleting apps (p. 479) · Internet-connected car* (p. 517) · Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
Managing system updates via the Download Centre
Functions for online car and infotainment can be updated via the Download Centre. Updates can be made one at a time or all at once.
Searching for update If an update is available, the message New software updates available See Download Center is shown in the centre display's status bar.
For system updates to be possible, the car must be connected to the Internet2.
Go to Download Centre in the centre display's app view.
> If no search has been performed since the last time the infotainment system was started, a search is performed. No search is performed if a software installation is in progress.
A number on System updates shows how many updates are available. One tap shows a list of the updates that can be installed in the car.
NOTE
Data download may affect other services that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect on other services is experienced as disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to switch off or interrupt other services.
NOTE
An update can be interrupted when the ignition is switched off and the car is left.
However, the update does not have to be completed before the car is left, this is because the update is resumed the next time the car is used.
Update all system software Select Install all at the bottom of the list.
If no list is desired, then the Install all option can be selected at System updates.
Update individual system software programs Select Install for the software required.
1 Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost. 2 Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
}} * Option/accessory. 583
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
|| Cancelling software download Tap on X in the activity indicator that has replaced Install at the start of the download.
Note that only the download can be cancelled, when the installation phase has started, this cannot be cancelled.
Deactivating the background search for software update Automatic search for software updates is activated when the car is delivered from the factory, but this function can be deactivated.
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view.
2. Press System Download Centre.
3. Deselect Auto Software Update.
Related information · Download Center (p. 583)
· Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
· Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
Car status
The general status of the car can be shown in the centre display.
The Car Status app is started from app view in the centre display and has four tabs:
· Messages - status messages · Status - checking engine oil level and
AdBlue level3
· TPMS - checking the tyre pressure · Appointments - appointment information
and car information4
Related information · Handling a message saved from the driver
display (p. 96)
· Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 594)
· Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 545) · Book service and repair (p. 585) · Sending car information to a workshop
(p. 586)
· Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
· Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 448)
3 AdBlue Applies to cars with diesel engines. 4 Applies to certain markets.
584
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Book service and repair5
This service provides a way to send a booking request for service and workshop visit directly in the car. When it is time for service, and in some cases when the car is in need of repair, a message will appear in the driver display and at the top of the centre display. The service date is determined by how much time has passed, hours that the engine has been running, or distance driven since the last service.
Before the service can be used · Create a Volvo ID and register it to the car.
· To send and receive booking information,
the car must be connected to the Internet6.
Book a service Fill in a booking request when so required or when a message indicating that the car needs a service or repair is shown.
1. Open the Car Status app from the app view in the centre display.
2. Press Appointments.
3. Press Request appointment.
4. Make sure that the correct Volvo ID is filled in.
5. Make sure that the desired Workshop information is filled in.
6. Fill in the field Tap to write information to the workshop if there is anything you would like done during the workshop visit or any other important information to your workshop.
7. Press Send appointment request.
> You will receive an appointment suggestion via e-mail within a couple of days7.
In certain markets, once you have sent the appointment request, the message that the car needs service is extinguished in the driver display.
8. Tap on Cancel request to cancel your request.
The booking enquiry sent from the car includes car information that facilitates workshop planning.
The retailer comes back with a digital booking proposal. Information about your dealer is also available in the car so that you can contact your workshop.
5 Applies to certain markets. 6 Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost. 7 This time frame may vary depending on market. 8 Applies to Sensus Navigation*.
Accept the appointment suggestion When the car has received an appointment suggestion, a message will be shown at the top of the centre display. 1. Tap the message. 2. If the suggested booking is acceptable,
tap on Accept. Otherwise, tap on Send new proposal or Decline. For certain markets, the system reminds you of a scheduled appointment time as it approaches and the navigation system8 can also guide you to the workshop when the time comes.
NOTE If you experience problems with this service contact your Volvo dealer.
Related information · Car status (p. 584) · Sending car information to a workshop
(p. 586)
· Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
}}
* Option/accessory. 585
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
· Volvo ID (p. 26) · Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
Sending car information to a workshop9
It is possible to send information for the car at any time, e.g. if you book a workshop appointment and want to help your workshop by providing them with better data so that your visit can be planned. Sending car information is not the same as booking a service appointment. 1. Open the Car Status app from the app
view in the centre display.
2. Press Appointments.
3. Press Send car data.
> A message that vehicle data are being sent is shown at the top of the centre display. You can cancel data transmission by tapping the X in the activity indicator.
The information is sent via the car's Internet connection10.
This car information can be accessed by any retailer if they have the car's identification number (VIN11).
Car information content The data sent is the last information saved (the last time the car was running) and includes information in the following areas:
· service requirement
· time since last service
· function status
· fluid levels
· meter reading
· the car's vehicle identification number
(VIN11)
· the car's software version
· the car's diagnostics data.
Related information · Book service and repair (p. 585)
· Car status (p. 584)
· Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
· Internet-connected car* (p. 517)
9 Applies to certain markets. 10 Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost. 11 Vehicle Identification Number.
586
* Option/accessory.
Raise the car
When raising the car, it is important that the jack is fitted in the intended points on the car's underbody.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
The triangles in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the lifting points (marked in red).
}} 587
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question. If a jack is selected other than the one recommended by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with the equipment.
The normal car jack is only designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment.
WARNING
· Apply the parking brake and set the
gear selector in Park position (P).
· Chock the wheels standing on the
ground using solid wood blocks or large stones.
· Check that the jack is not damaged,
that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.
· Check that the jack is resting on a firm,
level surface that is not slippery and is not slanted.
· The jack must be correctly attached in
the jack's bracket.
· Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the jack and the car's jacking point.
· Passengers must leave the car when it
is raised on the jack.
· If a wheel must be changed in a traf-
ficked environment, passengers must stand in a safe place.
· Use a jack designed for the car when
changing tyres. Use supports to secure the car for all other work.
· Never crawl under the car or reach
under with a part of your body when it is raised on a jack.
WARNING
If the car is raised using a workshop jack, this must be placed beneath one of the four jacking points. Take care to position the workshop jack so that the car cannot slip off. Make sure that the jack plate is fitted with a rubber guard so that the car remains stable and is not damaged. Always use axle stands or similar.
When not in use, the jack* should be stored in its stowage space under the cargo area floor.
Read through all instructions before beginning. Take out the tools needed before jacking up the car.
1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the hazard warning lights if, for example, a tyre is being changed in a trafficked location.
2. Apply the parking brake and engage gear position P, or engage first gear if the car has a manual gearbox.
3. Chock in front of and behind the wheels that remain on the ground. Use, for example, heavy wooden blocks or large stones.
588
* Option/accessory.
4. Position the jack or the lift arms at the designated spots of the car's undercarriage. The triangle markings in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the jacking/ lifting points. There are two jacking points on each side of the car. There is a recess for the jack at each point.
7. Turn the jack so that the crank is as far away from the side of the car as possible, at which point the jack's arms are perpendicular to the direction of the car.
8. Raise the car high enough to perform the intended measure.
Related information · Jack* (p. 552)
· Wheel bolts (p. 552)
· Tool kit (p. 551)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
5. Position the jack on level, firm and nonslippery ground under the jacking point that will be used.
6. Crank up until it is correctly aligned and so that it makes contact with the car's jacking point. Check that the head of the jack (or lifting arms at a workshop) is correctly positioned in the jacking point so that the bump in the centre of the head fits into the jacking point hole, and check that the base of the jack is positioned vertically below the jacking point.
* Option/accessory. 589
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Servicing the climate control system
The air conditioning system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.
Troubleshooting and repair The air conditioning system contains fluorescent tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be used during leak detection.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.
The car's climate control system uses a freonfree refrigerant either R1234yf or R134a depending on market. Information about which refrigerant the car's climate control system uses is printed on a decal located on the inside of the bonnet.
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.
WARNING The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe Service and Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C System), service and repair of the refrigerant system must only be performed by trained and certified technicians in order to ensure the safety of the system.
Related information · Volvo service programme (p. 582)
Opening and closing the bonnet
The bonnet can be opened using the handle in the passenger compartment and a handle under the bonnet. Open the bonnet
Pull the handle on the left of the brake pedal in order to release the bonnet from fully closed position.
590
Move the handle under the bonnet upwards to release the bonnet from the lock catch and lift the bonnet.
Warning - bonnet not closed When the bonnet is released, a warning symbol and graphics in the driver display will light up and an acoustic reminder will sound. If the
car starts rolling, an acoustic warning signal will repeat.
NOTE
If the warning symbol is lit or the warning signal is heard despite the bonnet being closed properly, contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Close the bonnet 1. Push the bonnet down until it starts to fall
from its own weight. 2. When the bonnet stops against the lock
catch, push the bonnet to close it completely.
WARNING Risk of crushing! Ensure that the closing path under the bonnet is not obstructed, otherwise there is a risk of personal injury.
WARNING Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed. The bonnet must engage at both sides audibly.
Bonnet completely closed.
WARNING Never drive with an open bonnet! If this symbol is visible or something else indicates that the bonnet is not fully closed while driving stop immediately
and close it properly.
Related information · Engine compartment overview (p. 592) · Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 50)
Bonnet not completely closed.
591
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Engine compartment overview
The overview shows some service-related components.
The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on model and engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Washer fluid filler pipe
Reservoir for brake fluid (located on the driver's side) Central electrical unit
Air filter
Engine oil filler pipe
Location of warning decal for the engine compartment. The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on model and engine variant.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and locations in the car. The information that applies to your particular car can be found on the decal on the car.
WARNING Remember that the radiator fan (located at the front of the engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start or continue to operate automatically for up to approx. 6 minutes after the engine has been switched off. Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
WARNING The ignition system works at a very high and hazardous voltage. The car's electrical system must always be in ignition position 0 when work is being performed in the engine compartment. Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II or when the engine is hot.
Related information · Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 590) · Filling washer fluid (p. 638) · Topping up coolant (p. 596) · Fuses in engine compartment (p. 604) · Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 594)
· Ignition positions (p. 406)
592
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Engine oil
An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals and warranty can be applied.
If the engine oil cannot be checked on a regular basis and the level falls too low, there is a risk that this will cause serious damage to the engine.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and locations in the car. The information that applies to your particular car can be found on the decal on the car.
Location of warning decal for the engine compartment. The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on model and engine variant. Volvo recommends:
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise there is a risk of the service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact of the car being affected.
If engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used, engine related components may become damaged. Volvo disclaims any liability for any such damage.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Symbols for low oil level Volvo uses different systems to warn about the oil level if it is too low/high, or in the event of low oil pressure. The driver display's warning symbol for low oil pressure is used for the
oil pressure sensor
. For oil level sensor,
}}
593
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
|| the driver is informed via the driver display's
warning symbol
and display texts. Cer-
tain variants have both systems. Contact a
Volvo dealer for more information.
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance with the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Using oil of a higher than specified grade is permitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade than the one specified.
Related information · Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 594)
· Engine oil -- specifications (p. 653)
· Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 655)
· Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)
Checking and filling with engine oil
The oil level is detected with the electronic oil level sensor. See oil level in the centre display
Example of graphic for oil level in the centre display The oil level is visualised using the electronic oil level gauge in the centre display when the car has been started. The oil level should be checked regularly.
1. Open the Car Status app from the app view in the centre display.
2. Press Status to show the oil level.
NOTE
The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained. The car must have been driven approx. 30 km (approx. 20 miles) and have been stationary for 5 minutes with the engine switched off and on level ground before the oil level indication is correct.
NOTE
If the right conditions for measuring the oil level (time after engine shutdown, the car's inclination, outside temperature, etc.) are not met, then the message No value available will be shown in the centre display. This does not mean that there is something wrong in the car's systems.
IMPORTANT
If this symbol is shown then the oil pressure may be too low. Stop the car as quickly as possible and have the car recovered to a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
594
Fill the engine oil
Filler pipe12,13 In some cases, oil may need to be topped up between service intervals. No action with regard to engine oil level needs to be taken until a message is shown in the driver display.
WARNING If the Engine oil level Service required message is shown, visit a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The oil level may be too high.
WARNING Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.
IMPORTANT If the Engine oil level low Refill 1 litre message is shown, fill only with the specified volume, e.g. 1 litre (1 quart).
Related information · Engine oil (p. 593) · Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 655)
· Engine oil -- specifications (p. 653) · Ignition positions (p. 406) · Car status (p. 584)
12 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick. 13 The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on model and engine variant.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Coolant
The coolant ensures that surplus heat is distributed in the circuit, e.g. in order to heat the starter battery or provide heat for the passenger compartment. Only coolant approved by Volvo should be used in order to prevent impairment of the cooling system, engine problems, etc. Prescribed grade: Ready-mixed coolant approved by Volvo. If concentrated coolant is used, mix with 50% water (of approved water quality, not salt water, etc.). Consult a Volvo dealer if unsure. Only coolant approved by Volvo should be used in order to prevent impairment of the cooling system, engine problems, etc.
WARNING Swallowing coolant is hazardous, it may cause damage to organs (kidneys). The product contains ethylene glycol, inhibitor, water, etc.
Related information · Topping up coolant (p. 596)
595
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Topping up coolant
When topping up the coolant, follow the instructions on the packaging. Never top up with water only. The risk of freezing increases with both too little and too much coolant concentrate. If there is coolant under the car, if there is coolant smoke, or if more than 2 litres (approx. 2 quarts) have been filled, always call for recovery to avoid the risk of engine damage due to a defective cooling system when attempting to start the car.
WARNING
The coolant may be very hot. Never open the cap when the coolant is hot. If a top-up is required, unscrew the expansion tank cap slowly to allow any overpressure to disappear.
Coolant expansion tank
Screw off the cap and top up with coolant if necessary. The coolant level must not exceed the MAX mark outside the expansion tank.
IMPORTANT
· Harmful if ingested. May cause organ
(kidney) damage.
· Use ready-mixed coolant as recom-
mended by Volvo. If concentrated liquid is used, make sure that the ratio is 50 % coolant to 50 % water of an approved quality.
· Do not mix different coolants.
· Only new coolant should be used
when replacing major cooling system components to ensure the system has sufficient corrosion protection.
· The engine must only be run with a
well-filled cooling system. Otherwise, temperatures that are too high may occur resulting in the risk of damage (cracks) in the cylinder head.
· A high content of chlorine, chlorides
and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.
Related information · Engine compartment overview (p. 592)
· Coolant (p. 595)
596
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Starter battery
The starter battery is used to start up the electrical system and drive the starter motor as well as other electrical equipment in the car. The electrical system is single-pole and uses the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.
The starter battery is a 12 V battery, designed for the carbon dioxide reducing functions Start/stop and regenerative charging, and to support the functionality of the car's different systems.
The service life and function of the starter battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts, discharging, driving style, driving conditions, climatic conditions etc.
· Never disconnect the starter battery when
the engine is running.
· Check that the cables to the starter bat-
tery are correctly connected and properly tightened.
WARNING
· The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.
· Do not connect the jump leads to any
fuel system component or any moving part. Be careful of hot engine parts.
· The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
· If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.
· Never smoke near the battery.
The service life and capacity of the starter battery The service life of the battery is affected by several factors, including factors such as the number of starts, discharging, driving style, driving conditions, climatic conditions, etc. Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a long time or when it is only driven short distances. Extreme cold further limits starting capacity. If the starter
battery is discharged a large number of times, it will negatively affect the service life. In order to maintain the starter battery in good condition, it is recommended that there is at least 15 minutes driving/week or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic trickle charging. A starter battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life. Location
The starter battery is located in the engine compartment.
WARNING If the starter battery is disconnected, the automatic opening and closing function must be reset to work properly. A reset must take place for pinch protection to work.
}}
597
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
IMPORTANT
On certain models, the battery is attached with a retaining strap. Make sure the retaining strap is properly tightened.
Specifications for starter battery Battery type
Voltage (V)
Cold start capacityA - CCAB (A)
Size, L×B×H
Capacity (Ah)
A According to EN standard. B Cold Cranking Amperes.
Volvo recommends entrusting battery replacement to an authorised Volvo workshop.
IMPORTANT If the battery is replaced, make sure you replace it with a battery with the same size, cold starting capacity and type as the original battery (see the decal on the battery).
H6 AGM 12 760 278×175×190 mm (10.9×6.9×7.5 inches) 70
· Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 455)
· Reset sequence for pinch protection
(p. 155)
· Battery recycle (p. 601)
Related information · Symbols on the batteries (p. 601)
· Support battery (p. 599)
598
Support battery
Cars with the start/stop function are equipped with two batteries - one more powerful 12 V starter battery for starting and one support battery that helps during the function's starting sequence.
The 12 V support battery is located down in the engine compartment. The starter battery is also shown here (top).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
If the car is equipped with a 48V support battery instead, it is located on the left in the cargo area. The 48V support battery must only be handled by an authorised workshop.
WARNING
High voltage can be dangerous in the event of incorrect intervention. Do not touch anything on the batteries that is not clearly described in the owner's manual.
· 48 V support battery must never be
used for jump-starting.
· External electrical equipment must not,
under any circumstances, be connected to the 48 V battery.
· The 48 V battery may only be serviced
and replaced by a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE · The higher the current take-off in the
car, the more the alternator must be working and the batteries charging = Increased fuel consumption.
· When the capacity of the battery has
fallen below the lowest permissible level then the Start/stop function is disengaged.
Temporarily reduced Start/stop function due to high current take-off means:
· The engine auto-starts without the driver
lifting his/her foot from the foot brake pedal. The support battery normally requires no more service than the normal starter battery. A workshop should be contacted in the event of questions or problems - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
}}
599
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed then the Start/stop function may temporarily cease to work after the connection of an external battery or battery charger:
· The negative battery terminal on the
car's starter battery must never be used for connecting an external starter battery or battery charger only the car's negative charging point may be used as the grounding point.
NOTE
If the starter battery has been discharged so much that the car has no normal electrical functions and the engine is then jumpstarted with an external battery or a battery charger, the Start/stop function may continue to be activated. If the Start/stop function then auto-stops the engine shortly afterwards, there is a great risk that engine auto-start will fail due to insufficient battery capacity, because the battery has not had the time to recharge.
If the car has been jump-started, or if there is insufficient time to charge the battery with a battery charger, the Start/stop function is temporarily deactivated until the battery has been recharged by the car. In an outside temperature of approx. +15 °C (approx. 60 °F), the battery needs to be charged for at least 1 hour by the car. In a lower outside temperature, the charging time may increase to 34 hours. The recommendation is to charge the battery using an external battery charger.
Specifications for support battery
Type
AGM
Voltage (V)
12
Cold start capacityA CCAB (A)
Size, L×B×H
Capacity (Ah)
A According to EN standard. B Cold Cranking Amperes.
170
150×90×130 mm (5.9×3.5×5.1 inches)
10
IMPORTANT
If the battery is replaced, make sure you replace it with a battery with the same size, cold starting capacity and type as the original battery (see the decal on the battery).
Related information · Starter battery (p. 597)
· Start/stop function (p. 430)
· Symbols on the batteries (p. 601)
· Battery recycle (p. 601)
600
Symbols on the batteries
There are information and warning symbols on the batteries.
Use protective goggles.
Avoid sparks and naked flames.
Further information in the owner's manual for the car.
Store the battery out of the reach of children.
The battery contains corrosive acid.
Risk of explosion.
Must be taken for recycling.
Related information · Starter battery (p. 597) · Support battery (p. 599) · Battery recycle (p. 601)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Battery recycle
A used starter battery or support battery must be recycled in an environmentally sound manner. Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty about how this type of waste should be discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information · Starter battery (p. 597) · Support battery (p. 599) · Symbols on the batteries (p. 601)
601
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fuses and central electrical units
All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.
If an electrical component or function does not work, it may be because the component's fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends contacting an authorised Volvo workshop for checking.
Location of central electrical units
Engine compartment
Under the left-hand front seat
Related information · Replacing a fuse (p. 602) · Fuses in engine compartment (p. 604) · Fuses under the left-hand front seat
(p. 610)
Replacing a fuse
All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading.
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.
WARNING Contact an authorised Volvo workshop about the fuses not mentioned in the owner's manual. If replacing the fuse is not performed correctly, it can cause serious damage to the electrical systems.
602
Related information · Fuses and central electrical units (p. 602)
· Fuses in engine compartment (p. 604)
· Fuses under the left-hand front seat
(p. 610)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
603
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fuses in engine compartment
Fuses in the engine compartment protect engine and brake functions, amongst other things.
604
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.
The fuse box also provides space for several spare fuses.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Positions On the inside of the cover is a label that shows the location of the fuses.
Function USB port, tunnel console, rear* Double USB ports, tunnel console, rear* 12 V socket in tunnel console, front
Ampere 5 7,5 15
Type Micro Micro Micro
Micro
12 V socket in cargo area*
15
Micro
Engine Control Module (ECM)
20
Micro
Ignition coils; Spark plugs
15
Micro
Solenoids (petrol); Valve; Thermostat for engine cooling system (petrol); EGR cooling pump (diesel); Glow control mod-
15
ule (diesel)
Engine Control Module (ECM)
Solenoids (petrol); Valve; Thermostat for engine cooling system (petrol); Cooling pump for EGR (diesel); Glow control
10
module (diesel); Vacuum regulators; Valve; Valve for output pulse (diesel)
15A
Valves for coolingA
Lambda probe, centre (petrol); Lambda probe, rear (diesel)
15
Micro Micro Micro
Sensor for nitrous oxides (diesel); Engine Control Module (ECM)
15
Micro
Coolant pump
20
Micro
}}
* Option/accessory. 605
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Function
Right-hand headlamp
Ampere 20
Type Micro
Left-hand headlamp
20
Micro
Airbags
5
Micro
Accelerator pedal sensor
5
Micro
Supplied when the ignition is switched on: Engine control module; Transmission components; Electric steering servo; Central electronic module; Control module for brake system
Electric additional heater* OBD-II firewall
Alcohol lock*
5
Micro
5
Micro
5
Micro
Micro
Internal relay coils
5
Micro
Micro
Sensor for brake pedal
5
Micro
Calculation unit
5
Micro
Control module for actuator for engagement/change of automatic gearbox gear positions Hydraulic clutch control unit Transmission control module Hydraulic clutch control unit
5
Micro
25
Micro
15
Micro
25
Micro
606
* Option/accessory.
Function Engine Control Module (ECM) Horn Siren* Windscreen wipers Control module for brake system (valves, parking brake) Control unit for brake system (ABS pump) Actuator for transmission Actuator for transmission Right-hand headlamp; Left-hand headlamp Brake control with 48V battery Towbar control module* Towbar control module*
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Ampere 5
Type Micro
Micro
Micro
20
Micro
5
Micro
30
MCaseB
40
MCaseB
40
MCaseB
MCaseB
25
MCaseB
30
MCaseB
30
MCaseB
30
MCaseB
MCaseB
25
MCaseB
40
MCaseB
}}
* Option/accessory. 607
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Function
Power driver seat*
Fuel filter heater (diesel)
Heated windscreen* right-hand side
Heated windscreen* left-hand side
Control function for support battery
Left-hand headlamp
Right-hand headlamp
A Applies to petrol engines, generation 3 (VEP4_G3). B This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
608
Ampere Type
MCaseB
20
MCaseB
MCaseB
Micro
Micro
Micro
Micro
Micro
30
MCaseB
40
MCaseB
40
MCaseB
5
Micro
20
Micro
20
Micro
* Option/accessory.
Related information · Fuses and central electrical units (p. 602)
· Replacing a fuse (p. 602)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
609
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fuses under the left-hand front seat
Fuses under the left-hand front seat protect, amongst other things, electrical sockets, displays and door modules.
610
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
The fuse box in the engine compartment provides space for several spare fuses. On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.
Positions On the inside of the cover is a label that shows the location of the fuses.
}}
611
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Function
Audio control device (amplifier)A
Central Electric Module A: Sensors, radar units, power seats*
Central Electric Module B: Sensors, radar units, power seats*
Fan module for climate control system, front
Power operated tailgate*
Power seat*, right
Parking heater*
Control module for reduction of nitrous oxides (diesel)
Door module in right-hand rear door
Door module in left-hand rear door
Door module in left-hand front door
Door module in right-hand front door
Seat heating, rear*
Battery module for 48V
Calculation module
Control module for reduction of nitrous oxides (diesel)
612
Ampere Type
40
MCaseB
40
MCaseB
40
MCaseB
40
MCaseB
25
MCaseB
20
MCaseB
25
MCaseB
30
MCaseB
20
Micro
20
Micro
20
Micro
Micro
20
Micro
15
Micro
5
Micro
5
Micro
15
Micro
* Option/accessory.
Function Steering lock Control module for climate control system Interior movement detectors* Driver display Keypad in centre console Steering wheel module Module for start knob; Electronic shifting module; Electronic parking brake Centre display Control module for online car; Control module for Volvo On Call Module for multi-band antenna Relay coils Module for detecting foot movement* (for opening the power operated tailgate) Sensus control module TV*C Diagnostic socket OBDII Alcohol lock* Lock motor for head restraint on rear left-hand side
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Ampere 7.5 7.5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 15
Type Micro Micro Micro Micro Micro Micro Micro Micro Micro Micro Micro Micro Micro
10
Micro
5
Micro
15
Micro
}}
* Option/accessory. 613
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Function
Lock motor for head restraint on rear right-hand side
Rear window defroster
Seatbelt pretensioner module, left-hand side
Seatbelt pretensioner module, right-hand side
Humidity sensor 48V alternator and voltage converter Control module for fuel pump
Coolant pump
Steering wheel module for heated steering wheel*
Air humidity sensor
Headlamp washers*
Windscreen and rear window washers
614
Ampere Type
15
Micro
30
MCaseB
40
MCaseB
40
MCaseB
5
Micro
20
Micro
7.5
Micro
15
Micro
5
Micro
25
MCaseB
25
MCaseB
MCaseB
MCaseB
Micro
Micro
Micro
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Function
Ampere
Type Micro
Seatbelt pretensioner module
5
Micro
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*: control module, exterior reversing sound
5
Micro
Micro
Micro
All Wheel Drive (AWD) control module*
15
Micro
Exhaust system
5
Micro
Parking camera*
5
Micro
Micro
Control module for airbags and seatbelt tensioners
5
Micro
Rear window wiper
15
Micro
Roof console for panoramic roof*
20
Micro
Sun sensor
5
Micro
Interior lighting; Dimming of interior rearview mirror*; Rain and light sensor*; Control panels in rear doors and cargo area 7.5
Micro
Micro
Control module for driver support functions
5
Micro
Alcohol lock*
5
Micro
}}
* Option/accessory. 615
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Function
Wireless mobile charger*; USB port
A Applicable to certain variants. B This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. C Applies to certain markets.
Related information · Fuses and central electrical units (p. 602)
· Replacing a fuse (p. 602)
Ampere 5
Type Micro Micro Micro
616
* Option/accessory.
Bulb replacement
Lamp types vary depending on model and equipment level. If a bulb14 breaks, it can be replaced according to the method described in the Owner's Manual.
If a fault occurs in LED15 lamps, the entire lamp unit usually must be replaced.
NOTE For information about bulbs not covered in this Owner's Manual, contact a Volvo dealer or an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING The car's electrical system must be in ignition position 0 when replacing bulbs.
IMPORTANT Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease from your fingers is vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
NOTE
If an error message remains after the broken bulb has been replaced then we recommend visiting an authorised Volvo workshop.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time.
Related information · Exterior lamp positions (p. 617) · Replacing the rear direction indicator bulb
(p. 618)
· Changing brake light bulb (p. 619) · Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb (p. 620) · Bulb specifications (p. 621)
Exterior lamp positions
The exterior lighting of the car uses a number of different lamps. An LED16 type lamp must be replaced by a workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Lamps, front
Daytime running lights/position lamps/ direction indicators (LED) Main beam (LED) Dipped beam (LED) Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (LED)
14 Some cars have no bulbs. 15 LED (Light Emitting Diode) 16 LED (Light Emmitting Diode)
}} * Option/accessory. 617
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || Lamps, rear
Replacing the rear direction indicator bulb
Bulbs for rear direction indicators are located behind the panel in the side of the cargo area.
Brake light - central, high-level (LED) Fog lamp Position lamps (LED) Direction indicators Brake lights Reversing lamps (LED)
Related information · Bulb replacement (p. 617) · Bulb specifications (p. 621) · Lighting control (p. 138)
1. Press in the panel hatch at the upper edge to detach it.
2. Move the insulation aside to access the supporting bridge.
3. Unscrew and remove the spring bolt anticlockwise, press the clips into the sides and remove the supporting bridge. It is easiest to allow the screw to remain in the supporting bridge.
618
4. Undo the grey bulb holder by turning it anticlockwise and pulling it out.
5. Remove the bulb by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise.
6. Fit a new bulb by pressing it in and turning it clockwise.
7. Attach the bulb holder by turning it clockwise.
8. Fit the supporting bridge with associated spring bolt and make sure that the clips align in the correct position. Tighten the spring bolt until it stops, max. 2 Nm (1.5 ft lbs).
9. Move back the insulation and then hook in the panel and press it back into place.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease from your fingers is vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.
Related information · Exterior lamp positions (p. 617) · Bulb specifications (p. 621) · Bulb replacement (p. 617)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Changing brake light bulb
Bulbs for brake lights are located behind the panel in the side of the cargo area.
1. Press in the panel hatch at the upper edge to detach it.
2. Move the insulation aside to access the brake light bulb.
}} 619
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE ||
Related information · Exterior lamp positions (p. 617)
· Bulb specifications (p. 621)
Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb
The rear foglight is fitted in the rear bumper on the driver's side.
3. Undo the black bulb holder by turning it anticlockwise and pulling it out.
4. Remove the bulb by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise.
5. Fit a new bulb by pressing it in and turning it clockwise.
6. Attach the bulb holder by turning it clockwise.
7. Move back the insulation and then hook in the panel and press it back into place.
IMPORTANT Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease from your fingers is vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.
620
The rear fog light is only fitted on the driver's side.
1. Loosen the foglight unit on the driver's side by inserting a flat object, such as a table knife or a screwdriver, on the bulb kit's narrower short side of the keypad and then prize the foglight unit out.
2. Unplug the connector.
3. Undo the bulb holder by turning it anticlockwise and pulling it out.
4. Remove the bulb by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise.
5. Fit a new bulb by pressing it in and turning it clockwise.
6. Attach the bulb holder by turning it clockwise.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
7. Plug in the connector.
8. Insert the hook on the wide part of the foglight unit in the rear bumper and rotate the unit inwards so that the clips engage.
Related information · Exterior lamp positions (p. 617)
· Bulb specifications (p. 621)
Bulb specifications
Specifications for replaceable bulbs.
Contact a workshop17 if faults occur in lamps
other than bulbs. If a fault occurs in LED18 lamps, the entire lamp unit usually must be replaced.
Function
WA Type
Rear direction indicators 24 PY24W
Brake lights
21 H21W LL
Rear fog lamp
21 H21W LL
A Watt
Related information · Exterior lamp positions (p. 617)
· Bulb replacement (p. 617)
Cleaning the interior
Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly, and deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents.
IMPORTANT
· Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g.
dark jeans and suede garments) may stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is important to clean and treat these parts of the upholstery as soon as possible.
· Never use strong solvents such as
washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit or concentrated alcohol to clean the interior, since this may damage the upholstery as well as other interior materials.
· Never spray the cleaning agent directly
onto components that have electrical buttons and controls. Wipe them instead using a moistened cloth containing the cleaning agent.
· Sharp objects and Velcro may damage
the fabric upholstery.
· Only use cleaning agents on the type
of material for which they were intended.
17 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
18 LED (Light Emitting Diode)
}}
621
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
|| Related information · Cleaning the centre display (p. 622) · Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 623) · Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 624) · Cleaning textile floor and entrance mats (p. 624) · Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 625) · Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 626) · Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 626)
Cleaning the centre display
Dirt, stains and grease from fingers can affect the centre display's performance and readability. Clean the screen frequently with a microfibre cloth.
IMPORTANT The microfibre cloth used to clean the centre display must be free from sand and dirt.
IMPORTANT When cleaning the centre display, only use gentle pressure on the screen. Heavy pressure can damage the screen.
1. Turn off the centre display with a long press on the home button.
2. Wipe the screen with the microfibre cloth supplied or use another microfibre cloth of equivalent quality. Wipe the screen with a clean and dry microfibre cloth using small circular movements. If necessary, lightly moisten the microfibre cloth with clean water.
3. Activate the display with a short press on the home button.
IMPORTANT
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on the centre display. Do not use window cleaning agent, other cleaning agents, aerosol spray, solvents, alcohol, ammonia or cleaning agent containing abrasive.
Never use abrasive cloths, paper towels or tissue paper, since they may scratch the centre display.
Related information · Cleaning the interior (p. 621)
· Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 623)
· Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 624)
· Cleaning textile floor and entrance mats
(p. 624)
· Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 625)
622
* Option/accessory.
· Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 626)
· Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 626)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
It is recommended to use a fabric cleaning agent when cleaning textile fabric. Clean if necessary, and treat stains straight away.
IMPORTANT
Never scrape or rub a stain since this may damage the upholstery.
IMPORTANT
Never use stain removing agent or strong solvents, they could damage the upholstery.
Cleaning fabric upholstery 1. Start by vacuum cleaning the upholstery. 2. Follow the instructions for the fabric
cleaning agent. 3. When cleaning fabric, a spray extraction
cleaner is recommended for suction of the washing fluid and subsequent water rinsing.
IMPORTANT
Some coloured clothing (such as jeans and suede garments) may stain the fabric upholstery. Heavy stains such as oil may be difficult to remove.
IMPORTANT Always clean the entire upholstery, even there are only individual stains. This is to avoid water rings.
NOTE Do not remove the upholstery for cleaning.
Cleaning the headlining 1. Brush the headlining carefully using a soft
brush. 2. Follow the instructions for the fabric
cleaning agent. 3. Then use a soft and lint-free cloth to wipe
the headlining.
IMPORTANT Careless cleaning can damage the headlining.
Related information · Cleaning the interior (p. 621) · Cleaning the centre display (p. 622) · Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 624) · Cleaning textile floor and entrance mats
(p. 624)
· Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 625)
}}
* Option/accessory. 623
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
· Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 626)
· Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 626)
Cleaning the seatbelts
Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly, and deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents. Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special textile cleaning agent is available from Volvo retailers. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.
Related information · Cleaning the interior (p. 621)
· Cleaning the centre display (p. 622)
· Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 623)
· Cleaning textile floor and entrance mats
(p. 624)
· Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 625)
· Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 626)
· Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 626)
Cleaning textile floor and entrance mats
It is recommended to use a fabric cleaning agent when cleaning mats. Clean regularly, and deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents. Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Each inlay mat is secured with pins.
1. Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of the inlay mat at each pin and lifting the mat straight up.
2. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.
NOTE
The inlay mats must not be swung around without care or hit against objects to remove dirt since this can crack the inlay mats.
3. A textile cleaner is recommended for stains on the floor mat, after vacuuming.
4. After cleaning, fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each pin.
624
* Option/accessory.
WARNING Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and check before setting off that the mat by the driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in the pins so that it does not get caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
Related information · Cleaning the interior (p. 621) · Cleaning the centre display (p. 622) · Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 623)
· Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 624) · Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 625) · Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 626)
· Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 626)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Cleaning leather upholstery*
Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly, and deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents.
Volvo's leather upholstery* is treated to preserve its original appearance.
Leather upholstery* is a natural product that changes and acquires a beautiful patina over time. Regular cleaning and treatment are required in order that the properties and colours of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo offers a comprehensive product, Volvo Leather Care KitWipes, for cleaning and treatment of leather upholstery. The protective outer layer of the leather is preserved when this is used according to the instructions.
To achieve results that are as good as possible, Volvo recommends cleaning and application of the protective cream one to four times per year (or more frequently if required). Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is available from Volvo dealers.
Cleaning the leather upholstery 1. Apply the leather cleaner to a damp
sponge and squeeze until a foam is created.
2. Use the sponge on the stain in a circular motion.
3. Thoroughly dampen the stain using the sponge, allow the sponge to absorb the stain without scrubbing.
4. Wipe the stain with a soft cloth and allow the leather to dry thoroughly.
Protecting the leather upholstery 1. Apply a small amount of leather protective
agent to a cloth and then apply it to the leather in light circular motions.
2. Allow to dry for about 20 minutes. > Protecting the leather upholstery makes it more resistant to the stresses from the sun's UV radiation.
Related information · Cleaning the interior (p. 621)
· Cleaning the centre display (p. 622)
· Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 623)
· Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 624)
· Cleaning textile floor and entrance mats
(p. 624)
· Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 626)
· Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 626)
* Option/accessory. 625
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly, and deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents. Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the leather steering wheel with protective plastic. We recommend Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes for cleaning the leather steering wheel. First remove dirt, dust, etc. with a damp sponge or cloth.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects, e.g. rings, can damage the leather on the steering wheel.
Related information · Cleaning the interior (p. 621)
· Cleaning the centre display (p. 622)
· Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 623)
· Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 624)
· Cleaning textile floor and entrance mats
(p. 624)
· Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 625)
· Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 626)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts
Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly, and deal with stains straight away. A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly moistened with water, available from Volvo dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior parts and surfaces.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong stain removers, either.
IMPORTANT
Do not use solvent that contains alcohol when cleaning the glass for the driver display.
IMPORTANT
Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces are easily scratched. Clean these surfaces with a clean, dry microfibre cloth using small, circular motions. If needed, dampen the microfibre cloth with a little clean water.
Related information · Cleaning the interior (p. 621) · Cleaning the centre display (p. 622) · Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 623)
· Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 624)
· Cleaning textile floor and entrance mats
(p. 624)
· Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 625)
· Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 626)
626
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Cleaning the exterior
The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Perform the cleaning in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo that is recommended by Volvo.
Related information · Cleaning the exterior (p. 627)
· Polishing and waxing (p. 627)
· Handwashing (p. 628)
· Automatic car wash (p. 629)
· High-pressure washing (p. 631)
· Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 631)
· Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 632)
· Cleaning wheel rims (p. 633)
· Rustproofing (p. 633)
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or to give the paintwork extra protection. The car does not need to be polished until it is at least one year old. However, the car can be waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax the car in direct sunlight, the surface being polished should be a maximum of 45 °C (113 °F).
· Wash and dry the car thoroughly before
you begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed using fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork. Use cleaning agent recommended by Volvo.
· Polish first with a polish and then wax
with liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the packaging carefully. Many preparations contain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Never polish or wax any matt details on the car. This can destroy the matt effect and give the surface a permanent shine.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.
IMPORTANT
Use cleaning agent recommended by Volvo. Other treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo warranty.
Related information · Cleaning the exterior (p. 627) · Handwashing (p. 628) · Automatic car wash (p. 629) · High-pressure washing (p. 631) · Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 631) · Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 632) }}
627
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
· Cleaning wheel rims (p. 633) · Rustproofing (p. 633)
628
Handwashing
The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Carry out cleaning in a cleaning area with an oil separator, and use car shampoo. Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo.
Important points to remember when handwashing the car · Avoid washing the car in direct sunlight.
This can cause the detergent or wax to dry and have an abrasive effect.
· Remove bird droppings from the paint-
work as soon as possible. They contain substances that damage and discolour paintwork very quickly. For example, use soft paper or sponge soaked in plenty of water. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended for the removal of any discolouration.
· Wash the underbody, including wheel
housings and bumpers.
· Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt
has been removed so as to reduce the risk of scratches from washing. Do not spray directly onto the locks.
· If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on
very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case, the surfaces must not be hot from the sun.
· Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water. Ensure that the sponge is dirt-free. Dirt on the sponge may cause you to scratch the car during washing.
· Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm
soap solution or car shampoo.
· Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or
a water scraper. If you avoid allowing drops of water to dry in strong sunlight, you reduce the risk of water drying stains which may need to be polished out.
· After the car has been washed, tar from
asphalt may remain. Use tar remover that is recommended by Volvo to get rid of the last spots.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality. Clean them regularly, e.g. when refuelling.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but use water and a non-scratching sponge instead.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time.
IMPORTANT
· Make sure that the panoramic roof*
and sun visor are closed before washing the car.
· Never use polishing agent with abra-
sive properties on the panoramic roof.
· Never use wax on the rubber mould-
ings around the panoramic roof.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
IMPORTANT
Remember to remove dirt from the drain holes in the doors and in the sills after washing the car.
Related information · Cleaning the exterior (p. 627) · Polishing and waxing (p. 627) · Automatic car wash (p. 629) · High-pressure washing (p. 631) · Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 631) · Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 632)
· Cleaning wheel rims (p. 633) · Rustproofing (p. 633) · Automatic parking brake activation setting
(p. 414)
Automatic car wash
The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. The longer the car is left dirty, the more difficult it will be to get it completely clean and there is a risk of scratching the paintwork.
Washing the car in an automatic car wash is a simple and quick way of getting it clean, but it cannot reach everywhere. Volvo recommends washing your car by hand or using an automatic car wash supplemented with washing by hand.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the car is not washed in an automatic car wash during the first few months (this is because the paintwork has not fully hardened).
IMPORTANT
Before driving the car into an automatic car wash, deactivate the functions for automatic braking when stationary and automatic parking brake application. If these functions are not deactivated, the brake system will jam when the car is stationary and the car will not be able to move.
}} * Option/accessory. 629
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
IMPORTANT
For car washes where the car is pulled forward with rolling wheels, the following applies:
1. Before washing the car, make sure that the automatic rain sensor is deactivated, otherwise there is the risk of it starting and damaging the wiper arms.
2. Make sure that the door mirrors are retracted, any auxiliary lamps secured, antennas retracted or removed, otherwise they risk being damaged by the automatic car wash.
3. Drive into the car wash.
4. Switch off the "Automatic braking at
standstill" function using the button on the tunnel console.
5. Switch off the "Automatic parking brake application" function via the top view of the centre display.
6. Switch off the engine by pressing the start button next to the steering wheel. Hold the button depressed for at least 2 seconds.
The car is ready for the car wash.
IMPORTANT The system will automatically switch to P mode unless the above step is followed. The wheels are locked in P mode, which they should not be when putting the car through an automatic car wash.
NOTE Be aware that if the car has the keyless locking and unlocking function*, the car can be locked/unlocked when the car is being washed if the remote control key is within range.
Test the brakes
WARNING Always test the brakes after washing the car, including the parking brake, to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking performance.
Depress the brake pedal now and then while driving long distances in rain or slush. The friction heat means that the brake linings heat up and dry out. Do the same after starting in very damp or cold weather.
Related information · Cleaning the exterior (p. 627)
· Polishing and waxing (p. 627)
· Handwashing (p. 628)
· High-pressure washing (p. 631)
· Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 631)
· Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 632)
· Cleaning wheel rims (p. 633)
· Rustproofing (p. 633)
· Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 415)
· Automatic parking brake activation setting
(p. 414)
· Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 252)
630
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
High-pressure washing
The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. The longer the car is left dirty, the more difficult it will be to get it completely clean and there is a risk of scratching the paintwork. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo that is recommended by Volvo. When using high-pressure washing, use sweeping movements and make sure that the nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm (13 in.) to the surface of the car. Do not spray directly onto the locks.
Related information · Cleaning the exterior (p. 627)
· Polishing and waxing (p. 627)
· Handwashing (p. 628)
· Automatic car wash (p. 629)
· Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 631)
· Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 632)
· Cleaning wheel rims (p. 633)
· Rustproofing (p. 633)
Cleaning the wiper blades
The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. The longer the car is left dirty, the more difficult it will be to get it completely clean and there is a risk of scratching the paintwork. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo that is recommended by Volvo. Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair the service life of wiper blades.
When cleaning, set the wiper blades in service position.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regularly with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo. Do not use any strong solvents.
Related information · Cleaning the exterior (p. 627)
· Polishing and waxing (p. 627)
· Handwashing (p. 628)
· Automatic car wash (p. 629)
· High-pressure washing (p. 631)
· Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 632)
· Cleaning wheel rims (p. 633)
· Rustproofing (p. 633)
631
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components
The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. The longer the car is left dirty, the more difficult it will be to get it completely clean and there is a risk of scratching the paintwork. Use car shampoo that is recommended by Volvo. A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended for the cleaning and care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim components, e.g. glossy trim mouldings. When using such a cleaning agent the instructions must be followed carefully.
Avoid washing the car with detergent with a pH value below 3.5 or above 11.5. This can cause discolouration of anodised aluminium components*, as illustrated. We advise against use of abrasive polishing agents, as illustrated.
Parts that should be washed using a cleaning agent with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.
IMPORTANT
Avoid washing the car with cleaning agent with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher than 11.5. This may result in discolouration of anodised aluminium parts such as roof rack and around the side windows.
Never use metal polishing agent on anodised aluminium parts, this can result in discolouration and destroy the surface treatment.
Related information · Cleaning the exterior (p. 627) · Polishing and waxing (p. 627) · Handwashing (p. 628) · Automatic car wash (p. 629) · High-pressure washing (p. 631) · Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 631) · Cleaning wheel rims (p. 633) · Rustproofing (p. 633)
632
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Cleaning wheel rims
The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. The longer the car is left dirty, the more difficult it will be to get it completely clean and there is a risk of scratching the paintwork. Perform the cleaning in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo that is recommended by Volvo.
Use rim cleaning agent recommended by Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the surface and cause stains on chrome-plated aluminium rims.
Related information · Cleaning the exterior (p. 627)
· Polishing and waxing (p. 627)
· Handwashing (p. 628)
· Automatic car wash (p. 629)
· High-pressure washing (p. 631)
· Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 632)
· Cleaning wheel rims (p. 633)
· Rustproofing (p. 633)
Rustproofing
The car has protection against corrosion. Anti-corrosion protection for the body consists of metallic protective coatings on the sheet metal, a high-quality painting process, corrosion-protected and minimised metal overlap, and shielding plastic components, abrasion protection and supplemental rust inhibitor on exposed areas. In the chassis, exposed components of the wheel suspension are made of corrosion-resistant cast aluminium.
Inspection and maintenance The car's anti-corrosion protection normally requires no maintenance, but a good way to reduce the risk of corrosion is to keep the car clean. Strong alkaline or acidic cleaning solutions must be avoided on glossy trim components. Any stone chips should be rectified as soon as they are discovered.
Related information · Cleaning the exterior (p. 627)
· Polishing and waxing (p. 627)
· Handwashing (p. 628)
· Automatic car wash (p. 629)
· High-pressure washing (p. 631)
· Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 631)
· Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 632)
· Cleaning wheel rims (p. 633)
Car paintwork
The paintwork consists of several layers and is an important part of the car's rustproofing, and should therefore be checked regularly. The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the edges of wings, doors and bumpers. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately.
Related information · Touching up minor paintwork damage
(p. 634)
· Colour codes (p. 635)
633
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Touching up minor paintwork damage
Paint is an important part of the car's rustproofing and should therefore be checked regularly. The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on e.g. the edges of wings, doors and bumpers. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately.
NOTE
When paint is repaired the surface must be clean and dry. The temperature of the surface should be at least 15 °C (59 °F).
Materials that may be needed
· Primer a special adhesive primer in a
spray can is available for e.g. plasticcoated bumpers.
· Basecoat and clearcoat - available in spray
cans or as touch-up pens/sticks19.
· Masking tape.
· Fine sand paper.
Applying touch-up paint to the damaged surface
If the damage has not reached down to the metal, the touch-up paint can be applied directly after the surface has been cleaned. 1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint. If the damage is down to the metal, use of a primer is appropriate. In the event of damage to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer should be used to give better results - spray into the lid of the spray can and brush on thinly.
2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a very fine polishing agent may be carried out locally if required (e.g. if there are any uneven edges). The surface is thoroughly cleaned (grease and salt should be removed) and left to dry.
3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off with a basecoat and clearcoat once the primer has dried.
For scratches, implement the same procedure but mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork.
Touch-up pens and spray paints for touching up paintwork are available from Volvo dealers.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down to the meal and an undamaged layer of paint remains in place, fill in with base coat and clear coat as soon as the surface has been cleaned.
Related information · Car paintwork (p. 633)
· Colour codes (p. 635)
19 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick. 634
Colour codes
Colour code The decal for the colour code is positioned on the car's right-hand door pillar between the front and rear door and will be visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
The wiper blades sweep water away from the windscreen and rear window. Together with washer fluid, they aim to clean the windows and ensure visibility while driving. Windscreen and rear window wiper blades can be replaced.
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
Exterior colour code
Any secondary exterior colour code
Related information · Car paintwork (p. 633) · Touching up minor paintwork damage
(p. 634)
Lift the wiper arm from the window and pull the lower section of the blade to the right.
Grip the centre of the wiper arm and lift it from the windscreen to lock position.
NOTE There is a lock position at half extension angle that may feel like resistance, this lock prevents the arm from falling back against the windscreen. The wiper arm must be pulled past the lock for wiper blade replacement.
Grip the lower part of the blade and pull to the right until the blade loosens from the arm.
}}
635
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
|| 3. Press the new wiper blade into place. You should hear a click. Check that it is firmly installed.
4. Lower the wiper arm.
IMPORTANT
Check the blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the service life of the wiper blades.
Related information · Using the rain sensor (p. 166) · Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 168)
· Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 170)
· Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 167)
· Using the rear window wiper and rear
window washer (p. 169)
· Filling washer fluid (p. 638) · Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 637)
· Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 636)
· Using windscreen wipers (p. 165) · Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 165)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
The wiper blades sweep water away from the windscreen and rear window. Together with washer fluid, they aim to clean the windows and ensure visibility while driving. Windscreen and rear window wiper blades can be replaced.
Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service position. Service position is activated/ deactivated via the function view in the centre display when the car is stationary and the windscreen wipers are not on. Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" is heard.
3. Check that the blade is firmly installed.
4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the windscreen.
The wiper blades are different lengths
636
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
NOTE
When replacing the wiper blades, note that they have different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than on the passenger side.
Related information · Using the rain sensor (p. 166)
· Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 168)
· Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 170)
· Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 167)
· Using the rear window wiper and rear
window washer (p. 169)
· Filling washer fluid (p. 638)
· Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 637)
· Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 635)
· Using windscreen wipers (p. 165)
· Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 165)
Set the wiper blades in service position
In some situations, the windscreen's wiper blades must be set in service position (vertical position), e.g. when they shall be replaced.
Wiper blades in service position. In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades (e.g. for scraping off ice from the windscreen) they must be in service position.
IMPORTANT Before placing the wiper blades in the service position, make sure that they are not frozen down.
Activating/deactivating service mode Service mode can be activated/deactivated when the car is stationary and the windscreen
wipers are not on. Service mode is activated/ deactivated via the function view in the centre display:
Press the Wiper Service Position button. The light indicator in the button illuminates when service mode is activated. When activated, the wipers move to the service position. To deactivate the service mode, press Wiper Service Position again. The light indicator in the button extinguishes when service mode is deactivated.
The wiper blades also exit the service position if:
· Windscreen wiping is activated.
· Windscreen washing is activated.
· The rain sensor is activated.
· The car is driven away.
IMPORTANT
If the wiper arms in service position have been folded up from the windscreen, they must be folded back down onto the windscreen before the activation of wiping, washing or the rain sensor, as well as before driving. This is to avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.
}}
637
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
|| Related information · Using the rain sensor (p. 166)
· Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 168)
· Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 170)
· Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 167)
· Using the rear window wiper and rear
window washer (p. 169)
· Filling washer fluid (p. 638)
· Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 636)
· Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 635)
· Using windscreen wipers (p. 165)
· Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 165)
Filling washer fluid
Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps as well as the windscreen and rear window. Washer fluid with antifreeze must be used when the temperature is under the freezing point.
Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recommended by Volvo with frost protection during cold weather and for temperatures below freezing point.
IMPORTANT
Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equivalent with a recommended pH of between 6 and 8, in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with neutral water).
Washer fluid is filled into the reservoir with the blue cap. The reservoir is used for windscreen washer, rear window washer and headlamp washers*
NOTE
When approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid remains in the reservoir, the message Washer fluid Level low, refill is shown in the driver display, together with the symbol.
IMPORTANT
Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the temperature is below freezing to avoid the fluid freezing inside the pump, reservoir and hoses.
Volume:
· Cars with headlamp washing: 5.5 litres
(5.8 qts).
· Cars without headlamp washing: 3.5
litres (3.7 qts).
Related information · Using the rain sensor (p. 166) · Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 168)
· Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 170)
638
* Option/accessory.
· Activating and deactivating the rain sen-
sor's memory function (p. 167)
· Using the rear window wiper and rear
window washer (p. 169)
· Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 637)
· Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 636)
· Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 635)
· Using windscreen wipers (p. 165)
· Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 165)
· Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 590)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE 639
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Type designations
The decals in the car contain information such as chassis number, type designation, colour code, etc. Label location
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model. Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle identification and engine numbers can facilitate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer regarding the car and when ordering spare parts and accessories.
642
SPECIFICATIONS
Decal for type designation, vehicle identifi-
cation number, permissible maximum weights and code designation for exterior colour and type approval number. The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.
Decal for A/C system for cars with refrigerant R134a.
Decal for engine code and the engine's
serial number. For certain engine alternatives there is no decal. In these cases, the engraved engine code can be read directly on the engine instead.
Label for parking heater.
Decal for A/C system for cars with refrigerant R1234yf.
Label for engine oil.
}} 643
SPECIFICATIONS ||
Decal for gearbox type designation and serial number.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and locations in the car. The information that applies to your particular car can be found on the decal on the car.
Related information · Air conditioning -- specifications (p. 657)
Decal for the car's identification number VIN (Vehicle Identification Number).
Further information on the car is presented in the registration document.
644
Dimensions
Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be read in the table.
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions
A Ground clearanceA
B Wheelbase
C Length
D Load length, floor, folded seat
mm 205
2702 4425 1670
inches 8.1
106.4 174.2 65.7
Dimensions
E Load length, floor
F HeightB
G Load height
H Front track
I Rear track
J Load width, floor
mm 887
1658 733 1601 1626 1059
inches 34.9
65.3 28.9 63.0 64.0 41.7
Dimensions K Width
mm
1873 (1863C)
inches
73.7 (73.3C)
}} 645
SPECIFICATIONS
||
Dimensions mm
inches
L Width including door mirrors
2034
80.1
M Width including folded-in door mirrors
1910
75.2
A At kerb weight + 1 person. (Varies slightly depending on tyre dimension, chassis option, etc.)
B Including roof antenna, for kerb weight. C Body width.
Related information · Weights (p. 647)
646
Weights
Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a label in the car. Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank 90% full, plus and all oils and fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories, and towball load (when a trailer is hitched) influence the load capacity and are not included in the kerb weight.
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight Kerb weight.
SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version - i.e. a car without extra equipment or accessories. This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly by the weight of the accessory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load capacity are the different equipment levels (e.g. Kinetic, Momentum, Summum), as well as other accessories such as towbar, load carrier, space box, audio system, auxiliary lamps, GPS, fuel-driven heater, safety grille, carpets, cargo cover, power seats, etc.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascertaining the kerb weight of your own particular car.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.
The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.
Max. gross vehicle weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document. Max. roof load: 75 kg.
Related information · Type designations (p. 642) · Towing capacity and towball load
(p. 648)
647
SPECIFICATIONS
Towing capacity and towball load
Towing capacity and towball load for driving with a trailer can be read in the tables.
Max. weight braked trailer
NOTE Use of vibration dampers on the towbar is recommended for trailers heavier than 1800 kg.
Engine T2 T2 T3 T3 T3 T4 T4 T4 AWD T4 AWD T4 AWD T5 AWD T5 AWD D3 D3
Engine codeA B3154T9 B3154T9 B3154T7 B3154T2 B3154T4 B4204T31 B4204T47 B4204T47 B4204T31 B4204T44 B4204T18 B4204T36 D4204T16 D4204T16
Gearbox Manual select Automatic Manual select Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Manual select Automatic
Max. weight braked trailer (kg) 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 2100 1800 2000 2100 2100 2100 2100 1600 1800
648
Max. towball load (kg) 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine
Engine codeA
Gearbox
D3 AWD
D4204T16
Manual select
D3 AWD
D4204T16
Automatic
D4 AWD
D4204T12
Automatic
B4
B420T6
Automatic
B4 AWD
B420T6
Automatic
B5 AWD
B420T2
Automatic
A The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
Max. weight braked trailer (kg) 2000 2000 2100 2100 2100 2100
IMPORTANT
When driving with a trailer, it is permitted to exceed the vehicle's gross vehicle weight (including towball load) by a maximum of 100 kg (220 lbs), provided that speed is limited to 100 km/h (62 mph). National legal requirements for the vehicle combination, such as speed, etc. must be observed.
NOTE
If there is no weight data in the table, this is available in an enclosed supplement.
Max. towball load (kg) 110 110 110 110 110 110
Max. weight unbraked trailer Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg)
750
Max. towball load (kg) 50
}} 649
SPECIFICATIONS || Related information
· Type designations (p. 642) · Weights (p. 647) · Driving with a trailer (p. 461) · Trailer stability assist* (p. 463)
650
* Option/accessory.
Engine specifications
Engine specifications (power, etc.) for each respective engine alternative can be found in the table below.
NOTE Not all engines are available in all markets.
SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE If there is no engine data in the table, this is available in an enclosed supplement.
Engine
Engine codeA
T2 T3 T3 T3 T4 / T4 AWD T4 AWD T4 AWD T4 / T4 AWD T5 AWD T5 AWD T5 AWD D3 / D3 AWD D4 AWD
B3154T9 B3154T4 B3154T7 B3154T2 B4204T47 B4204T51 B4204T44 B4204T31 B4204T14 B4204T36 B4204T18 D4204T16 D4204T12
Output (kW/rpm)
95/5000 110/5500 120/5500 120/5500 140/4700 140/4700 140/5000 140/5000 182/5500 183/5500 185/5500 110/3750 140/4000
Output (hp/rpm)
129/5000 150/5500 163/5500 163/5500 190/4700 190/4700 190/5000 190/5000 247/5500 249/5500 252/5500 150/3750 190/4000
Max. rated power
(kW/rpm)
133/5500
156/4700
202/5500
Max. rated power
(hp/rpm)
181/5500
211/4700
274/5500
Torque (Nm/rpm)
No. of cylinders
245/16003000
3
265/15003000
3
265/18503000
3
265/15003000
3
300/1400-4000
4
300/1400-4000
4
300/1400-4000
4
300/17004000
4
350/1800-4800
4
350/1800-4500
4
350/1800-4800
4
320/1750-3000
4
400/1750-2500
4
}} 651
SPECIFICATIONS
|| Engine
Engine codeA
Output (kW/rpm)
Output (hp/rpm)
B4 / B4 AWD
B420T6
145/48005400 197/48005400
B5 AWD
B420T2
184/54005700 250/54005700
A The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
Related information · Type designations (p. 642)
· Engine oil -- specifications (p. 653)
Max. rated power
(kW/rpm)
Max. rated power
(hp/rpm)
Torque (Nm/rpm)
No. of cylinders
300/15004200
4
350/1800-4800
4
652
Engine oil -- specifications
Engine oil grade and volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table. Volvo recommends:
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine
T2 T3 T3 T3
Engine codeA Oil grade
B3154T9 B3154T4 B3154T7 B3154T2
Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20
Volume, incl. oil filter (litres, approx.) 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6
}} 653
SPECIFICATIONS
||
Engine
Engine codeA Oil grade
T4 / T4 AWD
B4204T47
Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20
T4 / T4 AWD
B4204T31
T4 AWD
B4204T51
T4 AWD
B4204T44
T5 AWD
B4204T14
T5 AWD
B4204T36
T5 AWD
B4204T18
D3 / D3 AWD
D4204T16
Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20
D4 AWD
D4204T12
B4 / B4 AWD
B420T6
Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20
B5 AWD
B420T2
A The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
Related information · Type designations (p. 642)
· Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 655)
· Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 594)
· Engine oil (p. 593)
654
Volume, incl. oil filter (litres, approx.) 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.2 5.2 6.1 6.1
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnormally high oil temperature or oil consumption. Below are some examples of adverse driving conditions. Check the oil level more frequently for long journeys:
· towing a caravan or trailer
· in mountainous regions
· at high speeds
· in temperatures colder than -30 °C
(-22 °F) or hotter than +40 °C (+104 °F).
The above also apply to shorter driving distances at low temperatures.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions. It provides extra protection for the engine.
Volvo recommends:
SPECIFICATIONS
IMPORTANT In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact. An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise there is a risk of the service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact of the car being affected. If engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used, engine related components may become damaged. Volvo disclaims any liability for any such damage. Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information · Engine oil -- specifications (p. 653) · Engine oil (p. 593)
655
SPECIFICATIONS
Transmission fluid specifications
Under normal driving conditions, the transmission fluid does not need to be changed during the service life of the gearbox. However, it may be necessary in adverse driving conditions.
Manual gearbox Prescribed transmission fluid
M66:
BOT 350 M3
M76:
BOT 352 B1
Automatic gearbox Prescribed transmission fluid
TG-81SC:
AW-1
AWF8G30: AWF8G45:
AW-2
Related information · Type designations (p. 642)
Brake fluid specifications
Brake fluid is the medium in a hydraulic brake system that is used to transfer pressure from e.g. a brake pedal via a master brake cylinder, which in turn acts on the brake callipers. Prescribed grade: Volvo Original or equivalent fluid compliant with a combination of Dot 4, 5.1 and ISO 4925 class 6.
NOTE
It is recommended that brake fluid is changed or filled by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information · Engine compartment overview (p. 592)
Fuel tank - volume
The fuel tank's filling capacity can be read in the table below.
All models
Litres (approx)
54
US gallons (approx)
14.2
Related information · Filling fuel (p. 441)
656
Tank capacity for AdBlue®1
The tank capacity for the additive AdBlue is approx. 14.5 litres.
Related information · Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 450)
Air conditioning -- specifications
The car's climate control system uses a freonfree refrigerant either R1234yf or R134a depending on market. Information about which refrigerant the car's climate control system uses is printed on a decal located on the inside of the bonnet.
Prescribed grades and volumes of fluids and lubricants in the air conditioning system can be read below.
A/C decal
Decal for R134a
Decal for R1234yf
SPECIFICATIONS
1 Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA)
}} 657
SPECIFICATIONS
|| Symbol explanation R1234yf Symbol Meaning Caution
Cars with R134a refrigerant
Mobile air conditioning system (MAC)
Lubricant type
A trained and certified technician is required in order to service the mobile air conditioning system (MAC) Flammable refrigerants
Refrigerant amount.
WARNING The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop. Cars with R1234yf refrigerant
Refrigerant Refrigerant amount is printed on the decal located on the inside of the bonnet.
Refrigerant amount.
WARNING The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe Service and Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C System), service and repair of the refrigerant system must only be performed by trained and certified technicians in order to ensure the safety of the system.
Compressor oil Volume 130 ml (4.40 fl. oz.)
Evaporator
Prescribed grade PAG SP-A2
IMPORTANT
The A/C system's evaporator must never be repaired or replaced with a previously used evaporator. A new evaporator must be certified and labelled in accordance with SAE J2842.
Related information · Servicing the climate control system
(p. 590)
658
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
The information in the tables below is in accordance with WLTP (Worldwide Harmonised Light-Duty Vehicles Test Procedure), which is an international test method for vehicles equivalent to a passenger car designed for laboratory testing.
The fuel consumption for a vehicle is measured in litres per 100 km and carbon dioxide emissions (CO2) are measured in gram CO2 per km. Explanation
Urban driving (slow)
Suburban driving (average)
Extra-urban driving (fast)
Motorway driving (very fast)
Combined value (combined driving) Gram CO2/km Litres/100 km
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
SPECIFICATIONS
Low value
High value
NOTE If there is no consumption and emissions data in the table, this is available in an enclosed supplement.
T2 (B3154T9)
200
8.8
149
6.6
132
5.8
159
7.0
154
6.8
216
9.6
167
7.4
149
6.6
182
8.0
173
7.6
}} 659
SPECIFICATIONS ||
T2 (B3154T9) T3 (B3154T7) T3 (B3154T2) D3 (D4204T16) D3 (D4204T16) D3 AWD (D4204T16)
660
224
9.9
161
7.1
138
6.1
160
7.1
162
7.2
240
10.6
176
7.8
151
6.7
182
8.0
179
7.9
202
9.0
148
6.5
132
5.8
158
7.0
154
6.8
212
9.4
168
7.4
150
6.6
181
8.0
173
7.6
224
9.9
161
7.1
138
6.1
160
7.1
162
7.2
240
10.6
176
7.8
151
6.7
182
8.0
179
7.9
161
6.2
143
5.5
121
4.6
156
5.9
143
5.5
166
6.3
149
5.7
132
5.0
171
6.5
154
5.9
198
7.6
158
6.0
132
5.0
168
6.4
156
6.0
209
8.0
162
6.2
141
5.4
179
6.8
165
6.3
173
6.6
146
5.6
125
4.8
155
5.9
146
5.6
186
7.1
166
6.4
144
5.6
180
6.9
167
6.4
SPECIFICATIONS
D3 AWD (D4204T16) D4 AWD (D4204T12)
B4 (B420T6)
B4 AWD (B420T6)
B5 AWD (B420T2)
210
8.0
163
6.2
140
5.4
170
6.5
165
6.3
218
8.3
171
6.5
148
5.6
180
6.9
173
6.6
204
7.8
166
6.3
142
5.4
172
6.6
166
6.4
232
8.9
185
7.1
159
6.1
190
7.2
185
7.1
The values in the table above for fuel consumption and CO2 emissions are based on special drive cycles (see below). The car's weight may increase depending on its equipment level. Together with how heavily the car
is loaded, this affects fuel consumption and CO2 emissions. According to WLTP, every car has unique fuel consumption and CO2 emission values depending on how the car is
equipped. These values range between the low value and high value in the table above. In many markets, you can find your car's unique fuel consumption and CO2 emission values in the car's registration document.
}}
661
SPECIFICATIONS
|| There are several reasons for fuel consumption that is higher than the values in the table. Examples of these include:
· If the car is equipped with extra equip-
ment that affects its weight.
· Driving style.
· If the customer chooses wheels other than
those mounted as standard on the basic version of the model, this could increase rolling resistance.
· High speed causes increased air resis-
tance.
· Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
A combination of the examples above could increase consumption considerably.
There may be huge deviations in fuel consumption if comparing to the drive cycle profiles (see below), which are used in the certification of the car and on which consumption figures in the table are based. For further information, please refer to the referenced regulations.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes, in combination with poorer fuel quality than recommended, are factors that considerably increase the car's fuel consumption.
WLTP standard From and including 1 September 2018, a new standard was introduced for calculating consumption values in the car. The WLTP standard (Worldwide Harmonised Light-Duty Vehicles Test Procedure) represents the average driving conditions for everyday driving. In comparison with the previous standard (NEDC), WLTP takes into account more varied traffic situations and speeds, but also equipment and weight classes. Optional equipment that affects consumption is deactivated during testing, e.g. air conditioning, seat heating, etc. The new standard should provide more realistic figures when it comes to fuel consumption, carbon dioxide and emissions. The values are intended to allow comparison between different cars and not to represent your typical normal consumption.
Drive cycle profiles A drive cycle simulates actual average driving of the car. The standard is based on four different drive cycle profiles. The four drive cycle profiles are:
· Urban driving slow driving
· Suburban driving average driving
· Extra-urban driving fast driving
· Motorway driving very fast driving.
Every drive cycle is determined by different conditions such as speed, time and mileage, for example.
The official value for combined driving, which is shown in the table, is a combination of the results from the four drive cycles, in accordance with legal requirements.
The exhaust gases are collected in order to extrapolate the carbon dioxide emissions (CO2 emissions) during the four drive cycles. These were then analysed to determine the value for CO2 emissions.
Related information · Type designations (p. 642)
· Weights (p. 647)
662
SPECIFICATIONS
Approved wheel and tyre sizes
In certain countries not all approved sizes are indicated by the registration document or
other documents. The following table shows all approved combinations of wheel rims and tyres.
= Approved
Engine
man/ aut
235/60R17A 7.5x17x50.5
235/55R18B 7.5x18x50.5
235/50R19 7.5x19x50.5
245/45R20 8x20x50.5
T2 (B3154T9)
man
T2 (B3154T9)
aut
T3 (B3154T7)
man
T3 (B3154T2)
aut
T3 (B3154T4)
aut
T4 (B4204T47)
aut
T4 (B4204T31)
aut
T4 AWD (B4204T47)
aut
T4 AWD (B4204T31)
aut
T4 AWD (B4204T44)
aut
T5 AWD (B4204T14)
aut
T5 AWD (B4204T18)
aut
T5 AWD (B4204T36)
aut
D3 (D4204T16)
man
D3 (D4204T16)
aut
D3 AWD (D4204T16)
man
245/40R21 8x21x50.5
}}
663
SPECIFICATIONS
|| Engine
man/ aut
235/60R17A 7.5x17x50.5
235/55R18B 7.5x18x50.5
235/50R19 7.5x19x50.5
245/45R20 8x20x50.5
D3 AWD (D4204T16)
aut
D4 AWD (D4204T12)
aut
B4 (B420T6)
aut
B4 AWD (B420T6)
aut
B5 AWD (B420T2)
aut
A 235/60 R17 is not an approved size for use together with 18" brakes. Check with your Volvo dealer how your car is equipped. B 235/55 R18 on cars equipped with 18" brakes is only possible when using approved wheel rims. Check with your Volvo dealer how your car is equipped.
Related information · Minimum permitted tyre load index and
speed rating for tyres (p. 665)
· Type designations (p. 642)
· Dimension designation for tyre (p. 540)
· Dimension designation for wheel rim
(p. 541)
· Snow chains (p. 556)
245/40R21 8x21x50.5
664
Minimum permitted tyre load index and speed rating for tyres
The table below shows minimum permitted load index (LI) and speed rating (SS).
Engine
man/
aut
T2 (B3154T9)
man
T2 (B3154T9)
aut
T3 (B3154T7)
man
T3 (B3154T2)
aut
T3 (B3154T4)
aut
T4 (B4204T47)
aut
T4 (B4204T31)
aut
T4 AWD (B4204T47)
aut
T4 AWD (B4204T31)
aut
T4 AWD (B4204T44)
aut
T5 AWD (B4204T14)
aut
T5 AWD (B4204T18)
aut
T5 AWD (B4204T36)
aut
D3 (D4204T16)
man
D3 (D4204T16)
aut
Minimum permitted load index (LI)A
96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96
SPECIFICATIONS
Minimum permitted speed rating (SS)B
H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H
}}
665
SPECIFICATIONS
|| Engine
man/ aut
Minimum permitted load index (LI)A
D3 AWD (D4204T16)
man
96
D3 AWD (D4204T16)
aut
96
D4 AWD (D4204T12)
aut
96
B4 (B420T6)
aut
96
B4 AWD (B420T6)
aut
96
B5 AWD (B420T2)
aut
96
A The tyre's load index must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table. B The tyre's speed rating must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.
Related information · Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 663)
· Approved tyre pressures (p. 667)
· Type designations (p. 642)
· Dimension designation for tyre (p. 540)
· Dimension designation for wheel rim
(p. 541)
Minimum permitted speed rating (SS)B
H H H H H H
666
Approved tyre pressures
Approved tyre pressures for each engine alternative can be found in the table.
NOTE
All engines, tyres or combinations of these are not always available in all markets.
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine
Tyre size
Speed
All engines
235/60 R17 235/55 R18 235/50 R19 245/45 R20 245/40 R21
0-160 km/h (0-100 mph) 160+ km/h (100+ mph)
Temporary Spare Tyre
max 80 km/h (max 50 mph)
A Economical driving. B In certain countries the "bar" unit is used alongside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
Related information · Type designations (p. 642)
· Checking tyre pressure (p. 542)
· Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 663)
· Recommended tyre pressure (p. 544)
Load, 1-3 persons
Front (kPa)B
Rear (kPa)
230
230
Max. load
Front (kPa)
Rear (kPa)
260 260
ECO pressureA Front/rear (kPa) 260
240
240
260 260
420
420
420 420
667
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
1, 2, 3 ...
4WD
424
A
A/C (Air conditioning)
206
ABS
anti-lock brakes
409
Accessories and extra equipment
37
installation
38
Active bending lights
144
Active main beam
143
Active Park Assist
377
Limitations
382
Symbols and messages
385
Active Yaw Control
271
Adapting driving characteristics
424
Adaptive Cruise Control
295
activate
298
Auto brake
322
change cruise control functionality 301
change of target
319
controls
296
deactivate
299
display mode
297
fault tracing
301
Limitations
301
overtaking
317
setting the time interval
320
standby mode
299
stored speed
319
Symbols and messages
303
WARNING
318
AdBlue
448
filling
450
operation
449
Symbols and messages
452
tank capacity
657
Additional heater (Auxiliary heater)
217
Adjusting headlamp pattern/headlamp
beam
140
Adjusting the steering wheel
181
Aerial
location
255
Airbag Activating/deactivating driver's side passenger side
51 54 52 53, 54
Airbag, see Airbag
51
Air conditioning
206
Air conditioning, fluid
volume and grade
657
Air conditioning system repair
184, 195 590
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Air distribution Air vents change defrosting Recirculation table of options
190 190, 191
191 201 200 192
Air quality allergies and asthma passenger compartment filter
187, 189 188 190
Air recirculation
200
Alarm
264
deactivation
266
motion and tilt sensors
265
reduced alarm level
266
Alarm for hazard warning flashers
276
Alarm for slippery driving conditions 276
Alcohol lock
408, 409
Allergy and asthma inducing sub-
stances.
188
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
424
Ambience lights
adapt
151
Android Auto
499, 500, 502
Apple CarPlay
495, 496, 498
Approach lighting
148
Apps
477
Ashtray
566
669
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Assistance at risk of collision activate/deactivate Limitations Symbols and messages upon risk of head-on collision upon risk of rear-end collision upon risk of run-off
Audio and media
Audio settings phone play media Text message
Auto climate control
Auto hold
Automatic brake activate/deactivate after collision Driver support
Automatic car wash
Automatic car washes
Automatic engine stop auto-stop
Automatic gearbox kickdown oil trailer
Automatic locking
343 344 347 348 345 346 344
476
476, 509 510
487, 488 509
199
415
415 416 417 270
629
629
430
418, 419 422 656 461
258
Automatic relocking Automatic speed limiter
activate/deactivate Limitations tolerance Auxiliary heater AWD, All Wheel Drive
B
Backrest front seat, adjusting rear seat, lowering
Bag holder Battery
Battery jump starting maintenance overload recycling support symbols on the battery Bicycle rack towbar mounted Blind Spot Information BLIS activate/deactivate
224, 253 288 289 291 290 217 424
172, 173, 176 177 572
455, 597 597 455 597 455 601 599 601
465 350 350 351
Limitations
352
Symbols and messages
353
Bluetooth
connect
492
connect car to Internet
518
phone
502
settings
510
Bonnet, opening
590
Book service and repair
585
Brake assist
after collision
417
Brake fluid
grade
656
Brake functions
409
Brakes
409
Anti-lock braking system, ABS
409
autobrake with adaptive cruise con-
trol
322
auto brake with Pilot Assist
322
automatic when stationary
415
brake assist system, BAS
410
brake light
147
brake system
409
emergency brake lights
147
maintenance
411
on gritted roads
411
on wet roads
411
Parking brake
412
670
Brake system
fluid
656
Bulbs
change
617
specifications
621
Bypass alcohol lock
408
C
Camera sensor
see Camera unit
395
Camera unit
395
Limitations
395
maintenance and cleaning
398
Symbols and messages
400
Car care
627, 628, 629, 631, 632, 633
Leather upholstery
625
Care Key
restricted remote control key
232
settings
233
Car functions
in centre display
110
Cargo area
570
electrical socket
567
lighting
150
mounting points
573
parcel shelf
577
protective net
575
Cargo area floor
573
foldable
574
Cargo cover
577
cargo net
575
Car holiday
439
Car key battery low
227
Car modem
connect car to Internet
519
settings
520
Car status
584
Tyre pressure
547
Car upholstery 621, 623, 624, 625, 626
Car washing 627, 628, 629, 631, 632, 633
Catalytic converter
Recovery
466
central locking
256
Centre display change appearance cleaning climate control function view Keyboard manage messages
119 622 195 110 114 100, 103, 107, 112 128, 129
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
overview settings switch off and change volume symbols in status bar views
97 120, 121
119 112 103
Certificate
513
Change of owner
122
Checking the engine oil level
594
Child lock
activate/deactivate
257
Child safety
60
Child seat
60, 63, 64
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points
62
lower mounting points
62
overview table
66
positioning/fitting
63, 64
table for location
67
table of i-Size
69
table of ISOFIX
70
Upper mounting points
61
Cigarette lighter
566
City Safety
330
brakes for oncoming vehicles
338
cross traffic
336
evasive manoeuvre prevented
337
Limitations
339
limitations in the case of cross traf-
fic
337
671
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
obstacle detection
334 Climate control system
Connected Safety
276
set warning distance
333
Refrigerant
657
activate/deactivate
277
subfunctions
331 Clock, adjustment
84
Limitations
277
Symbols and messages
342
CO2 emissions
659 Connect phone
503
Cleaning
624, 626
automatic car wash
629
car washing 627, 628, 629, 631,
632,
633
Coat hanger Collision Collision warning
575 44, 46, 51, 58
Controls lighting
Coolant filling
151
595 596
centre display
622
from behind
349 Cooling system
Fabric upholstery
621, 623, 625
with adaptive cruise control
318
overheating
454
rims
633
with Pilot Assist
318 Cornering lights
145
Seatbelts
624 Collision warning system
Corner Traction Control
271
upholstery
621, 623, 624, 625, 626
cross traffic rear
356 Crash, see Collision
44
Cleaning wheel rims
633
see City Safety
330
Cross Traffic Alert
356
Cleaning wiper blades
631 Colour code, paint
635
activate/deactivate
357
CleanZone
188 Colour codes
635
Limitations
358
Clean Zone Interior Package
188 Combined instrument panel
77
messages
360
Climate control auto-regulation centre display experienced temperature fan control Parking rear seat sensors temperature control voice control zones
184, 195
settings
79 Cruise control
291
199 Compass
473
activate
293
195
calibration
473
deactivate
293
186 Condensation in headlamps 628, 629,
204
631, 632
standby mode stored speed
294 319
207 195 185 205, 206 186 184
Connect car to Internet no or poor connection via a mobile device (WiFi) via car modem via telephone (Bluetooth)
Customer privacy policy
37
521 CZIP (Clean Zone Interior Package)
188
518
519
518
672
D
Data
recording
35
transfer between car and workshop 582
Data link connector
38
Data sharing
523
Daytime running lights
141
Deadlock
267
Defrosting
201
Diagnosis
via the workshop's Wi-Fi
582
Diesel
445
run out of fuel
446
Diesel particle filter
447
Digital radio (DAB)
485
Dimensions
645
Towbar
458
dipped beam
141
Dipstick, electronic
594
Direction indicator
144
Direction indicators
144
direction of rotation
541
Display
driver information
77
Display lighting
151
Distance Warning
Set time interval
320
DivX®
491
Door mirrors Dipping resetting store position
157 158 159 174, 175
Download Centre
583
using
583
Drive-E
Environmental philosophy
28
Driver Alert Control
354
activate/deactivate
355
guide to rest stops
355
Limitations
356
Driver display
77
app menu
92
messages
93
settings
79
Driver performance
83
settings
83
Driver profile edit select
124 125, 126, 128
125
driver support system
270
Driving mode
322
Drivetrain
Gearbox
417
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Driving cooling system with a tailer
Driving economy
Driving in water
Driving mode change ECO when using driver support
Driving with a trailer towball load towing capacity
454 461 438 440 424 427 427, 429 322
648 648
E
ECO climate
427
ECO mode
427
activate with function button
429
Economical driving
427, 438
ECO pressure
544, 667
Electrically operated parking brake
412
Electrical socket
567
using
567
Electrical system
597
emergency brake lights
147
673
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Emergency equipment first aid kit warning triangle
Emergency puncture repair kit Pump up tyre using
Emission control
Emissions of carbon dioxide
Engine deactivate overheating start Start/Stopfunction
Engine braking
Engine compartment coolant Engine oil overview
Engine drag control
Engine oil adverse driving conditions check and top up grade and volume
Engine specifications
Engine temperature high
Environment
578 579 557 561 558 448 659
405 454 404 430 409, 436
596 593 592 271 593, 655 655 594 653 651
454 28
Ethanol content
443
External dimensions
645
F
Fan Air distribution Air vents Control
Fault tracing Adaptive Cruise Control City Safety
Ferry transport
First aid
First aid kit
Flooded road
Fluids, capacities
Fluids and oils
Fog lamp front rear
Foot brake
Four-C
Front seat Climate control Fan
191 191 204
301 339 434 578 578 440 638, 656, 657 595, 656, 657
145 146 409 434
195 204
heating Temperature
Front seat, manual
Front seat, power adjusting seat lumbar support massage multi-function control store position
FSC, ecolabelling
Fuel fuel consumption identifier
fuel gauge
Fuelling filling fuel filler flap
Fuel tank volume
Fuel vapour
Fuse box
Fuses changing in engine compartment under glovebox
674
197 205 172 173 173 176 176 176 174, 175
23 443, 445
659 443, 445
80
441 441
656 443 602 602 602 604 610
G
Gearbox automatic manual
417 418, 419, 423
418
Gear positions
automatic gearbox
419
Gear selector inhibitor
422
Gear shift indicator
423
Glass, laminated/reinforced
154
Glovebox
568
Gracenote®
490
Gross vehicle weight
647
GSI - Gear selector assistance
423
H
Handbrake Handwash Hard disk
space Hazard warning flashers HDC Headlamp beam
adaptation Headlamp control
412 628
525 147 436
140 138, 151
Headlamp pattern, adjusting
140
head restraint
179
Heated washer nozzles
165
Heater
215
auxiliary heater
217
parking heater
216
Heating seats steering wheel Windows
197, 198 198, 199 202, 203
High engine temperature
454
High-pressure washing
631
Hill descent control
436
activate with function button
437
Hill Descent Control
435, 436, 437
Hill start assist
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
416
Hill Start Assist
416
HomeLink®
469
program
470
Type approval
472
using
472
Home safe lighting, Homesafe Lighting,
Follow me home lighting, follow-me-
home lighting
148
Horn
180
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
I
IAQS (Interior Air Quality System)
189
IC (Inflatable Curtain)
57
ID, Volvo
26
Identification number
39
Ignition position
406, 407
Immobiliser
236
Immobilizer
Immobiliser
236
Indicator symbols
85
Individual drive mode
424
Inflatable curtain
57
Inflatable Curtain
57
Information display
77, 79
Infotainment system (Audio and
media)
476
Instrument lighting
151
Instrument overview
left-hand drive car
74
right-hand drive car
75
Instruments and controls
74, 75
IntelliSafe
Driver support
31
Interior Air Quality System
189
675
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Interior lighting
149
adapt
151
Interior rearview mirror
157
Dipping
158
Intermittent wiping
165
Internet, see Internet-connected car 517
Internet-connected car
book service and repair
585
send car information
586
system updates
583
iPod®, connection
493
ITPMS - Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitor-
ing System
545
J
Jack
552
Journey statistics
83
Jump starting
455
K
Kerb weight Key Keyboard
change language
647
222
114, 117 117
Keyless Locking/unlocking settings touch-sensitive surfaces
Keypad in the steering wheel Key tag
L
Labels location
Laminated glass Lamps
change location specifications trailer Lane assistance activate/deactivate display mode Limitations select assistance option Symbols and messages Lane Keeping Aid see Lane assistance Language Large Animal Detection (LAD)
676
Launch function
423
253 Leather upholstery, washing instruc-
254 tions
625
252
Level control
180
damping
434
222 License agreement
87, 526
Lifting tool
552
Lighting
active bending lights
144
approach lighting
148
642
Automatic main beam
154
brake light controls
143 147 138, 149
controls, instruments, display
151
617
cornering lights
145
617
daytime running lights
141
621
dipped beam
141
464
direction indicators
144
323
emergency brake lights
147
325
fog lamp
145
329
Hazard warning flashers
147
326
home safe lighting
148
326
in the passenger compartment
149
327
lamp positions
617
main beam
142, 143
323
position lamps
140
rear fog lamp
146
120
settings
139
334
Lighting, bulb replacement brake light bulbs, specifications direction indicator, rear rear fog lamp
Limp home
Load carriers
Loading General load retaining eyelets long load
Loading hooks
Load retaining eyelets cargo area
Lock Locking/unlocking
Lockable wheel bolts
Lock confirmation setting
Locking/unlocking tailgate
Locks and remote control keys
Low battery voltage Battery
Low speed control activate with function button
617 619 621 618 620 417 571
570 573 571 572
573
224 552 220 221
226, 254 220
455 435 435
M
Main beam
142, 143
Maintained climate comfort
212
start/shut-off
213
maintenance
Rustproofing
633
Manual gearbox
418
oil
656
Max. roof load
647
Media player compatible file formats voice control
486, 487, 488 494 134
Messages and symbols
Adaptive Cruise Control
303
Assistance at risk of collision
348
BLIS
353
camera and radar unit
400
City Safety
342
Cross Traffic Alert
360
Lane assistance
327
Park Assist
366
Park assist camera
375
Park Assist Pilot
385
Pilot Assist
316
stability and traction control system 274
Messages in displays manage saved
93, 128 95, 129 96, 129
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Meters fuel gauge
Mileage Misting
condensation in headlamps Mobile phone, see Phone Mood lighting Motion sensor
80 80
627, 629 503 150 265
N
Net
cargo area
575
O
Obstacle detection City Safety
octane rating Oil, see also Engine oil Oil filter Oil level Online car
no or poor connection Option/accessory
334 443 653, 655 593 594 517 521
21
677
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Output outside temperature gauge Overheating Overtaking Assistance
activate Owner's information Owner's manual
ecolabelling in centre display in mobile OWNER'S MANUAL
651 84 454, 461 317 317 16
23 17, 18
20 21
P
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off
Switch)
54
Paddle on the steering wheel
180
Paintwork colour code damage and touch-up
635 633, 634, 635
Panorama roof
pinch protection
154
Panoramic roof
160
opening and closing
162
sun blind
164
ventilation position
163
Parallel parking
377
Parcel shelf
577
Park Assist
361
activate/deactivate
363
forward, backward and along the
sides
362
Limitations
364
Symbols and messages
366
Park assist camera
367
activate
374
Limitations
395
locations and views
368
park assist lines
370
sensor fields
372
Symbols and messages
375
Park Assist Pilot
377
leave parking
382
parallel parking
378
perpendicular parking
378
using
379
Park Assist System
361
Parking
on hill
414
Parking brake
412
activate/deactivate
412
automatic activation
414
low battery voltage
414
Parking climate
207
Symbols and messages
214
Parking heater
216
Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch
54
Passenger compartment filter
190
Passenger compartment heater (Parking
heater)
216
Passenger compartment interior
564
ashtray
566
cigarette lighter
566
electrical socket
567
glovebox
568
Sun visor
570
tunnel console
565
Passenger compartment lighting
automatic
149
Personal information (Customer privacy
policy)
37
petrol
443
Petrol particle filter
444
Phone Calls change to another connect connect automatically connect manually disconnect remove
502 507, 509
506 503 505 506 506 507
678
text message voice control
Phone charger
Pilot Assist activate Auto brake change of target controls deactivate disabled steering assistance display mode Limitations overtaking setting the time interval standby mode stored speed Symbols and messages WARNING
Pinch protection resetting
PIN code Private locking
Polishing
Position lamp
Power panoramic roof
Power save mode
Power seat
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
508 Power windows
155, 156 Radio favourites
483
133
opening and closing
156 Rain sensor
511
pinch protection
154
Rain sensor memory function
305 310 322 319
Preconditioning
207
start/shut-off
208
Timer
209
Privacy policy (Customer privacy policy) 37
Raising the car
Rear Collision Warning Limitations
307 Private locking
311
activate/deactivate
312 308
Protective net
263 263
Rear seat Climate control head restraint
575
heating
313 Pump up tyre
561
lowering the backrest
166, 167 167 587 349 349
195 179 198 177
317
Rearview and door mirrors
320
angle external mirrors
159
311 R
compass
473
319
Dipping
158
316 Radar unit
386
door
157
318
Limitations
395
electrically retractable
159
154
maintenance and cleaning
398
heating
155
Symbols and messages
400
interior
Type approval 520
387 rear window
263 Radio
480
heating
627
change radio frequency and radio sta-
tion
481
Washers Wiper
203 157
203 169, 170 169, 170
140
DAB
160
search for radio station
455
settings start
173
voice control
485 482
Recommendations during driving
439
483 Recommendations for loading
570
480 Recovery
468
134
679
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Refrigerant
590
climate control system
657
Refuelling
441
AdBlue
450
Regeneration
444, 447
Regenerative braking
417
Remote control, HomeLink®
programmable
469
Remote control immobiliser
236
Remote control key
222
battery replacement
227
connect to driver profile
126
detachable key blade
233
loss
231
range
227
Remote control key system, type appro-
val
237
Remote updates
583
Resetting, trip meter
82
Resetting the door mirrors
159
Restore settings
122
change of owner
122
Driver profile
128
Retractable power door mirrors
159
Reversing camera
367
Rims
dimensions
541
Road run-off protection
344
Road sign information
Limitations
284
Road Sign Information
278
activate/deactivate
279
activating / deactivating warnings 283
display mode
280
Sensus Navigation
282
speed camera information
282
Speed warning
282
Rollover protection
271
Roll Stability Control
271
Roof load, max. weight
647
Run out of fuel
diesel
446
Rustproofing
633
S
Safety
44
pregnancy
44
Safety mode
58
start/movement
59
Sealing fluid
557
Seat, see Seats
172
Seatbelt buckle/unbuckle pregnancy seatbelt reminder seatbelt tensioner
Seatbelt, see Seatbelts
Seatbelt reminder
seatbelt tensioner Resetting
Seatbelt tensioner
Seats heating manual front seat power front seat store position whiplash protection
Security code
sensors Air quality Camera unit Climate control Radar unit
Sensus connection and entertainment
Sensus Navigation Road Sign Information
Service position
46 47 44 50 49 46 50
50 49
197, 198 172 173
174, 175 45
263
189 395 185 386
32
282 637
680
Service programme
582
Settings
Categories
123
contextual
121
Resetting
122
Side airbag
57
Side Impact Protection System
57
SIM card
520
SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) 57
Skidding
440
Ski hatch
573
slippery driving conditions
440
Snow chains
556
Software updates
35
Soot filter
447
Sound experience
477
spare wheel
553
manage
554
Speed camera information
282
activate/deactivate
283
Speed limiter
285
activate
286
automatic
288
deactivate
287
Limitations
288
stored speed
319
temporary deactivation
287
Speed ratings, tyres
540
Spin control
271
Stabiliser
trailer
463
Stability and traction control system 271
sport mode
272, 273
Symbols and messages
274
Stains
621, 623, 624, 625, 626
Start/Stop
car function
430
deactivate
432
Driving
430
Limitations
432
Starting the engine
404
after collision
59
Start the car
404
Steering assistance at risk of collision 343
Steering force, speed related
270
Steering force level, see Steering force 270
Steering lock
181
Steering wheel heating keypad paddle steering wheel adjustment
180, 181 198, 199
180 180 181
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Steering wheel paddles
421
Stickers
location
642
Stone chips and scratches 633, 634, 635
Stop/start function
430
Storage spaces
564
glovebox
568
Sun visor
570
tunnel console
565
Stored speed
319
Sun blind panoramic roof pinch protection
160, 164 154
Sunroof
pinch protection
154
Sun visor
570
mirror lighting
150
Support battery
599
Switching off the engine
405
Switch off engine
405
Symbols
dynamic
77
indicator symbols
85
warning symbols
85
Symbols and messages
centre display status field
112
parking climate
214
681
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
system updates
583
T
Tailgate
closing and locking with button
259
Locking/unlocking
226, 254
opening/closing with foot move-
ment
261
unlock from inside
257
Target vehicle change
319
Temperature Control experienced
205, 206 186
Temporary Spare
553
Terms and conditions
services
36
user
523
Through-load hatch
573
Tilt detector
265
Time interval to the vehicle ahead
320
Tools
551
Top view
120
Total airing function
222
Towbar
457
foldable
459
specifications
458
Towing
466, 468
Towing capacity and towball load
648
Towing eye
467
Traction control
271
Traffic information
483
Trailer
cable
461
driving with a trailer
461
Lamps
464
snaking
463
Trailer stability assist
272, 463
Trailer Stability Assist
272
Transmission
417
Transmission oil
grade
656
Tread
542
Tread depth
542
winter tyres
555
Tread wear indicators
542
Trip computer
80
show in driver display
81
Trip meter
80
Trip meter, resetting
82
Trip statistics
settings
83
TSA - trailer stability assist
463
Tunnel console
565
Tunnel detection
141
Type approval
HomeLink®
472
radar system
387
radio equipment
394
remote control key system
237
Type designations
642
Tyre load index
540
Tyre pressure
Adjust
543
Check
542
label showing recommended pres-
sure
544
Tyre pressure monitoring
545
action
548
save a new tyre pressure
546
Status
547
Tyre pressure table
667
Tyres
age
538
designation of dimensions
540
dimensions
663
direction of rotation
541
economy and wear
538
682
pressure
667
recommended
538
remove and mount
549
rotation during replacement
538
specifications
663, 665, 667
speed rating
540
Storage
538
tread wear indicators
542
tyre pressure table
667
winter tyres
555
U
Units
120
Unlocking
settings
226
with key blade
234
USB
jack for connecting media
493
V
Ventilation Vibration damper Video
settings
190, 191
457
491, 493 492
Voice control Climate control phone radio and media settings using
VOL marking
Volvo ID create and register
130 186 133 134 134 131, 133, 134
538
26 26
W
Warning lamps
Adaptive Cruise Control
318
Pilot Assist
318
stability and traction control system 271
Warning sound
Parking brake
414
Warning symbols
85
Safety
44
Warning triangle
579
Washer fluid
165, 638
Washer nozzles, heated
165
Washers headlamps rear window
168 169, 170
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
washer fluid, filling
638
windscreen
168
Waxing
627
Weights
kerb weight
647
Wheel bolts
552
Wheel rims
cleaning
633
Wheels
remove and mount
549
snow chains
556
Wheels and tyres
approved dimensions
663
tyre load index and speed rating
665
whiplash protection
45
Whiplash Protection System
45
WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) 45
Wi-Fi
connect car to Internet
518
delete network
522
share internet connection, hotspot 520
technology and security
522
Windows and glass
154
Windscreen
heating
202
Windscreen washing
168
683
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Windscreen wiper rain sensor
Winter driving snow chains winter tyres
Wiper blades changing Service position
Wiper blades and washer fluid WPC
165 166, 167
440 556 555
165 635, 636
637
165
511
684
TP 32876 (English), AT 2017, MY21, Copyright © 2000-2020 Volvo Car Corporation
GPL Ghostscript 9.06